6FC5303-0DT12-1AA0 - Siemens - searchdatasheet.com

06/2007

SINUMERIK 802D sl

Parameter Manual

Valid for

Control Softwa re -Ver sion

SINUMERIK 802D sl 1.4

Drive

SINAMICS S120

Maschine-/ Setting Data 1

Maschine Data 2

Setting Data 3

Interface Signals 4

PLC-Interface Signals 5

Parameter SINAMICS 6

Index I

Registered Trademarks

All designations with the trademark symbol ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other designations in this documentation may be trade-

marks whose use by third parties for their own purposes may infringe the rights of the owner.

Liability disclaimer

We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware and software described. Nonetheless, differences might exist

and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained in this document is, however, reviewed regularly

and any necessary changes will be included in the next edition.

Order No. 6FC5397-5CP10-1BA0-

Siemens AG 2007

Subject to change without prior notice

SINUMERIK®-Documentation

Printing history

Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.

The status of each edition is shown by the code in the "Remarks" column.

Status codes in the "Remarks" column.

A .... New documentation.

B .... Unrevised reprint with new Order No.

C .... Revised edition with new status.

Edition Order-No. Remarks

02/2006 6FC5397-5CP10-0BA0 C

06/2007 6FC5397-5CP10-1BA0 C

iii

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Preface

Structure of the documentation

The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts:

•General Documentation

•User Documentation

•Manufacturer/Service Documentation

An overview of publications, which is updated monthly and also provides informa-

tion about the language versions available, can be found on the Internet at:

http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol

Select "Support" -> "Technical Documentation" ->"Overview of Publications"

The Internet version of the DOConCD (DOConWEB) is available at:

http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb

Information about training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) can

be found in internet under:

http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol under menu option "Support"

Target group

This publication is intended for project engineers, commissioners, machine oper-

ators and service and maintenance personnel.

Utility value

The present Lists Manual provides knowledge in respect of parameters and their

effects on the system.

Standard Scope

The present documentation describes the functionality of the standard scope. Any

amendments made by the machine manufacturer are documented by the

machine manufacturer.

Other functions not described in this documentation can possibly also be per-

formed on thecontrol system. However, the customer is not entitled to demand

these functions when the new equipment is supplied or servicing is carried out.

Preface 06/2007

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

For reasons of clarity, this documentation does not contain all detailed information

on all types of the product and can thus not consider any conceivable case of

installation, operationand maintenance.

Technical Support

If you have any questions, please contact the following hotline:

Europa / Afrika

Phone +49 180 5050 - 222

Fax +49 180 5050 - 223

Internet http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request

Amerika

Phone +1 423 262 2522

Fax +1 423 262 2200

E-Mail mailto:techsupport.sea@siemens.com

Asien / Pazifik

Phone +86 1064 719 990

Fax +86 1064 747 474

E-Mail mailto:adsupport.asia@siemens.com

Note

Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided under the

following Internet address:

http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support.

06/2007 Preface

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Questions regarding documentation

If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this documenta-

tion, please fax or email us:

Fax form: See the reply form at the end of the document.

SINUMERIK Internet address

http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik

EC Declaration of Conformity

The EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found/obtained

on the Internet:

http://support.automation.siemen.com

under the Product/Order No. 15257461

at the relevant branch office of the A&D MC group of Siemens AG

Purpose of this manual

The Lists Manual provides a complete overview of the functions, machine data,

variables, interface signals and PLC blocks.

Safety information

This manual contains information which you should observe to ensure your own

personal safety as well as to protect the product and connected equipment.

Notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety

alert symbol; notices referring to property damage only have no safety alert sym-

bol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.

Fax +49 9131 98 - 63315

E-mail mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com

Danger

Indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are

not taken.

Preface 06/2007

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

In the event of a number of levels of danger prevailing simultaneously, the warn-

ing corresponding to the highest level of danger is always used. A warning notice

accompanied by a safety alert symbol indicating a risk of bodily injury can also

indicate a risk of property damage.

Qualified persons

The associated device/system must only be set up and operated using this doc-

umentation. The device/system must be commissioned and operated by qualified

personnel only. Qualified personnel as defined under the safety guidelines in this

documentation are those who are authorized to start up, earth and label units,

systems and circuits in accordance with the relevant safety standards.

Warning

means that there can be severe physical injury or even death if the corresponding

safety measures are not followed.

Caution

means that there can be slight physical injury if the corresponding safety mea-

sures are not followed.

Caution

means that there can be damage to property if the corresponding safety mea-

sures are not followed.

NOTICE

indicates that an undesirable result or state may occur if the corresponding

instruction is not followed.

vii
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition 
Content
Machine and Setting Data - Explanation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-11
1 Specifications in the list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-11
2 Overview of machine and setting data  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-17
Machine Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
1 Display machine data  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-19
2 Generale maschine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-22
3 Channel-specific machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-101
3.1 Axis-specific machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-212
Setting Data - Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-299
1 General setting data  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-299
2 Channel-specific setting data  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-314
Interface Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-343
1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-343
2 Signals from/to HMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-344
2.1 Program-control signals from HMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-344
2.2 Signals from HMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-346
2.3 Signals from operator panel  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-347
2.4 General selection/status signals from HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-348
2.5 General selection/status signals to HMI  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-350
3 Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-351
4 NC signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-354
4.1 General signals to NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-354
4.2 General signals from NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-355
5 Mode signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-357
6 Channel-specific signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-363
6.1 Signals to channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-363
6.2 Signals from the channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-379
7 Axis-/spindle-specific  signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-389
7.1 Transferred axis-specific M and S functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-389
7.2 Signals to axis/spindle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-390
7.3 Signals from axis/spindle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-407
8 Tool management functions from NC channel  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-419

Content 06/2007
viii
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
PLC User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-421
1 Adressranges  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-421
2 User data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-423
2.1 User data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-423
2.2 User data 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-423
2.3 Signals from MCP (connected to the MCPA module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-423
2.4 Signals to MCP (connected to the MCPA module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-424
2.5 Reading/writing NC data: Job [F20.6] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-424
2.6 Read/write NC data: Result [F20.6]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-424
3 Retentive data area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-425
4 User alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-426
4.1 User alarm: Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-426
4.2 Variable for alarm  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-426
4.3 Active alarm reaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-427
5 Signals from/to HMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-427
5.1 Program control signals from HMI (retentive area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-427
5.2 Program selection from PLC (retentive area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-427
5.3 Checkback signal Program selection from HMI (retentive area) . . . . . . . . . 5-428
5.4 Signals from HMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-428
5.5 Signals from PLC  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-428
5.6 Signals from operator panel (retentive area). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-429
5.7 General selection/status signals from HMI (retentive area)  . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-429
5.8 General selection/status signals to HMI (retentive area). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-430
6 Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-431
6.1 Decoded M signals: (M0-M99)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-432
6.2 Transferred T functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-432
6.3 Transferred M functions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-433
6.4 Transferred S functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-433
6.5 Transferred D functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-433
6.6 Transferred H functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-434
7 NCK signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-434
7.1 General signals to NCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-434
7.2 General signals from NCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-435
7.3 Signals to fast inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-436
7.4 Signal from fast inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-437
7.5 Operating mode signals  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-438
8 Channel Signals  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-439
8.1 Signals to NC channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-439
8.2 Signals from NC channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-442
9 Axis/spindle signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-445
9.1 Transferred M/S functions, axis-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-445
9.2 Signals to axis/spindle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-445
9.3 Signals from axis/spindle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-448
10 PLC machine data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-452
10.1 INT values (MD 14510 USER_DATA_INT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-452
10.2 HEX values (MD 14512 USER_DATA_HEX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-452
10.3 FLOAT values (MD 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-452
11 Reading and writing PLC variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-453
12 Tool management functions from NC channel  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-454

06/2007 Content

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

6 SINAMICS Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-455

IIndex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-457

Content 06/2007

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

1-11

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Machine and Setting Data - Explanation 1

1.1 Specifications in the list

The machine and setting data are listed in the form of tables.

The following information are specified:

Number and identifier

MD and SD are addressed via their numbers or their names (identifiers). The

number and the name, as well as the activation type and the unit are displayed

on the screen of the control system.

In the field " identifier", you can see the name of the data.

Cross reference

For a detailed description of the appropriate data, please refer to the description

of functions or manual/guide specified.

Example: [F-S1] Description of Functions 802D sl, Chapter "Spindle (S1)"

MD nummer MD identifier Cross

reference

Unit Brief description Activation

Display filter Attribute Data type

System Dimension Default value Minimalvalue Maximal value Protection

Machine and Setting Data - Explanation 06/2007

Specifications in the list

1-12

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Unit/unit system

Depending on MD 10240 SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC, the physical units of

the machine data (MD) differ as follows:

If there are machine data with no physical unit assigned, a hyphen ("-") can be

found in the relevant field.

Activation

In the "Activation" field, the following short designator specifies when the data

takes effect after a change.

The levels of effectiveness have been listed above in order of priority.

Display filter

A short designator for the filter setting is listed in the "Display filter" field. With the

aid of this filter setting, it is possible to selectively reduce the number of the dis-

played machine/setting data of a section.

Display criteria:

MD 10240 = 1 MD 10240 = 0

mm inch

mm/min inch/min

m/s2inch/s2

m/s3inch/s3

mm/rev. inch/rev

Hinweis:

The default setting is

MD 10240 SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC = 1 (metric)

po POWER ON "RESET" key on the front plate of the NCU module

cf NEW_CONF −The "Activate MD" softkey on the HMI

−"RESET" key on the control unit

−It is possible to modify block limits during program

operation

re RESET −at end of program M2/M30 or

−"RESET" key on the control unit

so IMMEDIATELY After entry of value

EXP Expert mode:

•Active: the MD is assigned to the expert mode (display of MD)

Specifications in the list

06/2007 Machine and Setting Data - Explanation

1-13

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Depending on the machine data section, there are different display filters. These

short designations return in the operator interface to activate the filters.

The short designations of the display filter and their meanings are listed below for

the individual machine data.

General machine data

Channelspecific machine data

N01 Configuration / Scaling

N02 Memory configuration

N03 PLC machine data

N04 Drive control

N05 Status data/Diagnostics

N06 Monitors/Limitations

N07 Auxiliary functions

N08 Corrections/Compensations

N09 Technological functions

N10 Peripheral configuration

N11 Standard machine

N12 NC language ISO dialect

C01 Configuration

C02 Memory configuration

C03 Initial settings

C04 Auxiliary functions

C05 Velocities

C06 Monitors/Limitations

C07 Transformations

C08 Corrections/Compensations

C09 Technological functions

C10 Standard machine

C11 NC language ISO dialect

Machine and Setting Data - Explanation 06/2007

Specifications in the list

1-14

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Axis-specific machine data

Data type

In the "Data type" field, the short designators indicate the data types. The have

the following meanings:

A01 Configuration (including memory)

A02 Measuring system

A03 Machine geometry

A04 Speeds/Accelerations

A05 Monitors/Limitations

A06 Spindle

A07 Controller data

A08 Status data

A09 Corrections/Compensations

A10 Technological functions

O11 Standard machine

A12 NC language ISO dialect

BOOLEAN Boolean value: 1(TRUE) or 0 (FALSE)

BYT E I8-bit value

•as a INTEGER value. -128::: 127

•as a hexadecimal value: 00 ... FF

•as a character as per ASCII character set, e.g. “a”

STRING Sequence of characters (max. 16)

WORD 16-bit value,

•as an INTEGER value: -32768 ... 32767

•as a hexadecimal value: 0000 ... FFFF

UNSIGNED WORD I16-bit value,

•as an INTEGER value: 0 ... 65535,

•as a hexadecimal value: 0000 ... FFFF

INTEGER I16-bit value (here defined locally),

•INTEGER value: -32768 ... 32767

Specifications in the list

06/2007 Machine and Setting Data - Explanation

1-15

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

System

Specifies the control system for which the data with the entered values applies.

The following entries are possible:

•default

The entered values apply for all SINUMERIK 802D sl.

Any deviations in the range of values must be entered in the following lines of

the table. If no "default" entry exists, the data only applies for the control vari-

ants specified.

Default values

This value is used to specify a default value for the machine data. If the default

values for the channels are different, this is marked by a " , ".

Range of values (minimum/maximum value)

Specifies the input limits. If no range of values is specified, the data type determi-

nes the input limits, and the field is marked with "***".

If no range of values is specified, the value in the "Data type" field determines the

input limits and the field is marked with "***".

DWORD 32-bit value,

•as an INTEGER value: -2147483648 ... 2147483647

•as a hexadecimal value: 0000 0000 ... FFFF

UNSIGNED DWORD I32-bit value,

•as an INTEGER value: 0 ... 4294967295,

•as a hexadecimal value: 0000 0000 ... FFFF FFFF

DOUBLE 64-bit value,

•floating point value: ± 4.19 x 10-307 to ± 1.67 x 10308)

FLOAT DWORD Realwerte (von ± 8,43 x 10-37 bis "3,37 x 1038)

UBYTE Integerwerte (von 0 - 255)

LONG Integerwerte (von 4294967296 - 4294967295)

802d-cu3 Customised pro

802d-ng2 Nibbling/grinding plus

802d-ng3 Nibbling/grinding pro

802d-tm1 Turning/milling value

802d-tm2 Turning/milling plus

802d-tm3 Turning/milling pro

Machine and Setting Data - Explanation 06/2007

Specifications in the list

1-16

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Protection

The SINUMERIK 802D sl provides a concept of protection levels for enabling data

areas.There are the protection levels 0 to 7 whereby 0 is the highest and 7 the

lowest level.The protection levels can be set for certain function areas (e.g. pro-

gram editor) using thedisplay machine data (USER_CLASS...).When the control

system is delivered, certain default passwords are already set for the pro-tection

levels 1 to 3. If necessary, the appropriate authorized person can change these

pass-words.

Protection levels 1 ... 3

The protection levels 1 to 3 require a password. The passwords can be changed

after activation. For example, if the passwords are no longer known, the control

system must be reini-tialized (booting with default machine data). This will reset

all passwords to their defaultsaccording to the software release you have

acquired.

The password remains set until it is reset by selecting the Delete password soft-

key. POWER ON will not reset the password.

Protection levels 4 ... 7

Protection level 7 is set automatically if no password is set and no protection level

interfacesignal is set. The protection levels 4 to 7 can be set from the PLC user

program even wi-thout a password by setting the bits in the user interface.

Tabelle 1-1

Protection

level

Locked by Area

0 Siemens, reserved

1 Password: SUNRISE

(default)

Expert mode (OEM HIGH)

2 Password: EVENING

(default)

Machine manufacturer (OEM LOW)

3 Password: CUSTOMER

(default)

Authorized operator, setter

4 to 7 No password anduser

interface from PLC NCK

Authorized operator, setter or

appropriate graduations as desired

Overview of machine and setting data

06/2007 Machine and Setting Data - Explanation

1-17

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

1.2 Overview of machine and setting data

The machine data and setting data are divided into the following areas:

Tabelle 1-2 Overview of the machine and setting data areas

Area Designation

from 200 to 400 Display machine data1

from 1 000 to 19 999 General machine data

from 20 000 to 29 999 Channel-specific machine data

from 30 000 to 39 999 Axis-specific machine data

from 41 000 to 41 999 General setting data

from 42 000 to 42 999 Channel-specific setting data

from 43 000 to 43 999 Axis-specific setting data

Machine and Setting Data - Explanation 06/2007

Overview of machine and setting data

1-18

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

2-19

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Machine Data 2

2.1 Display machine data

Description:

The language (1 or 2) which is to be automatically active after each system

startup is set in the machine data.

Two languages are available simultaneously in SINUMERIK 802D. Languages other

than those included in the control ex works can be loaded.

It is possible to temporarily switch to a second language using a softkey in

the Diagnosis area. After power ON the predefined language set in MD is again

active.

Description:

This machine data defines the number of places after the decimal point in the

position display for linear axes in metric systems as well as in general for

rotary axes.

Spindle positions are treated as rotary axis positions.

The position is displayed with 10 symbols max. including the plus/minus sign

and the decimal point. A plus sign is not displayed.

All 3 positions after the decimal point are displayed per default.⇒

MD value=3: Display resolution = 10-3 [mm] or [degrees].

related to:

MD 10200: INT_INCR_PER_MM or MD 10210: INT_INCR_PER_DEG

Number Identifier Display filters Reference

Unit Name Data type Active

Attributes

System Dimension Default value Minimum value Maximum value Protection

202 FIRST_LANGUAGE --

- Foreground language BYTE POWER ON

- 02 123/2

203 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION --

- Display resolution BYTE POWER ON

- 03 053/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Display machine data

2-20

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data specifies the number of places after the decimal point for

linear axes for Inch dimension systems.

The position is displayed with max. 10 characters including the plus/minus

sign and the decimal point. A plus sign is not displayed.

All 4 positions after the decimal point are displayed per default.⇒

MD value=4: Display resolution = 10 -4 [inch]

The display is retained according to MD 203 for rotary axes and spindle

positions

related to:

MD 10200: INT_INCR_PER_MM, MD 203: DISPLAY_RESOLUTION

Description:

This machine data specifies the number of places after the decimal point of

the spindle speed display.

The values are displayed with 10 symbols max. including the plus/minus sign

and the decimal point. A plus sign is not displayed.

1 position after the decimal point is displayed per default.⇒

MD value=1: Display resolution = 10-1

Description:

This MD is set to specify the time intervals at which the simulation graphic

must be updated in accordance with the current machining process on the

machine tool.

Value = 0 means no update.

Description:

The position of the coordinate system can be altered as follows:

204 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_INCH --

- Display resolution for the INCH dimension system BYTE POWER ON

- 04 053/2

205 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_SPINDLE --

- Display resolution for spindle values BYTE POWER ON

- 01 053/2

289 CTM_SIMULATION_TIME_NEW_POS --

- Simulation updating rate of actual value INTEGER POWER ON

- 0 100 0 4000 4/3

290 CTM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM --

- Simulation of actual-value refresh rate BYTE POWER ON

- 02 074/3

Display machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-21

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

0: Inputs for absolute values as radius value.

Zero offsets always as radius,

tool lengths always as radius,

tool wear always as radius

1: Position display as diameter,

distance to go as diameter

absolute distances as diameter

Description:

0: Input in radius

1: Input in diameter

Description:

0: T/D number input blocked

1: T/D number input enabled

Description:

Controls "Save/Pos" softkey for "Manual tool measuring" function:

0: The SK "Save Pos" is only active when measuring length 1

1: SK "Save Pos" is generally active

291 CTM_CROSS_AX_DIAMETER_ON --

- Diameter display for active transverse axes BYTE POWER ON

- 01 014/3

292 CTM_G91_DIAMETER_ON --

- Incremental infeed BYTE POWER ON

- 01 017/3

361 MEAS_TOOL_CHANGE --

- Input enable for T/D no. for tool measuring BYTE POWER ON

- -0 013/3

373 MEAS_SAVE_POS_LENGTH2 --

- Enable tool measuring SK "Save Pos" for all values. BYTE POWER ON

- -0 012/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-22

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

2.2 Generale maschine data

Description:

The name of the machine axis is entered in this MD

- The preferred axis label (name) should be used comprising a valid address

letter

(A, B, C, Q, U, V, W, X, Y, Z), followed by an optional, numerical expansion

(1-99).

- The selected machine axis label (name) must differ from the label (name) of

geometry axes (X, Y, Z) and additional channel axes (MD 20080:

AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB if a transformation is planned (e.g.: TRANSMITT).

Comment: Transformation for SINUMERIK 802D, SW release P1, transformations are

not available.

- A "free" entered machine axis label (axis name) may not be a name, address,

keyword or predefined label or name that is already being used in the control

or is reserved for other functions (e.g.: SPOS, DIAMON, ...).

Note: Not all the SINUMERIK control system functions are documented for 802D.

Use of a free axis identifier is therefore conditional.

Special cases:

We recommend the following for machine axis identifiers:

X1, Y1, Z1, U1, V1, W1, Q1for linear axes,

A1, B1, C1for rotary axes

related to:

MD 20060: AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB (geometry axis identifier)

MD 20080 :AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB (channel axis identifier)

Number Identifier Display filters Reference

Unit Name Data type Active

Attributes

System Dimension Default value Minimum value Maximum value Protection

10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB N01, N11 K2

- Machine axis name STRING POWER ON

- 31 "X1","Y1","Z1","A1","

B1","C1","U1"...

--7/2

802d-cu3 6 "X1","Y1","Z1","SP","

A1","PLCX1"...

--2/2

802d-ng2 6 "X1","Z1","C1","A1","

B1","PLCX1"...

--2/2

802d-ng3 6 "X1","Z1","C1","A1","

B1","PLCX1"...

--2/2

802d-tm1 4 "X1","Y1","Z1","SP" - - 2/2

802d-tm2 6 "X1","Y1","Z1","SP","

A1","PLCX1"...

--2/2

802d-tm3 6 "X1","Y1","Z1","SP","

A1","PLCX1"...

--2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-23

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Diagnostic data related to the PROFIBUS DP cycle.

[0]: Latest date at which the actual values must be available (Tdx)

[1]: Actually active position controller cycle offset (Tm)

[2]: Latest date at which the setpoints were output by the position controller

Diagnostic data are initialized with ZERO with each NCK power up

Description:

Division ratio between IPO and PLC tasks.

A value of 2 means, for example, that the PLC task is processed in every

second IPO cycle only. The PLC cycle time therefore equals 2 IPO times. More

runtime is therefore available for the other tasks.

The PLC runtime must not exceed this PLC cycle time, or a PLC STOP alarm will

be triggered.

Anwendungsbeispiel:

Description:

The reboot following PI "_N_IBN_SS" is delayed by the time

$MN_REBOOT_DELAY_TIME.

The suppressable NOREADY alarm 2900 is activated immediately with PI

"_N_IBN_SS".

10063 POSCTRL_CYCLE_DIAGNOSIS N01, N05, EXP -

s Active timing DOUBLE POWER ON

-, READ

-30.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/-

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/-

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/-

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/-

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/-

10074 PLC_IPO_TIME_RATIO N01, N05 -

- PLC task factor for main run (IPO) DWORD POWER ON

- - 1 1 50 0/0

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

10088 REBOOT_DELAY_TIME EXP -

s Reboot delay DOUBLE SOFORT

- - 0.2 0.0 1.0 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-24

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

If $MN_REBOOT_DELAY_TIME falls below the $MA_SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME value of

an axis, the axis is decelerated during $MN_REBOOT_DELAY_TIME. The servo

enable is disabled afterwards, i.e. the full $MA_SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME is

NOT waited.

Alarm 2900 does not become active with $MN_REBOOT_DELAY_TIME = 0.0 and there

is no reboot delay.

The NCK waits beyond the stated delay time until the PI has been able to be

acknowledged to the HMI. The delay time may total up to 2 s.

Description:

The number of internal increments per millimeter is defined in this MD. The

precision of the linear position input is limited to the calculation

resolution by rounding-off the product of the programmed value and the

calculation resolution to an integer value. To make the rounding clear, powers

of 10 should be used for the calculation resolution.

Anwendungsbeispiel:

The calculation resolution can be increased to u1000 incr./mm for linear axes

operating to high accuracy requirements.

Description:

The number of internal increments per degree is defined in this MD. The

precision of the angular position input is limited to the calculation

resolution by rounding-off the product of the programmed value and the

calculation resolution to an integer value. To make the rounding clear, powers

of 10 should be used for the calculation resolution.

Anwendungsbeispiel:

The calculation resolution can be changed to u1000 incr./degrees for a high-

resolution rotary axis.

10200 INT_INCR_PER_MM N01 G2

- Calculation resolution for linear positions DOUBLE POWER ON

- - 1000. 1.0 1.0e9 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 100000. - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 100000. - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

10210 INT_INCR_PER_DEG N01 G2

- Computational resolution for angular positions DOUBLE POWER ON

- - 1000.0 1.0 1.0e9 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 100000. - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 100000. - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-25

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The MD defines the basic system used by the control to scale length-dependent

physical

quantities during data input/output.

All related data are stored internally in the basic units 1 mm, 1 degree and 1

sec.

When accessing a part program via the operator panel or from an external

device, scaling is in the

following units:

SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC = 1: normalized to:

mm, mm/min, m/s2, m/s3mm/rev

SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC = 0: normalized to:

inch, inch/min, inch/s2inch/s3, inch/rev

The selection of the basic system also specifies the interpretation of the

programmed F value for

linear axes:

metricinch

G94mm/mininch/min

G95mm/revinch/rev

A power-up is necessary after changing this machine data, as associated

machine data that have

physical units will otherwise be normalized incorrectly.

Perform the following steps:

- MD change by manual input

⇒First perform start-up and then enter the physical units in the related

machine

data.

- MD change via machine data file

⇒First perform start-up and then reload the machine data file

so that the new physical units are activated.

If the machine data are altered, alarm 4070 "Scaling machine data altered" is

output.

Anwendungsbeispiel:

Installation in the metric system and then conversion to inch system.

10240 SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC N01 G2

- Basic system metric BOOLEAN POWER ON

SCAL

--TRUE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-26

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The number of bytes of the digital NCK inputs that can be used on the control

are defined in this machine data.

These digital NCK inputs can be read directly by the part program. Moreover,

the signal state at the HW inputs can also be changed by the PLC.

If more digital NCK inputs are defined in the machine data than are available

in the control hardware, a signal status of 0 is set in the control for the

inputs that do not exist in the hardware. The NCK value can be altered by the

PLC.

Related to:

IS "Disable the digital NCK inputs" (DB10, DBB0, DBB122 ...)

IS "PLC setting for digital NCK inputs" (DB10, DBB1, DBB123 ...)

IS "Actual value for digital NCK inputs" (DB10, DBB60, DBB186 ...)

Description:

The number of bytes for digital NCK outputs that can be used on the control

are defined in this machine data.

These digital NCK outputs can be set directly by the part program. The PLC is

able to

- set the digital outputs to "0" in a defined way with IS "Disable the digital

NCK outputs".

- alter the NCK value with IS "Overwrite mask for digital NCK outputs".

- specify a PLC value with IS "Setting mask for digital NCK outputs".

10350 FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS N10 A4

- Number of active digital NCK input bytes BYTE POWER ON

- -1 057/2

802d-cu3 - 2 1 - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 2 1 - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 2 1 - 2/2

802d-tm1 - 2 1 - 2/2

802d-tm2 - 2 1 - 2/2

802d-tm3 - 2 1 - 2/2

10360 FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS N10 A4

- Number of active digital NCK output bytes BYTE POWER ON

- -0 057/2

802d-cu3 - 2 - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 2 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 2 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - 2 - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - 2 - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - 2 - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-27

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

If more digital NCK outputs are defined in the machine data than are available

in the control hardware, no alarm is triggered. The signal states specified by

the part program can be read by the PLC.

Special cases:

Digital NCK outputs 5 to 8 can be processed only by the PLC (no hardware

outputs).

Related to:

IS "Disable the digital NCK outputs" (DB10, DBB4, DBB130 ...)

IS "Overwrite mask for digital NCK outputs" (DB10, DBB5, DBB131 ...)

IS "PLC setting for digital NCK outputs" (DB10, DBB6, DBB132 ...)

IS "Setting mask for digital NCK outputs" (DB10, DBB7, DBB133 ...)

IS "Setpoint for digital NCK outputs" (DB10, DBB64, DBB190 ...)

Description:

The following 4 bytes assign the external digital NCK I/Os to the hardware:

1st byte: I/O no.

2nd byte: Submodule no.

3rd byte: Module no.

4th byte: Segment no.

As soon as value 0 is entered in byte 3 (module no.), the output byte

concerned is not processed by the control.

I/O no.:

Number of the I/O byte on the DP compact module (range: 1 to 2; always 1

with analog inputs/outputs)

Submodule no.:

Submodule slot on the terminal block into which the DP compact module is

inserted (range: 1 to 8)

Module no.:

Number of the logical slot into which the terminal block with the external

I/Os is inserted. The logical slot is assigned to a physical slot by MD

13010: DRIVE_LOGIC_NR (logical drive number). Each module occupies a

physical slot. The first 6 slots are permanently occupied on the 810D.

Segment no.:

Always 1 for 840D/810D (ID for 611D bus)

10366 HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN N10 A4

- Hardware assignment of external digital NCK inputs DWORD POWER ON

- 10 0x01000000 0x01000000 0x060003FF 7/2

802d-cu3 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2

802d-ng2 1 0x00010101 0x0 0x00010101 2/2

802d-ng3 1 0x00010101 0x0 0x00010101 2/2

802d-tm1 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2

802d-tm2 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2

802d-tm3 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-28

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Example:

HW_ASSIGN_DIGITAL_FASTIN[3] = 01 04 03 02

1st byte: 02 = 2nd input byte of a 16 bit input module

2nd byte: 03 = Input module inserted in slot 3 of the terminal block

3rd byte: 04 = Terminal block inserted at logical drive number 4

4th byte: 01 = ID for 611D bus

PROFIBUS DP:

Segment no.: 5 = PROFIBUS DP

6 = PROFIBUS DP link module

Module no.: 1 ... MD_MAXNUM_SIMO611D_AXES:

Number of the logical slot in which the terminal block with the external

I/Os is inserted. The logical slot is assigned to a physical slot by

$MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR, it is activated by $MN_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE.

1st + 2nd bytes give the logical start address of the I/O slot on the PROFIBUS

1st byte = low byte

2nd byte = high byte

Value 0000 means NO active slots

Values 0001..007F are reserved for the PLC (NCK can also read the value for

input slots without error, but output slots are forbidden in this range and

lead to an alarm during startup)

Values 0080..02FF are valid

Values > 02FF are invalid

Example:

HW_ASSIGN_DIGITAL_FASTIN[3] = '05000302'

1st + 2nd byte: 0302 (hex) = logical start address 770 (decimal)

3rd byte: 00 = no significance

4th byte: 05 = ID for PROFIBUS DP

Related to:

MD 10368: HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTOUT

MD 10362: HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTIN

MD 10364: HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTOUT

Description:

The following 4 bytes assign the external digital NCK outputs to the hardware:

1st byte: I/O no.

2nd byte: Submodule no.

3rd byte: Module no.

4th byte: Segment no.

10368 HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTOUT N10 A4

- Hardware assignment of external digital NCK outputs DWORD POWER ON

- 4 0x01000000 0x01000000 0x060003FF 7/2

802d-cu3 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2

802d-ng2 1 0x00010101 0x0 0x00010101 2/2

802d-ng3 1 0x00010101 0x0 0x00010101 2/2

802d-tm1 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2

802d-tm2 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2

802d-tm3 1 0x0 0x0 0x00010101 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-29

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

As soon as value 0 is entered in byte 3 (module no.), the output byte

concerned is not processed by the control.

The hardware assignment is control specific and therefore different on the

SINUMERIK 840D/810D and FM-NC.

The individual bytes are explained under MD: HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN.

[hw] = Index (0 to 3) for addressing the external digital output bytes

Related to:

MD 10366: HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN

MD 10362: HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTIN

MD 10364: HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTOUT

Description:

The compile cycle user can freely define data within a data block on the PLC

user interface. As the user, he determines the size of the interface from PLC

to NCK. This machine data describes the length of the area on the VDI

interface in bytes which defines the NCK input interface. The sum of this MD

and the machine data CC_VDI_OUT_DATA must not exceed 400 for software version

Description:

The compile cycle user can freely define data within a data block on the PLC

user interface. As the user, he determines the size of the interface from PLC

to NCK. This machine data describes the length of the area on the VDI

interface in bytes which defines the NCK output interface. The sum of this MD

and the machine data CC_VDI_IN_DATA must not exceed 400.

10400 CC_VDI_IN_DATA EXP, N02 OEM

- Number of input bytes for compile cycles DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 1024 7/1

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

10410 CC_VDI_OUT_DATA EXP, N02 OEM

- Number of output bytes for compile cycles DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 1024 7/1

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-30

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Reservation of high-speed hardware outputs for CC applications

Bit 0(LSB)-14: Mask of the digital output bytes reserved for the CC

application

Bits 16-30: Mask of the analog outputs reserved for the CC application

The hardware outputs reserved here are included in the multiple assignment

monitoring routine when the system is powered up. It is recommended to

Bit 15: Suppresses power-up alarm 4275 (multiple assignment of digital output)

Bit 31: Suppresses power-up alarm 4275 (multiple assignment of analog output)

Description:

This machine data allows one machine axis to be assigned to each of the 16

possible cam pairs (each is comprised of one minus and one plus cam).

If a "0" is entered, the corresponding cam is not processed.

The cam signal output is activated via the axial IS "Cam activation" (DB31-48,

DBX2.0).

Index [n] of the machine data addresses the cam pair: n = 0, 1, ... , 15

correspond to cam pairs 1, 2, ... , 16

Related to IS "Cam activation" (DB31-48, DBX2.0)

10420 CC_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_MASK EXP, N10 OEM

- Reservation of external outputs for compile cycles DWORD POWER ON

--0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

10450 SW_CAM_ASSIGN_TAB N09 N3

- Assignment of software cams to machine axes BYTE POWER ON

-320 0317/2

802d-cu3 8 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 8 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 8 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 1 - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 1 - - - 0/0

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-31

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Example:

Cam pair 1 is to be assigned to machine axis 3 and cam pair 3 to machine axis

4. Cam pair 2 is not to be assigned to an axis.

MD: SW_CAM_ASSIGN_TAB[0]= 3

MD: SW_CAM_ASSIGN_TAB[1]= 0

MD: SW_CAM_ASSIGN_TAB[2]= 4

Description:

A lead or delay time can be assigned in this machine data to each minus cam 1-

16 to compensate for delay times.

The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the

time value entered.

Positive value: --> Lead time

Negative value: --> Delay time

Serves to compensate for the constant proportion of the internal delay time

between actual value acquisition and signal output.

Index [n] of the machine data addresses the cam pair:

n = 0, 1, ... , 15 correspond to cam pairs 1, 2, ... , 16

This machine data is added to the setting data SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_1[n] and

SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_2[n].

Related to:

SD: SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_1[n] (lead or delay time on minus cams 1 - 8)

SD: SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_2[n] (lead or delay time on minus cams 9 - 16)

10460 SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME N09 N3

s Lead or delay time at minus cams 1-16 DOUBLE POWER ON

-320.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 8 - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 8 - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 8 - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 1 - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 1 - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 1 - - - 0/0

10461 SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME N09 N3

s Lead or delay time at plus cams 1-16 DOUBLE POWER ON

-320.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 8 - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 8 - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 8 - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 1 - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 1 - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 1 - - - 0/0

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-32

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

A lead or delay time can be assigned in this machine data to each plus cam 1-

16 to compensate for delay times.

The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the

time value entered.

Positive value: --> Lead time

Negative value: --> Delay time

Serves to compensate for the constant proportion of the internal delay time

between actual value acquisition and signal output.

Index [n] of the machine data addresses the cam pair:

n = 0, 1, ... , 15 correspond to cam pairs 1, 2, ... , 16

This machine data is added to the setting data SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_1[n] and

SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_2[n].

Related to:

SD: SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_1[n] (lead or delay time on plus cams 1 - 8)

SD: SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_2[n] (lead or delay time on plus cams 9 - 16)

Description:

The cam signal status can be output to the NCK I/Os as well as to the PLC.

The hardware assignment of the minus and plus cam signals to the digital

output bytes used for the NCK I/Os is made in this machine data for cam pairs

1 - 8.

The assigned output signals can also be inverted with this machine data.

The MD is coded as follows:

Bits 0-7: No. of 1st HW byte used with digital outputs

Bits 8-15: No. of 2nd HW byte used with digital outputs

Bits 16-23: Inversion mask for writing 1st HW byte used

Bits 24-31: Inversion mask for writing 2nd HW byte used

Bit=0: Do not invert

Bit=1: Invert

If both HW bytes are specified, the 1st byte contains the minus cam signals

and the 2nd byte the plus cam signals.

10470 SW_CAM_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_1 N09 N3

- Hardware assignment for output of cams 1-8 to NCK

I/Os

DWORD POWER ON

--0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-33

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

If the 2nd byte is not specified (= "0"), then the 8 cams are output as an AND

operation of the minus and plus cam signals via the 1st HW byte using the 1st

inversion mask.

The status of the non-inverted output signal for linear axes and for rotary

axes with "plus cam - minus cam < 180 degrees" is:

"1" between minus and plus cams

"0" outside this range

The status of the non-inverted output signal for rotary axes with "plus cam -

minus cam >= 180 degrees" is:

"0" between minus and plus cams

"1" outside this range

The following must be specified as the byte address for the digital outputs:

1: for on-board byte

2 - 5: for external bytes

Description:

A timer-controlled output to the 4 on-board outputs of the NCK I/Os can be

selected in this machine data for 4 cam pairs.

In this case, the minus and plus signals of a cam pair are EXCLUSIVE OR'd for

output as one signal.

Meaning for set bit:

Associated cam (minus and plus cam signals EXCLUSIVE OR'd) is output via a

timer interrupt at one of the 4 on-board outputs of the NCU.

The on-board outputs are assigned in order of increasing machine axis numbers

(with assigned cam pairs).

Example:

Machine axis 3 = cam pair 1 --> on-board output 3

Machine axis 1 = cam pair 2 --> on-board output 1

Machine axis 7 = cam pair 3 --> on-board output 4

Machine axis 2 = cam pair 4 --> on-board output 2

If a plurality of cam pairs are set for one machine axis, then this axis is

assigned in ascending order of the cam pairs.

10480 SW_CAM_TIMER_FASTOUT_MASK N09 N3

- Mask for output of cam signals via timer interr. to

NCU

DWORD POWER ON

--0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-34

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Example:

Machine axis 3 = cam pair 1 --> on-board output 2

Machine axis 3 = cam pair 2 --> on-board output 3

Machine axis 7 = cam pair 3 --> on-board output 4

Machine axis 2 = cam pair 4 --> on-board output 1

This function works independently of the assignment set in MD:

SW_CAM_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_1 or MD: SW_CAM_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_2.

Note:

The on-board byte must not be used more than once.

If there is more than one signal change in the IPO cycle for the cam pairs

specified in the MD, then the cam pair with the lowest number determines the

instant of output. The other signal changes take place at the same time.

Description:

Meaning of the individual bits:

Bit 0(LSB) = 0:

If more than 1 signal change per interpolation cycle is due for the cams

specified in MD SW_CAM_TIMER_FASTOUT_MASK, the cam having the lowest number

will determine the output instant. The other signals change at the same

instant. That is, a maximum of one interrupt-controlled output is effected

per interpolation cycle.

Bit 0(LSB) = 1:

Each cam specified in MD SW_CAM_TIMER_FASTOUT_MASK will be output precisely

at the time of the interpolation cycle. There is no output priority of the

cams. A maximum of 8 interrupt-controlled outputs can be performed per

interpolation cycle.

Bit 1 = 0:

Inversion of signal behavior from plus cam where plus cam - minus cam >=

180 degr .

Bit 1 = 1:

No inversion of signal behavior from plus cam where plus cam - minus cam >=

10485 SW_CAM_MODE N09 N3

- Behavior of SW cams DWORD POWER ON

--0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-35

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

180 degr.

Signal behavior on-board output:

Overtravelling:

Minus cam plus cam

Traversing direction:

positive 0->1 1->0

negative 1->0 0->1

Bit 2 = 0:

No path-time cam

Bit 2 = 1:

Path-time cam for cams where minus position = plus position. The lead/delay

time applied is independent of:

- velocity of the axis

- position of the axis

- reversal of traversing direction

The cam is only activated on overtravelling of the cam position. A

lead/delay time applied to the minus cam is active and leads to a shift of

the whole cam.

Bit 3 = 0:

No alignment signal in case of measurement area selection.

Bit 3 = 1:

Output of an alignment signal for measurement area selection (FM only). On-

board output 8 is used permanently.

On-board output 8 = 1: Measurement possible (active range enabled)

On-board output 8 = 0: Measurement not possible

Bit 4 = 0:

and following free

Description:

Logical slot address of the PROFIBUS I/Os usable by the NCK.

The logical slot address is defined in STEP 7, hardware configuration.

10500 DPIO_LOGIC_ADDRESS_IN N10 -

- Logical slot address of the PROFIBUS I/Os DWORD POWER ON

- MD_MAXNU

M_DPIO_RA

NGE_IN

0 0 8191 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-36

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Length of the PROFIBUS I/O range consistently usable for the NCK. This range

must be defined in STEP 7, hardware configuration.

0: only the first data slot is used.

x: length of the consistent PROFIBUS I/O range

Description:

Attributes of the PROFIBUS I/Os

Bit 0: Little/Big Endian format of the system variable $A_DPx_IN[n,m]

0: Little Endian format

1: Big Endian format

Bit 1: (reserved)

Bit 2: Read input data

0: Read possible through system variable and CC binding (increased

performance requirements)

1: Read only possible for CC binding (low performance requirements)

Bit 3: Slot sign-of-life alarm

0: Slot sign-of-life alarms are output

1: Slot sign-of-life alarms are suppressed

10501 DPIO_RANGE_LENGTH_IN N10 -

- Length of the PROFIBUS I/O range DWORD POWER ON

- MD_MAXNU

M_DPIO_RA

NGE_IN

0 0 MD_MAXNUM_D

PIO_BYTES_RA

NGE_IN

7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

10502 DPIO_RANGE_ATTRIBUTE_IN N10 -

- Attributes of the PROFIBUS I/Os DWORD POWER ON

- MD_MAXNU

M_DPIO_RA

NGE_IN

0x01 0x00 0x0F 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-37

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Logical slot address of the PROFIBUS I/Os usable by the NCK.

The logical slot address is defined in STEP 7, hardware configuration.

Description:

Length of the PROFIBUS I/O range consistently usable for the NCK. This range

must be defined in STEP 7, hardware configuration.

0: only the first data slot is used.

x: length of the consistent PROFIBUS I/O range

10510 DPIO_LOGIC_ADDRESS_OUT N10 -

- Logical slot address of the PROFIBUS I/Os DWORD POWER ON

- MD_MAXNU

M_DPIO_RA

NGE_OUT

0 0 8191 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

10511 DPIO_RANGE_LENGTH_OUT N10 -

- Length of the PROFIBUS I/O range DWORD POWER ON

- MD_MAXNU

M_DPIO_RA

NGE_OUT

0 0 MD_MAXNUM_D

PIO_BYTES_RA

NGE_OUT

7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

10512 DPIO_RANGE_ATTRIBUTE_OUT N10 -

- Attributes of the PROFIBUS I/Os DWORD POWER ON

- MD_MAXNU

M_DPIO_RA

NGE_OUT

0x01 0x00 0x0F 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-38

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Attributes of the PROFIBUS I/Os

Bit 0: Little/Big Endian format of system variable $A_DPx_OUT[n,m]

0: Little Endian format

1: Big Endian format

Bit 1: Write output data

0: Write only through system variable

1: Write only through CC binding

Bit 2: (reserved)

Bit 3: Slot sign-of-life alarm

0: Slot sign-of-life alarms are output

1: Slot sign-of-life alarms are suppressed

Description:

This machine data is used to define whether any active protection zones will

remain active after a transformation change or geo axis replacement, or

whether they will be deactivated.

The machine data is bit-coded with the following meanings:

Bit 0 = 0

Protection zones deactivated on transformation change.

Bit 0 = 1

Active protection zones remain active after transformation change.

Bit 1 = 0

Protection zones deactivated on geo axis replacement.

Bit 1 = 1

Active protection zones remain active after geo axis replacement.

10618 PROTAREA_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE EXP, N01, N09 A3

- Protection range on change of geometry axes BYTE POWER ON

- -0 037/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-39

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Setting data to be backed up

The values of the SDs listed in this table are stored in non-volatile memory,

i.e. remain valid after power ON. The setting data whose HMI numbers were

entered in the backup list are written into the (buffered) active file system

after the description of the part program on RESET.

Programmable setting data are:

(GCODE)

SD 42000 $SC_THREAD_START_ANGLE SF

SD 42400 $SC_PUNCH_DWELLTIME PDELAYON

SD 42800 $SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB SETMS

SD 43210 $SA_SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 G25

SD 43220 $SA_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 G26

SD 43230 $SA_SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS LIMS

SD 43300 $SA_ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE FPRAON

SD 43420 $SA_WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS WALIMOF

SD 43430 $SA_WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS WALIMON

SD 43510 $SA_FIXED_STOP_TORQUE FXST

SD 43520 $SA_FIXED_STOP_WINDOW FXSW

SD 43700 $SA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 OSP1

SD 43710 $SA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2 OSP2

SD 43720 $SA_OSCILL_DWELL_TIME1 OST1

SD 43730 $SA_OSCILL_DWELL_TIME2 OST2

SD 43740 $SA_OSCILL_VELO FA

SD 43750 $SA_OSCILL_NUM_SPARK_CYCLES OSNSC

SD 43760 $SA_OSCILL_END_POS OSE

SD 43770 $SA_OSCILL_CTRL_MASK OSCTRL

SD 43780 $SA_OSCILL_IS_ACTIVE OS

The values of SD 43420: WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS (working area limitation plus) and

SD 43430: WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS (working area limitation minus) are to be

stored in the buffered RAM after every RESET, M02, M30 or M17.

--> PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB[0] = 43420

--> PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB[1] = 43430

10710 PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB EXP, N01 K1

- Setting data to be updated DWORD POWER ON

-300 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-40

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The M functions defined by machine data $MN_M_NO_FCT_STOPRE perform an

implicit preprocessing stop.

That is, the interpretation of the next part program line will be stopped

until the block with the M function defined in that way has been processed

completely

(PLC acknowledgement, motion, etc.).

Description:

For spindles where a '2' is configured in $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET, no

spindle reset is enabled with this M function when the part program is

terminated. The spindle therefore remains active after the end of the part

program.

Proposal: M32

Restrictions: see machine data 10715: $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE

Related to:

$MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET

$MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP,

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE,

$MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR,

$MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE

10713 M_NO_FCT_STOPRE EXP, N12, N07 -

- M function with preprocessing stop DWORD POWER ON

-15-1 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

10714 M_NO_FCT_EOP EXP, N07 S1

- M function for spindle active after reset DWORD POWER ON

---1 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-41

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

For external language mode:

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE,

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX

$MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR

For nibbling:

$MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE

Description:

M number with which a subprogram is called.

The name of the subprogram is stated in $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n]. If the M

function defined with $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[n] is programmed in a part program

block, the subprogram defined in M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n] is started at the end

of the block. If the M function is programmed again in the subprogram,

substitution by a subprogram call is then not carried out.

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[n] acts both in Siemens mode G290 and in external language

mode G291.

The subprograms configured with $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n] and

$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME must not be active simultaneously in one block (line

of a part program). That means no more than one M/T function replacement can

be active in any one block. Neither an M98 nor a modal subprogram call can be

programmed in a block with the M function replacement.

Subprogram return and end of part program are also not permitted. Alarm 14016

is output in the event of a conflict.

Restrictions:

M functions with a fixed meaning and configurable M functions are checked for

conflicting settings. A conflict is reported with an alarm.

The following M functions are checked:

- M0 to M5,

- M17,M30,

- M19,

- M40 to M45,

- M function for 'Spindle active after part program end' according to machine

data $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP

- M function for subprogram calls according to machine data $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE

- M function for spindle/axis mode switchover according to machine data

$MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR

- Additional M function for program stop according to machine data

$MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE

10715 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE EXP, N12, N07 FBFA,K1

- M function to be replaced by a subroutine DWORD POWER ON

-10-1 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-42

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

- Additional M function for conditional program stop according to machine data

$MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE

For external language mode only:

- M function for 'Macro call via M function' according to machine data

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE

- M functions for interrupt programming according to configuration by

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT and $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT

- M functions for channel synchronisation according to configuration by

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN und $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX

- M function for spindle/axis mode switchover with external language applied

according to machine data $MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR

- Additionally M98 and M99 with external language applied

($MN_MM_EXTERN_LANGUAGE).

For nibbling:

- M functions for nibbling/punching according to configuration by

$MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE provided that they have been activated by

$MC_PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION.

Exception:

The M function for the tool change defined by $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE must not

be used in $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE.

Related to:

$MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP,

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE,

$MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR,

$MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE,

With external language mode:

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE,

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX

MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR

With nibbling:

$MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE

10716 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME EXP, N12, N07 FBFA,K1

- Subroutine name for M function replacement STRING POWER ON

-10 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-43

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The machine data contains the name of the cycle. This cycle is called if the M

function has been programmed from machine data $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE.

If the M function is programmed in a motion block, the cycle is executed after

the motion.

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE is active in both Siemens mode G290 and in external

language mode G291.

If a T number is programmed in the call block, then the programmed T number

can be polled in the cycle under the variable $P_TOOL.

M and T function replacements must not be programmed simultaneously in one

block. That means not more than one M or T function replacement may be active

in any one block.

Neither an M98 nor a modal subprogram call may be programmed in a block with M

function replacement.

Moreover, neither subprogram return nor part program end are allowed.

Alarm 14016 is issued if there is a conflict.

Related to:

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE,

$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME

Description:

Cycle name for tool change routine on call-up with a T function.

If a T function is programmed in a part program block, the subprogram defined

in T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is called at the end of the block.

The T number programmed can be polled in the cycle via system variables $C_T /

$C_T_PROG as a decimal value and via $C_TS / $C_TS_PROG as a string (only with

tool management). $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is active both in Siemens mode G290

and in external language mode G291.

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME and $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME must not be active in one

block at the same time, i.e. no more than one M/T function replacement can be

active per block. In the block with the T function replacement, neither an M98

nor a modal subprogram call can be programmed. Furthermore, neither subprogram

return nor part program end are allowed.

In the event of a conflict alarm 14016 is output.

Related to:

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE,

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME

10717 T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME EXP, N12, N07 FBFA,K1

- Name of tool-changing cycle for T function

replacement

STRING POWER ON

-- --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-44

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

If an M function replacement was configured with $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[n] /

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n], a parameter transfer via system variable can be

specified for one of these M functions using $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR, in the

same way as T function replacement. The parameters stored in the system

variables always refer to the part program line where the M function to be

replaced was programmed.

The following system variables are available:

$C_ME : Address extension of the replaced M function

$C_T_PROG : TRUE if address T was programmed

$C_T : Value of address T ( Integer )

$C_TE : Address extension of address T

$C_TS_PROG : TRUE if address TS was programmed

$C_TS : Value of address TS (string, only with tool management )

$C_D_PROG : TRUE if address D was programmed

$C_D : Value of address D

$C_DL_PROG : TRUE if address DL was programmed

$C_DL : Value of address DL

Description:

This machine data parameterizes the execution of the replacement subprogram

for the tool and tool offset selection.

Bit 0 = 0:

D or DL number is transferred to the replacement subprogram (default

value)

10718 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR EXP, N12, N07 -

- M function replacement with parameters DWORD POWER ON

---1 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

10719 T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE EXP, N12, N07 K1

- Setting of T function substitution DWORD POWER ON

- -0 077/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-45

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Bit 0 = 1:

The D or DL number is not transferred to the replacement subprogram if the

following conditions are fulfilled: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1 Programming

D/DL with T or M function with which the tool change cycle is called, in a

part program line.

Bit 1 = 0

Execution of the replacement subprogram at end of block (default value)

Bit 1 = 1

Execution of the replacement subprogram at block start

Bit 2 = 0:

Execution of the replacement subprogram according to the settin of bit 1

Bit 2 = 1:

Execution of the replacement subprogram at block start and at end of block.

Description:

Bit 0:

Enables JOG in automatic.

JOG is enabled in automatic when all channels in the mode group are in the

RESET state and no channel of the DRF mode group has been selected. The

mode group changes internally to JOG with the +/- key and the handwheel,

and the axis moves. After the JOG motion has ended, a change back to AUTO

is also made internally.

Bits 1-31:

Currently unassigned.

10735 JOG_MODE_MASK EXP, N01 -

- Enable JOG in automatic DWORD POWER ON

--0 00x17/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

10760 G53_TOOLCORR N12 FBFA

- Method of operation of G53, G153 and SUPA BOOLEAN POWER ON

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-46

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

With this MD you define whether tool length offset and tool radius offset are

also to be suppressed with language commands G53, G153 and SUPA

0: G53,G153 and SUPA cause block-by-block suppression of zero offsets. The

active tool length offset and tool radius offset remain active.

1: G53,G153 and SUPA cause block-by-block suppression of zero offsets, active

tool length offset and tool radius offset.

Description:

M function number used to activate an interrupt program (ASUB) in ISO2/3 mode.

The interrupt program is always started by the 1st high-speed input of the

numerical control.

The M number defined in the machine data replaces M96 in external language

mode.

Restrictions: Refer to machine data 10715: $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE

Related to:

$MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP,

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE,

$MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR,

$MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE

For external language mode:

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE,

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX

$MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR

For nibbling:

$MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE

10804 EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT EXP, N12 FBFA

- M function to activate ASUB DWORD POWER ON

--96 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-47

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

M function number used to deactivate an interrupt program (ASUB) in ISO2/3

mode.

The M number defined in the machine data replaces M97 in external language

mode.

Restrictions: refer to machine data 10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE

$MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP,

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE,

$MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR,

$MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE

For external language mode:

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE,

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX

$MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR

For nibbling:

$MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE

Description:

Setting the various bits can influence the processing of the interrupt routine

activated by M96 P...

10806 EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT EXP, N12 FBFA

- M function to deactivate ASUB DWORD POWER ON

--97 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1

10808 EXTERN_INTERRUPT_BITS_M96 EXP, N12 FBFA

- Activate interrupt program (ASUB) DWORD POWER ON

--0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-48

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Bit 0 = 0,

No interrupt program possible, M96/M97 are normal M functions

Bit 0 = 1,

Using M96/M97 to activate an interrupt program is allowed

Bit 1 = 0,

Continue processing part program at the final position of the next block

after the interrupt block

Bit 1 = 1,

Continue processing part program from interrupt position

Bit 2 = 0,

The interrupt signal immediately interrupts the current block and starts

the interrupt routine

Bit 2 = 1,

The interrupt routine will not be started until the end of the block

Bit 3 = 0,

Interrupt machining cycle at an interupt signal

Bit 3 = 1,

Do not start interrupt program until the end of a machining cycle.

Description:

This machine data defines the assignment of measurement inputs 1 and 2 to the

P numbers programmed with G31 P1 ( - P4). The machine data is bit-coded. Only

bits 0 and 1 are evaluated. For example, if bit 0 = 1 in

$MN_EXTERN_MEAS_G31_P_SIGNAL[1] the 1st measurement input is activated with

G31 P2. If $MN_EXTERN_MEAS_G31_P_SIGNAL[3]=2, the 2nd measurement input is

activated with G31 P4.

Bit 0: = 0, Do not evaluate measurement input 1 with G31 P1 (- P4)

Bit 0: = 1, Activate measurement input 1 with G31 P1 (- P4)

Bit 1: = 0, Do not evaluate measurement input 2 with G31 P1 (- P4)

Bit 1: = 1, Activate measurement input 2 with G31 P1 (- P4)

10810 EXTERN_MEAS_G31_P_SIGNAL EXP, N12 FBFA

- Config. of measuring inputs for G31 P.. BYTE POWER ON

- 41 037/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

10812 EXTERN_DOUBLE_TURRET_ON EXP, N12 FBFA

- Double turret with G68 BOOLEAN POWER ON

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-49

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data is used to determine whether double-slide machining (channel

synchronization for 1st and 2nd channel) is to be started using G68 or whether

the second tool of a double turret (= two closely-linked tools at a distance

defined in the setting data $SC_EXTERN_DOUBLE_TURRET_DIST) is to be activated.

FALSE:

Channel synchronization for double-slide machining

TRUE:

Load 2nd tool of a double turret (that is, activate

$SC_EXTERN_DOUBLE_TURRET_DISTANCE as additive zero offset and mirroring

around Z axis)

Description:

A macro is called with this M number.

The name of the subprogram is stated in $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME[n].

If the M function specified with $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE[n] is programmed in

a part program block, the subprogram defined in EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME[n]

is started. All addresses programmed in the block are written into the

corresponding variables.

If the M function is programmed again in the subprogram, the replacement by a

subprogram call does not take place any more.

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE[n] is only active in the external language mode

G291.

The subprograms configured with $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME[n] must not be

active simultaneously in a block (part program line), i.e. maximally one M

function replacement can become active in a block. Neither an M98 nor a modal

subprogram call may be programmed in the block with the M function

replacement.

Subprogram return and the part program end arealso not permitted. Alarm 14016

is issued in case of a conflict. Restrictions: see machine data 10715:

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE

10814 EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE EXP, N12 FBFA

- Macro call via M function DWORD POWER ON

-10-1 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-50

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Related to:

$MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP,

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE,

$MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR,

$MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE

For external language mode:

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE,

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX

$MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR

For nibbling:

$MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE

Description:

Name of the subprogram started by a call via the M function defined by

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE[n].

Description:

G number for calling a macro.

The name of the subprogram is stated in $MN_EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME[n].

If the G function specified with $MN_EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE[n] is programmed in

a part program block, the subprogram defined in EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME[n]

is started. All addresses programmed in the block are written in the

corresponding $C_xx variables.

10815 EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME EXP, N12 FBFA

- Name of subroutine for M function macro call STRING POWER ON

-10 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

10816 EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE EXP, N12 FBFA

- Macro call via G function DOUBLE POWER ON

-50-1. --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-51

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

No subprogram call is executed if a subprogram call is already active via an

M/G macro or an M replacement. If a standard G function is programmed in this

case, this code is executed. Otherwise, alarm 12470 is issued.

$MN_EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE[n] is only active in the external language mode

G291.

Only a single subprogram call may be included in a block. This means that only

a single M/G function replacement may be programmed in a block and no

additional subprogram (M98) or cycle call may be included in the block.

Furthermore, a subprogram return and a part program end are not permitted in

the same block.

Alarm 14016 is issued in case of a conflict.

Description:

Name of the subprogram started by call via the G function defined by

$MN_EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE[n].

Description:

Number of the interrupt input starting an asynchronous subprogram activated in

ISO mode. (M96 <program number>)

10817 EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME EXP, N12 FBFA

- Name of subroutine for G function macro call STRING POWER ON

-50 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

10818 EXTERN_INTERRUPT_NUM_ASUP EXP, N12 FBFA

- Interrupt number for ASUP start (M96) BYTE POWER ON

- -1 187/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-52

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Number of the interrupt input triggering rapid retraction to the position

programmed with G10.6 in ISO mode.

Description:

Definition of the external CNC system whose part programs are to be executed

on the SINUMERIK control in addition to SINUMERIK code (ISO_1):

1: ISO_2: System Fanuc0 milling (from software version 5.1)

2: ISO_3: System Fanuc0 turning (from P5.2)

3: External language via OEM application (from software version 6.2)

10820 EXTERN_INTERRUPT_NUM_RETRAC EXP, N12 FBFA

- Interrupt number for rapid retraction (G10.6) BYTE POWER ON

- -2 187/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

10880 MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM N01, N12 FBFA

- Definition of the control system to be adapted DWORD POWER ON

- -1 137/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

10881 MM_EXTERN_GCODE_SYSTEM N01, N12 FBFA

- ISO_3 Mode: GCodeSystem DWORD POWER ON

- -0 027/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-53

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Definition of the GCodeSystem to be actively executed in ISO_3 Mod (turning):

Value = 0 : ISO_3: Code system B

Value = 1 : ISO_3: Code system A

Value = 2 : ISO_3: Code system C

Description:

List of G commands of external NC languages which have been reconfigured by

the user.

The implemented G commands are to be taken from the current Siemens

documentation for this programming language.

The list is structured as follows:

Even address: G command to be changed

Subsequent odd address: New G command

Only G codes can be reconfigured, e.g.: G20, G71.

Description:

This MD defines how programmed values without a decimal point are evaluated:

0: Values without a decimal point are interpreted in internal units. For

example, X1000 = 1 mm (for 0.001 mm input resolution) X1000.0 = 1000 mm

1: Values without decimal point are interpreted as mm, inch or degrees. For

example, X1000 = 1000 mm X1000.0 = 1000 mm

Related to:

EXTERN_INCREMENT_SYSTEM

10882 NC_USER_EXTERN_GCODES_TAB N12 FBFA

- List of user-specific G commands of an external NC

language

STRING POWER ON

-60 --2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

10884 EXTERN_FLOATINGPOINT_PROG N12 FBFA

- Evaluation of programmed values without decimal

point

BOOLEAN POWER ON

--TRUE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-54

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data is active for external programming languages, that is if MD

18800: MM_EXTERN_LANGUAGE = 1.

This machine data specifies which incremental system is active:

0: Incremental system IS-B = 0.001 mm/degree

= 0.0001 inch

1: Incremental system IS-C = 0.0001 mm/degree

= 0.00001 inch

Related to:

EXTERN_FLOATINGPOINT_PROG

Description:

This machine data is only active when $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM = 2.

Number of digits of the tool number in the programmed T word.

From the programmed T word, the number of leading digits specified in

$MN_EXTERN_DIGITS_TOOL_NO are interpreted as the tool number.

The following digits address the offset memory.

10886 EXTERN_INCREMENT_SYSTEM N12 FBFA

- Incremental system in external language mode BOOLEAN POWER ON

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

10888 EXTERN_DIGITS_TOOL_NO N12 FBFA

- Digits for T number in ISO mode BYTE POWER ON

- -2 087/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-55

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Configuration for programming the tool change in an external programming

language:

Bit0=0:

Only active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =2: The tool number and offset

number are programmed in the T word. $MN_DIGITS_TOOLNO defines the number

of leading digits that the tool number generates.

Example:

$MN_DIGITS_TOOLNO = 2

T=1234 ; Tool number 12,

; Offset number 34

Bit0=1:

Only active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =2: Only the tool number is

programmed in the T word. Offset number = Tool number. $MN_DIGITS_TOOLNO is

irrelevant.

Example:

T=12 ; Tool number 12

; Offset number 12

Bit1=0:

Only active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =2: A leading 0 is added if the

number of digits programmed in the T word is the same as that in

$MN_EXTERN_DIGITS_TOOL_NO.

Bit1=1:

Only active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =2: If the number of digits

programmed in the T word is equal to the number of digits defined in

$MN_EXTERN_DIGITS_TOOL_NO, the programmed number is both the offset number

and the tool number

Bit2=0:

Only active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_LANGUAGE =2: ISO T offset selection only

with D (Siemens cutting edge number)

Bit2=1:

Only active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_LANGUAGE =2: ISO T offset selection only

with H ($TC_DPH[t,d])

Bit3=0:

Only active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =2: Each H number is only allowed

once in each TOA, except H=0. If bit3 1 -> 0 is set, no H number may occur

more than once in a TO unit. Otherwise an alarm will be issued at the next

restart.

10890 EXTERN_TOOLPROG_MODE N12 FBFA

- Tool change programming for external language DWORD POWER ON

--0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-56

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Bit3=1:

Only active if $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =2: Each H number is only allowed

more than once in each TOA.

Bit6=0:

Only active if MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =1: Tool length cannot be selected

under address H

Bit6=1:

Only active if MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =1: Tool length selected under

address H

Bit7=0:

Only active if MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =1: Tool length cannot be selected

under address D

Bit7=1:

Only active if MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM =1: Tool length selected under

address D.

Selection under address D or H is possible if bits 6 and 7 have been set.

Description:

The indexing position table is used to assign the axis positions in the valid

unit of measurement (mm, inches or degrees) to the indexing positions [n] on

the indexing axis. The number of indexing positions used in table 1 is defined

by the MD: INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1.

These indexing positions must contain valid values in table 1. Any indexing

positions in the table above the number specified in the machine data are

ignored. Up to 60 indexing positions (0 to 59) can be entered in the table.

Table length = 0 means that the table is not evaluated. If the length is not

equal to 0, then the table must be assigned to an axis with the MD:

INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB.

If the indexing axis is defined as a rotary axis (MD: IS_ROT_AX = "1") with

modulo 360° (MD: ROT_IS_MODULO = "1"), the machine data defines the last

indexing position after which, with a further traversing movement in the

positive direction, the indexing positions begin again at 1 .

Special cases:

Alarm 17090 "Value violates upper limit" if values over 60 are entered in

the MD: INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1.

10900 INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1 N09 T1

- Number of positions for indexing axis table 1 DWORD RESET

- - 0 0 60 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-57

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Related to:

MD: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB (axis is an indexing axis)

MD: INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1 (indexing position table 1)

MD: IS_ROT_AX (rotary axis)

MD: ROT_IS_MODULO (modulo conversion for rotary axis)

Description:

The indexing position table is used to assign the axis positions in the valid

unit of measurement (mm, inches or degrees) to the indexing positions [n] on

the indexing axis.

[n] = indexing for the entry of the indexing positions in the indexing

position table.

Range: 0 y n x 59, where 0 is the 1st indexing position and 59 corresponds to

the 60th indexing position.

Note.

Programming with the absolute indexing position (e.g. CAC) starts with

indexing position 1. This corresponds to the indexing position with

indexing n = 0 in the indexing position table.

The following should be noted when entering the indexing positions:

- Up to 60 different indexing positions can be stored in the table.

- The 1st entry in the table corresponds to indexing position 1; the nth entry

corresponds to indexing position n.

- The indexing positions must be entered in the table in ascending order

(starting with the negative to the positive traversing range) with no gaps

between the entries. Consecutive position values must not be identical.

- If the indexing axis is defined as a rotary axis (MD: IS_ROT_AX = "1") with

modulo 360° (MD: ROT_IS_MODULO = "1"), then the position values are limited

to a range of 0° x pos. < 360°.

The number of indexing positions used in the table is defined by the MD:

INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1.

Entering the value 1 in the axial machine data: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB

assigns indexing position table 1 to the current axis.

Special cases:

Alarm 17020 "illegal array index" if over 60 positions are entered in the

table.

10910 INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1 N09 T1

mm/inch,

degrees

Indexing position table 1 DOUBLE RESET

-600. --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-58

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Related to:

MD: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB (axis is an indexing axis)

MD: INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1 (no. of indexing positions used in table 1)

MD: IS_ROT_AX (rotary axis)

MD: ROT_IS_MODULO (modulo conversion for rotary axis)

Description:

The indexing position table is used to assign the axis positions in the valid

unit of measurement (mm, inches or degrees) to the indexing positions [n] on

the indexing axis. The number of indexing positions used in table 2 is defined

by the MD: INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2.

These indexing positions in table 2 must contain valid values. Any indexing

positions in the table above the number specified in the machine data are

ignored.

Up to 60 indexing positions (0 to 59) can be entered in the table.

Table length = 0 means that the table is not evaluated. If the length is not

equal to 0, the table must be assigned to an axis with the MD:

INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB.

If the indexing axis is defined as a rotary axis (MD: IS_ROT_AX = "1") with

modulo 360° (MD: ROT_IS_MODULO = "1"), the machine data defines the last

indexing position after which, with a further traversing movement in the

positive direction, the indexing positions begin again at 1.

Not relevant for tool magazines (revolvers, chain magazines)

Special cases:

Alarm 17090 "Value violates upper limit" if a value over 60 is entered in

the MD:INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2.

Related to:

MD: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB (axis is an indexing axis)

MD: INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_2 (indexing position table 2)

MD: IS_ROT_AX (rotary axis)

MD: ROT_IS_MODULO (modulo conversion for rotary axis)

10920 INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2 N09 T1

- Number of positions for indexing axis table 2 DWORD RESET

- - 0 0 60 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-59

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The indexing position table is used to assign the axis positions in the valid

unit of measurement (mm, inches or degrees) to the indexing positions [n] on

the indexing axis.

[n] = indexing for the entry of the indexing positions in the indexing

position table.

Range: 0 y n x 59, where 0 is the 1st indexing position and 59 corresponds to

the 60th indexing position.

Note:

Programming with the absolute indexing position (e.g. CAC) starts with

indexing position 1. This corresponds to the indexing position with

indexing n = 0 in the table.

The following should be noted when entering the indexing positions:

- Up to 60 different indexing positions can be stored in the table.

- The 1st entry in the table corresponds to indexing position 1; the nth entry

corresponds to indexing position n.

- The indexing positions should be entered in the table in ascending order

(starting with the negative to the positive traversing range) with no gaps

between the entries. Consecutive position values must not be identical.

- If the indexing axis is defined as a rotary axis (MD: IS_ROT_AX = "1") with

modulo 360° (MD: ROT_IS_MODULO = "1"), then the position values are limited

to a range of 0° x pos. < 360°.

The number of indexing positions used in the table is defined by the MD:

INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2.

Entering the value 1 in the axial machine data: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB

assigns indexing position table 1 to the current axis.

Special cases:

Alarm 17020 "illegal array index" if over 60 positions are entered in the

table.

Related to:

MD: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB (axis is an indexing axis)

MD: INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2 (no. of indexing positions used in table 2)

MD: IS_ROT_AX (rotary axis)

MD: ROT_IS_MODULO (modulo conversion for rotary axis)

10930 INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_2 N09 T1

mm/inch,

degrees

Indexing position table 2 DOUBLE RESET

-600. --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-60

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The number of the auxiliary functions that have been distributed to the groups

must be entered in the MD. This number only includes the customer-specific

auxiliary functions, not the predefined auxiliary functions.

Anwendungsbeispiel:

related to:

MD 22010: AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE [n] (auxiliary function type)

Description:

Execution right assigned to the program stored in directory /_N_CST_DIR :

Value 0: Siemens password

Value 1: Machine OEM password

Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service

Value 3: End user password

Value 4: Keyswitch position 3

Value 5: Keyswitch position 2

Value 6: Keyswitch position 1

Value 7: Keyswitch position 0

Machine data can only be written with values 0 and 1, and with the

corresponding password also active.

11100 AUXFU_MAXNUM_GROUP_ASSIGN N01, N07, N02 H2

- Number of auxiliary functions distributed among the

AUXFU groups

DWORD POWER ON

- - 1 1 255 7/2

802d-cu3 - 1 - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 1 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 1 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - 1 - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - 1 - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - 1 - - 2/2

11160 ACCESS_EXEC_CST N01 -

- Execution right for /_N_CST_DIR BYTE POWER ON

--7 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-61

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Execution right assigned to the programs stored in directory /_N_CMA_DIR :

Value 0: Siemens password

Value 1: Machine OEM password

Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service

Value 3: End user password

Value 4: Keyswitch position 3

Value 5: Keyswitch position 2

Value 6: Keyswitch position 1

Value 7: Keyswitch position 0

Machine data can only be written with values 0 and 1, and with the

corresponding password also active.

Description:

Execution right assigned to the programs stored in directory /_N_CUS_DIR :

Value 0: Siemens password

Value 1: Machine OEM password

Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service

Value 3: End user password

Value 4: Keyswitch position 3

Value 5: Keyswitch position 2

Value 6: Keyswitch position 1

Value 7: Keyswitch position 0

Machine data can only be written with values 0, 1 and 2, and with the

corresponding password also active.

11161 ACCESS_EXEC_CMA N01 -

- Execution right for /_N_CMA_DIR BYTE POWER ON

--7 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

11162 ACCESS_EXEC_CUS N01 -

- Execution right for /_N_CUS_DIR BYTE POWER ON

--7 --7/3

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-62

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Set write protection for cycle directory /_N_CST_DIR:

Assigned to the programs:

Value -1: Keep the value currently set

Value 0: Siemens password

Value 1: Machine OEM password

Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service

Value 3: End user password

Value 4: Keyswitch position 3

Value 5: Keyswitch position 2

Value 6: Keyswitch position 1

Value 7: Keyswitch position 0

The machine data can only be written with values 0 and 1, and with the

corresponding password also active.

Description:

Set write protection for cycle directory /_N_CMA_DIR:

Assigned to the programs:

Value -1: Keep the value currently set

Value 0: Siemens password

Value 1: Machine OEM password

Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service

Value 3: End user password

Value 4: Keyswitch position 3

Value 5: Keyswitch position 2

Value 6: Keyswitch position 1

Value 7: Keyswitch position 0

The machine data can only be written with values 0 and 1, and with the

corresponding password also active.

11165 ACCESS_WRITE_CST N01 -

- Write protection for directory /_N_CST_DIR DWORD POWER ON

---1 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

11166 ACCESS_WRITE_CMA N01 -

- Write protection for directory /_N_CMA_DIR DWORD POWER ON

---1 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-63

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Set write protection for cycle directory /_N_CUS_DIR:

Assigned to the programs:

Value -1: Keep the value currently set

Value 0: Siemens password

Value 1: Machine OEM password

Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service

Value 3: End user password

Value 4: Keyswitch position 3

Value 5: Keyswitch position 2

Value 6: Keyswitch position 1

Value 7: Keyswitch position 0

The machine data can only be written with values 0, 1 and 2, and with the

corresponding password also active.

Description:

Set write protection for definition file /_N_DEF_DIR/_N_SACCESS_DEF:

Value 0: Siemens password

Value 1: Machine OEM password

Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service

Value 3: End user password

Value 4: Keyswitch position 3

Value 5: Keyswitch position 2

Value 6: Keyswitch position 1

Value 7: Keyswitch position 0

The machine data can only be written with values 0 and 1, and with the

corresponding password also active.

11167 ACCESS_WRITE_CUS N01 -

- Write protection for directory /_N_CUS_DIR DWORD POWER ON

---1 --7/3

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

11170 ACCESS_WRITE_SACCESS N01 -

- Write protection for _N_SACCESS_DEF BYTE POWER ON

--7 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-64

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Set write protection for definition file /_N_DEF_DIR/_N_SACCESS_DEF:

Value 0: Siemens password

Value 1: Machine OEM password

Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service

Value 3: End user password

Value 4: Keyswitch position 3

Value 5: Keyswitch position 2

Value 6: Keyswitch position 1

Value 7: Keyswitch position 0

The machine data can only be written with values 0 and 1, and with the

corresponding password also active.

Description:

Set write protection for definition file /_N_DEF_DIR/_N_UACCESS_DEF:

Value 0: Siemens password

Value 1: Machine OEM password

Value 2: Password of startup engineer, service

Value 3: End user password

Value 4: Keyswitch position 3

Value 5: Keyswitch position 2

Value 6: Keyswitch position 1

Value 7: Keyswitch position 0

The machine data can only be written with values 0, 1 and 2, and with the

corresponding password also active.

11171 ACCESS_WRITE_MACCESS N01 -

- Write protection for _N_MACCESS_DEF BYTE POWER ON

--7 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

11172 ACCESS_WRITE_UACCESS N01 -

- Write protection for _N_UACCESS_DEF BYTE POWER ON

--7 --7/3

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-65

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Selection of differential MD upload:

Bit0(LSB)Effectiveness of the differential upload for TEA files (machine data

files)

0: All data are output

1: only the values changed as compared to the compiled MD are output

Bit1 Effectiveness of the differential upload for INI files

0: All data are output

1: only the values changed as compared to the compiled MD are output

Bit2 change of a field element

0: complete arrays are output

1: only changed field elements of an array are output

Bit3 R parameter (for INI files only)

0: All R parameters are output

1: only R parameters unequal to '0' are output

Bit4 frames (for INI files only)

0: All frames are output

1: only frames are output which are not zero frames.

Bit5 tool data (cutting edge parameter) (for INI files only)

0: All tool data are output

1: only tool data unequal to '0' are output.

Description:

BUS_SDB_NUMBER [0] = 0

Digital inputs and outputs via I/O modules (PP modules)

The assignment is provided via DIL switches. Max. 3 modules with the addresses

9, 8 and 7 are possible.

11210 UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY N01, N05 IAD

- MD backup of changed MD only BYTE SOFORT

--0xFF--7/3

802d-cu3 - 0x0F - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 0x0F - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 0x0F - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - 0x0F - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - 0x0F - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - 0x0F - - 2/2

11240 PROFIBUS_SDB_NUMBER N01, N05 K4,FBU

- SDB1000 number DWORD POWER ON

-4-1 -172/2

802d-cu3 - 0,-1,0 - - -/-

802d-ng2 - 0,-1,0 - - -/-

802d-ng3 - 0,-1,0 - - -/-

802d-tm1 - 0,-1,0 - - -/-

802d-tm2 - 0,-1,0 - - -/-

802d-tm3 - 0,-1,0 - - -/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-66

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

PROFIBUS_SDB_NUMBER [2] = X

Number of the system module you are using for configuring the hardware I/Os.

SINUMERIK 802D sl offers the following options to choose from:

0: 2 SINAMICS drives with SLM

1: 3 SINAMICS drives with SLM

2: 4 SINAMICS drives with SLM

3: 5 SINAMICS drives with SLM

4: 3 SINAMICS drives with ALM

5: 4 SINAMICS drives with ALM

6: 5 SINAMICS drives with ALM

Note:

With the SDB reloaded from the toolbox, PROFIBUS_SDB_NUMBER[2] = 0 must be

set. This activates the module.

The machine data PROFIBUS_SDB_NUMBER[1] and PROFIBUS_SDB_NUMBER[3] are

reserved internally for Siemens.

Description:

With MD11240 > 0, SDBs are loaded directly from the directory:

MD11241=0: /siemens/sinumerik/sdb/...

MD11241=1: /addon/sinumerik/sdb/...

MD11241=2: /oem/sinumerik/sdb/...

MD11241=3: /user/sinumerik/sdb/...

Description:

Handling of PROFIBUS when shutting down NCK (NCK reset)

Value 0:

The bus is shut down directly from cyclic operation, without 'prewarning'

Value 1:

When shutting down NCK, the PROFIBUS is changed to the CLEAR state for at

least 20 cycles. Then, it is shut down. If this is not possible on the

hardware side, the procedure described for value 2 is used instead.

11241 PROFIBUS_SDB_SELECT N01, N05 -

- SDB source selection DWORD POWER ON

- -0 032/2

11250 PROFIBUS_SHUTDOWN_TYPE EXP, N01 G3,FBU

- Profibus shutdown handling BYTE POWER ON

- -0 027/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-67

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Value 2:

When shutting down NCK, the PROFIBUS is changed to a state where all drives

are sent a zero word as control word1 and control word2 (pseudoclear) for

at least 20 cycles. The bus itself remains in the Operate status.

Description:

Activation of the function 'Memory for initialization values of

NC language elements'

Bit Hex. Meaning

value

-------------------------------

0: (LSB) 0x1 default values GUD

Meaning of the individual bits:

Bit 0 = 0:

The default values stated for the definition are not stored

Bit 0 = 1:

The default values stated for the definition are stored persistently. The

memory reserved via MD $MN_MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM is used for this purpose.

The memory reserved via $MN_MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM should be increased by the size

required for default values.

If this size cannot be determined, the memory should be doubled and

adaptations should be made later if required.

The stored default values can be restored, provided that the corresponding

programming (REDEF) has been performed.

11270 DEFAULT_VALUES_MEM_MASK N01 PGA

- Activation of default values for NC language elementsDWORD POWER ON

--0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - 1 - - -/-

802d-ng3 - 1 - - -/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1

11310 HANDWH_REVERSE N09 H1

- Threshold for change in handwheel direction BYTE POWER ON

--2 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-68

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

0:No immediate movement in the opposite direction

> 0:Immediate movement in the opposite direction if the handwheel is turned in

the opposite direction by at least the number of pulses indicated

Description:

This adapts the connected handwheels to the control system.

The number of pulses generated by the handwheel for each handwheel detent

position is entered. The handwheel pulse weighting may be defined for each

connected handwheel (1 to 2) separately.

When adapted to the control, each handwheel detent position has the same

effect as one press of the traverse key in incremental jogging mode.

If a negative value is entered, the handwheel is active in the reverse

direction.

related to:

MD: JOG_INCR_WEIGHT (weighting of an increment of a machine axis for

INC/manual).

Description:

0: The settings from the handwheel are velocity settings. When the handwheel is

stationary, braking is realized along the shortest path.

1: The settings from the handwheel are distance settings. No pulses are lost.

Limiting the velocity to the maximum permissible value can cause the axes to

overtravel.

2: Effect as for value=0, however, with a longer braking travel when the

handwheel is stationary.

3: Effect as for value=1, however, with a longer braking travel when the

11320 HANDWH_IMP_PER_LATCH N09 H1

- Handwheel pulses per detent position [handwheel

index]:

DOUBLE POWER ON

-61. --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

11346 HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE N01 FBMA

- Handwheel path or velocity values BYTE POWER ON

- -1 037/2

802d-cu3 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - 0 - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-69

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

handwheel is stationary.

related to:

Description:

Cycle name for replacement routine of the T function.

If a D function is programmed in a part program block, then, depending on

machine data $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME, $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE and

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR, the subprogram defined in D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is

called.

The programmed D number can be polled in the cycle via system variable $C_D /

$C_D_PROG.

$MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is only active in Siemens mode (G290).

No more than one M/T/D function replacement can be active per part program

line.

A modal subprogram call must not be programmed in the block with the D

function replacement. Furthermore, neither subprogram return nor part program

end are allowed.

In the event of a conflict alarm 14016 is output.

Description:

The message frame type:

102: must be specified for each drive. Standard message frame for SINAMICS

actual-value assignment

11717 D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME EXP, N12, N07 -

- Subroutine name for D function replacement STRING POWER ON

-- --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

13060 DRIVE_TELEGRAM_TYPE N04, N10 G2

- Default message frame type for drives connected to

PROFIBUS DP

DWORD POWER ON

-31102 --7/2

802d-cu3 - 116,102 - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 116,102 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 116,102 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - 116,102 - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - 116,102 - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - 116,102 - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-70

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

103: SINAMICS- Spindle with second direct measuring system

Index [n] of the machine data has the following code: [drive index]:

n=0: Drive number 1

n=1: Drive number 2, etc.

Description:

Bit-coded mask for skipping the scope of available functions for PROFIBUS axes

expected from NCK.

Significance of set bits:

Bit 0:Deactivation of axial drive alarm display

Bit 1:Deactivation of 611U description file intermediate storage in the NCK

Bit 2:Deactivation of axial encoder driver parameter accesses

Bit 3:Deactivation of axial output driver parameter accesses

Bit 4:reserved (previously activation of DSC bits)

Bit 5:Deactivation of the 611U-specific drive parking (STW2.7/STA2.7)

Bit 6:Deactivation of the 611U-specific travel to fixed stop (STW2.8/STA2.8)

Bit 7:Deactivation of the 611U-specific motor switching int. (STW2.9 to 2.11)

Bit 8:Deactivation of the 611U-specific ramp block (STW1.11+13)

Bit 9:Deactivation of the 611U-specific function generator bits

(STW1.8/STA1.13)

Bit 10:Deactivation of the control of the holding brake (STW1.12 / STA2.5)

Bit 11:Deactivation of the effect of OFF2/OFF3 on "driveReady" (DB31, ...

DBX93.5)

Bit 14:Selection of non-cyclical communication 0 = DPT 1 = DPV1

Bit 15: Deactivation of the consistency check of the PROFIBUS telegram

configuration

The configuration of bits 4-8 which are new for SW 6.3 and higher allows an

adaptation of certain PROFIdrive profiles of non-standardized PROFIBUS control

or status bits of SIMODRIVE 611 universal. Bits 4 to 8 may have a different

significance in the default setting of external drives.

13070 DRIVE_FUNCTION_MASK N04, N10 G2

- DP functions used DWORD POWER ON

-310 --7/2

802d-cu3 - 2,0 - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 2,0 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 2,0 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - 2,0 - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - 2,0 - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - 2,0 - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-71

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

MD is relevant for drives at the PROFIBUS:

Drive type:

0: No drive or drive type unknown (default),

software-internally treated as:

1:FDD drive (SRM: Synchronous rotary drive)

2:MSD drive (ARM: Asynchronous rotary drive)

3:Linear drive

4:Analog drive (no automatic entry)

Note:

In general, the drive type is entered automatically with Siemens drives as

soon as the drives start operating.

With non-Siemens drives (at least with linear drives) the value must be

entered manually if automatic drive recognition is not possible.

Description:

Logical I/O address of a SINAMICS-CU (Control Unit) on the PROFIBUS-DP.

The cyclic DP communication with SINAMICS-CU is activated by taking over the

associated slot address from the STEP7 project. The onboard I/Os cannot be

accessed until after configuration.

13080 DRIVE_TYPE_DP EXP G2

- Drive type Profibus BYTE POWER ON

- 310 047/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

13120 CONTROL_UNIT_LOGIC_ADDRESS N04, N10 -

- Logical address of SINAMICS CU DWORD POWER ON

- 7 0 0 8191 7/2

802d-cu3 - 6500,0 - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - 6500,0 - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - 6500,0 - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - 6500,0 - 1/1

802d-tm2 - 6500,0 - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - 6500,0 - - 1/1

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-72

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Relevant to SINAMICS diagnostics:

Mask for displaying the SINAMICS DOS fault and warning buffers

Bit set:Alarms in this DO group are output

Bit not set:Alarms in this DO group are not output

BitHex. Meaning

value

==============================================================================

======

0: 0x1 Output faults of the Control Units

1: 0x2 Reserved

2: 0x4 Output faults of the Drive Controls

3: 0x8 Output faults of the Line Modules

4: 0x10 Output faults of the Terminal Boards

5: 0x20 Output faults of the Terminal Modules

8: 0x100 Output warnings of the Control Units

9: 0x200 Output warnings of the Communication Objects

10:0x400 Output warnings of the Drive Controls

11:0x800 Output warnings of the Line Modules

12:0x1000 Ouptut warnings of the Terminal Boards

13:0x2000 Output warnings of the Terminal Modules

Description:

0: non-deflected status 0 Vdeflected status24 V

1: non-deflected status24 Vdeflected status 0 V

13150 SINAMICS_ALARM_MASK N04, N05 -

- Activate fault and warning buffer output for Sinamics DWORD SOFORT

--0x0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1

13200 MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE N10, N09 M5

- Switching characteristics of probe BOOLEAN POWER ON

-2FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-73

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

For probes with e.g. radio transmission, the probe deflection can be detected

in the NC only with delay.

With this MD, the transmission link delay between the probe deflection and its

detection is set in the control.

The measured value is corrected internally by the control by the distance that

corresponds to the traversing motion during this time before measuring

(modeling).

It is practicable to set values only up to a maximum of 15 position controller

cycles.

Anyhow, the modeling could not work with the expected accuracy with values

greater than that. In this case, the input value is therefore limited

internally by the software to 15 position controller cycles (without any

further feedback).

Description:

User machine data, evaluation in PLC (displayed as whole number, decimal)

13220 MEAS_PROBE_DELAY_TIME N10, N09 FBA/IAD

s Delay time between probe deflection and recognition DOUBLE POWER ON

- 2 0.0 0 0.1 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

14510 USER_DATA_INT N03 A2,P3

- User data (INT) DWORD POWER ON

- 256 0 -32768 32767 7/2

802d-cu3 32 - - - 7/3

802d-ng2 32 - - - 7/3

802d-ng3 32 - - - 7/3

802d-tm1 32 - - - 7/3

802d-tm2 32 - - - 7/3

802d-tm3 32 - - - 7/3

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-74

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

User machine data, evaluation in PLC (display in HEX format) 1)

Description:

User machine data, evaluation in PLC (floating point format, restricted to

32Bit IEEE format in PLC)

Description:

User data is stored in the NCK-PLC interface and can be evaluated by the PLC

basic system (currently for software PLC 2xx).

14512 USER_DATA_HEX N03 A2,P3

- User data (HEX) DWORD POWER ON

- 256 0 0 0x0FF 7/2

802d-cu3 32 - - - 7/3

802d-ng2 32 - - - 7/3

802d-ng3 32 - - - 7/3

802d-tm1 32 - - - 7/3

802d-tm2 32 - - - 7/3

802d-tm3 32 - - - 7/3

14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT N03 A2,P3

- User data (FLOAT) DOUBLE POWER ON

- 32 0.0 -3.40e38 3.40e38 7/2

802d-cu3 8 - - - 7/3

802d-ng2 8 - - - 7/3

802d-ng3 8 - - - 7/3

802d-tm1 8 - - - 7/3

802d-tm2 8 - - - 7/3

802d-tm3 8 - - - 7/3

14516 USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM N03 A2,P3

- User data (HEX) BYTE POWER ON

-640 --0/0

802d-cu3 64 - - - 7/3

802d-ng2 64 - - - 7/3

802d-ng3 64 - - - 7/3

802d-tm1 64 - - - 7/3

802d-tm2 64 - - - 7/3

802d-tm3 64 - - - 7/3

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-75

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Name of the user program called on the basis of a substitution configured by

$MA_AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK.

The user program is called with the path configured by $MN_LANG_SUB_PATH.

Description:

Path with which the user program set by $MN_LANG_SUB_NAME is called on the

basis of a substitution configured by $MA_AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK:

0: /_N_CMA_DIR (default)

1: /_N_CUS_DIR

2: /_N_CST_DIR

Description:

A version information freely available to the user

(is indicated in the version screen)

15700 LANG_SUB_NAME N01 -

- Name for substitution subroutine STRING POWER ON

-- --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

15702 LANG_SUB_PATH N01 -

- Call path for substitution subroutine BYTE POWER ON

- -0 027/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

17400 OEM_GLOBAL_INFO A01, A11 -

- OEM version information STRING POWER ON

-5 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-76

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

HMI display support. This data enables individual data to be explicitly taken

into account or not taken into account in the OPI variables (block C/S)

toolCounter, toolCounterC, toolCounterM.

Bit no. Bit value HEX Meaning

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 0 Changes to the value of the tool status ($TC_TP8)

are not taken into account in toolCounterC

1 'H1' Changes to the value of the tool status ($TC_TP8)

are taken into account in toolCounterC

1 0 Changes to the remaining number of tools ($TC_MOP4)

are not taken into account in toolCounterC

1 'H2' Changes to the remaining number of tools ($TC_MOP4)

are taken into account in toolCounterC

2 0 Changes to the value of the tool data

are not taken into account in the tool data update

service

1 'H4' Changes to the value of the tool data

are taken into account in the tool data update

service

3 0 Changes to the value of the magazine data

are not taken into account in the tool data update

service

1 'H8' Changes to the value of the magazine data

are taken into account in the tool data update

service.

17530 TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER EXP, N01 FBW

- Mark tool data change for HMI DWORD POWER ON

--0 00xF7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

18030 HW_SERIAL_NUMBER N05 -

- Hardware series number STRING POWER ON

READ

-1 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/-

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/-

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/-

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/-

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/-

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-77

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

During power on of the control, a unique hardware serial number is stored in

this MD:

- For Powerline series modules this is the serial number of the NCU module

- For Solutionline series modules this is the serial number of the CF card, or

the unique number of the MCI module in the case of PC-based systems

This data cannot be written.

Description:

Version identifiers of the system software

The identifiers of the PCMCIA card (assigned by the configuration management)

and the 'system_date_time' from the NCK are stored in this MD during control

power on. A unique assignment can always be made with this data from the MD

block (startup file or INITIAL_INI) to a software release.

Description:

Output of the available memory in the Dual Port RAM (Bytes).

The data cannot be written.

18040 VERSION_INFO N05 IAD

- Version and possibly data of the PCMCIA card, not

FM-NC

STRING POWER ON

READ

18070 INFO_FREE_MEM_DPR EXP, N01, N02,

N05

- Display data of free memory in DUAL PORT RAM DWORD POWER ON

READ

--0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

18074 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TRACE_SZ N02, N09 /FBW/,

"Description of

Functions, Tool

Management"

- Max. size of the tool management diagnostic ring

buffers

DWORD POWER ON

- 2 25 4 500 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-78

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The number of entries in the tool management diagnostic ring buffers.

Index 0 = IPO trace buffer size.

Index 1 = Prep trace buffer size.

There are separate IPO trace buffers in each channel, and a Prep trace buffer

in channel 1 only.

The buffers are allocated only if bit 0 (0x0001) is ON at warm start, in both

MD 18080: MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and per-channel MD 20310:

TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.

Trace data is written to the buffers when bit 13 (0x2000) is ON in per-channel

MD 20310: TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.

Description:

Max. number of definable tool holders per TO range.

The address extension e of commands Te=t, Me=6 (*) is the number of the tool

holder.

t=T number/tool name - depending on the function activated in the NCK.

(*) if: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1 and $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE=6 applies

Normally the tool holder of milling machines is a spindle.

Also see $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND.

For turning machines the tool holder normally is not a spindle axis.

Also see $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER.

In this case it should reasonably apply that $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS is larger

or equal to $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND/$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER.

If bit 0 = 1 in $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK is

set (=magazine management (TOOLMAN))

it will apply for reasonable values that $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS is smaller or

equal to $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE.

A maximum of $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS intermediate memory locations of the type

18075 MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS N02, N09 /FBW/,

"Description of

Functions, Tool

Management"

- Max. number of tool holders per TOA DWORD POWER ON

- - 32 1 SLMDMAXMAGL

OCATIONSWITH

DISTANCE

7/2

802d-cu3 - 6 - 6 -1/-

802d-ng2 - 6 - 6 -1/-

802d-ng3 - 6 - 6 -1/-

802d-tm1 - 4 - 4 -1/-

802d-tm2 - 6 - 6 -1/-

802d-tm3 - 6 - 6 -1/-

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-79

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

spindle

($TC_MPP1[9998,x]=2) can then be defined.

Example: TOOLMAN inactive

$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND shall be =3, $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS shall be =3.

Then T1=t, T2=t, T3=t, T=t can be programmed.

Example: TOOLMAN active, milling machine with Me=6 as tool change command

$MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS shall be = 14, $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE=20,

10 channels shall be active, all channels have TOOLMAN active and have the

same tool and magazine data

(=one TO range for all channels). $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND=1,.....10 for the

channels.

Then up to 14 locations of the kind 'tool holder'/'spindle' can be defined in

the intermediate magazine memory.

Additional 6 grippers or others can be defined.

These 20 locations max. can be linked to magazines.

In the channels T1=t, .... T14=t and Tt, or M1=6,....M14=6 and M6 can be

programmed.

Description:

This machine data is reasonable, if the magazine management function, TOOLMAN,

is active

- See $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK; for each bit 0 =

Max. number of magazine locations (spindles, load locations,...) per TOA, that

can

have a remote connection to a magazine, defined by $TC_MDPx[n,m].

Example: TOOLMAN shall be active: $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE shall be = 5

and $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC = 2.

Two TO units shall be defined with three tool holders/spindles and two load

locations each.

Furthermore, two grippers each shall be defined in each TO unit.

This means that a total of 14 locations shall be defined in the intermediate

memory magazine/load magazine for the distances and assignments.

18076 MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE N02, N09 /FBW/,

"Description of

Functions, Tool

Management"

- Max. number of magazine locations per TOA with

remote connection

DWORD POWER ON

- - 32 1 SLMDMAXMAGL

OCATIONSWITH

DISTANCE

7/2

802d-cu3 - 1 - 1 -1/-

802d-ng2 - 1 - 1 -1/-

802d-ng3 - 1 - 1 -1/-

802d-tm1 - 1 - 1 -1/-

802d-tm2 - 1 - 1 -1/-

802d-tm3 - 1 - 1 -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-80

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

4 magazines shall be defined for TO unit 1, 6 magazines for TO unit 2.

With the value set to $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE = 5 each tool holder and

each load location

of the two TO units with up to two magazines ($MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC =

2) per remote relationship

can be connected; (see $TC_MDP1 and $TC_MDP2) and for each tool holder max.

two more grippers

($MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC = 2) can be assigned; (see $TC_MLSR).

One tool holder / one spindle location can subsequently have two tables - one

distance table for magazines and

one assignment table for grippers and similar locations.

Description:

This machine data will only be active, if the magazine management, TOOLMAN

function is active.

- See $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.

Two sizes are defined with this magazine data:

1.) Max. number of magazines in the distance table of a magazine location

(spindle, load location, ...)

2.) Max. number of locations (gripper, ...) in the connection table of a

spindle/tool holder location.

Example: $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC shall be = 3.

Two TO units shall be defined with two tool holder/spindles each and one load

location each.

Furthermore four grippers shall be defined in each TO unit.

4 magazines shall be defined for TO unit 1; 6 magazines shall be defined for

TO unit 2.

Then, each tool holder can define max. three distances for the magazines (see

$TC_MDP2)

and additionally a max. of three relationships to the grippers ($TC_MLSR).

18077 MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC N02, N09 /FBW/,

"Description of

Functions, Tool

Management"

- Max. no. of magazines in the distance table of a

magazine loc.

DWORD POWER ON

- - SLMDMAXLINKEDM

AGAZINES

0SLMDMAXLINKE

DMAGAZINES

7/2

802d-cu3 - 0 - 0 -1/-

802d-ng2 - 0 - 0 -1/-

802d-ng3 - 0 - 0 -1/-

802d-tm1 - 0 - 0 -1/-

802d-tm2 - 0 - 0 -1/-

802d-tm3 - 0 - 0 -1/-

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-81

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The machine data only has effect if the function 'tool magazine management',

TMMG, is activated - see $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK,

$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.

The maximum number of hierarchies for magazine location types.

In variable $TC_MPTH[n,m], the allowed range of n is from 0 to

($MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES - 1).

(The maximum of index m is given by $MN_MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES.)

Value = 0 means that the function 'magazine location type hierchies' is not

available.

Description:

The machine data only has effect if the function 'tool magazine management',

TMMG, is activated - see $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK,

$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK - and if $MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES is greater

than zero.

The maximum number of entries in a magazine location type hierarchy.

In variable $TC_MPTH[n,m], the allowed range of m is from 0 to

($MN_MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES - 1).

(The maximum of index n is given by $MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES.)

18078 MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES N02, N09 /FBW/,

"Description of

Functions, Tool

Management"

- The maximum number of hierarchies for magazine

location types

DWORD POWER ON

- - 8 0 32 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

18079 MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES N02, N09 /FBW/,

"Description of

Functions, Tool

Management"

- The max. number of entries in a mag. location type

hierarchy.

DWORD POWER ON

- - 8 1 32 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-82

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Step-by-step memory reservation for the tool management (TOOLMAN)

Bit-coded activation data. That is the memory for the TOOLMAN can be activated

in various versions.

The data is evaluated only during startup of the software.

The TOOLMAN data are battery-backed.

The TOOLMAN-specific memory reservation that is defined in detail by the

machine data

MD 18086: $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION

MD 18084: $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE

MD 18096: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM

MD 18094: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM

MD 18098: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM

MD 18092: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM

MD 18090: $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM

is made as a function of this data.

(Further TOOLMAN-specific memory is determined by other machine data, see

below.)

Value = 0 ->None of the above memory is reserved: That is TOOLMAN is not

available, only the basic functionality can be programmed.

Bit no.HexaMeaning when bit set

value

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 (LSB)0x1Tool management data (TMMG) are made available; the memory-reserving

MDs must be set correspondingly ($MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION,

$MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE). The machine data $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL,

$MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA, which make the memory available for the basic

functionality with and without TOOLMAN, must be set correspondingly. The

TOOLMAN-specific memory is added to the memory determined by $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL.

1 0x2 Monitoring data (TMMO) are made available; the memory-reserving MDs

must be set correspondingly ($MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION,

$MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE). The memory for the monitoring data is added to the

cutting edges (-> $MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA ).

2 0x4 OEM, CC data (individually determined by $MN_MM_NUM_CC_...) are made

available, the memory-reserving MDs must be set correspondingly.

18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK N02, N09 FBW

- Step-by-step memory reservation for tool

management (SRAM)

DWORD POWER ON

- - 0x0 0 0xFFFF 7/1

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-83

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

3 0x8 Memory reserved for consider adjacent location

4 0x10 Memory and function release for the PI service _N_TSEARC = 'Complex

search for tools in magazines'. Depending on the function characteristic, the

function requires memory of the order of 10KB.

5 0x20 Reserve memory and function release for wear monitoring

6 0x40 The classification of the magazine in wear groups is released

7 0x80 Reserve memory for the adapter of the magazine locations according to

the information in MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER

8 0x100 Reserve memory for sum offsets and/or setup offsets according to the

information in MM_NUM_SUMCORR, MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR

9 0x200 Value 1 = Tools in a revolver are handled in OPI variable blocks so

that they are not 'shown' on toolholder locations, but always in the revolver

location. That means that, in particular, tools in a revolver no longer leave

their revolver locations when there is a tool change (as far as the display is

concerned).

Value 0 = Default behavior; Tools in a revolver are 'displayed' on the OPI

according to their actual location (as far as the data is concerned).

Example 1:

MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 1 -> Memory is made available for tool management

data

(TMMG).

MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 2 -> Memory is made available for monitoring data

(TMMO).

MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 3 -> Memory is made available for TMMG and TMMO.

MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 4 -> Memory available for OEM/CC data

MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 9 -> Memory available for TMMG and

consider adjacent location

MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 17 -> Memory is made available for TMMG data

and the PI service _N_TSEARC can be used

(decimal 17 = 0x11 = bits 0 and 4)

Example 2:

The complete TOA area has 20 tools and 60 cutting edges. All other above-

mentioned memory-reserving MDs =0. The TOOLMAN is not active.

Bit 0 (LSB) is now assigned.

The battery-backed memory is deleted after a renewed start of the software

because now additional memory has been reserved for the TOOLMAN. Additional

memory is reserved for each of the 20 tools.

References:

/FBW/, "Description of Functions, Tool Management"

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-84

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Number of magazines which the NCK can manage.

Buffered user memory is used.

The MDs for TOOLMAN MD 20310: TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, MD 18080:

MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and the optional TOOLMAN $ON_TECHNO_FUNCTION_MASK must

be set.

Irrelevant:

MD is irrelevant if TOOLMAN is not in use.

Special cases:

Only tool management version 2:

Value = 0 -> TOOLMAN version 2 cannot be activated because no memory area

has been set up for the data.

The battery-backed data are lost if this machine data is altered!

Related to:

MD 18080: MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

(Mask for reserving memory for TOOLMAN)

MD 20310: TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

(Activation of different versions of tool management)

$ON_TECHNO_FUNCTION_MASK

References:

/FBW/, "Description of Functions, Tool Management"

18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE N02, N09 FBW

- Number of magazines the NCK can manage (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON

- - 3 0 32 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION N02, N09 FBW

- Number of magazine locations the NCK can manage

(SRAM)

DWORD POWER ON

- - 30 0 600 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-85

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Number of magazine locations which the NCK can manage.

Buffered user memory is used.

The MDs for TOOLMAN MD 20310: TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, MD 18080:

MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and the optional TOOLMAN $ON_TECHNO_FUNCTION_MASK must

be set.

Irrelevant:

MD is irrelevant if TOOLMAN is not in use.

Special cases:

Only tool management version 2:

Value = 0 -> tool management version 2 cannot be activated because no

memory area has been set up for the data.

The battey-backed data are lost if this machine data is altered!

Related to:

MD 18080: MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

(Mask for reserving memory for TOOLMAN)

MD 20310: TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

(Activation of different versions of tool management)

$ON_TECHNO_FUNCTION_MASK

References:

/FBW/, "Description of Functions, Tool Management"

Description:

Only if MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0=1 (0x1) and bit 2=1 (0x4), is

set for TMMG (and option is set):

Number of magazine data (format IN_Int.) which are created and can be

evaluated by compile cycles.

See also:

MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM, MM_NUM_MAGAZINE

Buffered user memory is used.

18091 MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM N02, N09 -

- Type of OEM magazine data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON

- 103 162/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-87

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Only if MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0=1 (0x1) and bit 2=1 (0x4), is

set for TMMG (and option is set):

Number of magazine location data (format IN_int.) which are created for the

memory area and can be evaluated by compile cycles.

Buffered user memory is used.

Irrelevant:

MD is irrelevant if TOOLMAN is not activated

Warning:

The battery-backed data are lost if this machine data is altered!

Related to:

MD 18080: MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

(Mask for reserving memory for TOOLMAN)

MD 18086: MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION

References:

/FBW/, "Description of Functions, Tool Management"

Description:

Only when MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0=1 (0x1) and bit 2=1 (0x4), is

set for TMMG (and option is set):

18092 MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM N02, N09 FBW

- Number of OEM magazine location data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 10 2/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

18093 MM_TYPE_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM N02, N09 -

- Type of OEM magazine location data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON

- 103 162/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-88

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Individual types can be assigned to the parameters in this way. The array

index n can accept values from 0 to the value of MD 18090: MM_NUM_CC_MAGA-

ZINE_PARAM.

The possible values of the MD = 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 represent the NC language

types

1 BOOL,

2 CHAR,

3 INT,

4 REAL and

6 AXIS

The value 5, type STRING, is here explicitly not possible. The value 5 is

treated like 2. The type FRAME cannot be defined here.

Example:

MD 18090: MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM=1

MD 18091: MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM=2

"A" can then be programmed for the parameter $TC_MPPC1.

Battery-backed working memory is used. A value change can - but need not -

lead to reconfiguration of the battery-backed memory.

Description:

Only when MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 2=1 (0x4), is set:

User or OEM data in the tool management.

Individual types can be assigned to the parameters in this way. The array

index n can accept values from 0 to the value of MD 18094:

MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM.

The possible values of the MD = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 represent the NC language

types

1 BOOL,

2 CHAR,

3 INT,

4 REAL,

5 STRING and

6 AXIS.

The type FRAME cannot be defined here. The type STRING can be up to 31

characters long.

Example:

MD 18094: MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM=1

MD 18095: MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM=5

"UserCuttingEdge" can then be programmed for parameter $TC_TPC1.

Battery-backed working memory is used. A value change can - need not - lead to

reconfiguration of the battery-backed memory.

18095 MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM N02, N09 -

- Type of OEM tool data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON

- 104 162/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-89

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Only when MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 2=1 (0x4), is set:

User or OEM data in the tools.

Type of the cutting-edge-specific user data configured via

MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM. Only the default setting may be used.

Individual types can be assigned to the parameters in this way. The array

index n can accept values from 0 to the value of MD 18096:

MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM.

The possible values of the MD = 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 represent the NC language

types

1 BOOL,

2 CHAR,

3 INT,

4 REAL and

6 AXIS.

The type FRAME cannot be defined here. (5 STRING is not explicitly possible

here; the value 5 is treated like value 2).

Example:

MD 18096: MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM=1

MD 18097: MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM=2

"A" can then be programmed for parameter $TC_DPC1

Battery-backed working memory is used. A value change can - but need not -

lead to reconfiguration of the battery-backed memory.

18097 MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM N02, N09 -

- Type of OEM data per cutting edge (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON

- 104 162/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

18099 MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM N02, N09 FBW

- Type of OEM monitor data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON

- 103 162/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-90

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Individual types can be assigned to the parameters in this way. The array

index n can accept values from 0 to the value of MD 18098: MM_NUM_CC_MON_PA-

RAM

Possible values of the MD = 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 represent the NC language types

1 BOOL,

2 CHAR,

3 INT,

4 REAL and

6 AXIS.

The FRAME type cannot be defined here.

(5 STRING is not possible explicitly here; the value 5 is treated like value

2).

Example:

MD 18098: MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM=1

MD 18099: MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM=2

"A" can then be programmed for the parameter $TC_MOPC1

A battery-backed working memory is used. A value change can - but need not -

lead to reconfiguration of the battery-backed memory.

Description:

This MD activates the 'flat D number management'.

The type of D programming can be determined by individual values:

- direct or

- indirect programming.

The default value is zero. This means that the NCK manages the T and D

numbers.

The NCK only accepts a value > 0 if bit 0 is not set in MD

$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK. That means the tool managment function cannot be

active simultaneously.

Value: Meaning

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-----

0: No 'flat D number management' active

1: D numbers are programmed directly and absolutely

2: D numbers are programmed indirectly and relatively.

That means the programmed D number is the index to a table in the VDI. The

PLC writes the absolute D number in this table. The NCK reads this number

and selects the corresponding offset.

18102 MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE N02, N09 W1

- Type of D No. programming (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON

- -0 017/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-91

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

The NCK and PLC are synchronized while doing so. The NCK may have to wait

until the PLC has made the D number(s) available.

The PLC receives the trigger for this by evaluating the T no.

The NC block containing the change command triggers the synchronization and

the waiting for the D numbers.

3 As 2, with simulation of the D numbers by the PLC. Only for testing the NCK

functionality.

In this case, the D numbers are placed by the NCK itself. They can be

assigned via the R parameters R1,...R9. In which case the value of R1 is

mapped onto D1 etc.

Activation (value changed from 0 to > 0) and deactivation (value changed

from > 0 to 0) reconfigure the battery-backed memory, that is delete the

data!

Description:

Defines the number of user variables for NCK global user data (GUD).

Approximately 80 bytes of memory per variable are reserved in the SRAM for the

names of the variables. The additional memory required for the value of the

variable depends on the data type of the variable. The number of available NCK

global user data is exhausted on reaching the limit value set in

MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK or MD 18150: MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM (memory space for user

variables).

Buffered user memory is used.

Special cases:

The battery-backed data are lost if this machine data is altered.

Related to:

MD 18150: MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM

(Memory space for user variables)

18120 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK N02 S7

- Number of global user variable names (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON

- - 50 0 32000 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-92

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Defines the number of user variable names for channel-specific global user

data (GUD). Approximately 80 bytes of memory are reserved in the SRAM for each

variable name. The additional memory required for the value of the variable is

equal to the size of the data type of the variable multiplied by the number of

channels. This means that each channel has its own memory available for the

variable values. The number of available channel-specific global user data is

exhausted on reaching the limit value set in MD 18130: MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN

or MD 18150: MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM (memory space for user variables).

The name created with the DEF statement is valid for all channels.

The memory requirement for the variable value is equal to the size of the data

type multiplied by the number of channels.

Buffered user memory is used.

Special cases:

The battery-backed data are lost if this machine data is altered.

Related to:

MD 18150: MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM

(Memory space for user variables)

Description:

The specified value reserves memory space for the variable values of the

global user data (GUD). The dimensioning of the memory depends to a large

extent on the data types used for the variables.

18130 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN N02 S7

- Number of channel-specific user variable names

(SRAM)

DWORD POWER ON

- - 150 0 32000 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

18150 MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM N02 S7

- Memory location for global user variable values

(SRAM)

DWORD POWER ON

- - 32 0 32000 7/2

802d-cu3 - 48 - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 48 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 48 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-93

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Overview of the memory requirements of the data types:

Data type Memory requirement

REAL 8 bytes

INT 4 bytes

BOOL 1 byte

CHAR 1 byte

STRING 1 byte per character, 100 characters permitted per string

AXIS 4 bytes

FRAME up to 1KB depending on control model

The total memory required by a channel or axis-specific global user variable

is the memory requirement of the variables multiplied by the number of

channels or axes. The number of global user variables available is given when

the limit defined in the MD: MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_xxxx or MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM is

reached.

Buffered user memory is used.

Special cases:

The battery-backed data are lost if this machine data is altered!

Relating to:

MD 18118: MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES:

(Number of GUD blocks)

MD 18120: MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK

(Number of global user variables)

MD 18130: MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN

(Number of channel-specific user variables)

Description:

This machine data defines how many blocks are created for the protection zones

available in the NCK.

Buffered memory is used.

Special cases:

The battery-backed data are lost if this machine data is altered.

References:

/FB/, A3, "Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones"

18190 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK N12, N02, N06,

N09

- Number of files for machine-related protection zones

(SRAM)

DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 10 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-94

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Only when MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0=1 ('H1') and bit 2=1 ('H4'),

is set for TMMG (and option is set):

User or OEM data in the tool management (TMMG).

Number of Siemens OEM magazine data (standard format IN_Int).

See also: MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM, MM_NUM_MAGAZINE

Buffered user memory is used

Description:

Only when MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0=1 ('H1') and bit 2=1 ('H4'),

is set for TMMG (and option is set):

User or OEM data in the tool management.

Type of magazine-specific Siemens user data configured by

MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM.

18200 MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM N02, N09 FBW

- Number of Siemens OEM magazine data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 10 2/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

18201 MM_TYPE_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM N02, N09 FBW

- Type of Siemens OEM magazine data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON

- 103 162/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-95

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Each parameter can be assigned its own type. The permissible types are:

Type Value of the machine data

(See types

of the NC language)

----------------------------------------------------------------

BOOL 1

CHAR 2

INT 3

REAL 4

STRING 5 (permits identifier up to 31

characters long)

AXIS 6

FRAME not defined

See also: MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM, MM_NUM_MAGAZINE

Buffered user memory is used

Description:

Only when MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0=1 ('H1') and bit 2=1 ('H4'),

is set for TMMG (and option is set):

User or OEM data in the tool management.

Number of Siemens OEM magazine location data (standard format IN_Int).

See also: MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM, MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION

Buffered user memory is used

Description:

Only when MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0=1 ('H1') and bit 2=1 ('H4'),

is set for TMMG (and option is set)

User or OEM data in the tool management.

18202 MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM N02, N09 FBW

- No. of Siemens OEM magazine location data (SRAM)DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 10 2/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

18203 MM_TYPE_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM N02, N09 FBW

- Type of Siemens OEM magazine location data

(SRAM)

DWORD POWER ON

- 103 162/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-96

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Type of magazine-specific Siemens user data configured by

MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM.

Each parameter can be assigned its own type. The permissible types are:

Type Value of the machine data

(See types of the NC language)

----------------------------------------------------------------

BOOL 1

CHAR 2

INT 3

REAL 4

- (STRING is explicitly impossible here; value 5 is treated like value 2)

AXIS 6

FRAME not defined

See also: MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM, MM_NUM_MAGLOC

Buffered user memory is used

Description:

Only when $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 0 = 1 or bit 1 = 1 and bit 2=1

('H4'), is set:

User or OEM data in the tool management.

Type of monitoring-specific Siemens user data configured by

MM_NUM_CCS_MON_PARAM.

Each parameter can be assigned its own type. The permissible types are

Type Value of the machine data

(See types of the NC language)

----------------------------------------------------------------

BOOL 1

CHAR 2

INT 3

REAL 4

- (STRING is explicitly impossible here; value 5 is treated like value 2)

AXIS 6

FRAME not defined

See also: MM_NUM_CCS_MON_PARAM, MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA

Buffered user memory is used

18209 MM_TYPE_CCS_MON_PARAM N02, N09 FBW

- Type of Siemens OEM monitor data (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON

- 103 162/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-97

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Size of the buffered memory for 'Setting data for cycles and display' [kB]

Description:

Battery-backed user memory for compile cycles (in kbyte)

Description:

The corresponding NC language must be activated to execute part programs of

other control manufacturers. Only one external NC language can be selected.

The range of instructions which is made available in each case is to be taken

from the current documentation.

Bit 0 (LSB):

Execution of part programs ISO_2 or ISO_3.

See $MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM for coding.

18237 MM_CYC_DATA_MEM_SIZE EXP, N02 -

- Cycle/display setting data in SRAM [kB] DWORD POWER ON

READ

- - 0 0 32000 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1

18238 MM_CC_MD_MEM_SIZE N02 -

- Compile cycle machine data in SRAM [kB] DWORD POWER ON

- - 1 1 32000 7/1

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

18800 MM_EXTERN_LANGUAGE N01, N12 FBFA

- Activation of external NC languages DWORD POWER ON

- - 0x0000 0x0000 0x0001 7/2

802d-cu3 - 1 - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - 1 - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - 1 - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - 1 - - 1/1

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-98

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Maximum number of elements in protection zones. If this MD has the value 0

(default value) then no protection zones are possible.

Description:

Maximum number of protection zone elements. If this MD is 0 (default value),

no protection zones are possible.

Description:

Maximum number of protection zone groups in the system

18890 MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREAS EXP, N01 -

- Maximum number of elements in 3D protection areas DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 - 200 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

18892 MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREA_ELEM EXP, N01 -

- Max. number of protection zone elements DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 1000 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

18894 MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_GROUPS EXP, N01 -

- Max. number of protection zone groups DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 100 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Generale maschine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-99

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Maximum size of a temporary memory area, which is required for the collision

check of two protection zones.

If the two protection zones have m or n elements and a number of machine axes

k, a memory space of 4 * n * m * k elements is required.

Each memory space requires 4 bytes (FLOAT).

If this machine data is 0, the size of the required memory is automatically

derived from machine data $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREA_ELEM and

$MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREAS.

If this memory size is not sufficient, it can explicitly be defined via this

machine data.

Description:

Defines how many input bits are available on the VDI interface for pre-

activation of 3D protection zones.

It will influence the size of the memory space required for each NC block.

If this machine data has value n, a memory size of approximately n * (n + 1) /

16 bytes will be required per block.

This machine data will be evaluated and will cause reservation of memory

space, only if machine data $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREAS is inequal to 0.

18896 MM_MAXNUM_3D_COLLISION EXP, N01 -

- Max. number of temp. memories for collision check DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 MAX_SIZE_3D_

S_MATRIX_MD

7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

18897 MM_MAXNUM_3D_INTRERFACE_IN EXP, N01 -

- Max. no. of interf. bits for pre-activation of protection

zones

DWORD POWER ON

- - 16 0 MAXNUM_3D_IN

TERFACEBITS_I

N_MD

7/1

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Generale maschine data

2-100

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Contains the names for the protection zone types. The meaning of the entry is

determined by the postition in the list. A change of name does therefore not

cause a change of function.

Meaning of entries:

1. Empty (no protection zone defined)

2. Cuboid

3. Sphere

4. Cylinder

5. Cone

6. Truncated cone

7. Square pyramid

8. Rectangular pyramid

9. Square truncated pyramid

10.Rectangular truncated pyramid

Example: If the third entry "SPHERE" is changed into "CUBOID", this new

keyword "CUBOID" still designates a sphere.

A meaningful change would be, for example "SP".

18898 PROT_AREA_3D_TYPE_NAME_TAB EXP, N12, N07 -

- Table of names for protection zone types STRING POWER ON

- 10 "BOX","SPHERE","C

YLINDER","CONE"...

--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-101

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

2.3 Channel-specific machine data

Description:

This MD assigns a geometry axis to a channel axis.

The assignment must be made for all 3 geometry axes (X,Y,Z). If a geometry

axis is not assigned, the value 0 should be entered. The geometry axis is

therefore not available and cannot be programmed, e.g. if the second geometry

axis is not required for the "turning" technology Y -> entry: value 0 (see

default setting for turning).

Special cases:

It is advisable to assign the first channel axes to the geometry axes.

Description:

This MD assigns a machine axis to a channel axis.

SINUMERIK 802D has 5 channel axes.

Channel axis identifiers for the axes activated in the channel must be

specified in MD 20080: AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB. The axes can be programmed.

A machine axis that has not been assigned to a channel axis is not active i.e.

no axis control, no display on the screen.

Number Identifier Display filters Reference

Unit Name Data type Active

Attributes

System Dimension Default value Minimum value Maximum value Protection

20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB C01, C10 K2

- Assignment between geometry axis and channel axisBYTE POWER ON

- 3 1, 2, 3,0 0 20 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 1, 0, 2 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 1, 0, 2 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED C01, C10 K2

- Machine axis number valid in channel BYTE POWER ON

- 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 0 0 31 7/2

802d-cu3 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 - - 2/2

802d-ng2 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 4 1, 2, 3, 4 - - 2/2

802d-tm2 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 - - 2/2

802d-tm3 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-102

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Anwendungsbeispiel:

Example of assigning the machine axis (MA) to the channel axes:

AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [0] = 3;3rd MA is 1st axis in the channel

AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [1] = 1;1st MA is 2nd axis in the channel

AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [2] = 5;5th MA is 3rd axis in the channel

AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [3] = 0; no assignment

Note: Leave no spaces!, Example of programming error:

AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [0] = 1;1st MA is 1st axis in the channel

AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [1] = 2;2nd MA is 2nd axis in the channel

AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [2] = 0;space in list ...

AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [3] = 3;... of the channel axes

Special cases:

A channel axis and therefore indirectly a machine axis must be assigned to

each geometry axis to be programmed. The remaining axes (besides the geometry

axes) in the channel are additional axes - also programmable.

related to:

MD 20080: AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[0]...[4] (channel axis identifier)

Description:

In this MD you can set the name of the channel axis.

The channel axis is displayed with this identifier in the WCS. This identifier

is also written in the program.

Generally, the first two or three channel axes are used as geometry axes (see

also MD 20050: AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB). The remaining channel axes are

defined as special axes.

SINUMERIK 802D has 5 channel axes.

Special cases:

We recommend the following for the channel axis identifiers:

X, Y, Z, U, V, W, Qfor linear axes,

A, B, C for rotary axes

If you decide to use names other than those recommended, follow the rules for

creating axis identifiers (see MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB).

20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB C01, C11, C10 K2

- Channel axis name STRING POWER ON

- 20 "X", "Y", "Z", "A",

"B", "C", "U", "V",

"X11", "Y11"

--7/2

802d-cu3 6 "X", "Y", "Z", "SP",

"A", "PLCX"

--2/2

802d-ng2 6 "X", "Z", "C", "A", "B",

"PLCX"

--2/2

802d-ng3 6 "X", "Z", "C", "A", "B",

"PLCX"

--2/2

802d-tm1 4 "X", "Y", "Z", "SP" - - 2/2

802d-tm2 6 "X", "Y", "Z", "SP",

"A", "PLCX"

--2/2

802d-tm3 6 "X", "Y", "Z", "SP",

"A", "PLCX"

--2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-103

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Definition of the master spindle default setting (in channel).

The spindle number is entered.

A series of functions are linked to the master spindle which are not possible

for a different spindle.

Note:

The SETMS(n) language command can be used to declare the spindle number n as

master spindle.

The spindle defined as master spindle in this MD is declared as master spindle

again with SETMS.

At the program end or program termination, the spindle defined in this MD is

also declared as master spindle.

Description:

This machine data defines the M auxiliary function number with which the

spindle is switched over to the axis mode.

The M number defined in the machine data replaces M70 in the Siemens language

mode.

Note:

On the VDI interface, M70 with the corresponding address extension is

always output as an identifier for the switchover to the axis mode.

Restrictions: Refer to machine data 10715: $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE

20090 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND C01, C03 S1

- Initial setting of master spindle in channel BYTE POWER ON

- - 1 1 20 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - 2 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - 2 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - 2 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - 1 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - 2 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - 2 2/2

20094 SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR C01, C03, C10 FBFA

- M function for switching into controlled axis mode DWORD POWER ON

--70 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-104

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Related to:

$MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP,

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE,

$MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR,

$MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE

For external language mode:

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE,

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX

$MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR

For nibbling:

$MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE

Description:

This machine data defines the M function number, with which switchover to

controlled spindle/axis mode is to be carried out.

The M number defined in the machine data replaces M29 in external language

mode.

Pre-defined M numbers such as M00,M1,M2,M3, etc. are not allowed as M number.

Restrictions: See machine data 10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE

Related to:

$MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP,

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE,

$MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR,

$MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE

For external language mode:

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE,

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX

$MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR

For nibbling:

$MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE

20095 EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR C01, C11, C03,

C10

FBFA

- M function for switching to controlled axis

mode(external mode)

DWORD POWER ON

--29 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-105

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Event-controlled programm calls (Prog-Events) can be set regarding their

single block behavior.

Bit 0 = 1 :

Prog-Event after part program start causes block change without restart

Bit 1 = 1 :

Prog-Event after part program end causes block change without restart

Bit 2 = 1 :

Prog-Event after OP reset causes block change without restart

Bit 3 = 1 :

Prog-Event after runup causes block change without restart

Bit 4 = 1 :

Prog-Event after 1st start after search run causes block change without

restart

Description:

Event-controlled programm calls (Prog-Events) can be set regarding their read-

in disable behavior.

Bit 0 = 1 :

Prog-Event after part program start causes block change despite read-in

disable

Bit 1 = 1 :

Prog-Event after part program end causes block change despite read-in

disable

20106 PROG_EVENT_IGN_SINGLEBLOCK N01 -

- Prog-Events ignore single block DWORD POWER ON

- - 0x0 0 0x1F 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

20107 PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT N01 -

- Prog-Events ignore read-in disable DWORD POWER ON

- - 0x0 0 0x1F 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-106

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Bit 2 = 1 :

Prog-Event after OP reset causes block change despite read-in disable

Bit 3 = 1 :

Prog-Event after runup causes block change despite read-in disable

Bit 4 = 1 :

Prog-Event after 1st start after search run causes block change despite

read-in disable

Description:

Parameterization of the events, at which the user program set with

$MN_PROG_EVENT_NAME (default: _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF) is called implicitly:

Bit 0 = 1 : Part program start

Bit 1 = 1 : Part program end

Bit 2 = 1 : Operator panel reset

Bit 3 = 1 : Runup

The user program is called via the following search path:

1. /_N_CUS_DIR/_N_PROG_EVENT_SPF

2. /_N_CMA_DIR/_N_PROG_EVENT_SPF

3. /_N_CST_DIR/_N_PROG_EVENT_SPF

Description:

Definition of the transformation data set selected during booting and for a

reset or an end of the part program.

(In conjunction with machine data $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and for a part program

start in conjunction with machine data $MC_START_MODE_MASK)

20108 PROG_EVENT_MASK N01, - K1

- Setting of event-driven programm calls DWORD POWER ON

- - 0x0 0 0xF 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

20140 TRAFO_RESET_VALUE C03 K1

- Active transformation following RESET BYTE RESET

- - 0 0 10 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-107

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Selects certain functionality of kinematic transformation by setting the

following bits:

Bit 0 = 0:

Default behavior.

Bit 0 = 1:

Transformation as defined in $MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE is persistent, i. e. it

is also selected with TRAFOOF and not shown in the display. It requires

that transformation as defined in $MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE is selected

automatically after RESET and START via $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and

$MC_START_MODE_MASK, i. e.:

$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK bit 0 = 1 and bit 7 = 0,

$MC_START_MODE_MASK bit 7 = 1

$MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET = TRUE

Description:

When an external NC programming language is used, definition of G codes which

become active on runup and reset or at part program end depending on machine

data $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and at part program start depending on machine data

$MC_START_MODE_MASK.

The following external programming languages are possible:

ISO2 dialect Milling

ISO3 dialect Turning

The G group division to be used is indicated in the current SINUMERIK

documentations.

20144 TRAFO_MODE_MASK C07 M1

- Function selection of kinematic transformation BYTE RESET

- - 0x0 0 0x01 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

20154 EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES C11, C03 FBFA

- Initial setting of G groups in ISO mode BYTE RESET

-311, 2, 3, 4, 0--2/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-108

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

The following groups within the MD EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES are writable:

ISO2 dialect M:

G group 2: G17/G18/G19

G group 3: G90/G91

G group 5: G94/G95

G group 6: G20/G21

G group 13: G96/G97

G group 14: G54-G59

ISO3 dialect T:

G group 2: G96/G97

G group 3: G90/G91

G group 5: G94/G95

G group 6: G20/G21

G group 16: G17/G18/G19

Description:

This MD is evaluated only if bit0 in $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK (see there) is set!

This MD is used to define for each entry in MD $MN_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES

(i.e. for each G group), whether the setting as per

$MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES is adopted again after a reset / part program

end ( MD = 0 ) or if the current setting is retained ( MD = 1 ).

Example for ISO dialect M:

Here, the basic setting for the 14th G group (settable zero offset) is read

out of machine data $MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES after each reset / part

program end:

$MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[13]=1 ;reset value of the 14th G group

;is G54

$MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_MODE[13]=0 ;basic setting for the 14th G group is

;defined by

;$MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[13]

;after reset / part program end

However, if the current setting for the 14th G group is to be retained beyond

reset / part program end, this results in the following setting:

$MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[13]=1 ;reset value of the 14th G group

;is G54

$MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_MODE[13]=1 ;current setting for the 14th

;G group is retained even after

;reset / part program end

20156 EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_MODE C03 K1

- Reset response of external G groups BYTE RESET

- 310 017/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-109

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The value indicates the maximum permissible deviation for the compression for

the path feedrate. The larger the value, the more short blocks can be

compressed into a long block. The maximum number of compressible blocks is

limited by the size of the spline buffer.

Related to:

$MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL[AXn]

$MC_COMPRESS_BLOCK_PATH_LIMIT

References:

/PGA/, Programming Guide, Advanced

Description:

In the case of smooth approach and retraction, the point defined with DISCL,

from which, in the case of infeed from the initial plane, traversing is

carried out at lower speed (G341) or the point in which the actual approach

movement begins (G 340), must lie between the initial plane and the approach

plane.

If this point lies outside this interval and the deviation is less than or

equal to this machine data, it is assumed that the point lies in the approach

or retraction plane.

If the deviation is greater, then alarm 10741 is output.

20172 COMPRESS_VELO_TOL C09 V1,PGA

mm/min Max. permissible deviation of path feedrate with

compression

DOUBLE POWER ON

- - 60000.0 - - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

20204 WAB_CLEARANCE_TOLERANCE C06 W1

mm Change of direction with SAR DOUBLE POWER ON

--0.01--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-110

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Example:

An approach is made from position Z = 20. The SAR plane is at Z = 0. The point

defined by DISCL must therefore lie between these two values. If it lies

between 20.000 and 20.010 or between 0 and -0.010, it is assumed that the

value 20.0 or 0.0 was programmed (under the condition that the MD has the

value 0.010). The alarm is output if the position is greater than 20.010 or

less than -0.010.

Description:

Activation of tool or magazine management (TM) (only if option TM is set).

Bit-coded activation data. That is, the TM can be activated in various

versions.

Comment:

The entire tool change process is essentially composed of two commands to

the PLC --> tool change preparation and tool change ON.These terms must be

known if one wants to use the following setting options.

(Tool change preparation and ON-T combine both steps from the NCK into one

if no M6 is used for programming).

Transport acknowledgement means that the PLC has received the tool change

preparation or tool change ON command from the NCK. That is, the tool

management command number output from the NCK is acknowledged by the PLC

with the value zero (see PLC description).

Comment:

Bits 5, 6, 7, 8 slow down the block processing sequence. Bits 7, 8 have a

greater slowing effect than bits 5, 6.

Comment:

Bit 18 lengthens the search procedure for a suitable tool, above all if

there are many disabled replacement tools present.

Comment:

Bit 19 in conjunction with set bits 5,6,7,8 slows down block processing.

Notice:

Bits 5 and 7, or 6 and 8 can only be set alternatively.

That is either bit 5 or bit 7; or bit 6 or bit 8.

If bits 5 and 7 or 6 and 8 are set simultaneously then bit 5 or bit 6 will

become active with priority over bit 7 or 8.

(Simply formulated: The transport acknowledgement is given priority over

the end acknowledgement.)

20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK C09 FBW

- Activation of tool management functions DWORD POWER ON

- - 0x0 0 0xFFFFFFF 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-111

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Bit no.Hexadec.Meaning of set bit

Value

0 (LSB)0x00001Tool or magazine management active (only possible with option

release).

1 0x00002TM monitoring functions active (only possible with option release. If

the magazine management is activated then that option is sufficient for this

function.)

2 0x00004OEM functions, compile cycles functions can become active.

3 0x00008Adjacent location is treated.

4 0x00010The PLC has the option of requesting a tool change preparation again

(PLC command numbers = 2,4,5) with changed parameters. Rejected by

acknowledging with status = 2, or status = 7. That is, if the PLC uses this

option the tool selection is recalculated in NCK and a corresponding new

command output to the PLC. If acknowledged with status=2, the tool proposed by

the NCK is also disabled. If these two status numbers 2 and 7 are used

although the bit has the value=0, an alarm is generated.

The PLC must not reject the tool defined by the NCK for tool selection

after the first start of "block search with calculation". An alarm is

generated if this is done nevertheless. The same applies if a tool

selection is refused within the scope of an init block.

Programming which needs the selected T number (e.g. GETSELT) must wait

until the end acknowledgement = 1 is received (or one of the

acknowledgements 103, 105 that show that the T no. is defined).

5 0x00020The main run PLC synchronization with tool change ON command for the

main spindle/main tool holder takes place at the same time as the transport

acknowledgement to NCK (see PLC description). If bit 19 (0x80000) = 0 ->

synchronization with respect to the tool command output (tool change). This

means that the command is not regarded as output until the stated

acknowledgement from the PLC is present in the NCK. If bit 19 (0x80000) = 1 ->

Synchronization with respect to the IPO block. That is, the main run block

remains active at least until the stated acknowledgement from the PLC is

present in the NCK.

Example: Value = 1

M6 ; the next block is processed if the transport acknowledgement

; has been made for the tool change ON command.

D2 ; latest possible time for synchronization.

; That is, at the time D2 is processed, the PLC must have

; acknowledged the two commands tool preparation,

; tool change ON as ended.

6 0x00040In the case of a tool change ON command for a secondary spindle resp.

a secondary tool holder, the main run PLC synchronization takes place at the

same time as the transport acknowledgement. If bit 19 (0x80000) = 0 ->

Synchronization with respect to the tool command output (tool change). That

is, the command is not regarded as output until the stated acknowledgement

from the PLC is present in the NCK. If bit 19 (0x80000) = 1 -> Synchronization

with respect to the IPO block. That is the main run block remains active at

least until the stated acknowledgement from the PLC is received in the NCK.

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-112

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

7 0x00080The main run PLC synchronization with tool change ON command for the

main spindle resp. a main tool holder does not take place until receipt of the

PLC acknowledgement that the tool change ON command has finished. If bit 19

(0x80000) = 0 -> Synchronization with respect to the tool command output (tool

change). This means that the command is not regarded as output until the

stated acknowledgement from the PLC is present in the NCK. If bit 19 (0x80000)

= 1 -> Synchronization with respect to the IPO block. That is the main run

block remains active at least until the stated acknowledgement from the PLC is

received in the NCK.

Example: Value=1

M6 ; the next block is processed if the end acknowledgement

D2 ; latest possible time for synchronization.

; That is, at the time D2 is processed, the PLC must have

; acknowledged the two commands tool preparation,

; tool change as ended.

8 0x00100The main run PLC synchronization with tool change ON command for an

auxiliary spindle resp. an auxiliary tool holder does not take place until

receipt of the PLC acknowledgement that the tool change ON command has

finished. If bit 19 (0x80000) = 0 -> Synchronization with respect to the tool

command output (tool change). This means that the command is not regarded as

output until the stated acknowledgement from the PLC is present in the NCK. If

bit 19 (0x80000) = 1 -> Synchronization with respect to the IPO block. That is

the main run block remains active at least until the stated acknowledgement

from the PLC is received in the NCK.

9 0x00200This bit is only used for test purposes. Simulation of the PLC

acknowledgements for tool motion and change active. It is used for testing the

data transport to NCK and HMI - without the otherwise necessary PLC program.

NCK gives itself the necessary acknowledgements from the PLC.

100x00400The tool change ON command (PLC command number= 3) is not output

until a PLC preparation acknowledgement is received.

110x00800The tool preparation command (PLC command numbers=2,4,5) is also

executed if the same tool preparation command has already been made. (Commands

4,5 contain the tool preparation)

Example: (Tool change made with M6 (PLC command no.= 3):

T="Tool1" ; tool preparation

M6 ; Tool change

T="Tool2" ; 1st tool preparation after M6 (for same tool holder) is always

output to PLC

T="Tool2" ; 2nd tool preparation is only output as command to the PLC; if

bit 11 = 1.

; This tool preparation counts as the first if the state of the tool has

changed since the previous tool preparation such that it would no longer be

serviceable. That can, for example, be an asynchronous unloading of the

tool. This tool preparation then attempts to select a replacement tool.

120x01000The tool preparation command (PLC command numbers=2,4,5) is also

executed if the tool is already in the spindle/tool holder.

T="Tool1" ; tool preparation

M6 ; Tool change

T="Tool1" ;Tool is already in the tool holder

; 1st tool preparation after M6 (for the same tool holder) is only output

to the PLC if; bit 12 = 1.

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-113

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

; An unserviceable tool (e.g. disabled because of tool monitoring.) on the

tool holder does not count as being on the tool holder. This tool

preparation then attempts to select a replacement tool.

T="Tool1" ; 2. Tool preparation - the rules of bit 11 apply to the output.

130x02000This bit is only used for test purposes. Recording of the tool

sequences in a diagnosis buffer. On reset, the commands are retrieved from the

diagnosis buffer and stored in a file in the part program memory. The

diagnosis file can be used to investigate problems in the set up of the NCK-

PLC communication (of the PLC program).

140x04000Automatic tool change on Reset and Start as per the machine data:

$MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME,$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK,

$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER .

150x08000No return transport of the tool from any defined buffers if there

are multiple preparation commands (Tx->Tx) during the power on process.

160x10000Programming T 'location number' is active, otherwise

T=''identifier'.

170x20000Value 1 = Control of the time monitoring via the PLC. That is the

PLC starts/stops the time monitoring counter.

Value = 0 standard. That is, traversing blocks unequal to G00 let the

counter run.

180x40000Message to the PLC if the last replacement tool is loaded from a

tool group.

190x80000Value 0 = The synchronizations defined by bits 5,6,7,8

(0x20,...0x100) refer to the TM command output.

Value 1 = The synchronizations defined by bits 5,6,7,8 (0x20,...0x100)

refer to the main run block.

200x100000Value 0 = Standard setting: If the PLC signal 'program test active'

is present, then the commands generated are not output to the PLC! NCK

acknowledges the commands itself. No magazine data is changed. Tool data are

not changed. Exception: The tool status of the tool activated in test mode can

assume the status 'active'.

Value 1 = If the PLC signal 'program test active' is present, then the

commands generated are output to the PLC. Depending upon the type of

acknowledgement by the PLC, tool/magazine data can be changed in the NCK.

If the acknowledgement parameters for the 'target magazine' are given the

values of the 'source magazine', then there is no tool transport and thus

also no data change in the NCK. Exception: The tool status of the tool

activated in test mode can assume the status 'active'.

210x200000Value 0 = Standard setting: Ignore the tool state 'W' during tool

selection (0x20 = tool is being changed).

Value 1 = Tools in the state 'W' cannot be selected by another tool

change/tool preparation command.

220x400000Value 0 = Standard setting

Value 1 = If the function T='location number' (bit16) is active then the

tool groups are divided into subgroups. $TC_TP11 is the grouping

parameter.During the transition to the replacement tool, only those tools

of the group are recognized as replacement tools that have set at least one

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-114

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

bit of the tool on the programmed location in the $TC_TP11 value.

230x800000Value 0 = Standard setting: TMMG selects the tool in the main run

optimally and safely. That is, in a serious case of offset selection, the

interpreter must wait for the end of the tool selection.

Value 1 = For simple applications. Interpreter selects the tool itself.

That is there is no synchronization with the main run is required for

offset selection. (However, an 'uncorrectable' alarm may be issued if the

tool becomes unserviceable after selection but before being loaded.)

24 0x1000000Value 0 = Standard setting: If the PLC commands 8 and 9 want to

move a tool to a location reserved for another tool, then this is rejected

with an alarm.

Value 1 = If the PLC commands 8 and 9 want to move a tool to a location

reserved for another tool with 'reserved for tool from buffer' (bit value=

'H4'), then this is possible. This location reservation is removed before

the execution of the motion ('reserved for new tool to be loaded' (bit

value= 'H8') remains effective).

With the default setting - Bit6-9 = 0 - the synchronization is related to a

tool change for main spindle/main tool holder in the block in which a cutting

edge of the new tool has been selected for the first time.

The synchronization can either be made via the transport acknowledgement or

via the end acknowledgement.

If the option for the tool management or magazine management is missing, bit

no. 0 cannot be set.

If the option for the tool monitoring is missing, bit no. 1 cannot be set.

(However, if bit no. 0 can be set, then that also gives the right to set bit

no. 1.)

All functions as from bit no. 3 only become effective if bit no. 0 is set.

Examples:

TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 0x1 -> tool and/or magazine management active

TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 0x3 -> TM + tool monitoring function active

TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 0x20003 -> TM + tool monitoring function active;

PLC controls time monitoring

TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 0x2 -> tool monitoring function active without TM

20320 TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK C06, C09 FBW

- Time monitoring for tool in tool holder DWORD POWER ON

--0x0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - 0x1 - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 0x1 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 0x1 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - 0x0 - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - 0x1 - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - 0x1 - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-115

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Activation of the tool time monitoring for the tool holders / spindles 1..x.

As soon as the path axes are traversed (not with G00, always with G63), the

tool time monitoring data of the active D compensation for the tool that is

present in the selected tool holder, which is also the master tool holder, are

updated.

Notice:

The time monitoring can be switched off through the PLC.

Notice:

With test mode activated, the time monitoring is switched off

automatically.

Bit No. Meaning when bit is set

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

0...x-1 Monitoring of tool in tool holder 1...x

Example: $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK = 'H5' or = 'B101'.

The two tool holders with numbers 1 and 3 are generally time-monitored.

If tools are present on tool holders 1, 2, 3 and if the active tool is on

master tool holder 1, then exactly this tool is monitored, and the actual time

value of the active D compensation reduced.

If the active tool is later on tool holder 2, then it is not time-monitored,

as bit 1 (for tool holder=2) of $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK is not set.

Note:

If you are working with setting $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT=-2, then there can

be programming situations, where the active tool does not equal the tool

changed in. In this situation, the tool of the master tool holder is

monitored (instead of the active tool).

And this only, if the active D compensation number is also known to the

tool on the tool holder. Otherwise, there will be no time monitoring.

Description:

Bit 0 = 0:For turning tools the wear parameter of the transverse axis X is

applied as a

radius value.

Bit 0 = 1:For turning tools the wear parameter of the transverse axis X is

applied as a

diameter value.

Special cases:

20360 TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK C09 W1

- Definition of tool parameters DWORD POWER ON

- - 0x0 0 0xFFFF 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-116

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data determines in ISO dialect M (G43 / G44) the way in which

length compensations programmed with H are processed.

0: Mode A

Tool length H always acts on the third geometry axis (usually Z)

1: Mode B

Tool length H acts, depending on the active plane, on one of the three

geometry axes. This means with

G17 on the 3rd geometry axis (usually Z)

G18 on the 2nd geometry axis (usually Y)

G19 on the 1st geometry axis (usually X)

In this mode, compensations in all three geometry axes can be configured

through multiple programming, i.e. through the activation of one component,

the length compensation possibly active in another axis is not deleted.

2: Mode C

The tool length acts, independent of the active plane, on the axis that has

simultaneously been programmed with H. Otherwise, the response is the same

as with mode B.

Description:

This machine data determines for tool length compensation in ISO dialect M

(ISO2) (G43 / G44), whether the compensation shall be allowed in mode C

(selection of the axis on which the compensation is acting by specifying the

corresponding axis letter) to act on several axes simultaneously.

If this machine data is 1, this type of programming is allowed; otherwise it

is rejected with an alarm.

20380 TOOL_CORR_MODE_G43G44 C01, C08, C11 FBFA

- Treatment of tool length compensation with G43 /

G44

BYTE RESET

- -0 027/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

20384 TOOL_CORR_MULTIPLE_AXES C01, C08, C11 FBFA

- Tool length compensation in several axes

simultaneously

BOOLEAN RESET

--TRUE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-117

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data activates the handwheel override in tool direction.

When this machine data is set, a handwheel override is active in the axis that

is assigned to length L1 of the active tool, in the direction defined by tool

orientation.

Example:

G17 is active; the tool is a milling tool; tool length L1 is therefore

assigned to the Z axis (the 3rd geometry axis).

When the tool (e.g. with active 5-axis transformation) is turned around the Y

axis by 90 degrees, so that it shows in X direction, a handwheel override

becomes active in the 3rd axis in the X axis.

Description:

Block cycle problems occur for the following reason:

The traversing length of the NC blocks to be processed is so short that the

Look Ahead function must reduce the machine velocity to provide enough time

for block preparation. In this situation, constant deceleration and

acceleration of the path motion can occur.

This machine data defines the extent to which such velocity fluctuations are

to be smoothed.

Special cases:

Values up to approx. 1.0 are appropriate.

The value 0.0 means that the function is deactivated.

20396 TOOL_OFFSET_DRF_ON C01, C08 W1

- Handwheel override in tool direction BOOLEAN RESET

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

20450 LOOKAH_RELIEVE_BLOCK_CYCLE EXP, C05 B1

- Relief factor for block cycle time DOUBLE POWER ON

--0.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-118

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

A smoothing factor can be defined to give a more stable path velocity control.

It defines the maximum permitted productivity loss.

Acceleration procedures which contribute less than this factor to a shorter

program run time are then not executed.

In this case, only those acceleration procedures whose frequency lies above

the frequency parameterized in MD $MA_LOOKAH_FREQUENCY are taken into account.

The entry of 0.0 deactivates the function.

Description:

Defines the minimum time for constant velocity during transition from

acceleration to deceleration in short blocks in which the set velocity cannot

be reached. Entering a time of at least several IPO cycles prevents a direct

transition from the acceleration to the deceleration phase and thus reduces

the acceleration jump to half. This acceleration limitation is only active

with the acceleration profile BRISK.

MD irrelevant for:

Look Ahead does not take account of this function.

20460 LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR EXP, C05 B1

% Smoothing factor for Look Ahead DOUBLE NEW CONF

- - 0.0 0. 500.0 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

20500 CONST_VELO_MIN_TIME EXP, C05 B2

s Minimum time with constant velocity DOUBLE POWER ON

- - 0.0 0.0 0.1 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-119

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Configuration of the exact stop conditions for G00 and other G codes of the

1st G code group.

The MD is decimal-coded. The units digits define the behavior at G00 (infeed

motion) and the tens digits the behavior of all the other G codes of the 1st

group ("machining G codes").

x0:At G00, the relevant programmed exact stop conditions become active.

x1:At G00, G601 (fine positioning window) becomes active independent of the

programmed exact stop condition.

x2:At G00, G602 (coarse positioning window) becomes active independent of the

programmed exact stop condition.

x3:At G00, G603 (setpoint value reached) becomes active independent of the

programmed exact stop condition.

0x:At the machining G codes, the relevant programmed exact stop conditions

become active.

1x:At the machining G codes, G601 (fine positioning window) becomes active

independent of the programmed exact stop condition.

2x:At the machining G codes, G602 (coarse positioning window) becomes active

independent of the programmed exact stop condition.

3x:At the machining G codes, G603 (setpoint value reached) becomes active

independent of the programmed exact stop condition.

The values of the units digits and tens digits are added.

For example, the value of EXACT_POS_MODE = 2 means that the exact stop

condition G602 is always activated automatically at G00, independently of

which exact stop condition was programmed. At all other G codes of group 1,

the programmed exact stop condition becomes active.

20550 EXACT_POS_MODE EXP B1

- Exact stop conditions on G00/G01. BYTE NEW CONF

- - 0 0 33 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

20552 EXACT_POS_MODE_G0_TO_G1 EXP PG

- Exact stop condition at G00-G01 transition BYTE NEW CONF

- -0 057/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-120

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Configuration of a stop at transition from G00 to a different G code of the

1st G code group, and also vice versa, at transition from non-G00 to G00 in

continuous-path mode.

In exact-stop mode, the positioning window programmed or set in

$MC_EXACT_POS_MODE is used.

The following applies:

0: No additional stop, no control of exact stop

1: Behavior active as with G601 (positioning window, fine).

2: Behavior active as with G602 (positioning window, coarse).

3: Behavior active as with G603 (setpoint reached).

4: As 0,

in addition, the override of the subsequent non-G00 block is taken into

account in the G00 block via LookAhead in the case of a change from G00 to

non-G00.

5: As 0,

in addition, the override of the subsequent block is taken into account via

LookAhead in the case of a change from G00 to non-G00 and non-G00 to G00.

Description:

This machine data contains the factor which defines the acceleration margin

which is not used by a path movement in order to provide sufficient

acceleration reserves for an overlaid movement for the velocity control.

A factor of 0.2 means that the path axes utilize 80% of the path acceleration

in normal operation. Only when a request for overlaid movement is made, can

100% of the path acceleration be utilized.

MD irrelevant for:

Error states that lead to a rapid stop. In addition, the limitation is also

ineffective for positioning axes.

Special cases:

At the moment the machine data is only taken into account if the function

"Fast retraction" is first activated.

Related to:

MD 32300: MAX_AX_ACCEL (axis acceleration)

20610 ADD_MOVE_ACCEL_RESERVE C05 K1,B1,B2

- Acceleration margin for overlaid movements DOUBLE POWER ON

- - .2 0. 0.9 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-121

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Definition of the behavior for handwheel travel to channel-specific VDI

interface signals (bit 0 to bit 7):

Bit = 0:

Interruption or gathering of the displacements entered via the handwheel

Bit = 1:

Stop of traversing and no gathering

Bit assignment

Bit 0: Mode group stop

Bit 1: Mode group stop, axes plus spindle

Bit 2: NC stop

Bit 3: NC stop, axes plus spindles

Bit 4: Feed disable (exceptions for $MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK bit 6)

For bit 4 feed disable it must be considered that a PLC-controlled axis,

for which $MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK bit 6 = 1, is not stopped by the feed

disable and that no interruption and no abort is triggered here.

Bit 5: Feedrate override

Bit 6: Rapid traverse override

Bit 7: Feed stop, geometry axis

Bit 8 = 0:

The maximum feedrate for handwheel travel is that specified in machine data

JOG_AX_VELO of the corresponding machine axis/axes.

Bit 8 == 1:

The maximum feedrate for handwheel travel is that specified in machine data

MAX_AX_VELO of the corresponding machine axis/axes.

Bit 9 == 0:

The override is active during handwheel travel

Bit 9 == 1:

During handwheel travel, the override is assumed to be 100% independent of

the position of the override switch.

Exception: override 0, which is always active.

20624 HANDWH_CHAN_STOP_COND EXP, C09 H1

- Definition of response of handwheel travel, channel-

specific

DWORD POWER ON

--0x13FF00xFFFF7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-122

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Bit 10 = 0:

Machine data $MN_HANDWH_REVERSE is not active for DRF, i.e. handwheel

travel with DRF is carried out as if $MN_HANDWH_REVERSE == 0.

Bit 10 == 1:

Machine data $MN_HANDWH_REVERSE is active for DRF.

Bit 11 = 0:

When the contour handwheel is deselected, program processing is continued

automatically.

Bit 11 = 1:

When the contour handwheel is deselected, an NCSTOP is triggered

automatically. Program processing is not continued until NCSTART is entered.

Bit 12 = 0

NC start has no effect on handwheel travel

Bit 12 = 1:

After NC start the paths collected so far will be rejected.

Bit 13 = 0:

For DRF, bits 0 - 3 and bit 12: bit == 0 / bit == 1 are active,

Bit 13 = 1:

For DRF, bits 0 - 3 and bit 12 are NOT active: the DRF motion is not

interrupted by a stop, and even in the 'Automatic interrupted' state

(achieved by NC Stop), a DRF motion can be carried out.

Note:

If an alarm leads to an axis stop and if such an alarm is pending, no DRF

motion can take place.

Bit 14 == 0:

The maximum feedrate for handwheel travel is that specified in setting

data $SN_JOG_REV_SET_VELO or in machine data $MA_JOG_REV_VELO (for

revolutional feedrate) or in $MA_JOG_REV_VELO_RAPID (for rapid traverse) of

the corresponding machine axis, allowing for the spindle or rotary axis

feedrate.

Bit 14 == 1:

The maximum feedrate for handwheel travel in the case of rotational

feedrate is that specified in machine data $MA_MAX_AX_VELO of the

corresponding machine axis (see also bit 6).

Bit 15 == 0:

If the geometry axis is traversed in the channel as a transverse axis, only

half of the distance of the specified increment is traveled during

handwheel travel (HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE == 1).

Bit 15 == 1:

If the geometry axis is traversed in the channel as a transverse axis, the

specified increment is fully traveled during handwheel travel

(HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE == 1).

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-123

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

0: The "NC start" interface signal (V3200 0007.1) for starting part programs or

part program blocks (MDA) is also possible if none or not all channel axes are

referenced. To ensure that the axes move to the correct position after NC

Start, the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) must be set to a correct value by

other methods (scratching method).

1: The NC only starts if all of the axes have been referenced.

Description:

This machine data defines the interpolation behavior of G0:

0: Non-linear interpolation: Every path axis interpolates as individual axis

(positioning axis) independently of the other axes at rapid traverse of the

axis ($MA_MAX_AX_VELO).

1: Linear interpolation: The path axes are interpolated jointly. With the part

program command G0LINOF, the non-linear interpolation can be selected; with

G0LINON it can be deselected.

Related to:

$MC_EXTERN_G0_LINEAR_MODE

20700 REFP_NC_START_LOCK C01, C03 R1

- NC start disable without reference point BOOLEAN RESET

--TRUE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

20730 G0_LINEAR_MODE C09 P2

- G0 interpolation mode BOOLEAN POWER ON

--TRUE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-124

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data defines the interpolation behavior of G00:

0: Axes are traversed as positioning axes

1: Axes interpolate with each other

Related to:

EXTERN_INCREMENT_SYSTEM

Description:

This machine data is used to influence functions in ISO mode.

Bit0: 0:

ISO mode T: "A" and "C" are interpreted as axes. If contour definition has

been programmed, "A" or "C" must be preceded by a comma.

"A" and "C" in the part program are always interpreted as a contour

definition. An axis "A" or "C" is not allowed.

20732 EXTERN_G0_LINEAR_MODE N12 P2

- G00 interpolation mode BOOLEAN POWER ON

--TRUE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

20734 EXTERN_FUNCTION_MASK N12 FBFA

- Function mask for external language DWORD RESET

- - 0 0 0xFFFF 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-125

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Bit1: 0:

ISO mode T: G10 P < 100 tool geometry

P > 100 tool wear

G10 P < 10000 tool geometry

P > 10000 tool wear

Bit2: 0:

G04 dwell time: always [s] or [ms]

If G95 is active, in spindle revolutions

Bit3: 0:

Errors in ISO scanner lead to an alarm

Errors in ISO scannner are not output, the block is transferred to the

Siemenstranslator.

Bit4: 0:

G00 is traversed with the current exact stop - continuous-path mode G code

G00 is always traversed with G09

Bit5: 0:

Modulo rotary axis is positioned at the shortest possible distance

Direction of rotation of modulo rotary axis depends on sign

Bit6: 0:

Only 4-digit program number allowed.

8-digit program number allowed. If the program number has less than 4

digits, it is expanded to 4 digits with 0.

Bit7: 0:

Axis programming for geometry axis exchange/parallel axes is ISO mode-

compatible.

Axis programming for geometry axis exchange/parallel axes is compatible in

ISO mode with Siemensmode.

Bit8: 0:

With cycles, the F value transferred is always interpreted as a feedrate.

With threading cycles, the F value transferred is interpreted as pitch.

Bit9: 0:

Multiplication with 0.01mm / 0.0001inch is carried out in ISO mode T for

G84, G88 and in standard mode F for G95.

Multiplication with 0.001mm / 0.00001inch is carried out in ISO mode T for

G84, G88 and in standard mode F for G95.

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-126

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Bit10: 0:

With M96 Pxx, the program programmed with Pxx is always called in the case

of an interrupt

With M96 Pxx, CYCLE396.spf is always called in the case of an interrupt

Bit11: 0:

With G54 Pxx, only G54.1 is displayed

With G54 Pxx, the programmed program is displayed after the point, e.g.

G54.48

Bit12: 0:

When the subroutine defined with M96 Pxx is called, $P_ISO_STACK is not

modified

When the subroutine defined with M96 Pxx is called, $P_ISO_STACK is

incremented

Description:

This machine data identifies the permissible absolute circle difference.

In circle programming, the radii from the programmed center point to the

starting point and to the end point are usually not equal (the circle is

"overdefined"). The maximum permissible difference between these two radii

which is accepted without an alarm being triggered is defined by the larger

value in the following data:

- MD: CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST

- Start radius multiplied by 0.001

I.e. for small circles the tolerance is a fixed value (MD: CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST)

and for large circles it is proportional to the start radius.

Anwendungsbeispiel:

MD 21000: CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST = 0.01 mm

With these MD and a radius ? 10mm, the constant has an effect, with > 10mm,

the proportional factor has an effect.

21000 CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST C06 K1

mm Circle end point monitoring constant DOUBLE POWER ON

--0.01--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-127

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Factor for permissible radius difference.

Defines the factor for large circles by which the starting radius and end

radius may deviate from each other

(see also MD 21000: CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST (circle end point monitoring constant).

Description:

0: The tool radius is not taken into account.

1: The tool radius is taken into account with respect to the working area

limit.

21010 CIRCLE_ERROR_FACTOR C06 K1

- Circle end point monitoring factor DOUBLE POWER ON

--0.001--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

21020 WORKAREA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS C03, C06 A3

- Allowance for tool radius with working area limiting BOOLEAN RESET

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

21120 ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1 C07 F2

- Definition of reference axes for orientation axes BYTE NEW CONF

- 3 1, 2, 3 0 3 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-128

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Defines the assignment of the rotations of the orientation axes around the

reference axes for each channel (definition 1).

This orientation description is activated with the G code ORIVIRT1

0: No rotation

1: Rotation around reference axis X

2: Rotation around reference axis Y

3: Rotation around reference axis Z

Example :

$MC_ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1[ 0 ] = 3 ; 1st ORI axis rotates around reference axis Z

$MC_ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1[ 1 ] = 2 ; 2nd ORI axis rotates around reference axis Y

$MC_ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1[ 2 ] = 1 ; 3rd ORI axis rotates around reference axis X

Description:

Defines the assignment of the rotations of the orientation axes around the

reference axes for each channel (definition 2).

This orientation description is activated with the G code ORIVIRT2

0: No rotation

1: Rotation around reference axis X

2: Rotation around reference axis Y

3: Rotation around reference axis Z

Example :

$MC_ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1[ 0 ] = 3 ; 1st ORI axis rotates around reference axis Z

$MC_ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1[ 1 ] = 2 ; 2nd ORI axis rotates around reference axis Y

$MC_ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1[ 2 ] = 1 ; 3rd ORI axis rotates around reference axis X

21130 ORIAX_TURN_TAB_2 C07 F2

- Definition of reference axes for orientation axes BYTE NEW CONF

- 3 1, 2, 3 0 3 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-129

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Velocity in JOG mode with rapid traverse override for orientation axes in the

channel [degrees/min]

Description:

Velocity in JOG mode for orientation axes in the channel

Description:

Acceleration for orientation axes in the channel

21150 JOG_VELO_RAPID_ORI C07 -

rev/min JOG rapid traverse for orientation axes DOUBLE RESET

-310.0--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

21155 JOG_VELO_ORI C07 -

rev/min Jog feedrate for orientation axes DOUBLE RESET

-32.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

21170 ACCEL_ORI C07 -

rev/s² Acceleration for ORI axes DOUBLE NEW CONF

-3.05 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-130

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data specifies the online correction mode in tool direction via

$AA_TOFF[ ].

Bit 0: Behavior of $AA_TOFF in case of a RESET

0: $AA_TOFF is deseclected in case of a RESET

1: $AA_TOFF is maintained also after RESET

Bit 1: Effect of the value assignment on the 1st component of $AA_TOFF[ ]

0: absolute value

1: incremental value (integrator)

Bit 2: Effect of the value assignment on the 2nd component of $AA_TOFF[ ]

0: absolute value

1: incremental value (integrator)

Bit 3: Effect of the value assignment on the 3rd component of $AA_TOFF[ ]

0: absolute value

1: incremental value (integrator)

Description:

Feedrate for online correction in tool direction [ mm/min ] via $AA_TOFF[ ]

21190 TOFF_MODE C08 F2

- Mode of correction in tool direction BYTE RESET

--0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

21194 TOFF_VELO C08 F2

mm/min Feedrate for online correction in tool direction DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30. --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-131

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Acceleration for online correction in tool direction [ m/s**2 ] via $AA_TOFF[

]

Description:

see MD 22010: AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE [n] (auxiliary function type)

Anwendungsbeispiel:

Description:

Special cases:

If the auxiliary function value of an auxiliary function is less than 0, then

21196 TOFF_ACCEL C08 F2

m/s² Acceleration for online correction in tool direction DOUBLE NEW CONF

- 3 100. 1.0e-3 - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

22000 AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP C04 H2

- Auxiliary function group [aux. func. no. in channel]: 0

... 63

BYTE POWER ON

- 255 1 1 64 7/2

802d-cu3 64 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 64 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 64 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 64 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 64 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 64 - - - 2/2

22010 AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE C04 H2

- Auxiliary function type [aux. func. no. in channel]: 0 ...

STRING POWER ON

-255"" --7/2

802d-cu3 64 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 64 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 64 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 64 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 64 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 64 - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-132

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

all auxiliary functions of this type and extension are assigned to a group.

related to:

MD 11100: AUXFU_MAXNUM_GROUP_ASSIGN

Description:

see MD 22010: AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE [n] (auxiliary function type)

Anwendungsbeispiel:

Description:

If the value in this MD is smaller than 0 all auxiliary functions of this type

and this

address extension are assigned to this group.

See MD 22010: AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE [n] (auxiliary function type)

22020 AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION C04 H2

- Auxiliary function extension [aux. func. no. in

channel]: 0 ... 63

BYTE POWER ON

- 255 0 0 99 7/2

802d-cu3 64 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 64 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 64 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 64 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 64 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 64 - - - 2/2

22030 AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE C04 H2

- Auxiliary function value [aux. func. no. in channel]: 0

... 63

DWORD POWER ON

-2550 --7/2

802d-cu3 64 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 64 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 64 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 64 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 64 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 64 - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-133

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Specification of the output behavior of the user-defined auxiliary functions.

Bit 0 (LSB) = 1 -> Acknowledgement "normal" after an OB1 cycle

Bit 1 = 1 -> Acknowledgement "quick" with OB40

Bit 2 = 1 -> No predefined auxiliary function

Bit 3 = 1 -> No output to VDI (may only be set as a single bit)

Bit 4 = 1 -> Spindle reaction after acknowledgement by the PLC

Bit 5 = 1 -> Output before the motion

Bit 6 = 1 -> Output during the motion

Bit 7 = 1 -> Output at block end

Bit 8 = 1 -> No output after block search

Description:

Group assignment of predefined auxiliary functions

The predefined groups cannot be changed for indices 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 22, 23, 24.

22035 AUXFU_ASSIGN_SPEC C04 H2

- Output specification DWORD POWER ON

-2550 --7/2

802d-cu3 64 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 64 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 64 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 64 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 64 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 64 - - - 2/2

22040 AUXFU_PREDEF_GROUP C04 H2

- Predefined auxiliary function groups BYTE POWER ON

- 33 1, 2, 4, 3 0 64 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-134

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The address codes of the predefined auxiliary functions are fix.

This setting cannot be changed!

Description:

Address extension for predefined auxiliary functions:

This setting can be changed only for indices 6 to 17!

Description:

Value of predefined auxiliary functions:

This setting cannot be changed!

22050 AUXFU_PREDEF_TYPE C04 H2

- Predefined auxiliary function type STRING POWER ON

-33"M" --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

22060 AUXFU_PREDEF_EXTENSION C04 H2

- Predefined auxiliary function extension BYTE POWER ON

- 33 0, 1 0 99 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

22070 AUXFU_PREDEF_VALUE C04 H2

- Predefined auxiliary function value DWORD POWER ON

- 33 0, 1, 2, 17, 30, 6, 3,

4, 5, 19, 70, 40, 41,

42, 43, 44, 45, -1

--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-135

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data defines an additional, predefined M function behaving in the

same way as M0. The value of the machine data corresponds to the number of the

auxiliary M function.

Predefined M numbers such as M0, M1, M2, M3, etc. are not allowed.

Restriction:

See MD 10715: M_NO_FCT_CYCLE

Related to:

$MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP,

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE,

$MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR,

$MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE

For external language mode:

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE,

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX

$MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR

For nibbling:

$MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE

22254 AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE C01, C03, C10 H2

- Additional M function to stop a program DWORD POWER ON

---1 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

22256 AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE C01, C03, C10 H2

- Additional M function for conditional stop DWORD POWER ON

---1 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-136

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data defines an additional, predefined M function behaving the

same way as M1. The value of the machine data corresponds to the number of the

auxiliary M function.

Predefined M numbers such as M0, M1, M2, M3, etc. are not allowed.

Restriction:

See MD 10715: M_NO_FCT_CYCLE

Related to:

$MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP,

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE,

$MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR,

$MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE

For external language mode:

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE,

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT

$MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN,

$MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MAX

$MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR

For nibbling:

$MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE

Description:

1: The last S values set in the main run are still active after a RESET.

0: The various S values are equal to 0 after a RESET and must therefore be

reprogrammed.

22400 S_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET C04, C03, C05 S1

- S function active beyond RESET BOOLEAN POWER ON

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-137

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

1: The last programmed F, FA, OVR and OVRA values are still active after RESET.

0: The various values are set to their default values after reset.

Related to:

MD 22240: AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE Output time of the F functions

Description:

Number of M code that is output at the VDI interface in the case of a

transformation changeover on the geometry axes.

No M code is output if this MD is set to one of the values 0 to 6, 17 or 30.

It is not monitored whether an M code created in this way will conflict with

other functions.

22410 F_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET C04, C03, C05 V1

- F function active beyond RESET BOOLEAN POWER ON

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

22534 TRAFO_CHANGE_M_CODE C04 M1

- M code for transformation changeover DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 99999999 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE C01, C11, C04,

C09

- New tool offset for M function BYTE POWER ON

- -0 017/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-138

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The T function is used to select a tool in a program. The setting in this

machine data determines whether the new tool is loaded immediately on

execution of the T function:

1: The new tool is prepared for changing with the T function. This setting is

used mainly on milling machines with a tool magazine, in order to bring the

new tool into the tool change position without interrupting the machining

process. The old tool is removed from the spindle with an M function and the

new tool is loaded into the spindle. According to DIN 66025, this tool change

is programmed using the M function M6.

related to:

Description:

Definition of the unit for the scaling factor P and for the axial scaling

factors I, J, K

Meaning:

0 Scale factor in 0.001

1 Scale factor in 0.00001

Related to:

DEFAULT_SCALEFACTOR_AXIS,

DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_P

22910 WEIGHTING_FACTOR_FOR_SCALE EXP, C01, C11 FBFA

- Input resolution for scaling factor BOOLEAN POWER ON

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

22914 AXES_SCALE_ENABLE EXP, C01, C11 FBFA

- Activation for axial scaling factor ( G51 ) BOOLEAN POWER ON

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-139

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Axial scaling is enabled with this MD.

Meaning:

0: axial scaling not possible

1: axial scaling possible -> MD DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_AXIS is active

Related to:

DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_AXIS

Description:

This MD is used to activate the fixed feedrates from the setting data

$SC_EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_F9[].

Meaning:

0: no fixed feedrates with F1 - F9

1: the feedrates set in setting data $SC_EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_F9[] will

become active when programming F1 - F9

Description:

Assignment table of the axes positioned parallel to the geometry axes.

This table can be used to assign channel axes positioned parallel to the

geometry axes. The parallel axes can then be activated as geometry axes in ISO

mode using the G functions of plane selection (G17 - G19) and the axis name of

the parallel axis. The axis is then replaced by the axis defined via

$MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB[].

Prerequisite:

The channel axes used must be active. ( list position assigned in

AXCONF_MACHAX_USED ). Entering zero deactivates the corresponding parallel

geometry axis:

22920 EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_ON EXP, C01, C11 FBFA

- Activation of fixed feedrates F1 - F9 BOOLEAN POWER ON

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

22930 EXTERN_PARALLEL_GEOAX EXP, C01, C11 FBFA

- Assignment of a parallel channel axis to the geometry

axis

BYTE POWER ON

- 3 0 0 20 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-140

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Bit mask for configuring the positions for frame suppressions (SUPA, G153,

G53).

The following rule applies:

Bit 0: Positions for display (OPI) without frame suppression

Bit 1: Position variables without frame suppression

Description:

0 no transformation

256TRANSMIT transformation

512TRACYL transformation

513TRACYL transformation with X-Y-Z-C kinematics

further transformations are not available with SINUMERIK 802D.

Transformation type of 1st transformation:

Irrelevant for:

No transformations

related to:

TRAFO_TYPE_2

24020 FRAME_SUPPRESS_MODE C03 K2

- Positions for frame suppression DWORD POWER ON

- - 0x0 0 0x0000003 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

24100 TRAFO_TYPE_1 C07 F2

- Type of 1st transformation DWORD NEW CONF

--0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-141

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Axis assignment at input of 1st transformation

Example for Transmit:

Index i assumes the values 0,1, 2 with TRANSMIT.

$MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[0]= channel axis number of axis perpendicular to rotary

axis

$MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[1]=channel axis number of rotary axis

$MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[2]=channel axis number of axis parallel to rotary axis

Example for TRACYL: see TRACYL section

Irrelevant for:

No transformation

related to:

TRAFO_AXES_IN_2

Description:

This MD specifies the channel axes on which the axes of the Cartesian

coordinate system

are mapped when transformation 1 is active.

Index i assumes the values 0, 1, 2 with TRANSMIT. It refers to the first,

second and third geometry axis.

Irrelevant for:

No transformation

Anwendungsbeispiel:

$MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[0]= 2 ; 2nd channel axis

related to:

$MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB, if no transformation is active.

24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 C07 F2

- Axis assignment for transformation 1 [axis index]: 0

... 4

BYTE NEW CONF

- 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 6 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 6 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 6 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 4 - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 6 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 6 - - - 2/2

24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 C07 F2

- Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes with

transformation 1

[geometry axis number]: 0 ... 2

BYTE NEW CONF

- 3 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-142

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during

the 1st transformation or externally.

This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations.

It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with

reference to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the

transformation. In standard transformations, only the "inclined-axis

transformation" fulfills this condition.

If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the

tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to

the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP).

The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations

varies correspondingly.

Description:

This MD states the second available transformation in each channel.

Same as TRAFO_TYPE_1, but for the second available transformation in the

channel.

References:

/FB/, F2, "5-Axis Transformation"

24130 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_1 C07 M1,F2

- Tool handling with 1st active transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

24200 TRAFO_TYPE_2 C07 F2

- Definition of the 2nd transformation in the channel DWORD NEW CONF

--0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-143

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

TRAFO_AXES_IN_2(n)

Axis assignment at input of 2nd to 8th transformation.

Same meaning as for TRAFO_AXES_IN_1.

Description:

This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate

system are mapped for active transformation 2.

Otherwise the meaning corresponds to TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1.

Description:

This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during

the 2nd transformation or externally.

24210 TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 C07 F2

- Axis assignment for transformation 2 BYTE NEW CONF

- 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 6 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 6 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 6 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 4 - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 6 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 6 - - - 2/2

24220 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 C07 F2

- Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for

transformation 2

BYTE NEW CONF

- 3 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

24230 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_2 C07 M1,F2

- Tool handling with active 2nd transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-144

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations.

It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with

reference to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the

transformation. In standard transformations, only "inclined-axis

transformation" fulfills this condition.

If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the

tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to

the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP).

The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations

varies correspondingly.

Description:

This MD states the third available transformation in each channel.

Same as TRAFO_TYPE_1, but for the third available transformation in the

channel.

References:

/FB/, F2, "5-Axis Transformation"

Description:

Axis assignment at the input point of the 3rd transformation in the channel.

Meaning is the same as TRAFO_AXES_IN_1, but for the third available

transformation in the channel.

24300 TRAFO_TYPE_3 C07 F2

- Definition of the 3rd transformation in the channel DWORD NEW CONF

--0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24310 TRAFO_AXES_IN_3 C07 F2

- Axis assignment for transformation 3 BYTE NEW CONF

- 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-145

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate

system are mapped for active transformation 3.

Otherwise the meaning corresponds to TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1.

Description:

This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during

the 3rd transformation or externally.

This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations.

It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with

reference to to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the

transformation. In standard transformations, only "inclined-axis

transformation" fulfills this condition.

If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the

tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to

the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP).

The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations

varies correspondingly.

24320 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_3 C07 F2

- Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for

transformation 3

BYTE NEW CONF

- 3 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24330 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_3 C07 M1,F2

- Tool handling with active 3rd transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-146

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This MD states the fourth available transformation in each channel.

Same as TRAFO_TYPE_1, but for the fourth available transformation in the

channel.

References:

/FB/, F2, "5-Axis Transformation"

Description:

Axis assignment at the input point of the 4th transformation in the channel.

Meaning is the same as TRAFO_AXES_IN_1, but for the fourth available

transformation in the channel.

24400 TRAFO_TYPE_4 C07 F2

- Definition of the 4th transformation in the channel DWORD NEW CONF

--0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24410 TRAFO_AXES_IN_4 C07 F2

- Axis assignment for the 4th transformation in the

channel

BYTE NEW CONF

- 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 6 - - - -1/-

24420 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_4 C07 F2

- Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for

transformation 4

BYTE NEW CONF

- 3 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-147

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate

system are mapped for active transformation 4.

Otherwise the meaning corresponds to TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1.

Description:

This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during

the 4th transformation or externally.

This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations.

It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with

reference to to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the

transformation. In standard transformations, only "inclined-axis

transformation" fulfills this condition.

If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the

tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to

the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP).

The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations

varies correspondingly.

Description:

Type of transformation available as the fifth in the channel. See

$MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 for explanation.

24426 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_4 C07 M1,F2

- Tool handling with active 4th transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24430 TRAFO_TYPE_5 C07 F2,M1

- Type of transformation 5 in the channel DWORD NEW CONF

--0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-148

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Axis assignment at the input point of the 5th transformation. See

TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 for explanation.

Description:

This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate

system are mapped for active transformation 5.

Otherwise the meaning corresponds to TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1.

Description:

This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during

the 5th transformation or externally.

This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations.

24432 TRAFO_AXES_IN_5 C07 F2,M1

- Axis assignment for transformation 5 BYTE NEW CONF

- 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 6 - - - -1/-

24434 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_5 C07 F2,M1

- Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for

transformation 5

BYTE NEW CONF

- 3 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24436 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_5 C07 M1,F2

- Tool handling with active 5th transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-149

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with

reference to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the

transformation. In standard transformations, only "inclined-axis

transformation" fulfills this condition.

If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the

tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to

the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP).

The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations

varies correspondingly.

Description:

Type of transformation available as the sixth in the channel. See

$MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 for explanation.

Description:

Axis assignment at the input point of the 6th transformation. See

TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 for explanation.

24440 TRAFO_TYPE_6 C07 F2,M1

- Type of transformation 6 in the channel DWORD NEW CONF

--0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24442 TRAFO_AXES_IN_6 C07 F2,M1

- Axis assignment for transformation 6 BYTE NEW CONF

- 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 6 - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-150

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate

system are mapped for active transformation 6.

Otherwise the meaning corresponds to TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1.

Description:

This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during

the 6th transformation or externally.

This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations.

It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with

reference to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the

transformation. In standard transformations, only "inclined-axis

transformation" fulfills this condition.

If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the

tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to

the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP).

The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations

varies correspondingly.

24444 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_6 C07 F2,M1

- Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for

transformation 6

BYTE NEW CONF

- 3 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24446 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_6 C07 M1,F2

- Tool handling with active 6th transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-151

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Type of transformation available as the seventh in the channel. See

$MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 for explanation.

Description:

Axis assignment at the input point of the 7th transformation. See

TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 for explanation.

Description:

This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate

system are mapped for active transformation 7.

Otherwise the meaning corresponds to TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1.

24450 TRAFO_TYPE_7 C07 F2,M1

- Type of transformation 7 in the channel DWORD NEW CONF

--0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24452 TRAFO_AXES_IN_7 C07 F2,M1

- Axis assignment for transformation 7 BYTE NEW CONF

- 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 6 - - - -1/-

24454 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_7 C07 F2,M1

- Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for

transformation 7

BYTE NEW CONF

- 3 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-152

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during

the 7th transformation or externally.

This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations.

It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with

reference to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the

transformation. In standard transformations, only "inclined-axis

transformation" fulfills this condition.

If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the

tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to

the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP).

The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations

varies correspondingly.

Description:

Type of transformation available as the eighth in the channel. See

$MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 for explanation.

24456 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_7 C07 M1,F2

- Tool handling with active 7th transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24460 TRAFO_TYPE_8 C07 F2,M1

- Type of transformation 8 in the channel DWORD NEW CONF

--0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-153

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Axis assignment at the input point of the 8th transformation. See

TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 for explanation.

Description:

This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate

system are mapped for active transformation 8.

Otherwise the meaning corresponds to TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1.

Description:

This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during

the 8th transformation or externally.

This machine data is evaluated only with specific transformations.

24462 TRAFO_AXES_IN_8 C07 F2,M1

- Axis assignment for transformation 8 BYTE NEW CONF

- 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 6 - - - -1/-

24464 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_8 C07 F2,M1

- Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for

transformation 8

BYTE NEW CONF

- 3 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24466 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_8 C07 M1,F2

- Tool handling with 8th active transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-154

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

It is evaluated on the condition that the orientation of the tool with

reference to the Basic Coordinate System cannot be changed by the

transformation. In standard transformations, only "inclined-axis

transformation" fulfills this condition.

If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the

tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to

the tool tip (Tool Center Point - TCP).

The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations

varies correspondingly.

Description:

Type of transformation available as the ninth in the channel. See

$MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 for explanation.

Description:

Axis assignment at the input point of the 9th transformation. See

TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 for explanation.

24470 TRAFO_TYPE_9 C07 M1

- Type of transformation 9 in the channel DWORD NEW CONF

--0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24472 TRAFO_AXES_IN_9 C07 M1

- Axis assignment for transformation 9 BYTE NEW CONF

- 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 6 - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-155

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This MD states the channel axes on which the axes of the cartesian coordinate

system are mapped for active transformation 9.

Description:

Same as TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_1, but for the 9th transformation.

Description:

Same as TRAFO_TYPE_1, but for the tenth available transformation in the

channel.

24474 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_9 C07 M1

- Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for

transformation 9

BYTE NEW CONF

- 3 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24476 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_9 C07 M1

- Treatment of tool with active 9th transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24480 TRAFO_TYPE_10 C07 M1

- Transformation 10 in channel DWORD NEW CONF

--0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-156

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Axis assignment at the input of the 10th transformation. See TRAFO_AXES_IN_1

for explanation.

Description:

Assignment table of geometry axes with transformation 10

Same as AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB, but only effective when transformation 10 is

active.

Description:

Same as TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_1, but for the 10th transformation.

24482 TRAFO_AXES_IN_10 C07 M1

- Axis assignment for transformation 10 BYTE NEW CONF

- 20 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 4 - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 6 - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 6 - - - -1/-

24484 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_10 C07 M1

- Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes f.

transformation 10

BYTE NEW CONF

- 3 0 0 20 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24486 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_10 C07 M1

- Treatment of tool with active 10th transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-157

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data designates an offset of the workpiece carrier for the first

(MD: TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1) or second (MD: TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_2) 5-axis

transformation of a channel and has a specific meaning for the different

machine types:

Machine type 1 (two-axis swivel head for tool):

Vector from machine reference point to zero point of workpiece table. This

will generally be a zero vector if both coincide.

Machine type 2 (two-axis rotary table for workpiece):

Vector from the second rotary joint of workpiece rotary table to zero point of

table.

Machine type 3 (single-axis rotary table for workpiece and single-axis swivel

head for tool):

Vector from rotary joint of workpiece table to zero point of table.

MD irrelevant:

if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed.

Description:

This machine data designates the angular offset of the first or second rotary

axis in degrees for the first 5-axis transformation of a channel.

MD irrelevant:

if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed.

24500 TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1 C07 F2

mm Offset vector of 5-axis transformation 1 DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24510 TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 C07 F2

degrees Position offset of rotary axes 1/2/3 for 5-axis

transformation 1

DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-158

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data designates the sign with which the two rotary axes are

included in the first (MD: TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1) or the second (MD:

TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2) 5-axis transformation of a channel.

MD = 0 (FALSE):

Sign is reversed.

MD = 1 (TRUE) :

Sign is not reversed and the traversing direction is defined according to

AX_MOTION_DIR.

This machine data does not mean that the rotational direction of the rotary

axis concerned is to be reversed, but specifies whether its motion is in the

mathematically positive or negative direction when the axis is moving in the

positive direction.

The result of a change to this machine data is not therefore a change in the

rotational direction, but a change in the compensatory motion of the linear

axes.

However, if a directional vector and thus, implicitly, a compensatory motion

is specified, the result is a change in the rotational direction of the rotary

axis concerned.

On a real machine, therefore, the machine data may be set to FALSE (or zero)

only if the rotary axis is turning in an anti-clockwise direction when moving

in a positive direction.

MD irrelevant:

if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed.

24520 TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 C07 F2

- Sign of rotary axis 1/2/3 for 5-axis transformation 1 BOOLEAN NEW CONF

-3TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24530 TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_1 C07 F2

degrees Definition of pole range for 5-axis transformation 1 DOUBLE NEW CONF

--2.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-159

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This MD designates a limit angle for the fifth axis of the first 5-axis

transformation with the following properties: if the path runs below this

angle past the pole, the traverse will pass through the pole.

For the 5-axis transformation, the two orientation axes of the tool form a

coordinate system of length and width circles on a spherical surface. If

orientation programming (that is the orientation vector lies in a plane) leads

the path so close past the pole that the angle defined by the MD is undershot

then there is a deviation from the defined interpolation such that the

interpolation runs through the pole.

Alarm 14112 is output if this modification of the path gives a deviation

greater than a tolerance defined by MD 24540: TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1.

MD irrelevant:

If the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed.

Also irrelevant with programming in the machine coordinate system ORIMKS.

Related to:

MD: TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT _2

Description:

This MD designates an end angle tolerance for the fifth axis of the first (MD:

TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1) or the second (MD: TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_2) 5-axis

transformation with the following properties:

With the interpolation through the pole point, only the fifth axis moves, the

fourth axis retains its starting position. If a motion is programmed that does

not run exactly through the pole point but is to run near the pole within the

area given by MD: TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT then there is a deviation from the

defined path as the interpolation runs exactly through the pole point. This

results in a deviation in the position of the end point of the fourth axis

(the polar axis) from the programmed value.

This MD defines the angle by which the polar axis may deviate from the

programmed value with 5-axis transformation when switching from the programmed

interpolation to the interpolation through the pole point.

Alarm 14112 is output if there is a greater deviation and the interpolation is

not executed.

24540 TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1 C07 F2

degrees End angle toler. with interpol. through pole for 5-axis

transf.

DOUBLE NEW CONF

--2.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-160

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

MD irrelevant:

If the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed.

Also irrelevant with programming in the machine coordinate system ORIMKS.

Related to:

MD: TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_1 and _2

Description:

End angle tolerance for interpolation through the pole for the 1st 5/6-axis

transformation.

This MD is evaluated only by the generic 5/6-axis

transformation.

If the end orientation lies within the pole cone and within the tolerance cone

specified by means of this MD, the pole axis does not move

and retains it start position. The other rotary axis, however,

moves to the programmed angle.

This results in a deviation of the end orientation

from the programmed orientation.

The maximum active value of this MD is the value of MD TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1,

which is used to define the pole cone.

Description:

This MD specifies the vector of the base tool which takes effect when the

first transformation (MD: TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_1) or the second (MD:

TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_2) is activated without a length compensation being selected.

Programmed length compensations have an additive effect with respect to the

base tool.

24542 TRAFO5_POLE_TOL_1 C07 -

degrees End angle tolerance for pole interpolation DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.0 0-7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24550 TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_1 C07 F2

mm Vector of base tool on activation of 5-axis

transformation 1

DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-161

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

MD irrelevant:

if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed.

Description:

This machine data is only evaluated for generic 5-axis transformations with

rotatable workpiece and rotatable tool (TRAFO_TYPE = 56, mixed kinematics).

It indicates the part of the vector between table and turning head assigned to

the table.

Only the sum of this MD and MD TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET is entered in the

transformation equations.

A difference results only when reading the whole tool length using the

function GETTCOR. In this case, only the MD TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET is considered.

On a machine with mixed kinematics, this machine data can be used to assign

the machine data of the 5-axis transformation and the parameters of the

orientable tool holder uniquely to one another as follows:

Orientable tool holder 5-axis transformation (1st transformation)

1 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1

2 TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_1

3 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_PART_1

4 TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1

24558 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_PART_1 C07 F2

mm Vector of kinematic table offset DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24560 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1 C07 F2

mm Vector of the kinem.offset of the 1st 5-axis transf. in

channel

DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-162

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data designates the vector from the first to the second joint for

the first (MD: TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1) or second (MD: TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_2)

transformation of a channel and has a specific meaning for the various machine

types:

Machine type 1 (two-axis swivel head for tool) and:

Machine type 2 (two-axis rotary table for workpiece):

Vector from first to second joint of tool rotary head or workpiece rotary

table.

Machine type 3 (single-axis rotary table for workpiece and single-axis swivel

head for tool):

Vector from machine reference point to joint of workpiece table.

MD irrelevant:

if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed. The same applies

for 3-axis and 4-axis transformations.

Description:

In the case of 6-axis transformations, defines the offset between the 2nd and

third rotary axes for the 1st transformation of each channel.

Description:

In the case of 5-axis transformation with swiveling linear axis, the value

indicates the offset of the rotary axis which swivels the linear axis with

reference to machine zero for the 1st transformation.

24561 TRAFO6_JOINT_OFFSET_2_3_1 C07 -

mm Vector of kinematic offset DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24562 TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 C07 F2

mm Offset of swivel point of 1st rotary axis on 5-axis

transform. 1

DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-163

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

MD irrelevant for:

other 5-axis transformations

Related to:

MD 24662

Description:

Angle between the second rotary axis and the axis corresponding to it in the

rectangular coordinate system

MD irrelevant for: Transformation type other than "universal milling head".

Related to:

TRAFO_TYPE_n

Description:

The MD has the following values:

0: The axis angles of the orientation axes are machine axis angles.

1: Virtual orientation axes are defined that form a rectangular coordinate

system and the axis angles are rotations around these virtual axes.

24564 TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_1 C07 F2

degrees Nutating head angle in 5-axis transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF

- - 45.0 -89. 89. 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24566 TRAFO5_NUTATOR_VIRT_ORIAX_1 C07 -

- Virtual orientation axes BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--FALSE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-164

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The MD indicates the vector that describes the direction of the first rotary

axis in the general 5-axis transformation (TRAFO_TYPE_* = 24).

The vector can have any magnitude.

Example:

Both with (0, 1, 0) and with (0, 7.21, 0), the same axis is described (in the

direction of the 2nd geometry axis, i.e. usually Y).

Valid for the first transformation of a channel.

Description:

Indicates the vector that describes the direction of the second rotary axis in

the general 5-axis transformation (TRAFO_TYPE_* = 24, 40, 56).

The vector can have any magnitude except zero.

Example:

Both with (0, 1, 0) and with (0, 7.21, 0), the same axis is described (in the

direction of the 2nd geometry axis, i.e. usually Y).

Valid for the first transformation of a channel.

24570 TRAFO5_AXIS1_1 C07 F2

- Direction of 1st rotary axis DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24572 TRAFO5_AXIS2_1 C07 F2

- Direction of 2nd rotary axis DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-165

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Indicates the vector which defines the direction of the third rotary axis in

the case of the general 6-axis transformation (TRAFO_TYPE_* = 24, 40, 56, 57).

The vector may have any value except zero.

Example:

The same axis is defined with both (0, 1, 0) and (0, 7.21, 0) (in the

direction of the 2nd geometry axis, that is as a rule Y).

Valid for the first orientation transformation of a channel.

Description:

Indicates the vector of the tool orientation in the general 5-axis

transformation (TRAFO_TYPE_* = 24, 40, 56) if this is not defined on the

transformation call or read from a programmed tool.

The vector can have any magnitude except zero.

24573 TRAFO5_AXIS3_1 C07 -

- Direction of third rotary axis DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24574 TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENT_1 C07 -

- Vector of the tool base orientation for 5-axis

transformation

DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24576 TRAFO6_BASE_ORIENT_NORMAL_1 C07 -

- Normal tool vector in 6-axis transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF

- 3 0.0, 1.0 - - 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-166

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Indicates a vector that is perpendicular to the tool orientation

(TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENTATION_1) in the case of the general 6-axis transformation

(TRAFO_TYPE_* = 24, 40, 56, 57).

If TRAFO6_BASE_ORIENT_NORMAL_1 and TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENTATION_1 are neither

orthogonal nor parallel, then the two vectors are orthogonalized by modifying

the normal vector.The two vectors must not be parallel.

The vector may have any value other than zero.

Valid for the first orientation transformation of a channel.

Description:

Indicates the direction of the orientation vector for the first 5-axis

transformation for each channel.

0: Tool vector in x direction

1: Tool vector in y direction

2: Tool vector in z direction

Description:

If the value of this machine data is not zero and if machine data

$MC_TRAFO_TYPE_X that points to the first orientation transformation has value

72, the kinematics data (offsets etc.) that parameterize the first 5-axis

transformation, will not be read from the machine data, but from the data of

the orientable tool holder to which this machine data refers.

24580 TRAFO5_TOOL_VECTOR_1 C07 F2

- Direction of orientation vector for the first 5-axis

transf.

BYTE NEW CONF

- -2 027/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24582 TRAFO5_TCARR_NO_1 C07 -

- TCARR number for the first 5-axis transformation DWORD NEW CONF

--0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-167

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Assignment table of the orientation axes for 5-axis transformation 1

Only active with active 5-axis transformation 1.

Description:

The programmable offset for orientation axes is automatically accepted from

the work offset active for the orientation axes on switch-on of an orientation

transformation.

24585 TRAFO5_ORIAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 C07 F2

- Orientation axis / channel axis assignment

transformation 1

BYTE NEW CONF

- 3 0 0 20 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24590 TRAFO5_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FR_1 C01, C07 -

- Offset of transformation rotary axes from WO. BOOLEAN SOFORT

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24600 TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_2 C07 F2

mm Offset vector of the 2nd 5-axis transformation in the

channel

DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-168

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data designates an offset of the workpiece carrier for the first

(MD: TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1) or second (MD: TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_2) 5-axis

transformation of a channel and has a specific meaning for the different

machine types:

Machine type 1 (two-axis swivel head for tool):

Vector from machine reference point to zero point of workpiece table. This

will generally be a zero vector if both coincide.

Machine type 2 (two-axis rotary table for workpiece):

Vector from second joint of workpiece rotary table to zero point of table.

Machine type 3 (single-axis rotary table for workpiece and single-axis swivel

head for tool):

Vector from joint of workpiece table to zero point of table.

MD irrelevant:

if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed.

Description:

Indicates the offset for each channel of the rotary axes in degrees for the

second orientation transformation.

Description:

This machine data designates the sign with which the two rotary axes are

included in the first (MD: TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1) or the second (MD:

TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2) 5-axis transformation of a channel.

24610 TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 C07 -

degrees Position offset of rotary axes 1/2/3 DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24620 TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 C07 F2

- Sign of rotary axis 1/2/3 for 5-axis transformation 2 BOOLEAN NEW CONF

-3TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-169

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

MD = 0 (FALSE):

Sign is reversed.

MD = 1 (TRUE) :

Sign is not reversed and the traversing direction is defined according to

AX_MOTION_DIR.

This machine data does not mean that the rotational direction of the rotary

axis concerned is to be reversed, but specifies whether its motion is in the

mathematically positive or negative direction when the axis is moving in the

positive direction.

The result of a change to this data is not therefore a change in the

rotational direction, but a change in the compensatory motion of the linear

axes.

However, if a directional vector and thus, implicitly, a compensatory motion

is specified, the result is a change in the rotational direction of the rotary

axis concerned.

On a real machine, therefore, the machine data may be set to FALSE (or zero)

only if the rotary axis is turning in an anti-clockwise direction when moving

in a positive direction.

MD irrelevant:

if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed.

Description:

This MD designates a limit angle for the fifth axis of the second 5-axis

transformation with the following properties: if the path runs below this

angle past the pole, the traverse will pass through the pole.

For the 5-axis transformation, the two orientation axes of the tool form a

coordinate system of length and width circles on a spherical surface. If

orientation programming (that is the orientation vector lies in a plane) leads

the path so close past the pole that the angle defined by this MD is

undershot, then there is a deviation from the defined interpolation such that

the interpolation runs through the pole.

Alarm 14112 is output if this modification of the path gives a deviation

greater than a tolerance defined by MD 24640: TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_2.

24630 TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_2 C07 F2

degrees Definition of pole range for 5-axis transformation 2 DOUBLE NEW CONF

--2.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-170

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

MD irrelevant:

If the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed.

Also irrelevant with programming in the machine coordinate system ORIMKS.

Related to:

MD: TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1

Description:

This MD designates an end angle tolerance for the fifth axis of the second 5-

axis transformation with the following properties:

With the interpolation through the pole point, only the fifth axis moves, the

fourth axis retains its starting position. If a motion is programmed that does

not run exactly through the pole point but is to run near the pole within the

area given by MD: TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT then there is a deviation from the

defined path as the interpolation runs exactly through the pole point. This

results in a deviation in the position of the end point of the fourth axis

(the polar axis) from the programmed value.

This MD defines the angle by which the polar axis may deviate from the

programmed value with 5-axis transformation when switching from the programmed

interpolation to the interpolation through the pole point.

An error message (alarm 14112) is output if there is a greater deviation and

the interpolation is not executed.

MD irrelevant:

If the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed.

Also irrelevant with programming in the machine coordinate system ORIMKS.

Related to:

MD: TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_1

24640 TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_2 C07 F2

degrees End angle toler. with interpol. through pole for 5-axis

transf.

DOUBLE NEW CONF

--2.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-171

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

End angle tolerance for interpolation through the pole for the 2nd 5/6-axis

transformation.

This MD is evaluated only by the generic 5/6-axis

transformation.

If the end orientation lies within the pole cone and within the tolerance cone

specified by means of this MD, the pole axis does not move

and retains it start position. The other rotary axis, however,

moves to the programmed angle.

This results in a deviation of the end orientation

from the programmed orientation.

The maximum active value of this MD is the value of MD TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_2,

which is used to define the pole cone.

Description:

This MD indicates the vector of the base tool which takes effect when the

first transformation is activated without a length compensation being

selected. Programmed length compensations have an additive effect with respect

to the base tool.

MD irrelevant:

if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed.

24642 TRAFO5_POLE_TOL_2 C07 -

degrees End angle tolerance for pole interpolation DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.0 0-7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24650 TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_2 C07 F2

mm Vector of base tool on activation of 5-axis

transformation 2

DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-172

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Same as MD 24558: TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_PART_1, but for the second

transformation.

Description:

This machine data designates the vector from the first to the second joint for

the first (MD: TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1) or second (MD: TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_2)

transformation of a channel and has a specific meaning for the various machine

types:

Machine type 1 (two-axis swivel head for tool) and:

Machine type 2 (two-axis rotary table for workpiece):

Vector from first to second joint of tool rotary head or workpiece rotary

table.

Machine type 3 (single-axis rotary table for workpiece and single-axis swivel

head for tool):

Vector from machine reference point to joint of workpiece table.

MD irrelevant:

if the "5-Axis Transformation" option is not installed. The same applies

for 3-axis and 4-axis transformations.

24658 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_PART_2 C07 F2

mm Vector of kinematic table offset DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24660 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_2 C07 F2

mm Vector of the kinem.offset of the 2nd 5-axis

transformation

DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-173

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

As TRAFO6_JOINT_OFFSET_2_3_1 but for the second transformation.

Description:

In the case of 5-axis transformation with swiveled linear axis, the value

indicates the offset of the rotary axis which swivels the linear axis with

reference to machine zero for the 2nd transformation.

MD irrelevant for:

other 5-axis transformations

Related to:

MD 24562

24661 TRAFO6_JOINT_OFFSET_2_3_2 C07 -

mm Vector of kinematic offset DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24662 TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 C07 F2

mm Offset swivel point of 2nd 5-axis transf. (swivelled

lin.axis)

DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24664 TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_2 C07 F2

degrees Nutating head angle DOUBLE NEW CONF

- - 45.0 -89. 89. 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-174

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Angle between the second rotary axis and the axis corresponding to it in the

rectangular coordinate system

MD irrelevant for:

Transformation type other than "universal milling head"

Related to:

TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_1

Description:

The MD has the following values:

0: The axis angles of the orientation axes are machine axis angles.

1: Virtual orientation axes are defined that form a rectangular coordinate

system and the axis angles are rotations around these virtual axes.

Description:

As for TRAFO5_AXIS1_1 but for the second orientation transformation of a

channel.

24666 TRAFO5_NUTATOR_VIRT_ORIAX_2 C07 -

- Virtual orientation axes BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--FALSE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24670 TRAFO5_AXIS1_2 C07 F2

- Direction of 1st rotary axis DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-175

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

As for TRAFO5_AXIS2_1 but for the second transformation of a channel.

Description:

As TRAFO5_AXIS3_1 but for the second orientation transformation of a channel.

Description:

As for TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENT_1 but for the second transformation of a channel.

24672 TRAFO5_AXIS2_2 C07 F2

- Direction of 2nd rotary axis DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24673 TRAFO5_AXIS3_2 C07 -

- Direction of third rotary axis DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24674 TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENT_2 C07 F2

- Basic tool orientation DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-176

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

As TRAFO6_BASE_ORIENT_NORMAL_1 but for the second orientation transformation

Description:

Indicates the direction of the orientation vector for the second 5-axis

transformation for each channel.

0: Tool vector in x direction

1: Tool vector in y direction

2: Tool vector in z direction

Description:

Same as TRAFO5_TCARR_NO_1, but for the second orientation transformation.

24676 TRAFO6_BASE_ORIENT_NORMAL_2 C07 -

- Normal tool vector DOUBLE NEW CONF

- 3 0.0, 1.0 - - 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24680 TRAFO5_TOOL_VECTOR_2 C07 F2

- Direction of orientation vector BYTE NEW CONF

- -2 027/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24682 TRAFO5_TCARR_NO_2 C07 -

- TCARR number for the second 5-axis transformation DWORD NEW CONF

--0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-177

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Assignment table of the orientation axes for 5-axis transformation 2

Only active with active 5-axis transformation 2.

Description:

Same as TRAFO5_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FR_1, but for the 2nd transformation of a

channel

Description:

Indicates for the first agreed TRAANG transformation of the channel the angle

of the inclined axis in degrees between the 1st machine axis and the 1st basic

axis while TRAANG is active. The angle is measured positively clockwise.

Related to:

TRAANG_ANGLE_2

24685 TRAFO5_ORIAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 C07 F2

- Orientation axis / channel axis assignment

transformation 1

BYTE NEW CONF

- 3 0 0 20 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24690 TRAFO5_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FR_2 C01, C07 -

- Offset of transformation rotary axes from WO. BOOLEAN SOFORT

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24700 TRAANG_ANGLE_1 C07 M1

degrees Angle between Cartesian axis and real (inclined) axis DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-178

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Indicates a basic offset of the tools zero for the 1st TRAANG transformation.

The offset is referenced to the geometry axes valid when TRAANG is active. The

basic offset is included with and without selection of the tool length

compensation. Programmed length corrections have an additive effect with

respect to the basic tool.

The index i takes the values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to 3rd geometry axes.

Related to:

$MC_TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_2

Description:

Indicates the axis velocity reserve for jog, positioning and oscillating

movements for each channel for the first TRAANG transformation, which is held

ready on the parallel axis (see $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_n[1]) for the compensating

movement.

Velocity reserve to be provided for jog, positioning and oscillating movements

on the parallel axis to handle the compensating movement as a consequence of

the inclined axis.

0.0 means that the control or the transformation itself determines the reserve

according to the angle of the inclined axis and the velocity capacity of the

inclined and parallel axes. - The criterion for this is that the same speed

limit is to be maintained in the direction of the parallel axis and the

vertical (virtual) axis.

24710 TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_1 C07 M1

mm Vector of base tool for 1st TRAANG transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24720 TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1 C07 M1

- Velocity margin for 1st TRAANG transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF

- - 0.0 0.0 1.0 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-179

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

>0.0 means that a fixed reserve has been set (TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1 *

MAX_AX_VELO of the parallel axis). The velocity capacity in the virtual axis

is determined by this. The lower TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1 has been set, the

lower it is

Related to:

TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_2

Description:

Indicates the acceleration margin for jog, positioning and oscillating

movements which is held ready on the parallel axis (see

$MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_n[1]) for the compensatory movement; MD setting applies to

the first TRAANG transformation for each channel.

Related to:

$MC_TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1

Description:

Indicates for the second agreed TRAANG transformation of the channel the angle

of the inclined axis in degrees between the 1st machine axis and the 1st basic

axis while TRAANG is active. The angle is measured positively clockwise.

Related to:

TRAANG_ANGLE_1

24721 TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_1 C07 M1

- Acceleration margin of parallel axis for the 1st

TRAANG transf.

DOUBLE NEW CONF

- - 0.0 0.0 1.0 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24750 TRAANG_ANGLE_2 C07 M1

degrees Angle between Cartesian axis and real (inclined) axis DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-180

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Indicates a basic offset of the tools zero for the 2nd TRAANG transformation.

The offset is referenced to the geometry axes valid when TRAANG is active. The

basic offset is included with and without selection of the tool length

compensation. Programmed length corrections have an additive effect with

respect to the basic tool.

The index i takes the values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to 3rd geometry axes.

Related to:

$MC_TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_1

Description:

Indicates the axis velocity reserve for jog, positioning and oscillating

movements which is held ready on the parallel axis (see

$MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_n[1]) for the compensatory movement; MD setting applies to

the second TRAANG transformation for each channel.

Related to:

TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_2

24760 TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_2 C07 M1

mm Vector of base tool for 2nd TRAANG transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24770 TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_2 C07 M1

- Velocity margin for 2nd TRAANG transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF

- - 0.0 0.0 1.0 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-181

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Indicates the axis acceleration margin for jog, positioning and oscillating

movements which is held ready on the parallel axis (see

$MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_n[1]) for the compensatory movement; MD setting applies to

the second TRAANG transformation for each channel.

Related to:

$MC_TRAANG_PARALLEL_RES_1

Description:

Specifies the offset of the rotary axis in degrees in relation to the zero

position while TRACYL is active for the first declared TRACYL transformation

for each channel.

Irrelevant for:

No TRACYL active

Anwendungsbeispiel:

$MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1=15.0

24771 TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_2 C07 M1

- Acceler. margin of parallel axis for the 2nd TRAANG

transform.

DOUBLE NEW CONF

- - 0.0 0.0 1.0 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24800 TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 C07 M1

degrees Offset of rotary axis for the TRACYL transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-182

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

0: axial rotary axis offset is not considered.

1: axial rotary axis offset is considered.

2: axial rotary axis offset is considered until SZS.

SZS frames include transformed axial rotary axis offsets.

Description:

Default setting of TRACYL type 514:

0: without groove side offset (i.e. TRACYL type 514 - equals 512)

1: with groove side offset (i.e. TRACYL type 514 - equals 513)

With $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_.. = 514 it can be decided via the selection parameters,

whether calculation is made with or without groove side offset. The parameter

will define the variable to be selected, if no selection is made in the call

parameters.

If $MC_TRACYL_DEFAULT_MODE_1 = 1, it will be sufficient to program TRACYL(30)

in the part program instead of TRACYL(30,1,1).

24805 TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 C07 -

- Rotary axis offset TRACYL 1 BYTE NEW CONF

- -0 027/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

24808 TRACYL_DEFAULT_MODE_1 C07 M1

- TRACYL mode selection BYTE NEW CONF

- -0 017/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-183

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Specifies the sign which is applied to the rotary axis during the TRACYL

transformation for the TRACYL transformation.

Irrelevant for:

No TRACYL transformation

Anwendungsbeispiel:

$MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 = 1

Description:

MD specifies the distance of the tool zero point referred to the appropriate

geometry axes valid with TRACYL active and without tool length offset selected

for the TRACYL transformation.

Programmed length compensations are added to the base tool.

Index i assumes values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to 3rd geometry axes.

Irrelevant for:

No TRACYL transformation

Anwendungsbeispiel:

$MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1[0]=tx

24810 TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 C07 M1

- Sign of rotary axis for the TRACYL transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

24820 TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 C07 M1

mm Vector of base tool for TRACYL transformation, [Geo-

Axis-Index]: 0 ... 2

DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-184

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Indicates the offset of the rotary axis in degrees in relation to the neutral

position for the 2nd agreed TRACYL transformation for each channel.

MD irrelevant:

If no TRACYL is active

Related to:

TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1

Description:

0: axial rotary axis offset is not considered.

1: axial rotary axis offset is considered.

2: axial rotary axis offset is considered until SZS.

SZS frames include transformed axial rotary axis offsets.

24850 TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 C07 M1

degrees Offset of rotary axis for the 2nd TRACYL

transformation

DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

24855 TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_2 C07 -

- Rotary axis offset TRACYL 2 BYTE NEW CONF

- -0 027/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

24858 TRACYL_DEFAULT_MODE_2 C07 M1

- TRACYL mode selection BYTE NEW CONF

- -0 017/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-185

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Default setting of TRACYL type 514 for the 2nd TRACYL:

0: without groove side offset (i.e. TRACYL type 514 - equals 512)

1: with groove side offset (i.e. TRACYL type 514 - equals 513)

With $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_.. = 514 it can be decided via the selection parameters,

whether calculation is made with or without groove side offset. The parameter

defines the variable to be selected, if no selection is made in the call

parameters.

If $MC_TRACYL_DEFAULT_MODE_2 = 1, it will be sufficient to program

TRACYL(30,2) in the part program instead of TRACYL(30,2,1).

Description:

Indicates the sign with which the rotary axis is taken into account in the

TRACYL transformation for the 2nd agreed TRACYL transformation for each

channel.

Related to:

TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1

Description:

Indicates a basic offset of the tools zero for the 2ndTRACYL transformation.

The offset is referenced to the geometry axes valid when TRACYL is active. The

basic offset is included with and without selection of the tool length

compensation. Programmed length corrections have an additive effect with

respect to the basic tool.

The index i takes the values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to 3rd geometry axes.

Related to:

$MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1

24860 TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 C07 M1

- Sign of rotary axis for 2nd TRACYL transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

24870 TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_2 C07 M1

mm Vector of base tool for 2nd TRACYL transformation DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-186

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Specifies the offset of the rotary axis in degrees in relation to the zero

position - while TRANSMIT is active - for the TRANSMIT transformation.

Irrelevant for:

No TRANSMIT active

Anwendungsbeispiel:

$MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1=15.0

Description:

0: axial rotary axis offset is not considered.

1: axial rotary axis offset is considered.

2: axial rotary axis offset is considered until SZS.

SZS frames include transformed rotations around the rotary axis.

24900 TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 C07 M1

degrees Position offset of rotary axis DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

24905 TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 C07 -

- Rotary axis offset TRANSMIT 1 BYTE NEW CONF

- -0 027/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

24910 TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 C07 M1

- Sign of rotary axis BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-187

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Specifies the sign which is applied to the rotary axis during the TRANSMIT

transformation for the TRANSMIT transformation.

Irrelevant for:

No TRANSMIT transformation

Anwendungsbeispiel:

$MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1= 1

Description:

Restriction of working range in front of/behind pole or no restrictions, i.e.

traversal through pole.

The setpoints have the following meanings:

0: No restrictions of working range. Traversal through pole.

1: Working range of linear axis for positions >=0,

(if tool length compensation parallel to linear axis equals 0)

2: Working range of linear axis for positions <=0,

(if tool length compensation parallel to the linear axis equals 0)

Description:

MD specifies the distance of the tool zero point referred to the appropriate

geometry axes valid with TRANSMIT active and without tool length offset

selected for the TRANSMIT transformation.

Programmed length compensations are added to the base tool.

Index i assumes values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to 3rd geometry axes.

Irrelevant for:

No TRANSMIT transformation

Anwendungsbeispiel:

$MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1[0]=20.0

24911 TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_1 C07 M1

- Restriction of working range in front of/behind pole BYTE NEW CONF

- -0 027/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

24920 TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 C07 M1

mm Vector of base tool on activation of transformation,

[Geo-Axis-Index]]: 0 ... 2

DOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-188

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Indicates the offset of the rotary axis for the second agreed TRANSMIT

transformation in degrees in relation to the neutral position while TRANSMIT

is active.

Related to:

TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1

Description:

0: axial rotary axis offset is not considered.

1: axial rotary axis offset is considered.

2: axial rotary axis offset is considered until SZS.

SZS frames include transformed rotations around the rotary axis.

24950 TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 C07 M1

degrees Offset of rotary axis for the 2nd TRANSMIT

transformation

DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

24955 TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_2 C07 -

- Rotary axis offset TRANSMIT 2 BYTE NEW CONF

- -0 027/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

24960 TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 C07 M1

- Sign of rotary axis for 2nd TRANSMIT transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-189

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Indicates the sign with which the rotary axis is taken into account in the

TRANSMIT transformation for the second agreed TRANSMIT transformation for each

channel.

Related to:

TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1

Description:

Restriction of working area in front of/behind pole or no restriction, i.e.

traversal through pole.

The assigned values have the following meanings:

1: Working area of linear axis for positions >=0,

(if tool length compensation parallel to linear axis equals 0)

2: Working area of linear axis for positions <=0,

(if tool length compensation parallel to linear axis equals 0)

0: No restriction of working area. Traversal through pole.

Description:

Indicates a basic offset of the tools zero for the 2nd TRANSMIT

transformation. The offset is referenced to the geometry axes valid when

TRANSMIT is active. The basic offset is included with and without selection of

the tool length compensation. Programmed length corrections have an additive

effect with respect to the basic tool.

The index i takes the values 0, 1, 2 for the 1st to 3rd geometry axes.

Related to:

$MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1

24961 TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_2 C07 M1

- Restr. of working range before/behind the pole, 2.

TRANSMIT

BYTE NEW CONF

- -0 027/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

24970 TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_2 C07 M1

mm Vector of base tool for 2nd TRANSMIT transformationDOUBLE NEW CONF

-30.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-190

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Transformation chain of the first concatenated transformation.

In the table, the numbers of the transformations which are to be concatenated

are given in the order in which the transformation has to be executed from BCS

into MCS.

Example:

A machine can be operated optionally either as a 5-axis machine or as a

transmit machine. A linear axis is not arranged at a right-angles to the other

linear axes (inclined axis).

5 transformations must be set via the machine data, e.g.

TRAFO_TYPE_1 = 16 (5-axis transformation)

TRAFO_TYPE_2 = 256 (Transmit)

TRAFO_TYPE_3 = 1024 (Inclined axis)

TRAFO_TYPE_4 = 8192 (Concatenated transformation)

TRAFO_TYPE_5 = 8192 (Concatenated transformation)

If the 4th transformation concatenates the 5-axis transformation / inclined

axis and the 5th transformation concatenates the transmit / inclined axis,

then (1, 3, 0, 0) is entered in the first table TRACON_CHAIN_1, and (2, 3, 0,

0) in the table TRACON_CHAIN_2. The entry 0 means no transformation.

The order in which the transformations are assigned (TRAFO_TYPE_1 to

TRAFO_TYPE_8) is arbitrary. The linked transformations do not have to be the

last. However, they must always stand behind all the transformations which

occur in a transformation chain. In the previous example, this means that,

e.g. the third and fourth transformations must not be switched.

However, it would be possible to define a further, sixth transformation, if

this does not go into a linked transformation.

Transformations cannot be linked with one another at will.

The following limitations apply in SW version 5:

The first transformation in the chain must be an orientation transformation

(3- , 4- , 5-axis transformation, nutator) transmit or peripheral curve

transformation. The second transformation must be an inclined axis

transformation.

No more than two transformations may be linked.

24995 TRACON_CHAIN_1 C07 M1

- Transformation grouping DWORD NEW CONF

- 40 087/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-191

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Transformation chain of the first concatenated transformation.

In the table, the numbers of the transformations which are to be concatenated

are given in the order in which the transformation has to be executed from BCS

into MCS.

Example:

A machine can be operated optionally either as a 5-axis machine or as a

transmit machine. A linear axis is not arranged at a right-angles to the other

linear axes (inclined axis).

Transformation chain of the second concatenated transformation.

Example: 5 transformations must be set via the machine data

TRAFO_TYPE_1 = 16 (5-axis transformation)

TRAFO_TYPE_2 = 256 (Transmit)

TRAFO_TYPE_3 = 1024 (Inclined axis)

TRAFO_TYPE_4 = 8192 (Concatenated transformation)

TRAFO_TYPE_5 = 8192 (Concatenated transformation)

If the 4th transformation concatenates the 5-axis transformation / inclined

axis and the 5th transformation concatenates the transmit / inclined axis,

then (1, 3, 0, 0) is entered in the first table TRACON_CHAIN_1, and (2, 3, 0,

0) in the table TRACON_CHAIN_2. The entry 0 means no transformation.

The order in which the transformations are assigned (TRAFO_TYPE_1 to

TRAFO_TYPE_8) is arbitrary. The cocatenated transformations do not have to be

the last. However, they must always follow all the transformations which occur

in a transformation chain. In the previous example, this means that, e.g. the

third and fourth transformations must not be switched.

However, it would be possible to define a further, sixth transformation, if

this does not go into a concatenated transformation.

Transformations cannot be concatenated with one another at will.

The following limitations apply in SW version 5:

The first transformation in the chain must be an orientation transformation

(3- , 4- , 5-axis transformation, nutator) transmit or peripheral curve

transformation.

The second transformation must be an inclined axis transformation.

No more than two transformations may be concatenated.

24996 TRACON_CHAIN_2 C07 M1

- Transformation grouping DWORD NEW CONF

- 40 087/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-192

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Transformation chain of the third concatenated transformation.

See TRACON_CHAIN_1 for documentation.

Description:

Transformation chain of the fourth concatenated transformation.

See TRACON_CHAIN_1 for documentation.

Description:

Assignment of the high-speed input byte for "punching and nibbling"

Bit 0-7: Number of the input byte used

Bit 8-15: Free

Bit 16-23: Inversion mask for writing the hardware byte

Bit 24-31: Free

24997 TRACON_CHAIN_3 C07 M1

- Transformation grouping DWORD NEW CONF

- 40 087/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

24998 TRACON_CHAIN_4 C07 M1

- Transformation grouping DWORD NEW CONF

- 40 087/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

26000 PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTIN C01, C09 N4

- Hardware assignment for input byte for stroke control DWORD POWER ON

--0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-193

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

This data defines which input byte is to be used for the signal "travel

active".

= 1:

On-board inputs (4 high-speed NCK outputs) are used.

2, 3, 4, 5

The external digital NCK inputs are used

128-129:

Comparator byte (results from high-speed analog inputs or VDI

specification)

Related to:

NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK[n]

References:

/FB/, A4, Digital and Analog NCK I/Os

The signal is high active as default from software 3.2. That is there is wire

break monitoring. If the signal is low active then, e.g., the MD must be set

to the value MD ="H 0001 0001" for the outboard inputs.

Description:

This data defines which output byte is to be used for the stroke control.

Number of the high-speed output byte for "punching and nibbling"

Bit 0-7: Number of the output byte used

Bit 8-15: Free

Bit 16-23: Inversion mask for writing the hardware byte

Bit 24-31: Free

Possible inputs:

840D on-board outputs (4 high-speed + 4 bits via VDI specification)

2, 3, 4, 5

External digital outputs (high-speed NCK O/I or VDI specification)

26002 PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTOUT C01, C09 N4

- Hardware assignment for output byte for stroke

control

DWORD POWER ON

--0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-194

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Related to:

NIBBLE_PUNCH_OUTMASK[n]

References:

/FB/, A4, Digital and Analog NCK I/Os

Description:

Mask for high-speed output bits for punching and nibbling.

Byte 1: Contains the bit for stroke release

Bytes 2-8: Currently free

Special cases:

Only NIBBLE_PUNCH_OUTMASK[0] is significant.

This is used to define the output bit for the signal "Release stroke".

Related to:

PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTOUT

Description:

This data can define up to 8 byte masks for the output of the high-speed bits.

The standard assignment of this data is as follows:

26004 NIBBLE_PUNCH_OUTMASK C01, C09 N4

- Mask for fast output bits BYTE POWER ON

-81, 0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

26006 NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK C01, C09 N4

- Mask for fast input bits BYTE POWER ON

-81, 0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-195

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK[0]=1:

2° = first bit for the first punch interface (SPIF1)

NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK[1]=4:

Second punch interface (SPIF2), not available as standard

NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK[2]=0

...

NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK[7]=0

Note:

The significance of the bit to be defined must be input as a value (refer to

MD 26004: NIBBLE_PUNCH_OUTMASK[n]).

Special cases:

Only NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK[0] is relevant. This is used to define the input

bit for the signal "Stroke active".

Related to:

PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTIN

Description:

This data defines the special M functions for punching and nibbling.

Standard value Example

NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[0] = 0 20 End punching, nibbling with M20

NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[1] = 23 23 End punching, nibbling with M23

NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[2] = 22 22 Start nibbling

NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[3] = 25 25 Start punching

NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[4] = 26 26 Activate dwell time

NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[5] =122 122 Start nibbling with pretension,

stroke control at servo level

NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[6] =125 125 Start punching with pretension,

stroke control at servo level

NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[7] = 0 0 Not used

(in preparation)

Special cases:

If MD: PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION = 2 (M functions are interpreted directly by the

software), then MD: NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[0] =20 has to be set.

Related to:

PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION

26008 NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE C09 N4

- Definition of M functions DWORD POWER ON

- 8 0,23,22, 25, 26 - - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-196

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Defines the axes involved in punching and nibbling. That is all the axes

defined here must be at rest during punching and nibbling.

Related to:

PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE

Description:

This MD defines the ways in which punching and nibbling functions can be

activated:

PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION = 0

None of the punching or nibbling functions can be activated. The automatic

path segmentation is the only exception if it is enabled via MD:

PUNCH_PATH_SPLITTING.

PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION = 1

The functions are activated via language commands. If M functions are to be

used, then they must be programmed using macros.

PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION = 2

The M functions are interpreted directly by the software. Language commands

can still be used.

Note:

This option is intended only as a temporary solution.

Related to:

PUNCH_PATH_SPLITTING

NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE[n]

26010 PUNCHNIB_AXIS_MASK C09 N4

- Definition of punching and nibbling axes DWORD POWER ON

--7,0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

26012 PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION C09 N4

- Activation of punching and nibbling functions DWORD POWER ON

--0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-197

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Activation data for automatic path segmentation.

Value Significance

------------------------------------------------------------------

0 =

Automatic path segmentation only active with punching and nibbling.

1 =

Automatic path segmentation can also be activated without punching and

nibbling functions;

that is, it is programmable and be used NC internally

2 =

Automatic path segmentation can only be used NC internally;

that is it cannot be programmed.

Description:

This machine data defines how single axes that are also nibbling axes within

the meaning of MD: PUNCHNIB_AXIS_MASK are to behave.

In this case, there are the following options for the behavior of the single

axes during path segmentation and stroke control:

26014 PUNCH_PATH_SPLITTING C09 N4

- Activation of automatic path segmentation DWORD POWER ON

--2 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

26016 PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE C09 N4

- Behavior of individual axes with automatic path

segmentation

DWORD POWER ON

--1,0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-198

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE = 0

No special behavior during automatic path segmentation. If the single axes are

programmed together with path axes in one block then their total traversing

path is split up according to the path axes. That is the pure geometric

relationship between the single axes and path axes is identical to the

undivided motion. If the single axes are programmed without the path axes but

with SPN=<value> then the path is divided accordng to the programmed SPN

value.

PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE = 1

In this case, the path of the single axes, if they are programmed together

with path axes, are generally traversed in the first section (that is

independently of the currently active type of interpolation).

PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE = 2

In this case the single axes behave with linear interpolation in the same way

as with PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE = 1, with all other types of interpolation, in

the same way as with PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE = 0.

Related to:

PUNCHNIB_AXIS_MASK

Description:

To minimize any dead times due to the reaction time of the punching unit, it

is possible to release the stroke before reaching the in-position window of

the axes. The reference time for this is the interpolation end. Since there is

normally a delay of some interpolation cycles after reaching the interpolation

end (depending on the machine dynamics) until the axes actually come into

position, the prestart time is a delay time with respect to reaching the

interpolation end.

The function is therefore coupled to G603 (block change at the end of

interpolation).

The time can be set via the machine data NIBBLE_PRE_START_TIME).

Example:

With an interpolation cycle of 5 µs, a stroke shall be released 2 cycles

after reaching the interpolation end. In this case, the value 0.010 s must

be selected for NIBBLE_PRE_START_TIME. If a value that is not integrally

divisible by the set interpolation time is selected, then the stroke is

initiated in the interpolation cycle following the set time.

26018 NIBBLE_PRE_START_TIME C09 N4

s Delay time for nibbling/punching with G603 DOUBLE POWER ON

--0. --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-199

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

When stroke active signal is set, for example by punch overshoots between the

strokes, then the interpolation is stopped. It is also possible to generate

the message "unclean punch signal" as a function of machine data

NIBBLE_SIGNAL_CHECK.

0: No error message when the punching signal is irregular

1: Alarm, when the punching signal is irregular between strokes

Description:

Parameterization of the "block display with absolute values" function

Bit 0 = 1 :

The position values of the transverse axis are always displayed as diameter

values.

Transverse axes can be applied via MD20100 or MD30460, bit2.

26020 NIBBLE_SIGNAL_CHECK C09 N4

- Alarm on chattering punching signal DWORD POWER ON

--0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

27100 ABSBLOCK_FUNCTION_MASK N01 -

- Parameterize the block display with absolute values DWORD POWER ON

- - 0x0 0 0x1 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-200

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

27200 MMC_INFO_NO_UNIT EXP, - -

- HMI info (without physical unit) DOUBLE POWER ON

- 80 45., 2., 0., -1., 100.,

--0/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

27201 MMC_INFO_NO_UNIT_STATUS EXP, - -

- HMI status info (without physical unit) BYTE POWER ON

-801 --0/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

27202 MMC_INFO_POSN_LIN EXP, - -

mm HMI info (linear positions) DOUBLE POWER ON

- 50 0., 1., 100., 1000. - - 0/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-201

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

27203 MMC_INFO_POSN_LIN_STATUS EXP, - -

- HMI status info (linear positions) BYTE POWER ON

-501 --0/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

27204 MMC_INFO_VELO_LIN EXP, - -

mm/min HMI info (linear velocities) DOUBLE POWER ON

- 16 10., 2000., 10000.,

300., 1000.,0.

--0/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

27205 MMC_INFO_VELO_LIN_STATUS EXP, - -

- HMI status info (linear velocities) BYTE POWER ON

-161,0 --0/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-202

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

27206 MMC_INFO_CUT_SPEED EXP, - -

m/min HMI info (cutting speed) DOUBLE POWER ON

-5100.,0.--0/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

27207 MMC_INFO_CUT_SPEED_STATUS EXP, - -

- HMI status info (cutting speed) BYTE POWER ON

-51,0 --0/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

27208 MMC_INFO_REV_FEED EXP, - -

mm/rev HMI info (feed) DOUBLE POWER ON

- 10 1.,0.100,0. - - 0/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-203

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

A version information freely available to the user

(is indicated in the version screen)

Description:

Selection of the technology for display and operating purposes (HMI)

0: Milling

1: Turning

This makes technology-dependent displays and softkeys available in the HMI.

Special cases:

27209 MMC_INFO_REV_FEED_STATUS EXP, - -

- HMI status info (feed) BYTE POWER ON

-101,0 --0/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

27400 OEM_CHAN_INFO A01, A11 -

- OEM version information STRING POWER ON

-3"" --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

27800 TECHNOLOGY_MODE C09 A2

- Technology in channel BYTE NEW CONF

--0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 21 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 21 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-204

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The channel-specific timers can be activated/deactivated through this machine

data.

Meaning:

Bit 0 = 0No measurement of the total runtime for all part programs

Bit 0 = 1The measurement of the total runtime for all part programs

is active ( $AC_OPERATING_TIME )

Bit 1 = 0No measurement of the current program runtime

Bit 1 = 1The measurement of the current program runtime is active

( $AC_CYCLE_TIME )

Bit 2 = 0No measurement of the tool cutting time

Bit 2 = 1The measurement of the tool cutting time is active

( $AC_CUTTING_TIME )

Bit 3 Reserved

Further bits only for Bit 0, 1, 2 = 1:

Bit 4 = 0No measurement with active dry run feedrate

Bit 4 = 1Measurement also with active dry run feed

Bit 5 = 0No measurement in program test

Bit 5 = 1Measurement also in program test

Bit 6, 7 Reserved

Anwendungsbeispiel:

Special cases:

It is recommended that timers that are never used are deactivated. This helps

the free-up computational time other user applications.

27860 PROCESSTIMER_MODE C09 K1

- Activating the program runtime measurement DWORD RESET

- - 0x00 0 0x0FF 7/2

802d-cu3 - 0x07 - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 0x07 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 0x07 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - 0x00 - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - 0x07 - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - 0x07 - - 2/2

27880 PART_COUNTER C09 K1

- Activation of the workpiece counters DWORD RESET

- - 0x0 0 0x0FFFF 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-205

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The workpiece counters can be set with this machine data.

Meaning of the individual Bits:

Bit 0 - 3:Activation $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS

----------------------------------------------

Bit 0 = 1:Counter $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS is active

Further meaning Bit 1-3 only when bit 0 =1:

Bit 1 = 0:Alarm IS output when $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS

matches $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS

Bit 1 = 1:Alarm IS output when $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS

matches $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS

Bit 2, 3Reserved

Bit 4 - 7:Activation $AC_TOTAL_PARTS

-------------------------------------------

BBit 4 = 1: Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS is active

Further meaning Bit 5-7 only when Bit 4 =1:

Bit 5 = 0:Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS is incremented by 1 on output of M2/M30.

Bit 5 = 1:Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS is incremented by 1 on the M command from

MD 27882: PART_COUNTER_MCODE[0]

Bit 6 = 0:Counter $AC_TOTAL_PARTS also active in program test/block search

Bit 6 = 1:no processing $AC_TOTAL_PARTS in program test/block search

Bit 7 Reserved

Bit 8 - 11:Activation $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS

--------------------------------------------

Bit 8 = 1: Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is active

Further meaning Bit 9-11 only when Bit 8 =1:

Bit 9 = 0:Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is incremented by 1 on output of M2/M30.

Bit 9 = 1:Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is incremented by 1 on the M command from

MD 27882: PART_COUNTER_MCODE[1]

Bit 10 = 0:Counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS also active in program test/block search

Bit 10 = 1:no processing $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS in program test/block search

Bit 11 Reserved

Bit 12 - 15:Activation $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS

---------------------------------------------

Bit 12 = 1:Counter $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is active

Further meaning Bit 13-15 only when Bit 12 =1:

Bit 13 = 0:Counter $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is incremented by 1 on output of M2/M30

Bit 13 = 1:Counter $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is incremented by 1 on output of the M

command from

MD 27882: PART_COUNTER_MCODE[2]

Bit 14, 15 Reserved

Anwendungsbeispiel:

related to:

MD 27882: PART_COUNTER_MCODE

IS "Required number of workpieces reached" (V3300 40001.1)

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-206

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

On activation of workpiece counting through MD 27880: PART_COUNTER the

counting pulse can be triggered by a special M command.

Only in this case are the values defined here observed.

Meaning:

The workpiece counters are incremented by 1 at the IS signal output of the

described

M command. The following applies:

$PART_COUNTER_MCODE[0] for $AC_TOTAL_PARTS

$PART_COUNTER_MCODE[1] for $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS

$PART_COUNTER_MCODE[2] for $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS

Anwendungsbeispiel:

related to:

MD 27880: PART_COUNTER

Description:

A TO unit is assigned to each channel through a default setting. The memory is

thus reserved for the data blocks (tools, magazines).

A TOA unit can also be assigned to several channels.

Def.: The TOA area is the sum of all TOA and magazine blocks in the NC.

The TOA unit consists of a TOA block and, with activated TM function, a

magazine block.

Special cases:

The backup data are lost if this machine data is altered!

27882 PART_COUNTER_MCODE C09 K1

- Workpiece counting via M command BYTE POWER ON

- 3 2 0 99 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/2

28085 MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT C02, C09 FBW,S7

- Assignment of a TO unit to a channel (SRAM) DWORD POWER ON

- - 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,1

1,12,13,14,15,16

1107/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-207

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The input value defines the number of block elements that can be used for

compile cycles.

In the case of software version 2, approximately 1.2KB of dynamic memory is

required per block element.

Description:

The value defines the total capacity of block memory available to the user in

the dynamic memory area for the compile cycles. The memory is allocated in

staggered blocks of 128 bytes.

28090 MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_ELEMENTS EXP, C02 S7

- Number of block elements for compile cycles (DRAM)DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 130 7/1

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

28100 MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_USER_MEM EXP, C02 S7

- Size of block memory for compile cycles (DRAM), in

DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 64000 7/1

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

28105 MM_NUM_CC_HEAP_MEM EXP, C02 S7

- Heap memory in kbytes for compile-cycle

applications (DRAM)

DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 64000 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-208

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Size of the heap memory in kbytes which can be used by the compile cycle user.

Dynamic memory is reserved.

The memory is allocated in subdivisions of 128 byte blocks.

The start address and the size of the reserved memory is made available via a

binding, the management lies in the hands of the CC user.

Description:

Defines the number of elements which the user has available for programming

link variables ($A_DLx). This number also applies to block search, but not to

synchronized actions.

The memory requirement is ca. 24 bytes per element.

One element is needed for each write action when writing NCU-link variables in

quick succession. However, the number of elements can be reduced if the

accessing actions are made separately (block transport has already been

accomplished).

Description:

This machine data defines how many blocks are set up for channel-specific

protection zones.

Related to:

MD 28210: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIVE

(number of simultaneously active protection zones)

MD 18190: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK

(number of files for machine-related protection zones (SRAM))

References:

/FB/, A3, "Axis/Contour Tunnel Monitoring, Protection Zones"

28160 MM_NUM_LINKVAR_ELEMENTS C02 B3

- Number of elements for writing NCU-link variables DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 32000 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

28200 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN C02, C06, C09 S7

- Number of files for channel-specific protection zones

(SRAM)

DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 10 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-209

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data defines the number of protection zones that may be activated

simultaneously for each channel.

It is not practical to enter a numerical value higher than MD 18190:

MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK + MD 28200: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN.

Related to:

MD 28200: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN

(Number of blocks for channel-specific protection zones)

MD 18190: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK

(Number of files for machine-related protection zones (SRAM))

References:

/FB1/ Function Manual Basic Functions; Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones (A3)

Description:

This machine data defines for each channel how many internal contour elements

in total are held available for active protection zones.

Dynamic memory is used.

The MD affects the memory requirements for the activated protection zones.

This machine data is active only if $MC_MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIVE is not

equal to 0.

28210 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIVE C11, C02, C06,

C09

- Number of simultaneously active protection zones in

one channel

DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 10 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

28212 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CONTOUR C11, C02, C06,

C09

- Elements for active protection zones (DRAM) DWORD POWER ON

--30 0507/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-210

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The expressions of the motion-synchronous actions are stored in memory

elements in the control. A motion-synchronous action occupies at least 4

elements.

It occupies:

- 1 element for each operand in the condition

- >= 1 element for each action

- 2 elements for each assignment

- 1 element for each further operand in complex expressions.

One element is ca 64 bytes.

The option "Synchronous actions stage 2" is required if the MD is to be

changed beyond its default value.

References:

Programming Guide, Advanced

Description:

The expressions of motion-synchronous actions are stored in memory elements of

the control. A motion-synchronous action assigns at least 4 elements.

28250 MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS C02, - S5,FBSY

- Number of elements for expressions in synchronized

actions

DWORD POWER ON

- - 159 0 32000 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

28251 MM_NUM_SAFE_SYNC_ELEMENTS C02, - S5,FBSI

- Number of elements for expressions in Safety synchr.

actions

DWORD POWER ON

- - 0 0 32000 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-211

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Assignments:

Each operand in the condition:1 element

Each action:>= 1 element

Each assignment:2 elements

Each additional operand in complex expressions:1 element

Also see:

MD 28250: $MC_MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS

Description:

Value:

0: Block display with absolute values deactivated

1: Block display with absolute values activated;

A display buffer with the following size is created:

($MC_MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE + $MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP) * 256 bytes

>= 128:Block display with absolute values activated;

A display buffer with the following size is created:

($MC_MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE + $MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP) * <value>

Description:

Size of upload buffer:

$MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF[0] : Number of blocks before current block

$MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF[1] : Number of blocks after current block

28400 MM_ABSBLOCK EXP, C02 S7

- activate block display w. absolute values DWORD POWER ON

- - 1 0 512 7/2

802d-cu3 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - 0 - - 2/2

28402 MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF EXP, C02 S7

- Setting of upload buffer size DWORD POWER ON

- 2 2, 4 0 32000 7/2

802d-cu3 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - 0 - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-212

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

The machine data is tested for the following upper / lower limits during

startup:

0 <= $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF[0] <= 8

0 <= $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF[1] <= ($MC_MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE +

$MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP)

When violating the limits, alarm 4152 is issued.

2.3.1 Axis-specific machine data

Description:

This MD is used to enter the number of the bus segment via which the output is

addressed.

0: Local bus (for 802d MCPA)

1: 611D drive bus for SINUMERIK 840D/810D (1st DCM)

2: reserved (previously local P bus)

3: reserved (previously 611D bus, 2nd DCM)

4: reserved (virtual buses)

5: Profibus DP (e.g. SINUMERIK 840Di)

6: reserved (same effect as 5)

Number Identifier Display filters Reference

Unit Name Data type Active

Attributes

System Dimension Default value Minimum value Maximum value Protection

30100 CTRLOUT_SEGMENT_NR EXP, A01 G2

- Setpoint assignment: bus segment number BYTE POWER ON

- 11 157/2

802d-cu3 - 5 0 5 2/2

802d-ng2 - 5 0 5 2/2

802d-ng3 - 5 0 5 2/2

802d-tm1 - 5 0 5 2/2

802d-tm2 - 5 0 5 2/2

802d-tm3 - 5 0 5 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-213

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

For a standard axis, the drive number must be entered.

Index [n] of the machine data is coded as follows: [setpoint branch]: 0

Description:

The number of the output on a module via which the setpoint output is

addressed is entered here.

Index[n] of the machine data is coded as follows: [setpoint branch]: 0

Description:

The speed setpoint output type is entered in the MD:

0: Simulation (no HW required)

1: Setpoint output active

The index [n] of the machine data has the following code: [setpoint branch]: 0

Anwendungsbeispiel:

Simulation: Machine functions can be simulated even if there is no drive

system.

30110 CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR A01, A11, - G2

- Setpoint: Drive number/module number BYTE POWER ON

- 1 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,1

1,12,13,14,15,16,17,

18...

1317/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 3,2,4,1 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 3,2,4,1 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - 2,3,4,1 - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - 2,3,4,1 - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - 2,3,4,1 - - 2/2

30120 CTRLOUT_NR EXP, A01, - G2

- Setpoint: Output to module: BYTE POWER ON

- 11 132/2

30130 CTRLOUT_TYPE A01, A11 G2,S6

- Output type of setpoint BYTE POWER ON

- 10 037/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-214

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Anwendungsbeispiel:

Unipolar output driver (for unipolar, analog drive actuator) -> analog

spindle:

For unipolar setting, only positive speed setpoints are supplied to the drive;

the sign of the speed setpoint value is output separately in its own digital

control signal.

0: Bipolar output ("10V) with pos./neg. speed setpoint value, controller enable

(regular case)

1: Unipolar output 0...+10V with enabling and direction signal

(controller enable, neg. direction of travel)

2: unipolar output 0...+10V with linkage of enabling and direction of travel

signals

(controller enabling pos. direction of travel, controller enabling neg.

direction of travel)

Description:

1: Spindle/axis with measuring system (in the motor or direct)

0: No measuring system (possible for spindles)

30134 IS_UNIPOLAR_OUTPUT A01 G2

- Setpoint output is unipolar BYTE POWER ON

- 10 027/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

30200 NUM_ENCS A01, A02, - G2

- Number of encoders BYTE POWER ON

- -1 027/2

802d-cu3 - - - 1 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - 1 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - 1 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - 1 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - 1 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - 1 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-215

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Number of the bus segment, through which the encoder is addressed.

The bus segments are assigned to control systems SINUMERIK FM-NC or SINUMERIK

840/810D.

The bus segments are assigned to the control systems.

0: reserved (previously local bus)

1: 611D drive bus for SINUMERIK 840D/810D (1st DCM)

2: reserved (previously local P bus)

3: reserved (previously 611D bus, 2nd DCM)

4: reserved (virtual busses)

5: PROFIBUS DP (for example SINUMERIK 840Di)

6: reserved (same effect as 5)

Index [n] has the following coding [Encodernr.]: 0 or 1

Description:

For a standard axis, the drive number must be entered.

Index [n] of the machine data is coded as follows: [encoder no.]: 0

30210 ENC_SEGMENT_NR EXP, A01, A02 G2

- Actual value assignment: bus segment number. BYTE POWER ON

- 21 157/2

802d-cu3 1 5 5 5 -1/-

802d-ng2 1 5 5 5 -1/-

802d-ng3 1 5 5 5 -1/-

802d-tm1 1 5 5 5 -1/-

802d-tm2 1 5 5 5 -1/-

802d-tm3 1 5 5 5 -1/-

30220 ENC_MODULE_NR A01, A02, A11 G2

- Actual value: Drive number/measuring circuit number BYTE POWER ON

- 2 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7... 1 31 7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - -/-

802d-ng2 1 3, 2, 4, 1 - - -/-

802d-ng3 1 3, 2, 4, 1 - - -/-

802d-tm1 1 2, 3, 4, 1 - - -/-

802d-tm2 1 2, 3, 4, 1 - - -/-

802d-tm3 1 2, 3, 4, 1 - - -/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-216

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The number of the input on a module via which the encoder is addressed is

entered here.

The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [encoder no.]: 0

Anwendungsbeispiel:

Simulation:

Machine functions can be simulated even if there is no measuring system.

Description:

The encoder type used is entered in the MD:

0: Simulation

1: Raw signal generator (1VPP, sin, cos)

4: Absolute encoder with EnDat interface

2, 3, 5: reserved

The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [encoder no.]: 0

Anwendungsbeispiel:

Simulation:

Machine functions can be simulated even if there is no measuring system.

30230 ENC_INPUT_NR A01, A02, A11, - G2

- Actual value: Input number on module/ measuring

circuit board

BYTE POWER ON

- 21, 2 127/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

30240 ENC_TYPE A01, A02, A11, - G2,R1

- Actual value: Encoder type BYTE POWER ON

- 20 057/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-217

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This MD defines in which way the absolute encoder position is buffered, and

whether a traversing range extension is active on software side (exceeding the

limits of the absolute value encoder area that can be displayed on the

hardware).

"0" = standard = traversing range extension (comp. ACT_POS_ABS) is active.

"1" = traversing range extension on software side is inactive.

When using an absolute linear scale, there will not be a traversing range

overflow for mechanical reasons. This MD is therefore only valid for rotary

absolute value encoders.

For rotary absolute value encoders, the traversing range that can be clearly

displayed on encoder side, is stored in ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO. You can do

without a traversing range extension without any problems (a hardware counter

overflow that might be within the traversing range, is concealed in the

software via shortest-path decision):

a. in linear axes or limited rotary axes, if the actual traversing range on

load side is smaller than the traversing range on load side that corresponds

to ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO.

b. in endlessly turning rotary axes (ROT_IS_MODULO = TRUE), if the absolute

encoder is connected on load side (no gear to be considered) or if "without

remainder" can be calculated:

Number of rotations on load side = ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO * gear ratio

(Example: ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO = 4096 encoder rotations, gear 25:32, i.e.

number of rotations on load side = 4096*(25/32)=3200 ).

Notice:

If you do not meet the conditions under a. or b., you run the risk of

getting a wrong absolute encoder position at next Power ON or encoder

activation after parking without prewarning, in case the traversing range

extension is not working. Therefore, the traversing range extension remains

active in the standard version.

Related to:

$MA_ENC_TYPE

$MA_IS_ROT_AX

$MA_ROT_IS_MODULO

$MA_ACT_POS_ABS

$MA_ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO

$MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR

30270 ENC_ABS_BUFFERING EXP, A01, A02 FBA,R1

- Absolute encoder: Traversing range extension BYTE POWER ON

- 20 017/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-218

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

1: Axis: The axis is defined as a "rotary axis" .

The units of the axis-specific machine data/setting data are interpreted

by the control in default setting as follows:

D position in degrees

D velocity in rev/min

D acceleration in rev/s2

D jerk limiting in rev/s3

Spindle:

For a spindle the machine data should always be set to "1",

or alarm 4210 "Rotary axis declaration missing" is sent.

0: The axis is defined as a linear axis.

Special cases:

For axis: alarm 4200 if the axis is already defined as a geometry axis.

For spindle: Alarm 4210

related to:

The subsequent machine data only become effective after activating the

MD 30300:IS_ROT_AX = 1:

- MD 30310:ROT_IS_MODULO(modulo conversion for rotary axis))

- MD 30320:DISPLAY_IS_MODULO(position display is modulo)

- MD 10210:INT_INCR_PER_DEG(calculation resolution for angular positions)

Description:

1: A modulo conversion is performed on the setpoints for the rotary axis..

The software limit switches and the working area limits are inoperative;

the

traversing range is therefore unlimited in both directions.

ROT_IS_AX must be set to "1"

30300 IS_ROT_AX A01, A06, A11, - R2

- Rotary axis BOOLEAN POWER ON

SCAL, CTEQ

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

30310 ROT_IS_MODULO A01, A06, A11, - R2

- Modulo conversion for rotary axis BOOLEAN POWER ON

CTEQ

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-219

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

0: no modulo conversion

Irrelevant for:

MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX = 0 (linear axis)

Anwendungsbeispiel:

Continuously rotating axes (e.g. for eccentric rotation, grinding, winding)

related to:

MD 30320: DISPLAY_IS_MODULO(position display is modulo 360°)

MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX = 1(rotary axis)

MD 36100: POS_LIMIT_MINUS(software limit switch minus)

MD 36110: POS_LIMIT_PLUS(software limit switch plus)

SD 43430: WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS(working area, limiting minus)

SD 43420: WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS(working area, limiting plus)

Description:

1: Position display "Modulo 360 degree" is active:

The position display of the rotary axis or spindle (for basic or machine

coordinate system) is defined as "Modulo 360 degree". In the positive

direction of rotation, the control periodically resets the position display

internally to 0.000 degrees after 359.999 degrees. The display range is always

positive and is always between 0 and 359,999 degrees

0: Absolute position display is active:

Contrary to the modulo 360 degree position display, for the absolute position

display - e.g. for a positive direction of rotation - after 1 revolution +360

degrees is displayed; after 2 revolutions, +720 degrees etc.

Here, the display range is limited corresponding to the linear axes.

Irrelevant for:

Linear axes MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX = 0

Anwendungsbeispiel:

- For endlessly rotating rotary axes (MD 30310:ROT_IS_MODULO = 1) we recommend

that the position display is activated with modulo 360 degrees.

- For spindles, the position display should always be activated with 360

degrees.

related to:

MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX (axis is rotary axis)

30320 DISPLAY_IS_MODULO A01, A06, A11 R2

- Position display "Modulo 360° BOOLEAN POWER ON

CTEQ

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-220

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The machine data specifies whether axis-specific interface signals are output

to the PLC during the simulation of an axis.

1: The axis-specific interface signals of a simulated axis are output to the

PLC.

The PLC user program can thus be tested even if the drives are not

available.

0: The axis-specific interface signals of a simulated axis are not output to

the PLC.

All axis-specific interface signals are set to "0".

Irrelevant for:

MD 30130: CTRLOUT_TYPE (output type of setpoint value) = 1

Anwendungsbeispiel:

MD: SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT = 0

For instance, this prevents the brake from being opened during the simulation

of an axis.

Description:

$MA_AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK defines for the leading spindle(s) of a coupling

(synchronous spindle coupling, ELG, tangential tracking, coupled motion,

master value coupling, master/slave) which language constructs/functions are

to be substituted by the user program set by $MN_LANG_SUB_NAME /

$MN_LANG_SUB_PATH (default: /_N_CMA_DIR/_N_LANG_SUB_SPF).

The substitution is executed only if a coupling is active for the relevant

spindle and in the case of a gear stage change only if a gear stage change is

actually pending.

30350 SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT A01, A06 G2

- Output of axis signals for simulation axes BOOLEAN POWER ON

CTEQ

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

30465 AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK N01 -

- Substitution of NC language commands DWORD POWER ON

- -0 037/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-221

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Bit 0 = 1:

Automatic (M40) and direct (M41-M45) gear stage change

Bit 1 = 1:

Spindle positioning with SPOS/SPOSA/M19

Description:

The axis is declared as an indexing axis by assignment of indexing position

table 1 or 2.

0:The axis is not declared as an indexing axis

1:The axis is an indexing axis. The associated indexing positions are stored

in table 1 (MD: INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1).

2:The axis is an indexing axis. The associated indexing positions are stored

in table 2 (MD: INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_2).

3:Equidistant indexing with SW 4.3 and higher (840D) and SW 2.3 and higher

(810D)

>3:Alarm 17090 "Value violates upper limit"

Special cases:

Several axes can be assigned to an indexing position table on the condition

that all the axes are of the same type (linear axis, rotary axis, modulo

360° function). If they are not, alarm 4000 is output during power-up.

Alarm 17500 "Axis is not an indexing axis"

Alarm 17090 "Value violates upper limit"

Related to:

MD: INDEX_AX_POS_TAB1 (indexing position table 1)

MD: INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1

(no. of indexing positions used in table 1)

MD: INDEX_AX_POS_TAB2 (indexing position table 2)

MD: INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2

(no. of indexing positions used in table 2)

For equidistant indexings with value 3:

MD: INDEX_AX_NUMERATOR Numerator

MD: INDEX_AX_DENOMINATOR Denominator

MD: INDEX_AX_OFFSET First indexing position

MD: HIRTH_IS_ACTIVE Hirth tooth system

30500 INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB A01, A10 T1

- Axis is an indexing axis BYTE RESET

- -0 037/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-222

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Defines the value of the numerator for calculating the distances between two

indexing positions when the positions are equidistant. Modulo axes ignore this

value and use $MA_MODULO_RANGE instead.

MD irrelevant for non-equidistant indexes in accordance with tables.

Related to:

MD 30502: INDEX_AX_DENOMINATOR,

MD 30503: INDEX_AX_OFFSET;

MD 30500: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB

Description:

Defines the value of the denominator for calculating the distances between two

indexing positions when the positions are equidistant. For modulo axes it

therefore specifies the number of indexing positions.

MD irrelevant for non-equidistant indexes in accordance with tables.

Related to:

MD 30501: INDEX_AX_NUMERATOR

MD 30503: INDEX_AX_OFFSET

MD 30500: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB

30501 INDEX_AX_NUMERATOR A01, A10 T1

mm, degrees Indexing axis equidistant positions numerator DOUBLE RESET

--0.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1

30502 INDEX_AX_DENOMINATOR A01, A10 T1

- Indexing axis equidistant positions denominator DWORD RESET

--1 1-7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-223

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Defines the position of the first indexing position from zero for an indexing

axis with equidistant positions.

MD irrelevant for non-equidistant indexes in accordance with tables.

Related to:

MD 30501, 30502, 30500

Description:

Hirth tooth system is active when value 1 is set.

MD irrelevant is axis is not the indexing axis.

Related to:

MD 30500, 30501, 30502, 30503

30503 INDEX_AX_OFFSET A01, A10 T1

mm, degrees Indexing axis with equidistant positions first index

position

DOUBLE RESET

--0.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1

30505 HIRTH_IS_ACTIVE A01, A10 T1

- Axis is an indexing axis with Hirth tooth system BOOLEAN RESET

CTEQ

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 1/1

30554 AXCONF_ASSIGN_MASTER_NCU A01, A06, A10 B3

- Initial setting which NCU creates setpoints for the axisBYTE POWER ON

- - 0 0 16 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-224

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data is evaluated only if the NCU is linked with other NCUs via

the NCU link communication.

Assignment of master NCU:

If a machine axis is activated via $MC_AXCONF_LOGIC_MACHAX_TAB in several NCUs

in an NCU cluster, then a MASTER NCU must be assigned to it. This NCU takes

over the setpoint creation for the axis after the runup. For axes which are

only activated in one NCU, the number of this NCU or 0 must be entered. Other

entries initiate a runup interrupt.

Description:

An axis for which this MD is set to 1 is not addressed by the local NCU at

runup. The associated drive is put into operation.

The axis is traversed by another NCU. The evaluation is made only if link

communication exists.

Not relevant for:

Systems without link modules

Related to:

MM_NCU_LINK_MASK

Description:

The fixed-point positions (max. 2) for each axis which can be approached when

G75 is programmed are entered in these machine data.

References:

/PA/, "Programming Guide: Fundamentals"

30560 IS_LOCAL_LINK_AXIS EXP, A01 B3

- Axis is a local link axis BOOLEAN POWER ON

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

30600 FIX_POINT_POS A03, A10 K1

mm, degrees Fixed-value positions of axis with G75 DOUBLE POWER ON

-20.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-225

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Value 1: Encoder is a linear scale

Description:

Distance of marks with linear encoders

Description:

The encoder lines per encoder revolution should entered in the MD.

The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [encoder no.]: 0

31000 ENC_IS_LINEAR A02, A11, - G2

- Direct measuring system (linear scale) BOOLEAN POWER ON

-2FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

31010 ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST A02, A11, - G2

mm Distance between reference marks on linear scales DOUBLE POWER ON

-20.01--7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

31020 ENC_RESOL A02, A11, - G2

- Encoder pulses per revolution DWORD POWER ON

-22048--7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-226

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The pitch of the leadscrew is entered in this MD.

Description:

1: Encoder for actual-value assignment is mounted directly at the machine.

0: Encoder for actual-value assignment is mounted on the motor.

The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [encoder no.]: 0

Special cases:

Entering the wrong information can cause an incorrect encoder resolution,

because, for example, the wrong gear ratios are used for calculation.

31030 LEADSCREW_PITCH A02, A11, - G2

mm Leadscrew pitch DOUBLE POWER ON

--10.0--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

31040 ENC_IS_DIRECT A02, A11, - G2

- Encoder is connected directly to the machine BOOLEAN POWER ON

-2FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

31044 ENC_IS_DIRECT2 A02, - -

- Encoder mounted on the additional gearbox BOOLEAN NEW CONF

-2FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-227

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

When using a load intermediate gearbox (for example for rotating tools,

compare $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_NUMERA and $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_DENOM), the encoder

installation location can be defined "on the output" of this load intermediate

gearbox:

Encoder installation "on the output of the load intermediate gearbox" is

configured by $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT=1 and $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT2=1 at the same time.

Encoder installation "on the input of the load intermediate gearbox" is

configured by $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT=1 together with $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT2=0.

A parameterization alarm will be output, if $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT2=1 is set

without $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT=1 (this combination has not been defined).

Description:

The denominator of the load gearbox should entered in the MD.

The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [closed-loop control

set of parameters set no.]: 0-5

Description:

The numerator of the load gearbox should entered in the MD.

The index[n] of the machine data has the code: Closed-loop control set of

parameters set no.: 0-5

31050 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM A02, A11, - G2

- Load gearbox, denominator DWORD POWER ON

- 6 1 1 2147000000 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

31060 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA A02, A11, - G2

- Load gearbox, numerator DWORD POWER ON

- 6 1 -2147000000 2147000000 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-228

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Intermediate gearbox denominator

The MD together with $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_NUMERA defines an intermediate

gearbox that acts as multiplier to the motor/load gearbox (described by

$MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA and $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM).

The load intermediate gearbox is inactive with default values 1:1.

Please consider $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT2 for encoder installation.

When functionality Safety Integrated (see $MA_SAFE_FUNCTION_ENABLE) is active,

the intermediate gearbox can be used, if

- the effectively active gear ratio from the motor to the tool is considered

in the safety-relevant machine data and if

- the safety-relevant secondary conditions are considered the gear ratios.

For more detailed information see the Safety Integrated Description of

Functions.

Description:

Intermediate gearbox numerator

Related to:

MD 31064

31064 DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_DENOM A02, - -

- Denominator additional gearbox DWORD NEW CONF

- - 1 1 2147000000 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

31066 DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_NUMERA A02, - -

- Numerator additional gearbox DWORD NEW CONF

- - 1 -2147000000 2147000000 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-229

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The denominator of the measuring gearbox should entered in the MD.

The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [encoder no.]: 0

Description:

The numerator of the measuring gearbox should entered in the MD.

The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [encoder no.]: 0

Description:

In conjunction with the setting MD 34200: ENC_REFP_MODE = 7, the MD causes a

signal propagation delay compensation in the positive direction of motion when

a Bero (zero mark) is used for defining position.

related to:

MD 34200: ENC_REFP_MODE

31070 DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM A02, A11, - G2

- Measuring gearbox denominator DWORD POWER ON

- 2 1 1 2147000000 7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

31080 DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA A02, A11, - G2

- Measuring gearbox numerator DWORD POWER ON

- 2 1 1 2147000000 7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

31122 BERO_DELAY_TIME_PLUS A02, A06 S1

s BERO delay time plus DOUBLE NEW CONF

- 2 0.000110 - - 7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-230

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

In conjunction with the setting MD 34200: ENC_REFP_MODE = 7, the MD causes a

signal propagation delay compensation in the negative direction of motion when

a Bero (zero mark) is used for defining position.

related to:

MD 34200: ENC_REFP_MODE

Description:

The limit velocity to which the axis can accelerate (rapid traverse limit) is

entered in this MD. This velocity is used for traversing when rapid traverse

G0 is programmed.

The maximum linear or rotary axis velocity should be entered in the MD in

accordance with MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX.

The maximum permissible axis velocity depends on the machine and drive

dynamics and the limit frequency of the actual-value acquisition.

Description:

The axis velocity entered here applies when the rapid traverse override key is

operated in JOG mode and when the feedrate override switch is set to 100%.

The value entered may not exceed the maximum permissible axis velocity

(MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO).

MD 32010 will not be used for the programmed rapid traverse G0.

Irrelevant for:

Operating modes AUTOMATIC and MDA

related to:

MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity)

IS "Rapid transverse override" (V3200 1000.5, V3200 1004.5, V3200 1008.5,

V380x 0004.5,)

IS "Feedrate override" (VB380x 0000) - axis-specific

IS "Rapid transverse override" (VB3200 0005) - for geom. axes

31123 BERO_DELAY_TIME_MINUS A02, A06 S1

s BERO delay time minus DOUBLE NEW CONF

- 2 0.000078 - - 7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

32000 MAX_AX_VELO A11, A04 G2

mm/min, rev/min Maximum axis velocity DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- - 10000. 1.e-9 - 7/2

32010 JOG_VELO_RAPID A11, A04, - H1

mm/min, rev/min Rapid traverse in JOG mode DOUBLE RESET

CTEQ

- - 10000. - - 7/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-231

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The velocity entered applies to traversing axes in JOG mode when the feedrate

override switch is at position 100%.

The velocity of MD 32020: JOG_VELO is only used when general setting data is

SD 41110:

JOG_SET_VELO = 0 for linear axes or

SD 41130: JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO = 0 for rotary axes.

If this is the case, the axis velocity is active for

- Continuous jogging

- Incremental traversing (INC1, ..., INCvar)

The value entered may not exceed the maximum permissible axis velocity

(MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO).

Spindle in JOG mode:

This can also be used to define the traverse velocity in JOG mode for specific

spindles if

SD 41200: JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO = 0.

The velocity is influenced by the spindle speed override switch.

Irrelevant for:

Operating modes AUTOMATIC and MDA

Anwendungsbeispiel:

If different velocities have to be set for the individual axes traversing in

JOG mode, this can be done for specific axes in this MD.

SD 41110: JOG_SET_VELO (or equivalent) may be set to 0!

related to:

MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity)

SD 41110: JOG_SET_VELO (JOG velocity for G94, linear axis)

SD 41130: JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO (JOG velocity for rotary axes)

SD 41200: JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO (JOG speed for spindle), which applies to all

spindles,

Axis-specific IS "Feedrate override" (VB380x 0000)

Axis-specific IS "Spindle override" (VB380x 2003)

Channel-specific IS "Feedrate override" (VB3200 0004) for geom. axes

32020 JOG_VELO A11, A04, - H1

mm/min, rev/min Axis velocity in JOG mode DOUBLE RESET

CTEQ

- - 2000. - - 7/2

32100 AX_MOTION_DIR A07, A03, A11, - G2

- Traversing direction DWORD POWER ON

--1 -117/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-232

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The traversing direction of the machine axis can be reversed with this MD. The

control direction is not reversed, i.e. closed-loop control remains stable.

0 or 1: Direction not reversed

-1: Direction reversed

Description:

The direction of evaluation of the rotary encoder signals is entered in this

MD.

0 or 1:Direction not reversed

-1: Direction reversed

If the direction is reversed, the control direction is also reversed if the

encoder is used for position

control.

The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [encoder no.]: 0 0

Special cases:

If the wrong control direction is entered, the axis may go out of control.

One of the following alarms is output, depending on the settings of the

associated limit values:

Alarm 25040 "Zero-speed monitoring"

Alarm 25050 "Contour monitoring"

Alarm 25060 "Speed setpoint limit"

The associated limit values are described in:

References: Chapter "Axis monitoring functions"

The control direction selected might be incorrect if an uncontrolled setpoint

jump occurs when a drive is connected.

Description:

Position controller gain, so-called servo gain factor

The input/output unit for the user is [(m/min)/mm].

That is, MD: POSCTRL_GAIN[n] = 1 corresponds to 1 mm following error at V =

1m/min.

32110 ENC_FEEDBACK_POL A07, A02, A11 G2

- Sign of actual value (control direction) DWORD POWER ON

-21 -117/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

32200 POSCTRL_GAIN A07, A11 G2

1000/min Servo gain factor DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 6 16.66666667 0 2000. 7/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-233

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

If the value "0" is entered the position controller is opened.

When entering the servo gain factor it is important to check that the gain

factor of the whole position control loop is still dependent on other

parameters of the controlled system. A distinction should be made between a

"desired servo gain factor" (MD: POSCTRL_GAIN) and the "actual servo gain"

(produced by the machine). Only when all the parameters of the control loop

are matched will these servo gain factors be the same.

Note:

Axes which interpolate with one another for a machining operation must either

have the same gain setting (i.e. an identical following error at the same

velocity).

The real servo gain factor can be checked with the following error in the

service displays.

The index[n] of the machine data has the following code: [closed-loop control

set of parameters set no.]: 0-5

Description:

Position controller integral action time for the integral component in s

The MD is only active if $MA_POSCTRL_INTEGR_ENABLE = TRUE.

A value of the MD less than 0.001 disables the integral component of the PI

controller. The controller is then a P controller which works with disabled

manipulated variable clamping (s.a. $MA_POSCTRL_CONFIG, bit0 = 1).

Description:

Enable of the integral component position controller; the position controller

is then a PI controller in which the manipulated variable clamping is disabled

(s.a. $MA_POSCTRL_CONFIG, bit0 = 1).

32210 POSCTRL_INTEGR_TIME A07 G2

s Position controller integral time DOUBLE NEW CONF

- - 1.0 0 10000.0 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

32220 POSCTRL_INTEGR_ENABLE A07 G2

- Enable integral component position controller BOOLEAN POWER ON

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-234

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Position overshoots may occur if the integral component is used. For this

reason, this functionality may only be used in special cases.

Description:

Configuration of the position controller structure:

Bit0 = 1: Manipulated variable clamping inactive

Bit4 = 1: Accelerated exact stop signal active

Description:

The acceleration defines a change in velocity of the axis against time.

Different axes do not have to have the same acceleration. The lowest

acceleration value of all the axes involved in interpolation is taken into

account.

In the case of rotary axes, the entered value corresponds to the angular

acceleration.

The machine manufacturer should determine for which continuous deceleration

and acceleration the machine is suitable. This value is entered in the machine

data.

The acceleration value is active for every type of acceleration and delay

operation.

Irrelevant for:

Error states that lead to rapid stop.

Description:

With MD $MA_DYN_LIMIT_RESET_MASK, the reset behavior of functions limiting the

dynamic response can be set.

The MD is bit-coded; currently only bit 0 (LSB) is assigned.

32230 POSCTRL_CONFIG A07 -

- Configuration of the position controller structure BYTE POWER ON

- - 0 0 17 7/2

32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL A11, A04, - B2

m/s², rev/s² Axis acceleration DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 5 1.0 1.0e-3 - 7/2

32320 DYN_LIMIT_RESET_MASK A05, A06, A10,

A04

- Reset behavior of dynamic response limitation. DWORD RESET

CTEQ

- - 0 0 0x01 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-235

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Bit 0 == 0:

Channel reset/M30 resets the programmed ACC to 100%. (compatibility: same

response as before)

Bit 0 == 1:

Programmed ACC is maintained beyond channel reset/M30.

Description:

Enables the axis-specific jerk limitation function for JOG and REF modes and

positioning axis operation.

related to:

MD 32430: JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK(axis-specific jerk)

Description:

The jerk limitation restricts changes to axis acceleration in JOG mode.

Irrelevant for:

Path interpolation and error states that lead to rapid stop.

related to:

MD 32420: JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE (enabling of axis-specific jerk limitation)

32420 JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE A04 B2

- Enabling axis-specific jerk limitation BOOLEAN RESET

CTEQ

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

32430 JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK A04 B2

m/s³, rev/s³ Axis-specific jerk DOUBLE RESET

CTEQ

- - 1000.0 1.e-9 - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

32431 MAX_AX_JERK A04 B1

m/s³, rev/s³ Maximum axis-specific jerk during path motion (in

AUTO, MDA mode)

DOUBLE NEW CONF

- 5 1.e6 1.e-9 - 3/3

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-236

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This maximum axis-specific jerk is active for path motion.

Path motion is possible in AUTO, MDA modes.

related to:

MD 32432: PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM acts at block transition

We recommend setting equal values for both MD.

Description:

The control limits the jerk (acceleration jump) at a block transition between

contour sections of different curvature to the value set.

Irrelevant for:

Exact stop

Anwendungsbeispiel:

related to:

Continuous path mode, SOFT type of acceleration

MD 32431: MAX_AX_JERK (maximum axis-specific jerk with path movement)

It is recommended to set both MD to the same values.

Description:

Acceleration procedures in continuous-path mode with Look Ahead which execute

with a higher frequency than that parameterized in this MD are smoothed as a

function of the parameterization in MD $MC_LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR.

It is always the minimum of all the axes participating in the path which is

determined.

If vibrations are aroused in the mechanics of this axis and if their frequency

is known, then this MD should be set to a lower value than this frequency.

32432 PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM A04 B1

m/s³, rev/s³ Maximum axis-specific jerk during path movement at

the block transition

DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

-51.e6--3/3

32440 LOOKAH_FREQUENCY EXP, A04 B1

- Smoothing frequency for Look Ahead DOUBLE NEW CONF

--10. --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-237

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Backlash between the positive and the negative direction of travel.

The compensation value input is

- positive if the encoder leads the machine part (normal case)

- negative if the encoder lags behind the machine part.

If zero is entered backlash compensation is deactivated.

Backlash compensation is always activated after reference point approach in

all modes.

The index [n] has the following coding: [encoder no.]: 0

Special cases:

related to:

MD 36500: ENC_CHANGE_TOL(backlash compensation partial section)

Description:

0: No friction compensation

1: Friction compensation with constant injection value or adaptive

characteristic

2: Friction compensation with learned characteristic via neural network

32450 BACKLASH A09 K3

mm, degrees Backlash DOUBLE NEW CONF

-20.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

32490 FRICT_COMP_MODE A09 K3

- Type of friction compensation BYTE POWER ON

- 11 027/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-238

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

1: Friction compensation is enabled for this axis.

Depending on the setting of MD 32490: FRICT_COMP_MODE, either "friction

compensation with constant injected value" or "QEC with neural networks"

becomes active.

In the case of neural QEC, the machine data should first be set to "1" when

a valid characteristic has been "learnt".

During the learning stage, the compensation values are injected

independently of the contents of this machine data.

0: Friction compensation is not enabled for this axis.

Thus, no friction compensation values are injected.

Related to:

MD 32490: FRICT_COMP_MODE

Friction compensation type

MD 32510: FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE

Friction compensation adaptation active

MD 32520: FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX

Maximum friction compensation value

MD 32540: FRICT_COMP_TIME

Friction compensation time constant

MD 38010: MM_QEC_MAX_POINTS

Number of interpolation points for QEC with neural networks

32500 FRICT_COMP_ENABLE A09 K3

- Friction compensation active BOOLEAN NEW CONF

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

32510 FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE EXP, A09 K3

- Adaptation friction compensation active BOOLEAN NEW CONF

-1FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-239

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

1: Friction compensation with amplitude adaptation is enabled for the axis.

With friction compensation, quadrant errors on circular contours can be

compensated.

Often, the injection amplitude of the friction compensation value is not

constant over the entire acceleration range. In this case, a smaller

compensation value must be injected for optimum friction compensation for

high accelerations than for small accelerations.

The parameters of the adaptation curve must be determined and entered in

the machine data.

0: Friction compensation with amplitude adaptation is not enabled for the axis.

MD irrelevant for:

MD 32500: FRICT_COMP_ENABLE = 0

MD 32490: FRICT_COMP_MODE = 2

Related to:

MD 32500: FRICT_COMP_ENABLE

Friction compensation active

MD 32520: FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX

Maximum friction compensation value

MD 32530: FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN

Minimum friction compensation value

MD 32550: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL1

Adaptation acceleration value 1

MD 32560: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL2

Adaptation acceleration value 2

MD 32570: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL3

Adaptation acceleration value 3

MD 32540: FRICT_COMP_TIME

Friction compensation time constant

Description:

With inactive adaption (MD32510=0), the maximum friction compensation is

injected all over the acceleration range.

With active adaption (MD32510=1), the maximum friction compensation is

injected according to the adaptation curve.

32520 FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX EXP, A09 K3

mm/min, rev/min Maximum friction compensation value DOUBLE NEW CONF

-10.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-240

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

In the 1st acceleration range ( a < MD32550), the injection

amplitude = MD32520 * (a/MD32550)

In the 2nd acceleration range (MD32550 <= a <= MD32560), the injection

amplitude = MD32520

In the 3rd acceleration range (MD32560 < a < MD32570), the injection

amplitude = MD32520 * (1-(a-MD32560)/(MD32570-MD32560))

In the 4th acceleration range (MD32570 <= a ), the injection

amplitude = MD32530

MD irrelevant for:

MD 32500: FRICT_COMP_ENABLE = 0

MD 32490: FRICT_COMP_MODE = 2 (neural QEC)

Related to:

MD 32500: FRICT_COMP_ENABLE

Friction compensation active

MD 32510: FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE

Friction compensation adaptation active

MD 32530: FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN

Minimum friction compensation value

MD 32550: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL1

Adaptation acceleration value 1

MD 32560: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL2

Adaptation acceleration value 2

MD 32570: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL3

Adaptation acceleration value 3

MD 32540: FRICT_COMP_TIME

Friction compensation time constant

Description:

The minimum friction compensation value is active only if "Friction

compensation with adaptation" (MD32510=1) is active.

The amplitude of the friction compensation value is injected in the 4th

acceleration range (MD32570 <= a).

MD irrelevant for:

MD 32510: FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE = 0

MD 32490: FRICT_COMP_MODE = 2 (neural QEC)

32530 FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN EXP, A09 K3

mm/min, rev/min Minimum friction compensation value DOUBLE NEW CONF

-10.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-241

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Special cases:

In special cases, the value for FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN may even be higher

than for MD 32520: FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX.

Related to:

MD 32500: FRICT_COMP_ENABLE

Friction compensation active

MD 32510: FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE

Friction compensation adaptation active

MD 32520: FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX

Maximum friction compensation value

MD 32550: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL1

Adaptation acceleration value 1

MD 32560: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL2

Adaptation acceleration value 2

MD 32570: FRICT_COMP_ACCEL3

Adaptation acceleration value 3

MD 32540: FRICT_COMP_TIME

Friction compensation time constant

Description:

The friction compensation value is injected via a DT1 filter.

The injection amplitude decays in accordance with the time constant.

MD irrelevant for:

MD 32500: FRICT_COMP_ENABLE = 0

Related to:

MD 32500: FRICT_COMP_ENABLE

Friction compensation active

MD 32520: FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX

Maximum friction compensation value

32540 FRICT_COMP_TIME EXP, A09 K3

s Friction compensation time constant DOUBLE NEW CONF

-10.015--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-242

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Weighting factor for feedforward control. Is normally = 1.0 on digital drives,

since these keep the setpoint speed exactly .

On analog drives, this factor can be used to compensate the gain error of the

drive actuator, so that the actual speed becomes exactly equal to the setpoint

speed (this reduces the following error with feedforward control).

On both drive types, the effect of the feedforward control can be continuously

reduced with a factor of < 1.0, if the machine moves too abruptly and other

measures (e.g. jerk limitation) are not to be used. This also reduces possibly

existing overshoots; however, the error increases on curved contours, e.g. on

a circle. With 0.0, you have a pure position controller without feedforward

control.

Contour monitoring takes into account factors < 1.0.

In individual cases, it can, however, become necessary to increase MD

CONTOUR_TOL.

Description:

This MD can be used to define whether the feedforward control for this

axis/spindle can be switched on and off in the part program.

0: Feedforward control cannot be switched on/off with FFWON or FFWOF.

1: Feedforward control can be switched on/off with FFWON or FFWOF in the part

program.

The last condition to be active remains active even after Reset (and therefore

with JOG).

32610 VELO_FFW_WEIGHT A07, A09 K3

- Feedforward control factor f. velocity/speed

feedforward control

DOUBLE NEW CONF

-61.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

32630 FFW_ACTIVATION_MODE A07, A09 K3,PA1

- Feedforward control can be activated from program BYTE RESET

CTEQ

--1 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-243

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Because the feedforward control for all axes of a channel is switched on/off

with FFWON or FFWOF, this MD should therefore have identical settings for axes

that interpolate with each other.

related to:

Description:

Activate dynamic stiffness control, if bit is set.

With active stiffness control, higher servo gain factors are possible (MD

32200: POSCTRL_GAIN).

Note on SIMODRIVE 611D:

Due to the higher computational load in the SIMODRIVE 611D, the setting of

the sampling cycles (current/drive module sampling time) should possibly be

adjusted in the 611D. For a single-axis drive module, the standard setting

(sampling time: 125 µs current, 125 µs speed controller) is sufficient; for

double-axis modules, the speed controller should possibly be increased (to

250 µs).

Description:

Configuration of dynamic stiffness control (DSC):

0: DSC in drive works with indirect measuring system (standard case)

1: DSC in drive works with direct measuring system

Note:

Availability of this function depends on the drive used; it is not

supported, for example, by SIMODRIVE 611D.

Note:

When the dynamic stiffness control of SINAMICS (P1193 unequal to 0) is

used, the value of this machine data must be set to 0.

32640 STIFFNESS_CONTROL_ENABLE A01, A07 K3,FBA

- Dynamic stiffness control BOOLEAN NEW CONF

CTEQ

-1FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

32642 STIFFNESS_CONTROL_CONFIG A01, A07 K3,FBA

- Dynamic stiffness control configuration (DSC) BYTE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 10 017/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-244

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Configuration of compensation dead time of the dynamic stiffness control (DSC)

with optimized DP cycle (e.g. SIMODRIVE 611U), unit: seconds

Description:

1: 'LEC' is activated for the axis/measuring system.

With LEC, leadscrew errors and measuring system errors can be compensated.

The function is only enabled internally if the measuring system has been

referenced (IS: "Referenced/synchronized 1" = 1).

Write protection function (compensation values) active.

0: 'LEC' is not active for the axis/measuring system.

Index[n] has the following coding: [encoder no.]: 0

related to:

IS "Referenced/synchronized 1"

32644 STIFFNESS_DELAY_TIME A01, A07 K3,FBA

s dynamic stiffness control: Delay DOUBLE POWER ON

CTEQ

- 1 0.0 -0.02 0.02 7/2

802d-cu3 - -0.0015 - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - -0.0015 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - -0.0015 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - -0.0015 - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - -0.0015 - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - -0.0015 - - 2/2

32700 ENC_COMP_ENABLE A09 K3

- Encoder/spindle error compensation (LEC ) BOOLEAN NEW CONF

-2FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME A07, A09 K3,G2

s Equivalent time constant of speed control loop DOUBLE NEW CONF

-60.008--7/2

802d-cu3 - 0.003 - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 0.003 - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 0.003 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - 0.003 - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - 0.003 - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - 0.003 - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-245

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This equivalent time constant is required for the "speed feedforward control"

function.

The value must correspond with the equivalent time constant of the closed

speed control loop.

Setting aid: Guide value is the time constant of the setpoint value smoothing

in the drive.

related to:

Description:

Path for triggering the lubrication pulse.

The status of the axis-specific IS: "Lubrication pulse" (V390x 1002.0) is

changed according to the specified path of the respective axis. This enables

travel-dependent control of a lubrication device for one axis by the PLC user

program.

The path is added up after POWER ON.

related to:

IS: "Lubrication pulse" (V390x 1002.0)

Description:

Machine axes with only one zero mark across their entire traversing range or

rotary axes with only one zero mark per revolution are not identified as a

machine axis with reference cam by the MD: REF_CAM_IS_ACTIVE. A machine axis

identified as a machine axis with reference cam accelerates, when the

plus/minus travel key is pressed, to the velocity defined in MD 34040:

REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER (reference point creep velocity).

Irrelevant for:

33050 LUBRICATION_DIST A03, A10 A2

mm, degrees Path for lubrication pulse PLC signal DOUBLE NEW CONF

--1.0e8--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

34000 REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE A03, A11 R1

- Axis with reference point cam BOOLEAN RESET

--TRUE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-246

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

0: Reference point approach in the positive direction

1: Reference point approach in negative direction

Approach with incremental measuring systems:

Starting via the traverse key is only possible in the specified direction. If

the wrong travel key is pressed, reference point approach does not start.

If the machine axis is positioned before the reference cam, it accelerates to

the velocity specified in MD 34020: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM (reference point

creep velocity).

If the machine axis is on the reference cam, it accelerates to the velocity

specified in MD 34020: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM and travels initially away from

the preset direction, away from the cam.

Note for absolute encoders:

The direction of the traversing key is also significant for calibrating the

absolute encoders: Approach the direction for fixed position and update values

in MD 34090 and MD 34210.

Description:

The reference point approach velocity is the velocity at which the machine

axis travels in the direction of the reference cam when the travel key is

pressed (phase 1). This value should be set at a magnitude large enough for

the axis

to be stopped before it reaches a hardware limit switch.

Irrelevant for:

34010 REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS A03, A11 R1

- Reference point approach in minus direction BOOLEAN RESET

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

34020 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM A03, A11, A04 R1

mm/min, rev/min Reference point approach velocity DOUBLE RESET

- - 5000.00 - - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-247

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

If the machine axis travels a path defined in this MD from the starting

position in the direction of the reference cam without reaching the reference

cam ("Reference point approach delay" interface signal is not set), the axis

stops and alarm 20000 "Reference cam not reached" is signaled

Irrelevant for:

Description:

1) For incremental measuring systems:

This is the velocity at which the axis travels between initial detection of

the reference cam and synchronization with the first zero mark (phase 2).

Traversing direction: opposite to the direction specified for cam detection

(MD 34010: REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS)

If MD 34050: REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERSE (direction reversal at the reference

cam) is set, then for synchronization with a rising reference cam edge, at the

cams, the axis travels at the velocity defined in MD 34020:

REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM.

2) Indirect measurement system with BERO on the load-side (preferred for

spindles)

At this velocity, the zero mark associated with the BERO is searched for.

The zero mark is accepted if the actual velocity is within the tolerance range

defined by

MD 35150: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL, from the velocity specified in

MD 34040: MD 34040: REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER[n].

34030 REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST A03, A11 R1

mm, degrees Maximum distance to reference cam DOUBLE RESET

- - 10000.0 - - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

34040 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER A03, A11, A04 R1

mm/min, rev/min Reference point creep speed [encoder number]: 0 DOUBLE RESET

- 2 300.00 - - 7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-248

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This can be used to set the search direction for the zero mark:

0: Synchronization with falling reference cam edge

The machine axis accelerates to the velocity defined in MD 34040:

REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER (reference point creep velocity) in the opposite

direction to that defined in MD 34010: REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS (approach

reference point in minus direction).

If the reference cam is exited ("Reference point approach delay" interface

signal is reset), the control synchronizes itself with the first zero mark.

1: Synchronization with rising reference cam edge

The machine axis accelerates to the velocity defined in MD 34020:

REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER (reference point creep velocity) in the opposite

direction to that specified in the MD: REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS. When the axis

leaves the reference cam ("Reference point approach delay" interface signal

is reset), the machine axis decelerates to a stop and accelerates in the

opposite direction towards the reference cam at the velocity defined in MD:

REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER. When the reference cam is reached ("Reference point

approach delay" interface signal is enabled), the control is synchronizing

with the first zero mark.

Irrelevant for:

Description:

For incremental measuring systems:

If, after leaving the reference cam ("Reference point approach delay"

interface signal is reset), the machine axis travels a distance defined in MD:

REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST without detecting the reference mark, the axis stops and

alarm 20002 "Zero mark missing" is signaled.

34050 REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERSE A03, A11 R1

- Change of direction on reference cam [encoder

number]: 0

BOOLEAN RESET

-2FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

34060 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST A03, A11 R1

mm, degrees Maximum distance to reference mark [encoder no.]: 0DOUBLE RESET

-220.0--7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-249

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Anwendungsbeispiel:

If, on incremental measurement systems, the control is required to detect

reliably that the same zero mark is always used for synchronization (to avoid

detection of an incorrect machine zero), the maximum value in this MD must not

exceed the distance between two reference marks.

Description:

With incremental measuring systems:

The axis travels at this velocity between the time of synchronization with the

first zero mark and arrival at the reference point.

Description:

34070 REFP_VELO_POS A03, A11, A04 R1

mm/min, rev/min Reference point positioning velocity DOUBLE RESET

- - 10000.00 - - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

34080 REFP_MOVE_DIST A03, A11 R1

mm, degrees Reference point distance/target point with distance-

coded system [encoder number]: 0

DOUBLE NEW CONF

- 2 -2.0 -1e15 1e15 7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

34090 REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR A03, A02, A08,

A11

mm, degrees Reference point offset/absolute offset, distance-

coded, n: [encoder number]: 0

DOUBLE NEW CONF

-, -

- 2 0.0 -1e12 1e12 7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-250

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

- Incremental encoder with zero mark(s):

After detecting the zero mark, the axis is positioned away from the zero mark

through the distance specified by MD 34080: REFP_MOVE_DIST +

REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR. Once the axis has traveled this distance, it has reached

the reference point. MD 34100: REFP_SET_POS is included in the actual value.

Override switches are effective during the traversing motion through

REFP_MOVE_DIST+REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR.

- Absolute value encoder:

REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR is effective as absolute offset. It defines the offset

between machine zero and the zero mark of the absolute measuring system.

Note: this MD is changed by the control during calibration and modulo

correction in conjunction with the absolute encoders!

Description:

The indicated value is equivalent to the distance between departure from the

reference cam and detection of the reference mark. If the values are too

small, there is a risk that the determination of the reference point will be

non-deterministic, due to temperature effects or fluctuations in the operating

time of the cam signal. The path covered can be used as a guide for setting

the electronic reference cam offset.

The machine data is read only.

related to:

REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE, REFP_SHIFT_CAM

34092 REFP_CAM_SHIFT A03, A11 R1

mm, degrees Electronic reference cam offset for incremental

measuring systems with equidistant zero marks

DOUBLE RESET

-20.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

34093 REFP_CAM_MARKER_DIST A03, A11 R1

mm, degrees Reference cam/reference mark distance DOUBLE POWER ON

-, READ

-20.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-251

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

- Incremental encoder with zero mark(s):

The position value which is set as the current position after detecting the

zero mark and traveling through the distance REFP_MOVE_DIST +

REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR (relative to the zero mark).

- Absolute value encoder:

REFP_SET_POS corresponds to the correct actual value at the calibration

position. The reaction on the machine depends on the status of MD34210:

ENC_REFP_STATE:

When MD 34210: ENC_REFP_STATE = 1, the value of REFP_SET_POS is transferred as

the absolute value.

When MD 34210: ENC_REFP_STATE = 2 and MD 34330: REFP_STOP_AT_ABS_MARKER=0, the

axis approaches the target position defined in REFP_SET_POS. The value from

REFP_SET_POS is used.

Note: MD: REFP_SET_POS[1]...[3] reserved - do not use.

related to:

Description:

0: Axis-specific referencing

Axis-specific referencing is started separately for each machine axis with the

"plus/minus travel keys" interface signal. All axes can be referenced at the

same time. If the machine axes are to be referenced in a particular order, the

following options are available:

34100 REFP_SET_POS A03, A11 R1

mm, degrees Reference point for an incremental system DOUBLE RESET

- 4 0. -45000000 45000000 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

34110 REFP_CYCLE_NR A03 R1

- Axis sequence for channel-specific referencing DWORD POWER ON

- - 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,1

1,12,13,14,15,16,17,

18...

-1 31 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-252

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

D The operator must follow the order himself after starting.

D The PLC must check the order after starting or define the order itself.

The machine axis is not started via channel-specific referencing . The NC

cannot be started without first referencing this axis.

-1:The machine axis is started using channel-specific referencing.

NC start is possible without referencing this axis.

Note:

The effect of inputting -1 for all axes of a channel can be achieved by

setting the channel-specific MD 20700: REFP_NC_START_LOCK (NC start disable

without reference point) to zero.

> 0:Channel-specific referencing

Channel specific referencing is started with the "activate referencing"

interface signal (V3200 0001.0). The control acknowledges a successful start

with the "referencing active" interface signal. Each machine axis assigned to

the channel can be referenced with channel-specific referencing (this is

achieved internally on the control by simulating the plus/minus travel keys).

MD: REFP_CYCLE_NR can be used to define the sequence in which machine data is

referenced:

1: The machine axis is started using channel-specific referencing.

2: The machine axis is started using channel-specific referencing if all of the

machine axes designated in MD: REFP_CYCLE_NR with a 1 are referenced.

3: The machine axis is started using channel-specific referencing if all of the

machine axes designated in MD: REFP_CYCLE_NR with a 2 are referenced.

4: The machine axis is started using channel-specific referencing if all of the

machine axes designated in MD: REFP_CYCLE_NR with a 3 are referenced.

Irrelevant for:

Axis-specific referencing

related to:

"Activate referencing" interface signal

"Referencing active" interface signal

Description:

With this MD, the electrical "polarity" of a BERO connected to the digital

drive is indicated.

REFP_BERO_LOW_ACTIVE = 0 means:

Non-deflected state 0 V (low), deflected state 24 V (high)

REFP_BERO_LOW_ACTIVE = 1 means:

Non-deflected state 24 V (high), deflected state 0 V (low)

The polarity is evaluated in the referencing mode ENC_REFP_MODE = 5.

34120 REFP_BERO_LOW_ACTIVE A02 M5

- BERO polarity change BOOLEAN POWER ON

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-253

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Note:

The use of this MD is allowed only in conjunction with ENC_REFP_MODE = 5

and the following SIMODRIVE 611 closed-loop control modules:

Performance 1 control module (1 axis) 6SN1118R0DG2*-0AA1

Performance 1 control module (2 axes) 6SN1118R0DH2*-0AA1

Performance 2 control module (2 axes) 6SN1118R0DK23-0AA0

Related to:

ENC_REFP_MODE

Description:

All mounted position measuring systems can be subdivided as follows for

referencing:

0: if absolute encoder exists: transfer of MD 34100: REFP_SET_POS

Other encoders: no reference point travel possible

1: referencing with incremental measuring systems:

Incremental rotary measuring system

Incremental linear measuring system (position measuring system)

Zero pulse on encoder track

(not with absolute encoders)

2, 3, 4, 5, 6: not available

7: synchronize spindle with BERO, configured approach velocity (MD 34040)

related to:

Description:

- Absolute encoder:

This machine data contains the absolute encoder status

0: Encoder is not calibrated

1: Encoder calibration enabled (but not yet calibrated)

34200 ENC_REFP_MODE A03, A02 R1

- Referencing mode [encoder no.]: 0 BYTE POWER ON

- 21 087/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

34210 ENC_REFP_STATE A07, A03, A02 R1

- Adjustment status of absolute encoder BYTE SOFORT

- 20 027/4

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-254

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

2: Encoder is calibrated

Default setting for new startup: Encoder is not calibrated.

- Incremental encoder:

This machine data contains the "Referenced status", which can be saved over

Power On:

0: Default setting: No automatic referencing

1: Automatic referencing enabled, but encoder not yet referenced

2: Encoder is referenced and at exact stop, automatic referencing active with

next encoder activation

Default setting for new startup: No automatic referencing

Description:

Number of encoder revolutions, which a rotary absolute encoder can resolve

(cf. also maximum multiturn information of the absolute encoder, cf. encoder

data sheet or, for example SIMODRIVE 611D-MD 1021 or 1031).

The absolute position of a rotary axis is reduced to this resolvable range

when an absolute encoder is switched on:

That means that a MODULO transformation takes place, if the actual position

sensed is larger than the position permitted by MD ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO.

0 degree <= position <= n*360 degrees, (with n = ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO)

Note:

With SW 2.2, the position is reduced to this range when the control/encoder

is switched on. With SW 3.6 and higher, half of this value represents the

maximum permissible travel distance with the control swiched off / the

encoder inactive.

Special cases:

For SIMODRIVE 611D, only powers of two are permissible values ( 1, 2, 4, 8,

16, ..., 4096).

If other values are entered, these are "rounded down" up to SW < 4.1 without

any further message. With SW 4.1 and higher, a rounded down value bcomes

visible in the machine data and is indicated by alarm 26025.

This MD is relevant only for rotary encoders (on linear and rotary axes).

Important recommendation:

The default value "1 encoder revolution" has been changed for SW 3.6 and

higher to "4096". The new value is a more robust setting for the most

frequently used encoder types.

34220 ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO A03, A02 R2

- Modulo range for rotary absolute encoder DWORD POWER ON

- 2 4096 1 100000 7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-255

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

When an encoder with a smaller multiturn information (encoder data sheet!) is

used or when singleturn encoders are used, the value must be reduced

accordingly. In either case, the value should be adjusted with multiturn

absolute encoders to the maximum variable supported by the encoder, in order

to be able to utilize the definite maximum travel range (Please observe: This

value also influences the permissible position offset with the encoder

inactive/Power Off).

Related to:

SIMODRIVE 611D-MD 1021, ENC_ABS_TURNS_MOTOR,

SIMODRIVE 611D-MD 1031, ENC_ABS_TURNS_DIRECT

Description:

Using low-resolution encoders, a more continuous motion of coupled path or

axis motions can be achieved with smoothed actual values. The bigger the time

constant, the better the smoothing of actual values and the larger the

overtravel.

Smoothed actual values are used for:

- Thread-cutting (G33, G34, G35)

- Revolutional feedrate (G95, G96, G97, FPRAON)

- Display of actual position and velocity, or speed respectively.

Description:

The machine axis that is to be used as a spindle is entered into this MD.

Anwendungsbeispiel:

34990 ENC_ACTVAL_SMOOTH_TIME A02 V1

s Smoothing time constant for actual values. DOUBLE RESET

- 2 0.0 0.0 0.5 7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 1 - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 1 - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 1 - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 1 - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 1 - - - 3/3

35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX A01, A06, A11 S1

- Assignment of spindle to machine axis BYTE POWER ON

- - 0 0 20 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-256

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

An example of a milling machine with 3 machine axes (X1, Y1, Z1) and a

spindle:

SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX[AX1] = 0 --->X1

SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX[AX2] = 0 --->Y1

SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX[AX3] = 0 --->Z1

SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX[AX4] = 1 --->Spindle no. 1 is the 4th machine axis

related to:

MD 30300: IS_ROT_AX (rotary axis/spindle)

MD 30310: ROT_IS_MODULO (modulo conversion for rotary axis/spindle)

This machine data must be set; otherwise, the alarms 4210 "Rotary axis

declaration missing" and 4215 "Modulo axis declaration missing" are output.

MD 30320: DISPLAY_IS_MODULO (display modulo 360 degrees)

IS "Spindle/no axis" (V390x 0000.0)

Description:

If the spindle motor is mounted to the spindle directly (1:1) or with a non-

adjustable gear ratio, GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE (gear stage change is possible)

must be set to zero. It is not possible to change the gear stage with M40 to

M45.

If the spindle motor is mounted to the spindle via a gearbox with changeable

gear stages, GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE must be set to one. The gear can have up

to 5 gear stages, which can be selected using M40, M41 to M45.

related to:

MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO (maximum speed for gear stage change)

MD 35120: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO (min. speed for gear stage change)

GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO and GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO must cover the whole speed range.

35010 GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE A06, A11 S1

- Gear stage change possible DWORD RESET

CTEQ

--0x0000x2B7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

35012 GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_POSITION A06, A11 S1

mm, degrees Gear stage change position DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

-60.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-257

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Gear stage change position.

The value range must be within the configured modulo range.

Related to:

MD 35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE, bit 1

MD 30330: MODULO_RANGE

Description:

With this MD, a gear stage can be defined which can be loaded into the axis

mode during the transition with M70. The parameter set zero used in axis mode

is to be optimized on this gear stage.

Significance of the values:

0: There is no implicit gear stage change with M70.

The current gear stage is retained.

1 ... 5:

There is a change into gear stage (1...5) during the execution of M70.

During the transition into axis mode without M70, there is monitoring for

this gear stage and alarm 22022 is issued if necessary. The condition for a

gear stage change is the general release of the function in MD 35010

GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE.

Secondary conditions:

When changing from axis mode into spindle mode, the configured gear stage

continues to remain active. There is no automatic return to the last active

gear stage in spindle mode.

35014 GEAR_STEP_USED_IN_AXISMODE A01, A06, A11 -

- Gear stage for axis mode with M70 DWORD NEW CONF

CTEQ

- -0 057/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

35020 SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE A06, A10 S1

- Initial spindle setting BYTE RESET

CTEQ

- -0 037/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-258

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE activates the operating mode of the spindle at the time

specified in MD 35030: SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK. The appropriate spindle

operating modes can be selected with the following values:

0 Speed mode, position control deselected

1 Speed mode, position control activated

2 Positioning mode

3 Axis mode

Related to:

MD 35030: SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK (activate initial spindle setting)

Description:

SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK specifies the time at which the operating mode defined

in MD 35020: SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE becomes effective. The initial spindle setting

can be assigned the following values at the following points in time:

0 POWER ON

1 POWER ON and NC program start

2 POWER ON and RESET (M2/M30)

Special cases:

If MD 35040: SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET = 1, the following supplementary

conditions are applicable:

- SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK should be set to 0

- If this is not possible, the spindle must be at standstill prior to

activation.

Related to:

MD 35020: SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE (initial spindle setting)

MD 35040: SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET (spindle active via reset)

35030 SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK A06, A10 S1

- Time at which initial spindle setting is effective BYTE RESET

CTEQ

--0x0000x037/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

35040 SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET A06, A10 S1

- Spindle active after reset BYTE POWER ON

CTEQ

- -0 027/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-259

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This MD defines the response of the spindle after reset (V3200 0000.7) and

program end (M2, M30). It is only active in the spindle control mode.

Open-loop control mode:- Spindle stops; applies to M2/M30 and Reset

- Program is aborted; applies to M2/M30

Oscillation mode:- Alarm 10640 "Stop not possible during gear change"

- Oscillation is not aborted

- Axes are stopped

- Program is aborted after gear change or spindle reset,

the alarm is cleared.

Positioning mode:- Is stopped

Axis mode:- Is stopped

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Open-loop control mode:- Spindle does not stop

- Program is aborted

Oscillation mode:- Alarm 10640 "Stop not possible during gear change"

- Oscillation is not aborted

- Axes are stopped

- Program is aborted after gear change, the

alarm is cleared and the spindle continues rotating at the

programmed M and S value.

Positioning mode:- Is stopped

Axis mode:- Is stopped

The IS "Spindle reset" (V380x 0002.2) is always active irrespective of

SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET.

Irrelevant for:

All spindle modes except control mode

related to:

IS "Reset" (V3200 0000.7)

IS "Spindle reset" (V380x 0002.2)

Description:

The maximum spindle speed is defined in this MD, which the spindle (the

spindle chuck with the workpiece or the tool) must not exceed. The NCK limits

an excessive spindle speed setpoint to this value. If the maximum spindle

actual speed is exceeded, even allowing for the spindle speed tolerance (MD

35150: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL, there is a fault in the drive and the IS "Speed

limit exceeded" (V390x 2001.0) is enabled. Alarm 22050 "Maximum speed reached"

is also output and all of the axes and spindles on the channel brought to a

standstill (provided the encoder is still functioning correctly).

related to:

MD 35150: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL (spindle speed tolerance)

IS "Speed limit exceeded" (V390x 2001.0)

Alarm 22050 "Maximum speed reached"

35100 SPIND_VELO_LIMIT A06, A11, A04 S1

rev/min Maximum spindle speed DOUBLE POWER ON

CTEQ

- - 10000.0 1.0e-3 - 7/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-260

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The maximum speed of the gear stage for automatic gear stage change (M40 ) is

defined. The gear stages must be defined by this MD and MD 35120:

GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT in a way that avoids gaps in the programmable spindle

speed range between the gear stages.

Incorrect

GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO [gear stage1] =1000

GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO [gear stage2] =1200

Correct

GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO [gear stage1] =1000

GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO [gear stage2] =950

related to:

MD 35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE (gear stage change is possible)

MD 35120: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO (minimum speed for gear stage change)

MD 35140: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (minimum speed for gear stage)

MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (maximum speed for gear stage)

Description:

With GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2, the 2nd data set for the max. speeds (upper

switching threshold) of the gear stages for the automatic gear stage change

(M40) is set. The gear stage must be defined via GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 and MD

35122: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 so that there are no gaps between the gear stages

in the programmable spindle speed range.

35110 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO A06, A11, A04 S1

rev/min Maximum speed for gear stage change [gear stage

number]: 0...5

(index 0 is irrelevant for spindles)

DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 6 500., 500., 1000.,

2000., 4000., 8000.

--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

35112 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 A06, A11, A04 S1

rev/min 2nd data set: Maximum speed for gear stage change DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 6 500., 500., 1000.,

2000., 4000., 8000.

0- 2/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-261

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Examples:

incorrect:

GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 [gear stage 1] =1000

GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 [gear stage 2] =1200

correct:

GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 [gear stage 1] =1000

GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 [gear stage 2] =950

Activation of the 2nd gear stage data block for tapping with G331/G332 via MD

35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE bit 5 of the master spindle.

Corresponding with:

MD 35140: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (min. speed of gear stage)

MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (max. speed of gear stage)

Description:

The minimum speed of the gear stage for automatic gear stage change (M40 ) is

defined.

Refer to MD 35120: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO for more information.

related to:

MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO (maximum speed for gear stage change)

MD 35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE (gear stage change is possible)

MD 35140: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (minimum speed for gear stage)

MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (maximum speed for gear stage)

Description:

In GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 the 2nd data block of the minimum speeds (lower

35120 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO A06, A11, A04 S1

rev/min Minimum speed for gear stage change [gear stage

number]: 0 ... 5

DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 6 50., 50., 400., 800.,

1500., 3000.

--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

35122 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 A06, A11, A04 S1

rev/min 2nd data set: Minimum speed for gear stage change DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 6 50., 50., 400., 800.,

1500., 3000.

0- 2/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-262

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

switching thresholds) of the gear stages for automatic gear stage change (M40)

is set. The gear stages must be defined with GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 and MD 35112:

GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 so that there are no gaps between the gear stages within

the programmable spindle speed range.

Examples:

incorrect:

GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 [gear stage 1] = 1000

GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 [gear stage 2] = 1200

correct:

GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 [gear stage 1] = 1000

GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 [gear stage 2] = 950

Activation of the 2nd gear stage data block for tapping with G331/G332 via MD

35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE bit 5 of the master spindle.

Corresponding with

MD 35140: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (min. speed of the gear stage)

MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (max. speed of the gear stage)

Description:

The maximum speed for the gear stage is defined. This speed can never be

exceeded in the currently engaged gear stage.

Special cases:

- When the closed-loop position control is enabled, then a limit is set to 90%

of the value (control margin)

- If an S value is programmed, that lies above the max. speed of the gearbox

stage selected, the reference (setpoint) speed is limited to the maximum speed

of the gear stage (for gear stage selection - M41 to M45); further, the IS:

"Programmed speed too high" is set.

- If an S value is programmed that lies above the max. speed for gear stage

change, a new gear stage is specified (for automatic gear stage selection

M40).

- If an S value is programmed, that lies above the max. speed of the highest

gear stage, the speed is limited to the max. speed of the gear stage (for

automatic gear stage selection - M40).

- If an S value is programmed for which there is no matching gear stage, then

a gear stage change is not made.

35130 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT A06, A11, A04 S1

rev/min Maximum speed for gear stage [gear stage number];

0 ... 5

DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 6 500., 500., 1000.,

2000., 4000., 8000.

1.0e-3 - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-263

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

related to:

MD 35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE (gear stage change is possible)

MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO (maximum speed for gear stage change)

MD 35120: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO (minimum speed for gear stage change)

MD 35140: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (min. speed of gear stage)

IS "Setpoint speed limited" (V390x 2001.1)

Description:

In GEAR_STEP_PC_MAX_VELO_LIMIT the maximum speed of the gear stage is set with

the position control active.

If value 0 is set (default), 90% of the value from MD35130:

GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (control margin) will become the max. speed of the

gear stage with position control active. This limit speed is limited to a

value that does not exceed MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT and MD 35100:

SPIND_VELO_LIMIT.

If an S value is programmed that exceeds the limit speed, the setpoint speed

is limited to the limit speed. In this case, the VDI interface signal

"Programmed speed too high" will be set.

Related to:

MD 35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE (gear stage change possible)

MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO (max. speed for gear stage change)

MD 35120: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO (min. speed for gear stage change)

MD 35140: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (min. speed of the gear stage)

35135 GEAR_STEP_PC_MAX_VELO_LIMIT A06, A11, A04 S1

rev/min Maximum speed of the gear stage with position

control

DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 6 0. 0 - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

35140 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT A06, A11, A04 S1

rev/min Minimum speed for gear stage [gear stage number]: 0

... 5

DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 6 5., 10., 20., 40., 80. - - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-264

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The minimum gear stage speed is entered. The speed cannot drop to below this

value, even if a very low S value is programmed.

The speed can only drop to below this minimum value as a result of the

signals/commands/states listed in "Minimum/maximum speed for the gear stage".

Irrelevant for:

Spindle mode, oscillation mode, positioning mode

Anwendungsbeispiel:

Smooth operation of the motor is not assured below the minimum speed.

related to:

MD 35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE (gear stage change is possible)

MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO (maximum speed for gear stage change)

MD 35120: GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO (minimum speed for gear stage change)

MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (max. speed of gear stage)

IS "Setpoint speed increased" (V390x 2001.2)

Description:

Factor for spindle speed for determining the tolerance in the spindle mode

control mode.

The set speed (programmed speed x spindle override, allowing for limits) is

compared with the actual speed.

- If the actual speed deviates from the setpoint speed by more than the

SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL, IS "spindle in setpoint range" (V390x 2001.5) is set to

zero.

- If the actual speed exceeds the maximum spindle speed (MD 35100:

SPIND_VELO_LIMIT) by more than SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL, the IS "Speed limit

exceeded" is set (V390x 2001.0) and alarm 22050 "Maximum speed reached" is

output. All axes and spindles of the channel are brought to a standstill.

Irrelevant for:

Spindle mode oscillation mode

Spindle mode positioning mode

related to:

MD 35500: SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START

MD 35100: SPIND_VELO_LIMIT (maximum spindle speed)

IS "Spindle in setpoint range" (V390x 2001.5)

IS "Speed limit exceeded" (V390x 2001.0)

Alarm 22050 "Maximum speed reached"

35150 SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL A03, A05, A06,

A10, A04

- Spindle speed tolerance DOUBLE RESET

- - 0.1 0.0 1.0 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-265

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

A limit for the spindle speed is entered, which is taken into account when the

IS "Velocity/speed limiting" (V380x 0003.6) is enabled. The control limits an

excessive spindle speed setpoint to this value.

Description:

If the spindle is in control mode, the acceleration in

GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL. is entered.

Special cases:

Thus the acceleration in speed control mode can be set so that the current

limit is reached.

related to:

MD 35210: GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL (acceleration in position control mode)

35160 SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT A06, A04 S1

rev/min Spindle speed limiting via PLC DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- - 1000.0 1.0e-3 - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

35200 GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL A06, A11, A04, - S1

rev/s² Acceleration in control mode [gear stage number]: 0

... 5

DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 6 30.0, 25.0, 20.0,

15.0, 10.0

1.0e-3 - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-266

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The acceleration in position control mode must be set so that the current

limit is not reached.

related to:

MD 35200: GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL

Description:

Second gear stage data set for maximum acceleration capability of the gear

stages in position control mode.

The acceleration in position control mode must be set so that the current

limit is not reached.

Activation of the 2nd data set for tapping with G331/G332 via MD 35010

GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE, bit 5 for the master spindle.

Related to:

MD 35210: GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL

MD 35200: GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL

MD 35220: ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT

35210 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL A06, A11, A04, - S1

rev/s² Acceleration in position control mode [gear stage

number]: 0 ... 5

DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 6 30.0, 25.0, 20.0,

15.0, 10.0

1.0e-3 - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

35212 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL2 A06, A11, A04, - S1

rev/s² 2nd data set: Acceleration in position control mode DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 6 30.0, 25.0, 20.0,

15.0, 10.0

1.0e-3 - 2/2

35300 SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO A06, A04 S1

rev/min Position control activation speed DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

-6500.0--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-267

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

When positioning a spindle that is not in position control mode, the position

control is not activated until the spindle has reached the speed defined in

MD: SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO.

Please refer to Chapter "Spindle mode, positioning mode" for a description of

spindle operating characteristics under various supplementary conditions

(positioning from movement, positioning from standstill).

related to:

MD 35350: SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR (direction of rotation during positioning from

standstill), if no synchronization is available.

Description:

After reaching the positioning end (exact stop fine) the time delay for block

search is activated at output of a collected positioning block (SPOS).

related to:

Description:

When SPOS is programmed, the spindle is switched to position control mode and

accelerates with the acceleration defined in MD 35210: GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL

(acceleration in position control mode) if the spindle is not synchronized.

The direction of rotation is defined by MD 35350: SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR

(direction of rotation for positioning from standstill).

SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR = 3 --->Clockwise rotation

SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR = 4 --->Counterclockwise rotation

related to:

MD 35300: SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO (position control activation speed)

35310 SPIND_POSIT_DELAY_TIME A06, A04 S1

s Positioning delay time [gear stage number]: 0 ... 5 DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 6 0.0, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2,

0.4, 0.8

--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

35350 SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR A06 S1

- Positioning direction of rotation for a nonsynchronized

spindle

BYTE RESET

CTEQ

- -3 347/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-268

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

During oscillation, the IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5) is used to

select a motor speed for the spindle motor. The motor speed is defined here.

This motor speed is independent of the current gear stage. In the AUTOMATIC

and MDA displays, the oscillation speed is displayed in the "spindle setpoint"

window until the gear is changed.

Irrelevant for:

All spindle modes except oscillation mode

Anwendungsbeispiel:

The to and fro oscillation of the spindle motor makes it easier to engage a

new gear

stage because the teeth on the gear wheels can mesh with each other better.

Special cases:

The oscillation acceleration defined in

MD 35410: SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL is valid for the oscillation speed defined in

this MD.

related to:

MD 35410: SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL (acceleration in oscillation mode)

MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT[n] (maximum speed of the gear stage)

IS "Oscillation via PLC" (V380x 2002.4)

IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5)

Description:

The acceleration specified is only effective for the output of the oscillation

speed

(MD 35400: SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO) to the spindle motor. The oscillation speed

is selected using the IS "Oscillation speed".

35400 SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO A06, A04 S1

rev/min Oscillation speed DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

--500.0--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

35410 SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL A06, A04, - S1

rev/s² Oscillation acceleration DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- - 16.0 1.0e-3 - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-269

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Irrelevant for:

All spindle modes except oscillation mode

related to:

MD 35400: SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO (Oscillation speed)

IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5)

IS "Oscillation via PLC" (V380x 2002.4)

Description:

With the IS "Oscillation speed", the spindle motor accelerates to the speed

specified in MD 35400: SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO. The start direction is defined

by this MD: SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR if IS "Oscillation via PLC" is not enabled.

0: start direction corresponding with the last direction of rotation

1: start direction in opposite direction of last rotation

2: start direction in opposite direction of last rotation

3: start direction is M3

4: start direction is M4

Irrelevant for:

All spindle modes except oscillation mode

related to:

MD 35400: SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO (Oscillation speed)

IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5)

IS "Oscillation via PLC" (V380x 2002.4)

35430 SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR A06 S1

- Oscillation start direction BYTE RESET

CTEQ

- -0 047/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

35440 SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW A06 S1

s Oscillation time for M3 direction DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

--1.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-270

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The oscillation time defined here acts in direction of M3.

Irrelevant for:

- All spindle modes except oscillation mode

- Oscillation set by the PLC (IS "Oscillation via PLC" (V380x 2002.4))

related to:

MD 35450: SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW (Oscillation time for M4 direction)

IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5)

IS "Oscillation via PLC" (V380x 2002.4)

Description:

The oscillation time defined here acts in direction of M4.

Irrelevant for:

- All spindle modes except oscillation mode

- Oscillation set by the PLC (IS "Oscillation via PLC" (V380x 2002.4))

related to:

MD 35440: SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW (Oscillation time for M3 direction)

IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5)

IS "Oscillation via PLC" (V380x 2002.4)

Description:

0: path interpolation is not influenced

1: path interpolation is only enabled when the spindle has reached the

specified speed (tolerance band is set via MD35150).

2: function as for value =1, in addition:

Traveling path axes are also stopped before machining. e.g. continuous path

mode (G64) and change of rapid traverse (G60) in one machining block (G1,

G2,...). The path is stopped at the last G0 block and does not start moving

until the spindle has reached the speed setpoint range.

35450 SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW A06 S1

s Oscillation time for M4 direction DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

--0.5 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

35500 SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START A03, A06, A10 S1

- Feed enable with spindle in setpoint range BYTE RESET

CTEQ

- -1 027/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-271

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Anwendungsbeispiel:

see MD 35510

related to:

MD 35150: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL (spindle speed tolerance)

IS "Spindle in setpoint range" (V390x 2001.5)

Description:

When a spindle is stopped (M5), the path feed is disabled if this MD is

enabled and the spindle is in control mode.

When the spindle has come to a standstill (IS, "axis/spindle stationary"

(V390x 0001.4) is enabled), the path feed is enabled.

Anwendungsbeispiel:

The MD 35500 and this MD 35510 can be used to control the path feed according

to the actual spindle speed (control mode):

- If the spindle is in the acceleration phase (programmed setpoint not yet

reached), the path feed is disabled.

- If the actual speed deviates from the speed setpoint by less than the

spindle speed tolerance (MD 35150: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL), the path feed is

enabled..

- If the spindle is in the braking phase, the path feed is disabled.

- If the spindle is signaled to be stationary (IS: "Axis/spindle stationary "

V390x 0001.4)

path feed is enabled.

- In blocks with G0, the modification is not active.

related to:

MD 35500: SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START (feed enable for spindle in setpoint

range)

35510 SPIND_STOPPED_AT_IPO_START A03, A06, A10 S1

- Feed enable with stationary spindle BOOLEAN RESET

CTEQ

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

35550 DRILL_VELO_LIMIT A06, A11, A04 -

rev/min Maximum speeds for tapping DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 6 10000. 1 - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-272

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Limit speed values for tapping without compensating chuck with G331/G332.

The maximum speed of the linear motor characteristic range (constant

acceleration capacity) must be specified depending on the gear stage.

Description:

An NC block has been completed when the distance in between the actual

position of the path axes and the setpoint (reference) position is the exact

stop limit that has been entered. If the actual position of a path axis is not

within these limits, the NC block is not considered complete and continued

part program processing is not possible. Transition to the next block can be

influenced by the value entered. The larger the value, the earlier block

change can be initiated. If the defined exact stop limit is not reached,

- the block is not considered completed,

- it is not possible to continue traversing the axis,

- alarm 25080 positioning monitoring is triggered after the time in MD 36020:

POSITIONING_TIME (monitoring time exact stop fine) has elapsed,

- the direction of movement +/- is displayed for the axis in the positioning

display. The exact stop window is also evaluated for spindles in position

control mode.

Special cases:

This MD may not be smaller than the setting in MD 36010: STOP_LIMIT_FINE

(exact stop fine). In order to achieve the same block change behavior as for

exact stop, the exact stop coarse window can be the same as that for exact

stop fine.

This MD may not be equal to or larger than the setting in MD 36030:

STANDSTILL_POS_TOL (zero-speed tolerance).

related to:

MD 36020: POSITIONING_TIME (exact stop fine delay time)

36000 STOP_LIMIT_COARSE A05 B1

mm, degrees Exact stop coarse DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.04--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

36010 STOP_LIMIT_FINE A05 B1

mm, degrees Exact stop fine DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.01--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-273

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

See MD 3600: STOP_LIMIT_COARSE (exact stop coarse)

Special cases:

This MD must not be greater than the setting in MD 36000: STOP_LIMIT_COARSE

(exact stop coarse).

This MD must not be equal to or greater than the setting in MD 36030:

STANDSTILL_POS_TOL (zero-speed tolerance).

related to:

MD 36020: POSITIONING_TIME (exact stop fine delay time)

Description:

This MD defines the time after which the following error must have reached the

limit value for exact stop fine when approaching a position (position setpoint

has reached the target). If this is not the case, alarm 25080 "Positioning

monitoring" is set and the relevant axis is stopped.

The MD setting should be large enough that the monitoring function does not

respond during normal operation, as the complete traversing operation

(acceleration, constant travel, deceleration) is monitored by other functions.

related to:

MD 36010: STOP_LIMIT_FINE (exact stop fine)

Description:

At the end of a motion block (position setpoint has reached the target),

monitoring checks whether the axis is not more than the distance specified in

MD 36040:

STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME (zero-speed monitoring delay time) from its setpoint

after the configurable delay time in MD 36060: STANDSTILL_POS_TOL (zero-speed

tolerance) has expired.

36020 POSITIONING_TIME A05 B1,A3

s Time delay exact stop fine DOUBLE NEW CONF

--1.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

36030 STANDSTILL_POS_TOL A05 A3

mm, degrees Zero-speed tolerance DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.2 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-274

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

If the setpoint position zero-speed tolerance has been violated in any

direction, alarm 25040 "Zero-speed monitoring" is triggered and the axis is

brought to a standstill.

Special cases:

The zero-speed tolerance must be greater than the "Exact stop limit coarse".

related to:

MD 36040: STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME (zero-speed monitoring delay time)

Description:

See MD 36030: STANDSTILL_POS_TOL (zero-speed tolerance)

related to:

MD 36030: STANDSTILL_POS_TOL (zero-speed tolerance)

Description:

The clamping monitor is activated by "Clamping active" interface signal (V380x

0002.3). If the monitored axis has been pushed out of the setpoint position

(exact stop limit) by more than the clamping tolerance, alarm 26000 "Clamping

monitoring" is triggered and the axis is stopped.

Special cases:

The clamping tolerance must be larger than the "Exact stop limit coarse".

related to:

IS "Clamping in progress"

36040 STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME A05 A3

s Zero-speed monitoring delay time DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.4 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

36050 CLAMP_POS_TOL A05 A3

mm, degrees Clamping tolerance with interface signal "Clamping

active"

DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.5 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-275

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The zero-speed range for the axis velocity and spindle speed is set in this

machine data.

If the actual velocity of the axis or the actual speed of the spindle is

smaller than the value entered, and if no more setpoints are being output to

the axis/ spindle, interface signal "Axis/spindle stationary" (V390x 0001.4)

is set.

Anwendungsbeispiel:

The pulse enable should not be removed until the axis/spindle is stationary to

ensure that the axis/spindle is stopped in a controlled manner. Otherwise the

axis will coast to rest.

related to:

"Axis/ spindle stationary" interface signal (V390x 0001.4)

Description:

Same meaning as 1st software limit switch but applies to the traversing limit

in the negative direction.

The MD is effective after reference point approach if PLC interface signal

"2nd software limit switch minus" is not set.

Irrelevant for:

If axis is not referenced.

related to:

"2nd software limit switch minus" interface signal

36060 STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL A05, A04 A2

mm/min, rev/min Maximum velocity/speed "Axis/spindle stationary" DOUBLE NEW CONF

--5.00--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

36100 POS_LIMIT_MINUS A03, A05, A11, - A3

mm, degrees 1st software limit, switch minus DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

---1.0e8--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-276

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

A software limit switch can be activated in addition to a hardware limit

switch. The absolute position, in the machine coordinate system, of the

positive range limit is entered for each axis.

The MD is effective after reference point approach if interface signal "2nd

software limit switch plus" is not enabled.

Irrelevant for:

If axis is not referenced.

related to:

"2nd software limit switch plus" interface signal

Description:

Same meaning as 2nd software limit switch plus, but applies to the traversing

limit in the negative direction.

An interface signal can be used to select from the PLC which of the software

limit switches 1 or 2 is to apply.

e.g.V380x 1000 Bit 2 = 0"1st software limit switch minus" active for 1st axis

Bit 2 = 1"2nd software limit switch minus" active for 1st axis

Irrelevant for:

If axis is not referenced.

related to:

"2nd software limit switch minus" interface signal

36110 POS_LIMIT_PLUS A03, A05, A11, - A3

mm, degrees 1. Software limit, switch plus DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

--1.0e8--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

36120 POS_LIMIT_MINUS2 A03, A05, - A3

mm, degrees 2nd software limit, switch minus DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

---1.0e8--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-277

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data can be used to specify a 2nd software limit switch position

in the positive direction in the machine axis system.

An interface signal can be used to select from the PLC which of the software

limit switches 1 or 2 is to apply.

e.g.:V380x 1000 Bit 3 = 0"1st software limit switch plus" active for 1st axis

Bit 3 = 1"2nd software limit switch plus" active for 1st axis.

Irrelevant for:

If axis is not referenced.

related to:

"2nd software limit switch plus" interface signal

Description:

The threshold value for the actual velocity monitoring function is entered in

this MD.

If the axis has at least one active encoder and this is operating below its

limit frequency, alarm 25030 "Actual velocity alarm limit" is activated and

the axes brought to a standstill when the threshold value is exceeded.

Settings

- BFor axes, a value that lies 10-15% above

MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity) should be chosen.

- For spindles, a value should be selected for each gear stage which is 10-15%

higher than

MD 35110: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT[n] (maximum speed of gear stage).

Machine data index has the following code:

[control parameter set number]: 0-5

Please refer to the following for the effect of control parameters sets:

References: Chapter "Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop

Control"

36130 POS_LIMIT_PLUS2 A03, A05, - A3

mm, degrees 2nd software limit, switch plus DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

--1.0e8--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

36200 AX_VELO_LIMIT A05, A11, A04 A3,G2

mm/min, rev/min Threshold value for velocity monitoring DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 6 11500. - - 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-278

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The maximum speed setpoint is defined as a percentage in this MD.

The value refers to the speed (100%) at which the axis velocity of MD 32000:

MAX_AX_VELO is reached. A value larger than 100% contains the required control

reserve for digital drives.

If settings beyond the limit are made, the MD value is used as the limiter, an

alarm is emitted and the axes brought to a halt.

With an analog spindle the maximum speed that con be output is limited by the

maximum setpoint output voltage of 10V. The value in this MD should not be

greater than the speed value that is reached at this voltage (100%).

Index[n] of the machine data is coded as follows: [setpoint branch]: 0

Description:

The encoder frequency is entered into this MD.

The active encoder is defined via the "Position measuring system 1" interface

signal (V380x 0001.5).

related to:

MD 36302: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW

36210 CTRLOUT_LIMIT EXP, A05 G2

% Maximum speed setpoint DOUBLE NEW CONF

CTEQ

- 1 110.0 0 200 7/2

36300 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT EXP, A02, A05,

A06

- Encoder limit frequency DOUBLE POWER ON

-23.0e5--7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

36302 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW EXP, A02, A05,

A06

% Encoder limit frequency resynchronization DOUBLE NEW CONF

- 2 99.9 0 100 7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-279

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The encoder frequency monitoring function operates with a hysteresis.

MD 36300: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT defines the encoder limit frequency at which the

encoder is switched off, MD: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW the frequency at which the

encoder is switched back on again.

MD: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW is a fraction of MD: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT in percent.

Normally the default of MD: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW is enough. However, the limit

frequency of the absolute track on absolute value encoders with En-Dat

interface is significantly lower than the limit frequency of the incremental

track. By setting a low value in

MD: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT, it is possible to ensure that the encoder is not switched

on again until the frequency is lower than the limit frequency of the absolute

track and is thus not referenced until permitted by the absolute track. This

referencing takes place automatically for spindles.

Example EQN 1325:

Limit frequency of incremental track electronics: 430 kHz

===>MD 36300: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT = 430000 Hz

Limit frequency of absolute track: approx. 2000 encoder rev/min with 2048

marks, i.e. limit frequency (2000/60) * 2048 Hz = 68 kHz

===>MD 36302: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW = 68/430 = 15 %

related to:

Description:

This machine data activates the zero-mark monitoring and determines the number

of inadmissible zero marks.

0: Zero-mark monitoring OFF, encoder hardware monitoring ON

1-99, > 100: Number of identified zero-mark errors at which the monitoring

should be activated

100: Zero-mark monitoring OFF, encoder hardware monitoring OFF

Special cases:

The zero-mark monitoring on absolute value encoders must be switched off with

value = 0!

36310 ENC_ZERO_MONITORING EXP, A02, A05 A3

- Zero-mark monitoring DWORD NEW CONF

-20 --7/2

802d-cu3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 1 - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 1 - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-280

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Tolerance band for max. contour deviation.

The maximum difference between the real and expected actual value is entered

in this MD.

The input of a tolerance band is designed to prevent the contour monitoring

function from responding erroneously due to slight fluctuations in speed

resulting from normal control procedures (e.g. during first cut).

This MD must be adapted to the position controller gain and, in the case of

feedforward control, to the accuracy of the loop model MD 32810:

EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME (equivalent time constant for speed loop feedforward

control) and to the permissible acceleration rates and velocities.

Description:

Partial section when applying backlash compensation.

This MD is used to manage large backlash compensation values. It ensures that

the backlash is not switched through to the actual value all at once, but in n

steps with an increment size as set in MD: ENC_CHANGE_TOL. Calculation of the

backlash thus takes n servo cycles. If it takes too long to complete

computation of the backlash, zero speed monitoring alarms may be generated.

This MD only becomes effective if the MD: ENC_CHANGE_TOL is set higher than

MD: BACK_LASH.

related to:

MD 32450: BACKLASH[0] (backlash compensation)

36400 CONTOUR_TOL A05, A11 A3

mm, degrees Contour monitoring tolerance band DOUBLE NEW CONF

--1.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

36500 ENC_CHANGE_TOL A02, A05 G2

mm, degrees Backlash compensation partial section/tolerance for

position actual value changeover

DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.1 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-281

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

If a rising signal edge is detected at the axis-specific hardware limit

switch, the axis is decelerated immediately.

The type of deceleration is specified via machine data:

0: controlled deceleration according to the acceleration ramp defined by

MD 32300: MAX_AX_ACCEL (axis acceleration).

1: fast deceleration (setpoint default = 0) with reduction of following error.

related to:

"Hardware limit switch plus or minus" interface signal (V380x 1000.1 or V380x

1000.0)

Description:

Where interpolating axes are involved, maintenance of the contour during the

deceleration phase cannot be guaranteed.

Notice:If the value for the duration of the braking ramp for error states has

been set too high, controller enable is canceled even though the axis/spindle

is still traversing. It is then stopped abruptly with speed setpoint 0. The

time set in

MD 36610: AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME should therefore be less than the time set in

MD 36620: SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME (shutdown delay controller enable).

related toIrrelevant for:

MD 36620: SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIMEShutdown delay servo enable

MD 36210: CTRLOUT_LIMITMaximum speed setpoint

36600 BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE EXP, A05 A3

- Deceleration behavior on hardware limit switch BYTE POWER ON

CTEQ

- -1 017/2

802d-cu3 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - 0 - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - 0 - - 2/2

36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME A05, - A3

s Length of the braking ramp for error states DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.05--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-282

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Maximum delay time for removal of "controller enable" after a fault.

If the axis/spindle is still moving the speed enable (controller enable) of

the drive is removed by the control at the latest after the delay time set.

The entered delay time is activated in the following events:

- For faults which cause the axes to stop immediately

- If IS "controller enable" is removed by the PLC

As soon as the actual speed has reached the zero speed range

(MD 36060: STANDSTILL_VELO_ TOL) "Servo enable" is removed for the drive.

The time set must be long enough to allow the axis/spindle to be brought to

zero speed from maximum traversing velocity/speed.

If the axis/spindle is stationary, "controller enable" is removed for the

drive immediately.

Anwendungsbeispiel:

The drive speed control should be maintained long enough for the axis/spindle

to come to a standstill from maximum traversing speed. Removal of "controller

enable" for a moving axis/spindle must be delayed until this has happened.

Special cases:

Caution: If the setting for the controller enable shutdown delay is too small

the servo enable will be removed even though the axis/spindle is still moving.

The axis/spindle is then stopped abruptly with setpoint 0.

The time in this MD should therefore be greater than the duration of the brake

ramp in error states (MD 36610: AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME).

related to:

IS "controller enable" (V380x 0002.1)

MD 36610: AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME (Time for braking ramp when an error occurs)

36620 SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME A05, - A2

s Cutout delay servo enable DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.1 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

36710 DRIFT_LIMIT EXP, A07, A09 K3

% Drift limit value for automatic drift compensation DOUBLE NEW CONF

- 1 0.0 0 1.e9 1/1

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-283

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

With MD: DRIFT_LIMIT, the magnitude of the drift additional value calculated

during automatic drift compensation can be limited.

If the drift additional value exceeds the limit value entered in MD:

DRIFT_LIMIT, alarm 25070 "Drift value too large" is output and the drift

additional value is limited to this value.

MD irrelevant for:

MD: DRIFT_ENABLE = 0

Description:

The basic drift value entered here is always applied as an additional speed

setpoint value for the analog spindle.

Irrelevant for:

Description:

The machine data specifies how the "Travel to fixed stop" function can be

started.

Value

=0:Travel to fixed stop not available.

= 1:Travel to fixed stop may be started from the NC program using the

command

FXS[x]=1.

36720 DRIFT_VALUE EXP, A07, A09 K3

% Basic drift value

for analog spindles only

DOUBLE NEW CONF

-10.0 --1/1

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

37000 FIXED_STOP_MODE A10, - F1

- Travel to fixed stop mode BYTE POWER ON

CTEQ

- -0 037/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-284

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Bit 0: Response for pulse inhibit at limit

=0:Travel to fixed stop is canceled.

= 1:Travel to fixed stop is interrupted, i.e. the drive is rendered

powerless.

As soon as the pulse block is canceled once more, the drive applies

pressure again with

the limited torque.

The torque is applied abruptly.

Description:

The clamping torque is entered in this machine data as a percentage of the

maximum motor torque (for FSD, corresponds with percentage of max. current

setpoint)

The clamping torque becomes operative as soon as the fixed stop is reached or

IS "Acknowledge fixed stop" has been set.

The entered value is a default and is effective only on the condition that

- no clamping torque has been programmed with command FXST[x].

- the clamping torque set in SD 43510: FIXED_STOP_TORQUE has not been changed

(after fixed stop was reached).

related to:

SD 43510: FIXED_STOP_TORQUE (clamping torque for travel to fixed stop)

37002 FIXED_STOP_CONTROL A10 F1

- Special function when traveling to fixed stop BYTE POWER ON

- -0 037/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

37010 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_DEF A10 F1

% Default for clamping torque DOUBLE POWER ON

CTEQ

- - 5.0 0.0 100.0 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-285

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Virtual time until reaching the modified torque limit.

The subdivision is measured in the position controller cycle and applied

abruptly.

The value 0.0 deactivates the ramp function.

Description:

Interface factor torque limit.

With this factor, the torque limit of linked slave axes (MD 37250) can be

weighted additionally.

Even with different motors, the torque limits can be kept equal in all linked

axes.

37012 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_RAMP_TIME A10 F1

s Virtual time until reaching the new clamping torque

when traveling to fixed stop

DOUBLE NEW CONF

--0.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

37014 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_FACTOR A10 F1

- Adaption factor torque limit DOUBLE NEW CONF

--1.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

37020 FIXED_STOP_WINDOW_DEF A05, A10 F1

mm, degrees Default for fixed stop monitoring window DOUBLE POWER ON

CTEQ

--1.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-286

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The default setting for the fixed stop monitoring window is set in this

machine data.

The fixed stop monitoring window becomes operative as soon as the fixed stop

is reached, i.e. IS "Fixed stop reached" is set.

If the axis/spindle leaves the position at which the fixed stop has been

detected by more than the tolerance specified in MD: FIXED_STOP_WINDOW_DEF,

then alarm 20093 "Fixed stop monitoring has responded" is output and the "FXS"

function deselected.

The entered value is a default and is effective only on the condition that

- no fixed stop monitoring window has been programmed with command FXSW[x]

- the fixed stop monitoring window set via SD 43520: FIXED_STOP_WINDOW has not

been changed (after fixed stop was reached).

related to:

SD 43520: FIXED_STOP_WINDOW (fixed stop monitoring window)

Description:

The contour monitoring threshold for fixed stop detection is entered in this

machine data.

This machine data is effective only if MD: FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR is set to 0.

IS "Fixed stop reached" is set if the axis-specific contour deviation exceeds

the threshold set in MD: FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD.

Irrelevant for:

MD 37040: FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR = 1

related to:

IS "Fixed stop reached"

37030 FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD A10, - F1

mm, degrees Threshold for fixed stop detection DOUBLE NEW CONF

--2.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

37040 FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR A10 F1

- Fixed stop detection via sensor BYTE SOFORT

CTEQ

- -0 037/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-287

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The machine data specifies how the "Fixed stop reached" criterion

is determined.

Value=0:The "Fixed stop reached" criterion is determined internally based on

the axis-specific

contour deviation (threshold specified by MD: FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD).

= 1:The "Fixed stop reached" criterion is determined via an external sensor

and

the NC is notified via IS "Fixed stop sensor".

=2:The "Fixed stop reached" criterion is accepted provided either the

contour monitoring function (setting = 0) or

the signal from the external sensor (setting = 1) has responded.

related to:

MD 37030: FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD (threshold for fixed stop detection)

IS "Sensor for fixed stop"

Description:

The machine data specifies whether the alarm

20091 "Fixed stop not reached" and

20094 "Fixed stop aborted" will be generated.

Value= 0:suppress alarm 20091 "Fixed stop not reached"

= 2:suppress alarms20091 "Fixed stop not reached" and

20094 "Fixed stop aborted"

= 3:suppress alarm 20094 "Fixed stop aborted"

All other permissible values of ? 7 do not suppress any alarms.

37050 FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK A05, A10 F1

- Enabling the fixed stop alarms BYTE NEW CONF

- - 1 0 15 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

37060 FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK A10 F1

- Monitoring of PLC acknowledgments for travel to

fixed stop

BYTE POWER ON

CTEQ

- -0 037/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-288

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This machine data determines whether or not the NC waits for acknowledgment

messages from the PLC when the "Travel to fixed stop" function is active.

Bit 0 = 0:Once the NC has transmitted IS "Activate travel to fixed stop" to

the PLC, it starts the programmed travel motion.

Bit 0 =1:After the NC has transferred IS "Activate travel to fixed stop" to

the PLC, it waits for the PLC to acknowledge with IS "Enable travel to fixed

stop" and then starts the programmed travel motion.

Bit 1 = 0:Once the NC has transferred IS "Fixed stop reached" to the PLC, the

program advances to the next block.

Bit 1 = 1:After the NC has transferred IS "Fixed stop reached" to the PLC, it

waits for the PLC to acknowledge with IS "Acknowledge fixed stop reached",

outputs the programmed torque and then executes a block change.

related to:

IS "Activate travel to fixed stop"

IS "Enable travel to fixed stop"

IS "Fixed stop reached"

IS "Acknowledge fixed stop reached"

Description:

General: decimal representation, with a b

0:Leading axis

1:Synchronized axis

0: No gantry axis

1: Axis in gantry grouping 1

2: Axis in gantry grouping 2

3: Axis in gantry grouping 3

...

A max. of 8 gantry groupings is possible.

Examples:

11: Axis is synchronized axis in gantry grouping 1

2: Axis is leading axis in gantry grouping 2

12: Axis is synchronized axis in gantry grouping 2

3:Axis is leading axis in gantry grouping 3

13:Axis is synchronized axis in gantry grouping 3

37100 GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE A01, A10 G1

- Gantry axis definition BYTE POWER ON

CTEQ

- - 0 0 33 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-289

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Special cases:

Alarm 10650 "Incorrect gantry machine data" and 10651 "Gantry unit not

defined" in the case of incorrect gantry axis definition.

Related to:

MD 37110: GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING (gantry warning limit)

MD 37120: GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR (gantry trip limit)

MD 37130: GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF (gantry trip limit during referencing)

Description:

Value > 0

With gantry axes, the difference between the position actual values of the

leading and synchronized axes is constantly monitored.

MD: GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING is used to define a limit value for the position

actual value difference; when the limit is exceeded, warning 10652 "Warning

limit exceeded" is output. However, the gantry axes are not stopped

internally in the control. The warning threshold must therefore be selected

such that the machine can withstand the position actual value deviation

between the gantry axes without sustaining mechanical damage.

Furthermore, the IS "Gantry warning limit exceeded" (DB31-48, DBX101.3) to

the PLC is set to "1". The PLC user program can thus initiate the necessary

measures (e.g. program interruption at block end) when the warning limit is

exceeded.

As soon as the current position actual value difference has dropped below

the warning limit again, the message is canceled and IS "Gantry warning

limit exceeded" reset.

Effect of gantry warning limit on gantry synchronization process:

The position actual value difference between the leading and synchronized

axes is determined during gantry synchronization. If the deviation is lower

than the gantry warning limit, the synchronizing motion of the gantry axes

is automatically started internally in the control.

The synchronizing motion must otherwise be initiated via the PLC interface

(IS "Start gantry synchronization process").

37110 GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING A05, A10 G1

mm, degrees Gantry warning limit DOUBLE RESET

--0.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-290

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Value = 0

Setting MD: GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING to 0 deactivates the monitoring for

violation of the warning limit.

Gantry synchronization is not initiated internally in the control.

MD irrelevant for:

SINUMERIK FM-NC; SINUMERIK 840D with NCU 571

Special cases:

Alarm 10652 "Warning limit exceeded" in response to violation of gantry

warning limit.

Related to:

MD 37100: GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE Gantry axis definition

MD 37120: GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR Gantry trip limit

MD 37130: GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF

Gantry trip limit during referencing

IS "Gantry warning limit exceeded" (DB31-48, DBX101.3)

IS "Start gantry synchronization" (DB31-48, DBX29.4)

Description:

With gantry axes, the difference between the position actual values of the

leading and synchronized axes is continuously monitored. The maximum

permissible deviation in position actual value between the synchronized axis

and the leading axis in the gantry axis grouping must be defined with MD:

GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR. Monitoring for violation of this limit value takes place

only if the gantry axis grouping is already synchronized (IS "Gantry grouping

is synchronized" = 1); otherwise the value set in MD 37130: GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF

is used.

When the limit value is exceeded, alarm 10653 "Error limit exceeded" is

output. The gantry axes are immediately stopped internally in the control to

prevent any damage to the machine.

In addition, IS "Gantry trip limit exceeded" to the PLC is set to "1".

MD irrelevant for:

SINUMERIK FM-NC; SINUMERIK 840D with NCU 571

Special cases:

Alarm 10653 "Error limit exceeded" in response to violation of gantry trip

limit.

37120 GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR A05, A10 G1

mm, degrees Gantry trip limit DOUBLE POWER ON

--0.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-291

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Related to:

MD 37100: GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE Gantry axis definition

MD 37110: GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING Gantry warning limit

MD 37130: GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF

Gantry trip limit during referencing

IS "Gantry grouping is synchronized" (DB31-48, DBX101.5)

IS "Gantry trip limit exceeded" (DB31-48, DBX101.2)

Description:

With gantry axes, the difference between the position actual values of the

leading and synchronized axes is continuously monitored. The maximum

permissible deviation in position actual values between the synchronized axis

and the leading axis that is monitored if the gantry axis grouping is not yet

synchronized (IS "Gantry grouping is synchronized" = "0") must be set in MD:

GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF.

When the limit value is exceeded, alarm 10653 "Error limit exceeded" is

output. The gantry axes are immediately stopped internally in the control to

prevent any damage to the machine.

In addition, IS "Gantry trip limit exceeded" to the PLC is set to "1".

MD irrelevant for:

SINUMERIK FM-NC; SINUMERIK 840D with NCU 571

Special cases:

Alarm 10653 "Error limit exceeded" in response to violation of gantry trip

limit.

Related to:

MD 37100: GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE Gantry axis definition

MD 37110: GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING Gantry warning limit

MD 37120: GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR Gantry trip limit

IS "Gantry grouping is synchronized" (DB31-48, DBX101.5)

IS "Gantry trip limit exceeded" (DB31-48, DBX101.2)

37130 GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF A05, A10 G1

mm, degrees Gantry trip limit during referencing DOUBLE POWER ON

--0.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-292

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Actual value difference between master axis and slave axis in the case of

alarm 10653.

Leads to alarm 10657 after Power ON.

Description:

GANTRY_BREAK_UP = "0"

The forced coupling of the gantry axis grouping remains valid. Monitoring of

violation of the gantry warning or trip limit is active!

GANTRY_BREAK_UP = "1"

This invalidates the forced coupling of the gantry grouping, thus allowing all

gantry axes in this grouping to be traversed individually in manual mode. The

monitoring for violation of the gantry warning or trip limit is deactivated.

IS "Gantry grouping is synchronized" is set to "0".

Notice:

In cases where the gantry axes are still mechanically coupled, the machine

may sustain damage in this operating state when the leading or synchronized

axis is traversed!

The gantry axes cannot be referenced individually.

MD irrelevant for:

SINUMERIK FM-NC; SINUMERIK 840D with NCU 571

37135 GANTRY_ACT_POS_TOL_ERROR A05, A10 -

mm, degrees Current gantry trip limit DOUBLE RESET

--0.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

37140 GANTRY_BREAK_UP EXP, A01, A10 G1

- Invalidate gantry axis grouping BOOLEAN RESET

CTEQ

--FALSE--7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-293

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Related to:

MD 37100: GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE Gantry axis definition

MD 37110: GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING Gantry warning limit

MD 37130: GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF

Gantry trip limit during referencing

IS "Gantry grouping is synchronized" (DB31-48, DBX101.5)

IS "Gantry trip limit exceeded" (DB31-48, DBX101.2)

Description:

Special gantry functions are set with this MD.

The MD is bit-coded, the following bits are assigned:

Bit 0 == 0:

Extended monitoring of the actual value difference is inactive.

An offset between master and slave axes occurring in the tracking or

BREAK_UP is not taken into account in the monitoring of the actual value

difference.

Alarm 10657 is not output if alarm 10563 occurs before Power OFF.

Bit 0 == 1:

Extended monitoring of the actual value difference is active.

An offset between master and slave axes occurring in the tracking or

BREAK_UP is taken into account in the monitoring of the actual value

difference.

Prerequisite: The gantry grouping must be re-referenced or re-synchronized

after starting of the control.

Alarm 10657 is output if alarm 10563 occurs before Power OFF.

Bit 1 == 0:

Zero mark search direction of the slave axis analogous to MD 34010

Bit 1 == 1:

Zero mark search direction of the slave axis same as for master axis

37150 GANTRY_FUNCTION_MASK A10 -

- Gantry functions DWORD RESET

- - 0x00 0 0x3 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-294

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

If TLIFT has been programmed and the axis is under tangential follow-up

control (tracking), a step change in the position setpoint which is larger

than the value of this MD causes an intermediate block to be inserted. The

intermediate block moves the axis to the position corresponding to the initial

tangent in the next block.

Irrelevant for:

TLIFT not activated

related to:

TLIFT instruction

Description:

Default offset (angle) which the following axis forms with the tangent.

The angle acts additively to the angle programmed in the TANGON block.

Irrelevant for:

if no tangential follow-up control

related to:

TANGON instruction

37400 EPS_TLIFT_TANG_STEP A10 T3

mm, degrees Tangential angle for corner recognition DOUBLE RESET

CTEQ

--5.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

37402 TANG_OFFSET A10 T3

mm, degrees Default angle for tangential follow-up control DOUBLE RESET

CTEQ

--0.0 --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-295

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Machine data for setting special PROFIBUS control word functionality:

0 =

default = no change of standard behavior

1 =

STW2, bits 0-1 are set depending on mode of operation/rapid traverse

suppressing the setting of defaults for the VDI control bits "Parameter set

bit0/1" from the PLC.

Bits 0-1 get the following combinations depending on the mode of operation,

and controlled by NCK:

00 = Default (after Power-On)

01 = JOG (except for JOG-INC) or ((AUTOMATIC or MDI) and G0)

10 = ((AUTOMATIC or MDI) and not G0), other

11 = JOG-INC

2 =

Combination of MD=0 (preset by VDI) and MD=1 (internally preset):

MD=2 acts as MD=1, as long as there are no VDI control bits from the PLC,

i.e. if the VDI control bits "Parameter set bit0/1" are both reset (0).

MD=2 acts as MD=0, if the VDI control bits "Parameter set bit0/1" are set

both or individually (!=0). In this case, the VDI control bits are

transferred directly to the drive (priority of VDI signals higher than that

of internally created signals).

Description:

Resolution of the torque reduction on the PROFIBUS (LSB significance)

37610 PROFIBUS_CTRL_CONFIG EXP, A01 K4

- Profibus control bit configuration BYTE POWER ON

- -0 027/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

37620 PROFIBUS_TORQUE_RED_RESOL EXP, A01 -

% Resolution Profibus torque reduction DOUBLE NEW CONF

- - 1.0 0.005 10.0 7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-296

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

The MD is only relevant for controls with PROFIBUS drives. For these controls,

it defines the resolution of the cyclic interface data "Torque reduction

value" (only exists for $MN_DRIVE_TELEGRAM_TYPE = 101 or 201 ff.), which

is required for the "Travel to fixed stop" functionality.

The 1% default value corresponds to the original significance. The torque

limit is transferred on the PROFIBUS with increments of 1%; the value 100 in

the corresponding PROFIBUS data cell corresponds to full torque reduction

(i.e. without force).

By changing this MD to 0.005%, for example, the value can be entered in

increments of 0.005%, i.e. the increments for the torque limit value become

finer by the factor 200.

For the limitation to the rated torque, the value 0 is transmitted in this

case; a complete torque reduction (i.e. without force) characterizes the

transmittable value 10000.

To avoid misadaptation, the setting value of the MD must be selected to match

the interpretation configured on the drive side or the firmly defined

interpretation of the torque reduction value.

Description:

A version information freely available to the user

(is indicated in the version screen)

Description:

For leadscrew error compensation, the maximum number of interpolation points

per axis/measuring system is 125.

37800 OEM_AXIS_INFO A01, A11 -

- OEM version information STRING POWER ON

-2"" --7/2

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

38000 MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_POINTS A01, A09, A02 K3

- Interpolation points for encoder/spindle compensation

(LEC )

DWORD POWER ON

- 2 0 0 5000 7/2

802d-cu3 1 125 - - 7/0

802d-ng2 1 125 - - 7/0

802d-ng3 1 125 - - 7/0

802d-tm1 1 125 - - 7/0

802d-tm2 1 125 - - 7/0

802d-tm3 1 125 - - 7/0

Channel-specific machine data

06/2007 Machine Data

2-297

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

The required number k can be calculated as follows using the defined

parameters:

$AA_ENC_COMP_MAX-

$AA_ENC_COMP_MIN

k = ------------------------------------------- + 1

$AA_ENC_COMP_STEP

$AA_ENC_COMP_MINInitial position(system variable)

$AA_ENC_COMP_MAX End position(system variable)

$AA_ENC_COMP_STEP Distance betw. interpolation points(system variable)

Index[n] has the following coding: [encoder no.]: 0

related to:

MD 32700: ENC_ COMP_ ENABLE[n] Interpolatory compensation active

Machine Data 06/2007

Channel-specific machine data

2-298

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

3-299

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Setting Data - Description 3

3.1 General setting data

Description:

This setting data defines the number of increments when variable increment (INCvar) is

selected. This increment size is traversed by the axis in JOG mode whenever the tra-

verse key is pressed or the handwheel is turned one detent position and variable incre-

ment is selected ("Active machine function: INC variable" interface signal for machine or

geometry axes is set to 1).

Note: Please note that the increment size is active for incremental jogging and hand-

wheel jogging.

Irrelevant for:

If INCvar not active

related to:

IS "Active machine function: INCvariable" (V3200 1001.5, V3200 1005.5, V3200 1009.5,

V380x 0005.5)

Number Identifier Display filters Reference

Unit Name Data type Active

Attributes

System Dimension Default value Minimum value Maximum value Protection

41010 JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE -H1

- Size of variable increment for INC/handwheel DOUBLE SOFORT

--0. --7/7

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

General setting data

3-300

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Value > 0:

The velocity entered applies to all linear axes in JOG mode if they are traversed manu-

ally using the "traversing keys plus and minus".

The axis velocity setting is active for:

- Continuous traversing

- Incremental traversing (INC1, ..., INCvar)

The value entered may not exceed the maximum permissible axis velocity

(MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO).

Value = 0:

The feedrate in JOG mode is the corresponding axis-specific MD 32020: JOG_VELO

"JOG axis velocity". In this way, it is possible to define a separate JOG velocity for every

axis.

Irrelevant for:

- For rotary axes (SD 41130: JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO) applies

related to:

Axis-specific MD 32020: JOG_VELO (JOG axis velocity)

Axis-specific MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity)

SD 41130: JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO (JOG velocity for rotary axes)

Description:

As for SD 41110: JOG_AX_SET_VELO - but for all rotary axes instead of linear axes

Application example:

The operator can define a JOG velocity for a particular application.

related to:

MD 32020: JOG_VELO(JOG axis velocity)

MD 32000: MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity)

41110 JOG_SET_VELO -H1

mm/min JOG velocity for linear axes (for G94) DOUBLE SOFORT

--0.0 --7/7

41130 JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO -H1

rev/min JOG velocity for rotary axes DOUBLE SOFORT

--0.0 --7/7

41200 JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO -H1

rev/min JOG speed for spindles DOUBLE SOFORT

--0.0 --7/7

General setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-301

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Value > 0:

The velocity entered applies to spindles in JOG mode if they are traversed manually

using the "traversing keys plus and minus".

The velocity setting is active for:

-Continuous jogging

- Incremental jogging (INC1, ..., INCvar)

The value entered must not exceed the maximum permissible velocity (MD 32000:

MAX_AX_VELO).

Value = 0:

If 0 has been entered in the setting data, the active JOG velocity is

MD 32020: JOG_VELO (JOG axis velocity). Each axis can be given its own JOG velo-

city with this MD (axis-specific MD).

When the spindle is traversed in JOG mode, the maximum velocity of the active gear

stage (MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT) is taken into account.

Irrelevant for:

Axes

related to:

MD 32020: JOG_VELO (JOG axis velocity)

MD 35130: GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (maximum velocity of gear stages)

Description:

1: The evaluation of the compensation table [t] is enabled.

The compensation table is now included in the calculation of the compensation value for

the compensation axis.

The compensation axis $AN_CEC_OUTPUT_AXIS can be taken from the table configu-

ration.

The effective total compensation value in the compensation axis can be adapted to the

current machining by the targeted activation of tables (from NC part programm or

PLC user program).

The function does not become active until the following conditions have been fulfilled:

- The option "Interpolatory compensation" is set

- The associated compensation tables in the NC user memory have been loaded and

enabled (SD: CEC_TABLE_ENABLE[t] = 1)

- The current position measuring system is referenced (IS: "Referenced/Synchronized"

=1).

41300 CEC_TABLE_ENABLE -K3

- Compensation table enable BOOLEAN SOFORT

- 62 FALSE - - 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

General setting data

3-302

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

0: The evaluation of the sag compensation table [t] is not enabled.

Related to ....

MD: MM_CEC_MAX_POINTS[t] Number of interpolation points with sag compensation

SD: CEC_TABLE_ENABLE[t] Evaluation of the sag compensation table t is enabled

IS "Referenced/Synchronized 1" DB31-48, DBX60.4

IS "Referenced/Synchronized 2" DB31-48, DBX60.5

Description:

The compensation value stored in the table [t] is multiplied by the weighting factor.

When selecting the weighting factor it should be ensured that the total compensation

value in the compensation axis does not exceed the maximal value of

(MD: CEC_MAX_SUM). With [t] = index of the compensation table (see MD:

MM_CEC_MAX_POINTS)

If, for example, the weight of the tools used on the machine or the workpieces to be

machined are too different and this affects the error curve by changing the amplitude,

this can be corrected by changing the weighting factor. In the case of sag compensation,

the weighting factor in the table can be changed for specific tools or workpieces from the

PLC user program or the NC program by overwriting the setting data. However, different

compensation tables are to be used if the course of the error curve is substantially chan-

ged by the different weights.

Related to ....

SD: CEC_TABLE_ENABLE[t] Evaluation of the sag compensation table t is enabled

MD: CEC_MAX_SUM Maximum compensation value for sag compensation

41310 CEC_TABLE_WEIGHT -K3

- Weighting factor compensation table DOUBLE SOFORT

-621.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

41500 SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_1 -N3

mm/inch,

degrees

Trigger points at falling cam 1-8 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80.0 --7/7

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

General setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-303

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The cam positions of minus cams 1 - 8 are entered in this machine data.

The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system.

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 1, 2, ... , 8

When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associa-

ted "minus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals )

switch from 1 to 0.

Description:

The cam positions of plus cams 1 - 8 are entered in this machine data.

The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system.

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 1, 2, ... , 8

When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associa-

ted "plus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals ) switch

from 0 to 1.

Description:

The cam positions of minus cams 9-16 are entered in this machine data.

The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system.

41501 SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_1 -N3

mm/inch,

degrees

Trigger points at rising cam edge 1-8 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80.0 --7/7

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

41502 SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_2 -N3

mm/inch,

degrees

Trigger points at falling cam edge 9-16 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

General setting data

3-304

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 9, 10, ... , 16

Switching points with falling edges of cams 9 - 16.

When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associa-

ted "minus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals )

switch from 1 to 0.

Description:

The cam positions of plus cams 9-16 are entered in this machine data.

The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system.

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 9, 10, ... , 16

Switching points with rising edges of cams 9 - 16.

When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associa-

ted "plus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals ) switch

from 0 to 1.

41503 SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_2 -N3

mm/inch,

degrees

Trigger points at rising cam edge 9-16 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

41504 SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_3 -N3

mm/inch,

degrees

Trigger points at falling cam edge 17-24 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

General setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-305

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The cam positions of minus cams 17 - 24 are entered in this machine data.

The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system.

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 17, 18, ... , 24

Switching points with falling edges of cams 17 - 24.

When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associa-

ted "minus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals )

switch from 1 to 0.

Description:

The cam positions of plus cams 17 - 24 are entered in this machine data.

The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system.

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 17, 18, ... , 24

Switching points with rising edges of cams 17 - 24

When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associa-

ted "plus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals ) switch

from 0 to 1.

41505 SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_3 -N3

mm/inch,

degrees

Trigger points at rising cam edge 17-24 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

41506 SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_4 -N3

mm/inch,

degrees

Trigger points at falling cam edge 25-32 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

General setting data

3-306

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The cam positions of minus cams 25 - 32 are entered in this machine data.

The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system.

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 25, 26, ... , 32

Switching points with falling edges of cams 25 - 32.

When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associa-

ted "minus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals )

switch from 1 to 0.

Description:

The cam positions of plus cams 25 - 32 are entered in this machine data.

The positions are entered in the machine coordinate system.

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 25, 26, ... , 32

Switching points with rising edges of cams 25 - 32.

When the set switching points are overtraveled in the positive axis direction, the associa-

ted "plus" cam signals in the PLC interface ( and any applied fast output signals ) switch

from 0 to 1.

Description:

A lead or delay time can be assigned to each cam 1-8 in this setting data to compensate

for delay times.

41507 SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_4 -N3

mm/inch,

degrees

Trigger points at rising cam edge 25-32 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

41520 SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_1 -N3

s Rate time for '-' trigger points of cams 1-8 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80.0 --7/7

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

General setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-307

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time

value entered.

Positive value: Lead time

Negative value: Delay time

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 1, 2, ... , 8

This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n].

Related to ....

MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on minus cams 1 - 16)

Description:

A lead or delay time can be assigned to each plus cam 1-8 in this setting data to com-

pensate for delay times.

The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time

value entered.

Positive value: Lead time

Negative value: Delay time

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 1, 2, ... , 8

This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n].

Related to ....

MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on plus cams 1 - 16)

41521 SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_1 -N3

s Rate time for '+' trigger points of cams 1-8 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80.0 --7/7

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

41522 SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_2 -N3

s Rate time for '-' trigger points of cams 9-16 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

General setting data

3-308

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

A lead or delay time can be assigned to each minus cam 9 - 16 in this setting data to

compensate for delay times.

The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time

value entered.

Positive value: Lead time

Negative value: Delay time

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 9, 10, ... , 16

This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n+8].

Related to ....

MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on minus cams 1 - 16)

Description:

A lead or delay time can be assigned to each plus cam 9 - 16 in this setting data to com-

pensate for delay times.

The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time

value entered.

41523 SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_2 -N3

s Rate time for '+' trigger points of cams 9-16 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

General setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-309

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Positive value: Lead time

Negative value: Delay time

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 9, 10, ... , 16

This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n+8].

Related to ....

MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on plus cams 1 - 16)

Description:

A lead or delay time can be assigned to each minus cam 17-24 in this setting data to

compensate for delay times.

The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time

value entered.

Positive value: Lead time

Negative value: Delay time

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 17, 18, ... , 24

This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n].

Related to ....

MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on minus cams 1 - 16)

41524 SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_3 -N3

s Rate time for '-' trigger points of cams 17-24 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

41525 SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_3 -N3

s Rate time for '+' trigger points of cams 17-24 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80. --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

General setting data

3-310

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

A lead or delay time can be assigned to each plus cam 17-24 in this setting data to com-

pensate for delay times.

The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time

value entered.

Positive value: Lead time

Negative value: Delay time

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 0, 1, ... , 7 corresponds to cam pair 17, 18, ... , 24

This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n].

Related to ....

MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on plus cams 1 - 16)

Description:

A lead or delay time can be assigned to each minus cam 25-32 in this setting data to

compensate for delay times.

The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time

value entered.

41526 SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_4 -N3

s Rate time for '-' trigger points of cams 25-32 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80. --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

General setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-311

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Positive value: Lead time

Negative value: Delay time

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 25, 26, ... , 32

This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n+8].

Related to ....

MD: SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on minus cams 1 - 16)

Description:

A lead or delay time can be assigned to each plus cam 25 - 32 in this setting data to

com-pensate for delay times.

The switching edge of the associated cam signal is advanced or delayed by the time

value entered.

Positive value: Lead time

Negative value: Delay time

Index [n] of the setting data addresses the cam pair:

n = 8, 9, ... , 15 corresponds to cam pair 25, 26, ... , 32

This setting data is added to MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n+8].

Related to ....

MD: SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME[n] (lead or delay time on plus cams 1 - 16)

41527 SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_4 -N3

s Rate time for '+' trigger points of cams 25-32 DOUBLE SOFORT

-80.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

41600 COMPAR_THRESHOLD_1 -A4

- Threshold value of the 1st comparator DOUBLE SOFORT

-80. --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

General setting data

3-312

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

COMPAR_THRESHOLD_1[b] defines the threshold values for the individual input bits [b]

of comparator byte 1.

The output bit n of the 1st comparator is created by comparing the threshold value n

according to the comparison type defined in bit n of COMPAR_TYPE_1.

For example:

COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_1[2] = 4

COMPAR_TRESHOLD_1[2] = 5000.0

COMPAR_TYPE_1 = 5

The 3rd output bit of comparator 1 is set if the input value at AnalogIn 4 is greater than or

equal to 5 volts.

Index [b]: Bits 0 - 7

Related to ....

MD 10530: COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_1

MD 10531: COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_2

MD 10540: COMPAR_TYPE_1 MD 10541: COMPAR_TYPE_2

Description:

COMPAR_THRESHOLD_1[b] defines the threshold values for the individual input bits [b]

of comparator byte 1.

The output bit n of the 1st comparator is created by comparing the threshold value n

according to the comparison type defined in bit n of COMPAR_TYPE_2.

Index [b]: Bits 0 - 7

Related to ....

MD 10530: COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_1

MD 10531: COMPAR_ASSIGN_ANA_INPUT_2

MD 10540: COMPAR_TYPE_1

MD 10541: COMPAR_TYPE_2

41601 COMPAR_THRESHOLD_2 -A4

- Threshold value of the 2nd comparator DOUBLE SOFORT

-80. --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

General setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-313

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The number of entries (slots) by which the entries in the axis container are advanced on

execution of the rotation. The value is interpreted modulo of the actually existing entries.

Negative values reverse the direction of rotation.

Related to the container rotation command, container axes.

This machine data is distribued via the NCU-link.

Contrary to the the definition for setting data, this SD is not immediately active, but first

with NEWCONF.

41700 AXCT_SWWIDTH -B3

- Default rotation of axis container DWORD NEW CONF

CTDE

-160 -32327/7

802d-cu3 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm1 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm2 - - - - -1/-

802d-tm3 - - - - -1/-

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

Channel-specific setting data

3-314

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

3.2 Channel-specific setting data

Description:

This setting data can be used to program the offset of the individual threads when cut-

ting multiple threads.

This SD can be changed from the part program by the SF=... command. If no SF=... is

written in the G33 block of the part program, then the setting data applies.

Description:

The SD is effective for thread cutting with G33, G34, G35. It provides two elements that

determine the behavior during the starting of the thread axis (1st element = index 0) and

during the braking with rounding (2nd element = index 1).

The values possess the same properties for the thread run-in and run-out:

-1: Starting/braking of the thread axis is carried out with the configured acceleration.

Jerk according to current BRISK/SOFT programming.

0: Abrupt starting/braking of the feedrate axis during thread cutting.

> 0:The maximum thread starting/braking distance is defined. The defined distance may

cause an acceleration overload of the axis. The SD is defined during

the programming of DITR (Displacement Thread Ramp) from the block.

The default values (-1) for both elements of the SD are set with NC reset and at the end

of the part program.

Example:$SC_THREAD_RAMP_DISP[0]=2 ; run-in path 2 mm

42000 THREAD_START_ANGLE -K1

degrees Start angle for thread G33 DOUBLE SOFORT

--0. --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

42010 THREAD_RAMP_DISP -V1

mm Starting and deceleration behavior of feed axis in

thread cutting G33

DOUBLE SOFORT

- 2 -1. -1. 999999. 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

Channel-specific setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-315

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

The SD is defined during the programming of DITS (index 0) and DITE (index 1) from the

block.

Irrelevant for:

no G33, G34, G35

related to:

With the DITS and DITE (Displacement Thread Start/End) part program instructions.

Description:

To check a part program with regard to the traversing path (without workpiece to be

machined) the operator can activate the dry run feed function on the operator interface

(Program control softkey). The value of this setting data is then taken instead of the pro-

grammed feed value. Rapid traverse feed values are not changed.

The dry run feedrate value can be entered in the Setting data menu.

The function is effective only in the AUTOMATIC and MDA modes.

Irrelevant for:

Dry run feedrate function not activated

Application example:

Checking traversing distances with new part programs

Special cases:

The function may not be activated if a workpiece should be machined. The maximum

cutting speed of the tool might be exceeded by the activated dry run feedrate. The des-

truction of the workpiece and of the tool could be the consequence.

Description:

This MD can be used to set the method of operation of the dry run velocity specified by

the setting data $SC_DRY_RUN_FEED.

The following values are possible:

The maximum of setting data $SC_DRY_RUN_FEED and the programmed velocity

become active. This is the standard setting and corresponds to the behavior up to

SW 5.

The minimum of setting data $SC_DRY_RUN_FEED and the programmed velocity

become active.

The setting data $SC_DRY_RUN_FEED becomes active directly irrespective of the pro-

grammed velocity.

The values 3...9 are reserved for extensions.

42100 DRY_RUN_FEED -V1

mm/min Dry run feedrate DOUBLE SOFORT

- - 5000. - - 7/7

42101 DRY_RUN_FEED_MODE -V1

- Mode for dry run velocity BYTE SOFORT

--0 0127/7

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

Channel-specific setting data

3-316

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

10:

As configuration 0 except thread cutting (G33, G34, G35) and tapping (G331, G332,

G63). These functions are executed as programmed.

11:

As configuration 1 except thread cutting (G33, G34, G35) and tapping (G331, G332,

G63). These functions are executed as programmed.

12:

As configuration 2 except thread cutting (G33, G34, G35) and tapping (G331, G332,

G63). These functions are executed as programmed.

Description:

The setting date is evaluated during the start of the part program with consideration of

the switch-on position of the feedrate type.

Switch-on positions:

Turning: G95 - feedrate in mm/rev. of the spindle

Milling: G94 - feedrate in mm/min

If no F word is written at G1, G2, G2, ... for the applicable feedrate type and if the SD

value is not zero, the feedrate from this SD is used. Otherwise, an alarm indicating the

missing feedrate is issued.

Irrelevant for:

Turning: G94 programmed

Milling: G95 programmed

Description:

Default value for path feedrate in approach blocks (after repos., block search, SERUPRO

etc).

The contents of this settting data are only used when it is non-zero.

It is evaluated like an F word programmed for G94.

42110 DEFAULT_FEED -V1,FBFA

mm/min Default value for path feedrate DOUBLE SOFORT

--0. --7/7

42120 APPROACH_FEED --

mm/min Path feedrate in approach blocks DOUBLE SOFORT

--0. --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-317

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Additional channel-specific rapid traverse override in %. The value is calculated to the

path depending on OPI variable enablOvrRapidFactor. The value multiplies the other

rapid traverse overrides (rapid traverse override of the machine control panel, override

default through synchronized actions $AC_OVR).

Description:

The value in this machine data is active if no scaling factor P has been programmed in

the block.

Related to:

WEIGHTING_FACTOR_FOR_SCALE

Description:

The value in this machine data is active if no factor for rotation R is programmed in the

block.

42122 OVR_RAPID_FACTOR - $MN_OVR_FAC

TOR_RAPID_T

RA,$AC_OVR

% Add. rapid traverse override can be specified

through operation

DOUBLE SOFORT

- - 100.,100.,100.,100.,

100.,100.,100....

--7/7

42140 DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_P -FBFA

- Default scaling factor for address P DWORD SOFORT

--1 --7/7

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

42150 DEFAULT_ROT_FACTOR_R --

- Default rotation factor for address R DOUBLE SOFORT

--0. --7/7

42160 EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_F9 -FBFA

- Fixed feedrates F1 - F9 DOUBLE SOFORT

-100. --7/7

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

Channel-specific setting data

3-318

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Fixed feedrate values for programming with F1 - F9. If the machine data

$MC_FEEDRATE_F1_F9_ON = TRUE is set with the programming of F1 - F9, the fee-

drate values are read from the setting data

$SC_EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_F9[0] -

$SC_EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_F9[8], and activated as the machining feedrate.

The rapid traverse feedrate must be entered in

$SC_EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_F9[0].

Description:

Distance between both tools of a double turret head.

The distance is activated using G68 as additive zero point offset if

$MN_EXTERN_DOUBLE_TURRET_ON is set to TRUE.

Description:

Value = TRUE:

A preprocessing stop is made with every block if SBL2 (single block with stop after every

block) is active. This suppresses the premachining of part program blocks. This variant of

the SBL2 is not true-to-contour.

This means that a different contour characteristic might be generated as a result of the

preprocessing stop than without single block or with SBL1.

Application: Debug mode for testing part programs.

42162 EXTERN_DOUBLE_TURRET_DIST -FBFA

- Double turret head tool distance DOUBLE SOFORT

--0. --7/7

802d-ng2 - - - - -1/-

802d-ng3 - - - - -1/-

42200 SINGLEBLOCK2_STOPRE -BA

- Activate SBL2 debug mode BOOLEAN SOFORT

--FALSE--7/7

42400 PUNCH_DWELLTIME -N4

s Dwell time for punching and nibbling DOUBLE SOFORT

--1.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

Channel-specific setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-319

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This data sets the dwell time between reaching the position and triggering the stroke.

The set value is rounded to an integer multiple of the interpolation cycle. (This means

that the value set here can only differ slightly from that which is actually executed.)

Note:

MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be set so that the value written by

the part program is transferred into the active file system on reset (i.e. the value is retai-

ned even after the reset).

Description:

This machine data has exactly the same effect as machine data

NIBBLE_PRE_START_TIME. Its primary purpose is to allow the pre-start time to be alte-

red from the NC program so that it can be adapted to different metal sheet sizes and

thicknesses. However, the setting data is active only when the machine data has been

set to zero.

Related to .... NIBBLE_PRESTART_TIME

Description:

Minimum time between 2 strokes in seconds

42402 NIBPUNCH_PRE_START_TIME -N4

s Delay time (punch/nibble) with G603 DOUBLE SOFORT

- - .02,0.0 - - 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

42404 MINTIME_BETWEEN_STROKES -N4

s Minimum time between 2 strokes in seconds DOUBLE SOFORT

--0.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

Channel-specific setting data

3-320

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

0: When incremental programming is used on an axis, only the programmed position

delta is traversed after a frame change. Zero offsets in FRAMES are only traversed when

an absolute position is specified.

1: When incremental programming is used on an axis, changes to zero offsets are tra-

versed after a frame change (standard response up to software version 3).

Related to ....

SD 42442: TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG

Description:

0: When incremental programming is used on an axis, only the programmed position

delta is traversed after a frame change. Tool length offsets in FRAMES are only tra-

versed when an absolute position is specified.

1: When incremental programming is used on an axis, changes to tool length offsets

are traversed after a tool change (standard response up to SW version 3).

Related to ....

SD 42440: FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG

Description:

If the first programming of an axis after "Search run with calculation to end of block" is

incremental, the incremental value is added as a function of SD

$SC_TARGET_BLOCK_INCR_PROG to the value accumulated up to the search target :

SD = TRUE: Incremental value is added to accumulated position

SD = FALSE: Incremental value is added to current actual value

The setting data is evaluated on NC start for output of the action blocks.

42440 FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG -K2

- Traversing from zero offset with incr. programming BOOLEAN SOFORT

--TRUE--7/7

42442 TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG -W1

- Traversing from zero offset with incr. programming BOOLEAN SOFORT

--TRUE--7/7

42444 TARGET_BLOCK_INCR_PROG -BA

- Set down mode after search run with calculation BOOLEAN SOFORT

--TRUE--7/7

Channel-specific setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-321

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This setting data defines the maximum tolerance of smoothing for the contour.

Related to:

$MC_SMOOTHING_MODE,

$SC_SMOOTH_ORI_TOL

Description:

The setting data defines the limit angle from which the compressor COMPCAD inter-

prets a block transition as a corner. Practical values lie between 10 and 40 degrees.

Values from 0 to 89 degrees inclusive are permitted.

The angle only serves as an approximate measure for corner detection. The compressor

can also classify flatter block transitions as corners and eliminate larger angles as out-

liers on account of plausibility considerations.

42465 SMOOTH_CONTUR_TOL -B1

mm maximum contour tolerance on smoothing DOUBLE SOFORT

- - 0.05 0.000001 999999. 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

42470 CRIT_SPLINE_ANGLE -W1,PGA

degrees Corner limit angle for compressor DOUBLE SOFORT

- - 36.0 0.0 89.0 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

Channel-specific setting data

3-322

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The setting data defines a typical tool radius. It is only evaluated in compressor COMP-

CAD. The lower the value, the greater the precision, but the slower the program execu-

tion.

Description:

This setting data defines the maximum contour tolerance in the compressor.

42471 MIN_CURV_RADIUS EXP, C09 -

mm Minimum radius of curvature DOUBLE SOFORT

--3.0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

42475 COMPRESS_CONTUR_TOL -F2,PGA

mm maximum contour deviation with compressor DOUBLE SOFORT

- - 0.05 0.000001 999999. 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

42480 STOP_CUTCOM_STOPRE -W1

- Alarm response with tool radius compensation and

preproc. stop

BOOLEAN SOFORT

--TRUE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

Channel-specific setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-323

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

If this setting data is TRUE, block execution is stopped by preprocessing stop and active

tool radius compensation, and does not resume until after a user acknowledgement

(START).

If it is FALSE, machining is not interrupted at such a program point.

Description:

FALSE:

If there is a preprocessing stop (either programmed or generated internally by the cont-

rol) before the deselection block (G40) when tool radius compensation is active, then

firstly the starting point of the deselection block is approached from the last end point

before the preprocessing stop. The deselection block itself is then executed, i.e. the

deselection block is usually replaced by two traversing blocks. Tool radius compensation

is no longer active in these blocks. The behavior is thus identical with that before the

introduction of this setting data.

TRUE:

If there is a preprocessing stop (either programmed or generated internally by the cont-

rol) before the deselection block (G40) when tool radius compensation is active, the end

point of the deselection point is traversed in a straight line from the last end point before

the preprocessing stop.

Description:

This setting data controls the approach and retraction behavior with tool radius compen-

sation if the activation or deactivation block does not contain any traversing information.

42490 CUTCOM_G40_STOPRE -W1

- Retraction behavior of tool radius compensation with

prep. stop

BOOLEAN SOFORT

--FALSE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

42494 CUTCOM_ACT_DEACT_CTRL -W1

- Approach & retraction behavior with 2-1/2D tool

radius compens.

DWORD SOFORT

- - 2222.. - - 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

Channel-specific setting data

3-324

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

It is only evaluated with 2-1/2D TRC

(CUT2D or CUT2DF).

The decimal coding is as follows:

N N N N

| | | |____ Approach behavior for tools with tool point direction

| | | (turning tools)

| | |______ Approach behavior for tools without tool point direction

| | (milling tools)

| |________ Retract behavior for tools with tool point direction

| (turning tools)

|__________ Retract behavior for tools without tool point direction

(milling tools)

If the position in question contains a 1, approach or retraction is always performed, even

if G41/G42 or G40 stands alone in a block.

For example:

N100 x10 y0

N110 G41

N120 x20

If we assume a tool radius of 10mm in the above example, position x10y10 is approa-

ched in block N110.

If the position in question contains the value 2, the approach or retraction movement is

only performed if at least one axis of the offset plane is programmed in the activa-

tion/deactivation block. To obtain the same results as the above example with this set-

ting, the program must be altered as follows:

N100 x10 y0

N110 G41 x10

N120 x20

If axis information x10 is missing in block N110, activation of TRC is delayed by one

block, i.e. the activation block would now be N120.

If the position in question contains a value other than 1 or 2, i.e. in particular the value 0,

an approach or retraction movement is not performed in a block that does not contain

any traversing information.

About the term "Tools with tool point direction":

These are tools with tool numbers between 400 and 599 (turning and grinding tools),

whose tool point direction has a value between 1 and 8. Turning and grinding tools with

tool point direction 0 or 9 or other undefined values are treated like milling tools.

Note:

If the value of this setting data is changed within a program, we recommend program-

ming a preprocessing stop (stopre) before the description to avoid the new value

being used in program sections before that point. The reverse case is not serious,

i.e. if the setting data is written, subsequent NC blocks will definitely access the new

value.

Channel-specific setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-325

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

FALSE:

If two intersections are created on correction of the inner side of an (almost) closed con-

tour consisting of two successive circle blocks or a circle and a linear block, the

intersection that lies on the first part contour nearer to the block end will be selec-

ted as per the default behavior.

A contour will be considered as (almost) closed if the distance between the starting point

of the first block and the end point of the second block is smaller than 10% of the

active compensation radius, but not larger than 1000 path increments (corresponds

to 1mm to 3 decimal places).

TRUE:

Under the same condition as described above, the intersection that lies on the first part

contour nearer to block start is selected.

Description:

Setting data for additional limitation of (tangential) path acceleration

Related to ...

MD 32300: MAX_AX_ACCEL

SD 42502: IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL

42496 CUTCOM_CLSD_CONT --

- Tool radius compensation behavior with closed

contour

BOOLEAN SOFORT

--FALSE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

42500 SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL -B2

m/s² maximum path acceleration DOUBLE SOFORT

- - 10000. 1.0e-3 - 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

Channel-specific setting data

3-326

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Setting data SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL is included in the limit calculations if SD:

IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL=TRUE

Related to ...

SD 42500: SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL

Description:

As well as MD: MAX_PATH_JERK, the maximum path-related jerk can also limit the jerk.

Related to ...

MD 20600: MAX_PATH_JERK

SD 42510: IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK

42502 IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL -B2

- Evaluate SD SC_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL BOOLEAN SOFORT

--FALSE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

42510 SD_MAX_PATH_JERK -B2

m/s³ maximum path-related jerk as setting data DOUBLE SOFORT

- - 100000.,100000.,10

0000.,100000....

1.e-9 - 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

Channel-specific setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-327

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Setting data SD_MAX_PATH_JERK is included in the limit calculations if SD:

IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK=TRUE

Related to ...

SD 42510: SD_MAX_PATH_JERK (SD for additional limitation of (tangential) path jerk)

Description:

Traverse path distance from which the feed is reduced before the corner with G62.

42512 IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK -B2

- Evaluate SD SD_MAX_PATH_JERK BOOLEAN SOFORT

--FALSE--7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

42520 CORNER_SLOWDOWN_START --

mm Start of feed reduction at G62. DOUBLE SOFORT

--0. --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

42522 CORNER_SLOWDOWN_END --

mm End of feed reduction at G62. DOUBLE SOFORT

--0. --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

Channel-specific setting data

3-328

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Traverse path distance up to which the feed remains reduced after a corner with G62.

Description:

Override used to multiply the feed at the corner with G62.

Description:

Angle from which a corner is taken into account when reducing the feed with G62.

For example: CORNER_SLOWDOWN_CRIT = 90 means that all corners of 90 degrees

or a more acute angle are traversed slower with G62.

42524 CORNER_SLOWDOWN_OVR --

% Feed override reduction at G62 DOUBLE SOFORT

--0. --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

42526 CORNER_SLOWDOWN_CRIT --

degrees Corner detection at G62 DOUBLE SOFORT

--0. --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

Channel-specific setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-329

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The setting data limits feed lowering of the tool center point on concave circle segments

with tool radius compensation active and CFC or CFIN selected.

With CFC, the feed is defined at the contour. On concave circular arcs, feed lowering of

the tool center point is created by the ratio of the contour curvature to the tool center

point path curvature. The setting data is limiting this effect, reducing backing off and

overheating of the tool.

For contours with varying curvatures, a mid-range curvature is used.

0: Provides the previous behavior: If the ratio between contour radius and tool center

point path radius is less than or equal to 0.01 the feed is applied to the tool center point

path. Less pronounced feed reductions are executed.

>0: Feed lowering is limited to the programmed factor. At 0.01, this means that the feed

of the tool center point path is possibly only 1 percent of the programmed feed value.

1: On concave contours, the tool center point feed equals the programmed feed (the

behavior then corresponds to CFTCP).

Description:

If this setting data is not zero, the allocation of the tool lengths 1 to 3

(length, wear) to the geometry axes is not changed if the machining plane (G17 to G19)

changes. The allocation of tool length components to the geometry axes results from the

value of the setting data according to the following tables. With respect to the allocation,

42528 CUTCOM_DECEL_LIMIT --

- Feed lowering on circles with tool radius

compensation

DOUBLE SOFORT

- - 0. 0. 1. 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST -W1

- Retain the assignment of tool lengths 1 to 3 to the

geo-axes when changing the machining plane (G17

to G19)

DWORD SOFORT

--0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

Channel-specific setting data

3-330

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

a distinction is made between turning tools (tool types 500 to 599) and other tools (dril-

ling/milling tools). For the representation in the tables it is assumed that geometry axes 1

to 3 are named X, Y, Z. However, the geometry axis sequence, and not the axis identi-

fier, is the determining factor in the assignment of an offset to an axis.

The assignment of the tool lengths to the geometry axes for turning tools (tool types 500

to 599) results from the value of setting data SD 42940 in accordance with the following

table:

Plane/value Length 1 Length 2 Length 3

17 Y X Z

18*) X ZY

19 Z Y X

-17 X Y Z

-18 Z X Y

-19 Y Z X

The following table shows the allocation of the tool lengths 1 to 3 to the geometry axes

for drills/milling cutters (tool types 100 to 299):

Plane/valueLength 1 Length 2 Length 3

17*) Z Y X

18 Y X Z

19 X Z Y

-17 Z X Y

-18 Y Z X

-19 X Y Z

related to:

SD 42950: TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE

Description:

0: The assignment is performed by default. A distinction is made between turning tools

(tool type 500 to 599) and drilling/milling tools (tool type 100 to 299).

related to:

SD 42940: TOOL_LENGTH_CONST

42950 TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE -W1

- Allocation of the tool length compensation

independent of tool type

DWORD SOFORT

--0 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng2 - - - - 3/3

802d-ng3 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm1 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm2 - - - - 3/3

802d-tm3 - - - - 3/3

Channel-specific setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-331

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

This setting data can be used to delimit the maximum number of blocks in the interpola-

tion buffer by the maximum number specified in MD MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE.

A negative value means that no limitation of the number of blocks is active in the interpo-

lation buffer, and the number of blocks is determined solely by the MD

MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE (default setting).

Description:

This setting data writes the taper angle for taper turning. This setting data is written via

the operator interface.

Description:

If no axial scaling factor I, J, or K is programmed in the G51 block,

DEFAULT_SCALEFACTOR_AXIS is active. The scaling factor is only active if MD

AXES_SCALE_ENABLE is set.

Related to:

AXES_SCALE_ENABLE,

WEIGHTING_FACTOR_FOR_SCALE

42990 MAX_BLOCKS_IN_IPOBUFFER -K1

- maximum number of blocks in IPO buffer DWORD SOFORT

---1 --7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm2 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

42995 CONE_ANGLE --

- Taper angle DOUBLE SOFORT

- - 0 -90 90 7/7

43120 DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_AXIS -FBFA

- Axial default scaling factor with G51 active DWORD SOFORT

--1 --7/7

802d-ng2 - - - - 0/0

802d-ng3 - - - - 0/0

43200 SPIND_S -S1

rev/min Speed for spindle start by VDI DOUBLE SOFORT

--0.0 --7/7

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

Channel-specific setting data

3-332

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Spindle speed at spindle start by VDI interface signals DB31,...DBB30.1 and

DB31,...DBB30.2.

Example: $SA_SPIND_S[S1] = 600

Spindle 1 is started at a speed of 600 rpm upon detection of the positive edge of one of

the above mentioned VDI starting signals.

Speed programming values are entered in the SD by setting bit 4=1 in MD 35035

SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK.

The SD becomes active in JOG as a default speed by setting bit 5=1 in MD 35035

SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK (exception: the value is zero).

Related to:

SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK

Description:

Definition of the constant cutting speed for the master spindle.

The setting data is evaluated at spindle start by the VDI interface signals

DB31,...DBB30.1 and DB31,...DBB30.2.

Cutting speed programming values are entered in the SD by setting bit 8=1 in MD 35035

SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK.

Related to:

SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK

Description:

Definition of the spindle speed type for the master spindle.

The setting data is evaluated via the DBB30 interface at spindle start.

The range of values and the functionality correspond to the 15th G group "feed type".

Permissible values are the G values: 93, 94, 95, 96, 961, 97, and 971.

With the stated values, a functional distinction has to be made between the following

variants:

==>93, 94, 95, 97 and 971: The spindle is started at the speed in SD 43200

$SA_SPIND_S.

==>96 und 961: The speed of the spindle is derived from the cutting speed of SD 43202

$SA_SPIND_CONSTCUT_S and the radius of the transverse axis.

The default value is 94 (corresponds to G94).

The default value becomes active if the SD is written with impermissible values.

43202 SPIND_CONSTCUT_S -S1

m/min Const cut speed for spindle start by VDI DOUBLE SOFORT

--0.0 --7/7

43206 SPIND_SPEED_TYPE A06 -

- Spindle speed type for spindle start through VDI DWORD SOFORT

- - 94 93 972 7/7

Channel-specific setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-333

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The spindle speed is not permitted to drop below the minimum spindle speed limit ente-

red in this SD. The NCK limits an excessively small spindle speed setpoint to this value.

The spindle speed can only fall below the minimum limit through:

- Spindle override 0%

-M5

-S0

- IS "Spindle stop" (V380x 0004.3)

- IS "Controller enable" (V380x 0002.1)

- IS "Reset" (V3000 0000.7)

- IS "Spindle reset" (V380x 0002.2)

- IS "Oscillation speed" (V380x 2002.5

Irrelevant for:

All spindle modes except control mode

Special cases:

The value in SD: SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 can be altered by means of:

- G25 S .... in the part program

- Operator commands from the HMI

The value in SD: SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 is retained after reset or power off.

related to:

SD 43220: SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26

SD 43230: SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS (progr. Spindle speed limiting with G96)

Description:

The spindle speed is not permitted to exceed the maximum spindle speed limit entered in

this SD. The NCK limits an excessive spindle speed setpoint to this value.

Irrelevant for:

All spindle modes except control mode.

Special cases:

The value in this SD: SPIND_MIN_VELO_G26 can be altered by means of:

- G26 S .... in the part program

- Operator commands from the HMI

The value in SD: SPIND_MIN_VELO_G26 is retained after reset or power off.

related to:

SD 43210: SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 (progr. spindle speed limiting G25)

SD 43230: SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS (progr. Spindle speed limiting with G96)

43210 SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 -S1

rev/min Programmable lower spindle speed limiting for G25 DOUBLE SOFORT

--0.0 --7/7

43220 SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 -S1

rev/min Programmable upper spindle speed limiting for G26 DOUBLE SOFORT

- - 1000.0 - - 7/7

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

Channel-specific setting data

3-334

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

At constant cutting rate (G96 and G97) an extra limits entered in

SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS is operative in addition to the continually applied limits. Fur-

thermore this can be described with SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS in the part program with

LIMS=... .

Irrelevant for:

All spindle functions except for G96 and G97 (constant cutting speed)

Application example:

When cutting-off and for very small diameters of the workpiece to be machined, the

spindle with the workpiece (lathe) accelerates higher and higher at a constant cutting

rate (G96), theoretically reaching an infinitely high set speed in the position of the tra-

verse axis X=0. In cases such as this, the spindle rotates up to its maximum spindle

speed in the current gear stage (limited, where applicable, by G26). If, especially for

G96, the spindle is to be limited to a lower speed, then this can be defined using

LIMS=.... SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS.

Special casesrelated to:

The value SD 43210: SPIND_MIN_VELO_LIMS can be changed using:

- LIMS S .... in the part program

- Operator commands from the HMI

The value SD SPIND_MIN_VELO_LIMS is retained after reset or power down.

related to:

SD 43220: SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 (maximum spindle speed)

SD 43210: SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 (minimum spindle speed)

Description:

Spindle position in [ DEGREES ] for spindle positioning with M19.

The position approach mode is defined in $SA_M19_SPOSMODE.

Default positions must lie in the range 0 <= pos < $MA_MODULO_RANGE.

Path defaults ($SA_M19_SPOSMODE = 2) can be positive or negative and are only

limited by the input format.

43230 SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS -S1

rev/min progr. Spindle speed limiting G96 DOUBLE SOFORT

- - 100.0 - - 7/7

43240 M19_SPOS -, A12 S1

degrees Spindle position for spindle positioning with M19. DOUBLE SOFORT

- - 0.0 -10000000.0 10000000.0 7/7

43250 M19_SPOSMODE -, A12 S1

- Spindle position approach mode for spindle

positioning with M19.

DWORD SOFORT

--0 057/7

Channel-specific setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-335

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Spindle position approach mode for spindle positioning with M19.

In which signify:

0: DC (default) approach position on the shortest path.

1: AC approach position normally.

2: IC approach incrementally (as path), sign gives the traversing direction

3: DC approach position on the shortest path.

4: ACP approach position from the positive direction.

5: ACN approach position from the negative direction.

Description:

Reference point position for G30.1.

This setting data will be evaluated in CYCLE328.

Description:

0: The working area limit of the axis is deactivated in the positive direction.

1: The working area limit of the axis is active in the positive direction.

The setting data is parameterized using the operator panel in the "Parameter" area by

activating/deactivating the working area limitation.

Irrelevant for:

G-Code: WALIMOF

Description:

0: The working area limit of the axis is deactivated in the negative direction.

1: The working area limit of the axis is active in the negative direction.

The setting data is parameterized using the operator panel in the "Parameter" area by

activating/deactivating the working area limitation.

Irrelevant for:

G-Code: WALIMOF

43340 EXTERN_REF_POSITION_G30_1 -, A12 FBFA

- Reference point position for G30.1 DOUBLE SOFORT

--0.0 --7/7

43400 WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE -A3

- Working area limiting active in positive direction BOOLEAN SOFORT

CTEQ

--FALSE--7/7

43410 WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE -A3

- Working area limiting active in negative direction BOOLEAN SOFORT

CTEQ

--FALSE--7/7

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

Channel-specific setting data

3-336

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The working area limits can be used to restrict the working area in the MCS in the posi-

tive direction of the corresponding axis.

The setting data can be changed via the operator panel in the "Parameter" operating

area.

The positive working area limit can be changed in the program with G26.

Irrelevant for:

G-Code: WALIMOF

related to:

SD 43400: WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE

Description:

The working area limitation can be used to restrict the working area in the MCS in the

negative direction of the corresponding axis.

The setting data can be changed via the operator panel in the "Parameter" operating

area.

The negative working area limit can be changed in the program with G25.

Irrelevant forSpecial cases:

G code: WALIMOF

related to:

SD 43410: WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE

Description:

This setting data allows the "Travel to fixed stop" function to be checked.

Value=0: Deselect "Travel to fixed stop" function

=1: Select "Travel to fixed stop" function

The setting data can be overwritten by the part program using the command FXS[x]=1/0.

43420 WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS -A3

mm, degrees Working area, limiting plus DOUBLE SOFORT

--1.0e+8--7/7

43430 WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS -A3

mm, degrees Working area, limiting minus DOUBLE SOFORT

- - -1.0e+8 - - 7/7

43500 FIXED_STOP_SWITCH -F1

- Selection of travel to fixed stop BYTE SOFORT

--0 017/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng3 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

Channel-specific setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-337

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

The clamping torque is entered in this setting data as a percentage of the maximum

motor torque (for FSD, corresponds with percentage of max. current setpoint)

Please note that a clamping torque greater than 100% may only be present for a short

time; otherwise, the motor will be damaged

When selecting the function "Travel to fixed stop" through programming FXS[.]

the default setting of the MD 37010: FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_DEF applies until it is pro-

grammed

with FXST[.].

The FXST[x] command acts like a block-synchronous change of this setting data.

The setting data can be modified by the operator.

The SD is already operative as the stop is approached.

The fixed stop is considered reached if: FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK,

bit 1 = 0, with MD37060: (no acknowledgment required) IS "Fixed stop reached" is

set by the NC.

Bit 1 = 1: (acknowledgment required) IS "Fixed stop reached" is set by the NC

and acknowledged by IS "Acknowledge fixed stop reached".

related to:

MD 37010: FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_DEF (default setting for clamping torque)

Description:

Position of the oscillating axis at reversal point 1.

Note:

MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written

by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value

is retained after RESET.)

43510 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE -F1

% Clamping torque for travel to fixed stop DOUBLE SOFORT

- - 5.0 0.0 800.0 7/7

802d-cu3 - - - - 2/2

802d-ng2 - - - - 1/1

802d-ng3 - - - - 1/1

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 2/2

802d-tm3 - - - - 2/2

43700 OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 -P5

mm, degrees Oscillation reversal point 1 DOUBLE SOFORT

--0.0 --7/7

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

Channel-specific setting data

3-338

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Application example(s)

NC language: OSP1[Axis]=Position

Related to ....

OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2

Description:

Position of the oscillating axis at reversal point 2.

Note:

MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written

by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value

is retained after reset.)

Application example(s)

NC language: OSP2[Axis]=Position

Related to ....

OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1

Description:

Hold time of the oscillating axis at reversal point 1.

Note:

MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value writ-

ten by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the

value is retained after RESET.)

Application example(s)

NC language: OST1[Axis]=Position

Related to ....

OSCILL_DWELL_TIME2

43710 OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2 -P5

mm, degrees Oscillation reversal point 2 DOUBLE SOFORT

--0.0 --7/7

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

43720 OSCILL_DWELL_TIME1 -P5

s Hold time at oscillation reversal point 1 DOUBLE SOFORT

--0.0 --7/7

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

Channel-specific setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-339

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Hold time of the oscillating axis at reversal point 2.

Note:

MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written

by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value

is retained after RESET.)

Application example(s)

NC language: OST2[Axis]=Position

Related to ....

OSCILL_DWELL_TIME1

Description:

Feed rate of the oscillating axis

Note:

MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value writ-

ten by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the

value is retained after RESET.)

Application example(s)

NC language: FA[Axis]=F value

43730 OSCILL_DWELL_TIME2 -P5

s Hold time at oscillation reversal point 2 DOUBLE SOFORT

--0.0 --7/7

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

43740 OSCILL_VELO -P5

mm/min, rev/min Feedrate of reciprocating axis DOUBLE SOFORT

--0.0 --7/7

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

43750 OSCILL_NUM_SPARK_CYCLES -P5

- Number of spark-out strokes DWORD SOFORT

--0 --7/7

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

Channel-specific setting data

3-340

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Description:

Number of sparking-out strokes performed after ending the oscillating movement

Application example(s)

NC language: OSNSC[Axis]=Stroke number

Note:

MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value writ-

ten by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the

value is retained after reset.)

Description:

Position the oscillating axis travels to after ending the sparking-out strokes.

Note:

MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value writ-

ten by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value

is retained after reset.)

Application example(s)

NC language: OSE[Axis]=Position

Description:

Bit mask:

Bit no. | Meaning in OSCILL_CTRL_MASK

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

0(LSB)-1 | 0: Stop at the next reversal point if the

| oscillating movement is switched off

| 1: Stop at reversal point 1 if the

| oscillating movement is switched off

| 2: Stop at reversal point 2 if the

| oscillating movement is switched of

| 3: Do not approach a reversal point when the oscillating movement is switched

43760 OSCILL_END_POS -P5

mm, degrees End position of the reciprocating axis DOUBLE SOFORT

--0.0 --7/7

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

43770 OSCILL_CTRL_MASK -P5

- Oscillation sequence control mask DWORD SOFORT

--0 --7/7

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

Channel-specific setting data

06/2007 Setting Data - Description

3-341

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

off

| if no sparking-out strokes are programmed

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2 | 1: Approach end position after sparking out

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3 | 1: If the oscillating movement is aborted by delete distance-to-go,

| then the sparking-out strokes are to be executed afterwards

| and the end position approached if necessary

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4 | 1: If the oscillating movement is aborted by delete distance-to-go,

| then the corresponding reversal point

| is approached on switch off

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

5 | 1: Changed feedrate does not become active until the next reversal point

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

6 | 1: Path override is active if the feed rate is 0,

| otherwise speed override is active

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

7 | 1: In the case of rotary axes DC (shortest path)

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

8 | 1: Execute sparking-out stroke as single stroke not as double stroke

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

9 | 1: On starting, first approach the starting position, see

| $SA_OSCILL_START_POS

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Application example(s)

NC language: OSCTRL[Axis]=(setting options, reset options)

Description:

Switching the oscillating movement on and off

Note:

MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value writ-

ten by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the

value is retained after reset.)

Application example(s)

NC language: OS[Axis]=1, OS[Axis]=0

43780 OSCILL_IS_ACTIVE -P5

- Activate oscillation movement BOOLEAN SOFORT

--FALSE--7/7

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

Setting Data - Description 06/2007

Channel-specific setting data

3-342

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Irrelevant for

Description:

Position approached by the oscillating axis at the start of oscillation if this is set in

$SA_OSCILL_CTRL_MASK.

Note:

MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written

by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value

is retained after reset.)

43790 OSCILL_START_POS --

mm, degrees Start position of reciprocating axis DOUBLE SOFORT

--0.0 --7/7

802d-tm1 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm2 - - - - 0/0

802d-tm3 - - - - 0/0

4-343

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Interface Signals 4

4.1 General

Interfaces

The exchange of signals and data between the PLC user program and

•NCK (core of numerical control)

•HMI (display unit)

takes places through various data areas. The PLC user program does not have

to handle the exchange of data and signals. From the users point of view, this

takes place automatically.

Cyclical signal exchange

The control and status signals of the PLC/NCK interface are updated cyclically.

•General signals

•Operating mode signals

•Channel signals

•Axis/spindle signals

$[LV

$[LV

$[LVQ

6SLQGOHQ

6LJQDOVWR1&

6LJQDOVIURP1&

&KDQQHO

6LJQDOVWR1&

6LJQDOVIURP1&

2SHUDWLQJPRGHV

6LJQDOVWR1&

6LJQDOVIURP1&

*HQHUDO

6LJQDOVWR1&

6LJQDOVIURP1&

3/&1&.

8VHU

SURJUDP

*HQHUDO

$[LV

6SLQGOH

&KDQQHO

2SHUDWLQJ

PRGHV

Interface Signals 06/2007

Signals from/to HMI

4-344

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

4.2 Signals from/to HMI

4.2.1 Program-control signals from HMI

V1700 0000.5

Interface signal

M01 selected

Signal(s) from HMI ---> PLC

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

Program control Activate M1 has been selected on the operator interface. This

does not activate the function.

Signal state 0 or signal

transition 1 ---> 0

Program control Activate M1 has not been selected via the operator interface.

Related to .... IS ”Activate M01”

IS ”M0/M1 active”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V1700 0000.6

Interface signal

Dry run feedrate selected

Signal(s) from HMI ---> PLC

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal status 1 or edge

transition 0 ---> 1

Dry run feedrate is selected.

Instead of the programmed feedrate, the dry run feedrate entered in SD

42100: DRY_RUN_FEED is effective.

When activating the dry run feedrate, the signal is automatically entered in the

PLC interface and transferred by the PLC basic program to the PLC interface

signal ”Activate dry run feedrate”.

Signal status 0 or edge

transition 1 ---> 0

Dry run feedrate is not selected.

The programmed feedrate is effective.

Related to .... IS ”Activate dry run feedrate” (V3200 0000.6)

SD: DRY_RUN_FEED (dry run feedrate)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1, K1

V1700 0001.3

Interface signal

Feed override for rapid traverse selected

Signal(s) from HMI ---> PLC

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal status 1 or edge

transition 0 ---> 1

The feedrate override switch is also to act as a rapid traverse override switch.

Overrides more than 100 % are limited to the maximum value of 100 % rapid

traverse override.

The interface signal (IS) ”Feedrate override selected for rapid traverse” is

automatically entered in the PLC interface by the operator panel and

transferred by the PLC basic program to the PLC interface signal ”Rapid

traverse override effective”.

Furthermore, the IS ”Feedrate override” (VB3200 0004) is copied by the PLC

basic program into the IS ”Rapid traverse override” (VB3200 0005).

Signal state 0 or signal

transition 1 ---> 0

Program control -Feed override for rapid traverse- has not been selected via

the operator interface.

Application example(s) This signal is used if no separate rapid traverse override switch exists.

Signals from/to HMI

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-345

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1

V1700 0001.7

Interface signal

Program test selected

Signal(s) from HMI ---> PLC

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

Program control Program test has been selected via the operator interface.

This does not activate the function.

Signal state 0 or signal

transition 1 ---> 0

Program control Program test has not been selected via the operator

interface.

Related to .... IS ”Activate program test”

IS ”Program test active”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V1700 0002

V1700 0003.0 to .1

Interface signal

Skip block selected Program test selected””#

Signal(s) from HMI ---> PLC

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

Program control -skip block- has been selected via the operator interface. This

does not activate the function.

Signal state 0 or signal

transition 1 ---> 0

Program control -skip block- has not been selected via the operator interface.

Related to .... IS ”Activate skip block”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V1700 0003.7 *** Measuring in JOG active

Interface signal Signal(s) to PLC (HMI ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

The ”Tool measuring in JOG” function is activated by HMI.

Note: This signal remains set when changing to AUTOMATIC mode in this

function. The HMI maintains the JOG image in the display. Only the active

mode display changes.

Signal state 0 or signal

transition 1 ---> 0

The ”Tool measuring” function is not active.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: M5

Interface Signals 06/2007

Signals from/to HMI

4-346

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

4.2.2 Signals from HMI

V1800 0000.0

Interface signal

AUTOMATIC mode

Signal(s) to PLC (HMI ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

AUTOMATIC mode has been selected by the HMI.

The signal status 1 is active for only one PLC cycle.

Signal state 0 AUTOMATIC mode is not selected by the HMI.

Signal irrelevant for ...

...

if ”Change mode disable” signal

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: M5

V1800 0000.1

Interface signal

MDA mode

Signal(s) to PLC (HMI ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

MDA mode has been selected by the HMI.

The signal status 1 is active for only one PLC cycle.

Signal state 0 MDA mode is not selected by the HMI.

Signal irrelevant for ... ... if ”Change mode disable” signal

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: M5

V1800 0000.2

Interface signal

JOG mode

Signal(s) to PLC (HMI ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

JOG mode has been selected by the HMI.

The signal status 1 is active for only one PLC cycle.

Signal state 0 JOG mode is not selected by the HMI.

Signal irrelevant for ... ... if ”Change mode disable” signal

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: M5

V1800 0000.4

Interface signal

Mode group changeover disable

Signal(s) to PLC (HMI ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

Request by MMC: The current active mode (JOG, MDA or AUTOMATIC)

should not be changed.

The signal status is active for only one PLC cycle.

Signal state 0 The mode can be changed.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: M5

Signals from/to HMI

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-347

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

4.2.3 Signals from operator panel

V1800 0000.6 ***

Interface signal

Start measuring in JOG

Signal(s) to PLC (HMI ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

Request to PLC by HMI to start the measuring program with NC start.

The signal status 1 is active for only one PLC cycle only.

Signal state 0

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: M5

V1800 0001.2

Interface signal

Machine function REF

Signal(s) to PLC (HMI ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

The REF machine function is selected from within JOG mode.

The signal status 1 is active for only one PLC cycle only.

Signal state 0 Machine function REF is not selected.

Signal irrelevant for ...

...

if JOG mode is not active.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: M5

V1900 0000.6

Interface signal

Simulation activ

Signal(s) from HMI ---> PLC

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

The -simulation- function has been selected via the operator interface.

Signal state 0 or signal

transition 1 ---> 0

The -simulation- function has not been selected via the operator interface.

Related to ....

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Signals from/to HMI

4-348

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

4.2.4 General selection/status signals from HMI

V1900 0003.7

V1900 0004.7

Interface signal

Machine axis for handwheel 1

for handwheel 2

Signal(s) from NC (HMI -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The operator has assigned an axis to the handwheel (1, 2, 3) directly on the

operator panel. This axis is a machine axis - not a geometry axis (axis in the

WCS).

For further information see IS ”Axis number”.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The operator has assigned an axis to the handwheel (1, 2, 3) directly on the

operator panel. This axis is a geometry axis (axis in the WCS).

For further information see IS ”Axis number”.

Related to .... IS ”Axis number” (V1900 0003.0 to .4, ff)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

V1900 1003.0 to .2

V1900 1004.0 to .2

Interface signal

Axis number for handwheel 1

for handwheel 2

Signal(s) from NC (HMI -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Significance of signal The operator can assign an axis to every handwheel directly via the operator

panel. To do so, he defines the required axis (e.g. X).

The PLC user interface provides the number of the axis plus the information

’machine axis or geometry axis’ (”machine axis” interface signal) as HMI

interface signals.

The ”Activate handwheel” interface signal for the defined axis must be set from

the PLC user program.

Depending on the setting in the HMI interface signal ”machine axis”, either the

interface for the geometry axis or for the machine axis is used.

Signals from/to HMI

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-349

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

The following must be noted when assigning the axis designation to the axis

number:

•IS ”Machine axis” = 1; i.e. machine axis - not geometry axis:

The assignment is made via MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[n]

(machine axis name).

•IS ”Machine axis” = 0; i.e. geometry axis (axis in WCS):

The assignment is made via MD 20060: AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[n]

(geometry axis name in channel). IS ”Channel number geometry axis

handwheel n” defines the channel assigned to the handwheel.

The following coding applies to the axis number:

Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 axis number

0 0 0 -

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 2

0 1 1 3

1 0 0 4

1 0 1 5

Note: Bit 3 and bit 4 must always be left with value =0.

Related to ....

IS ”Machine axis” (V1900 1003.7 ff)

IS ”Activate handwheel” 1 to 3 /geometry axes 1, 2, 3

(V3200 1000.0 to .2, V3200 1004.0 to .2, V3200 1008.0 to .2)

IS ”Activate handwheel” 1 to 3 /machine axes (V380x 0004.0 to .2)

MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB [n] (machine axis name)

MD 20060: AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[n] (name of the geometry axis in the

channel)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Signals from/to HMI

4-350

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

4.2.5 General selection/status signals to HMI

V1900 5001.0

Interface signal

Update the tool list

Signal(s) from channel (PLC ---> HMI)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

Tool display is updated

Signal state 0 or signal

transition 1 ---> 0

No effect

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: W1

V1900 5002.0

Interface signal

Enabling machine tool measuring in JOG

Signal(s) from NCK (PLC → HMI)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 2

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

Measuring in JOG function can be activated.

Signal state 0 or signal

transition 1 ---> 0

Measuring in JOG is not possible.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: M5

VD1900 5004

Interface signal

Tool number for tool measuring in JOG

Signal(s) to HMI (PLC ---> HMI)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1

Value > 0 (DWORD) Input of T number from PLC for entering measurement results to HMI. The

number entered in the HMI screen is used as offset number D.

Value = 0 No specification of the T no. by PLC

Signal irrelevant for ... ... if IS ”Measuring in JOG active” (V1700 0003.7) is not set.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: M5

Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-351

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

4.3 Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel

V2500 0004. 0 to .4

V2500 0006.0

V2500 0008.0

V2500 0010.0

V2500 0012.0 to .2

Interface signal

M function Change 1 to 5

S function Change 1

T function Change 1

D function Change 1

H function Change 1 to 3

Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 An M, S, T, D or H function has been output to the interface with a new value

together with the associated change signal. In this case, the change signal

indicates that the appropriate value is valid.

The change signals are only valid for one PLC cycle! That means that there is a

pending change for this cycle if the signal is 1.

Signal state 0 The value of the data concerned is not valid.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H2

VB2500 1000 to

VB2500 1012

Interface signal

Decoded M signals: M0 - M99

Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 The dynamic M signal bits are set by decoded M functions.

Signal state 0 With a general auxiliary function output, dynamic M signal bits are

acknowledged by the PLC system program after the complete AWP routine has

been executed once.

Application

example(s)

clockwise rotation, switch coolant ON/OFF

Related to .... specific” (VD370x 0000)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H2

VD2500 2000

Interface signal

T function 1

Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: Job controlled

by NCK

Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 The T function programmed in an NC block is made available here as soon as

the T change signal is applied.

Value range of T function: 0-32000; integer

The T function remains valid until it is overwritten by a new T function.

Signal state 0 •After PLC power-up.

•All auxiliary functions are deleted before a new function is entered.

Application

example(s)

Control of automatic tool selection.

Special cases, errors,

... ...

When T0 is selected, the current tool is removed from the tool holder but not

replaced by a new tool (default configuration by machine manufacturer).

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H2

Interface Signals 06/2007

Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel

4-352

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

VD2500 3000

VD2500 3008

VD2500 3016

VD2500 3024

VD2500 3032

VB2500 3004

VB2500 3012

VB2500 3020

VB2500 3028

VB2500 3036

Interface signal

M function 1

M function 2

M function 3

M function 4

M function 5

Extended address M function 1

Extended address M function 2

Extended address M function 3

Extended address M function 4

Extended address M function 5

Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: Job controlled

by NCK

Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 Up to 5 M functions programmed in an NC block are made available here

simultaneously as soon as the M change signals are applied.

Value range of the M functions: 0 to 99; integer

Value range of extended address: 1-2; integer (spindle number)

The M functions remain valid until they are overwritten by new M functions.

Signal state 0 •After PLC power-up.

•All auxiliary functions are deleted before a new function is entered.

Related to .... IS "S function for the spindle (REAL), axis-specific” (VD370x 0000)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H2

VD2500 4000

VD2500 4008

VB2500 4004

VB2500 4012

Interface signal

S function 1

S function 2

Extended address S function 1

Extended address S function 2

Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: Job controlled by

NCK

Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 The S function programmed in an NC block (speed or cutting value with G96) is

made available here as soon as the S change signal is applied.

Value range of the S function: : Floating point (REAL format/4-byte)

Value range of extended address: 1-2; integer (spindle number)

The S function remains valid until it is overwritten by a new S function.

Signal state 0 •After PLC power-up.

•All auxiliary functions are deleted before a new function is entered.

Related to .... specific” (VD370x 0004)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H2

VD2500 5000

Interface signal

D function 1

Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: Job controlled by

NCK

Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 The D function programmed in an NC block is made available here as soon as

the D change signal is applied.

Value range of D function: 0-9; integer

The D function remains valid until it is overwritten by a new D function.

Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-353

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Signal state 0 •After PLC power-up.

•All auxiliary functions are deleted before a new function is entered.

Application

example(s)

Special cases, errors,

... ...

D0 is reserved for deselecting the current tool offset.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H2

VD2500 6000

VD2500 6008

VD2500 6016

VW2500 6004

VW2500 6012

VW2500 6020

Interface signal

H function 1

H function 2

H function 3

Extended address H function 1

Extended address H function 2

Extended address H function 3

Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: Job controlled by

NCK

Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 Up to 3 H functions programmed in an NC block are made available here

simultaneously as soon as the H change signals are applied.

Value range of the H functions: Floating point (REAL format/4-byte)

Value range of extended address: 0 to 99; integer

The H functions remain valid until they are overwritten by new H functions.

Signal state 0 •After PLC power-up.

•All auxiliary functions are deleted before a new function is entered.

Application

example(s)

Switching functions on the machine.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H2

Interface Signals 06/2007

NC signals

4-354

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

4.4 NC signals

4.4.1 General signals to NC

V2600 0000.1

Interface signal

EMERGENCY STOP

Signal(s) to NC (PLC ---> NC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The NC is switched to the EMERGENCY STOP state and the EMERGENCY

STOP procedure is started on the NC.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

•The NC is not in the EMERGENCY STOP state.

•The EMERGENCY STOP state is (still) active but can be reset with IS

”Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP” and IS ”reset”.

Related to .... IS ”Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP” (V2600 0000.2)

IS ”EMERGENCY STOP active” (V2700 0000.1)

V2600 0000.2

Interface signal

Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP

Signal(s) to NC (PLC ---> NC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The EMERGENCY STOP state is reset only if IS ”Acknowledge EMERGENCY

STOP” followed by IS ”Reset” (V3000 0000.7) are set. It must be noted in this

respect that IS ”Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP” and IS ”Reset” must be set

(together) for a long enough period for IS ”EMERGENCY STOP active” (V2600

0000.1) to be reset.

By resetting the EMERGENCY STOP state:

•the ”EMERGENCY STOP active” interface signal is reset

•the controller enable is switched in

•IS ”Position control active” is set

•Ready” is set

•Alarm 3000 is canceled

•the part program is no longer processed

Related to .... IS ”EMERGENCY STOP” (V2600 0000.1)

IS ”EMERGENCY STOP active” (V2700 0000.1)

IS ”Reset” (V3000 0000.7)

V2600 0001.0

Interface signal

INC inputs in mode group range active

Signal(s) to NCK (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

1The IS ”INC1”, ”INC10”, ..., ”continuous” in the operating mode range are used

as input signals (V3000 0002.0 to .6).

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

0The IS ”INC1”, ”INC10”, ..., ”continuous” in the axis and geometry axis range are

used as input signals.

NC signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-355

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

4.4.2 General signals from NC

Related to .... IS ”Machine function INC1 to continuous” in operating mode range (V3000

0002.0 to .6)

IS ”Machine function INC1,...,continuous”

for geometry axis 1 (V3200 1001.0 to .6)

for geometry axis 2 (V3200 1005.0 to .6)

for geometry axis 3 (V3200 1009.0 to .6)

IS ”Machine function INC1,...,continuous” in axis range (V380x 0005.0 to .6)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

V2700 0000.1

Interface signal

EMERGENCY STOP active

Signal(s) to NC (PLC ---> NC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The NC is in the EMERGENCY STOP state.

Related to .... IS ”EMERGENCY STOP” (V2600 0000.1)

IS ”Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP” (V2600 0000.2)

V2700 0001.0

Interface signal

Probe 1 is actuated

Signal(s) from NCK (NCK → PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Probe 1 is actuated

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Probe 1 is not actuated

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: M5

V2700 0001.7

Interface signal

INCH dimension system

Signal(s) to NC (PLC ---> NC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 The NC works with the inch dimension system.

Signal state 0 The NC works with the metric dimension system.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: G2

Interface Signals 06/2007

NC signals

4-356

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V2700 0004.0 to .7

Interface signal

Minus cam signals 1-32

Signal(s) from NCK (NCK---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid from SW release:

2.1

Signal status 1 or

edge transition 0 --->

The switching edges of the minus cam signals 1-32 are created independently of

the direction of traversing of the (rotary) axis and transferred to the PLC interface

at the IPO clock.

Linear axis:

– The minus cam signal switches from 0 to 1 when the axis overtravels the

minus cam in the negative axis direction.

Modulo rotary axis:

– The minus cam signal changes the levels at each positive edge of the plus

cam signal.

Signal status 0 or

edge transition 1 --->

Linear axis:

– The minus cam signal switches from 1 to 0 when the axis overtravels the

minus cam in the positive axis direction.

Modulo rotary axis:

– The minus cam signal changes the levels at each positive edge of the plus

cam signal.

V2700 0008.0 to .7

Interface signal

Plus cam signals 1-32

Signal(s) from NCK (NCK---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid from SW release:

2.1

Signal status 1 or

edge transition 0 --->

The switching edges of the plus cam signals 1-32 are created independently of

the direction of traversing of the (rotary) axis and transferred to the PLC interface

at the IPO clock.

Linear axis:

– The plus cam signal switches from 0 to 1 when the axis overtravels the plus

cam in the positive direction.

Modulo rotary axis:

– The plus cam signal switches from 0 to 1 when the axis overtravels the

minus cam in the positive axis direction.

The described behavior of the plus cam applies under the following condition:

Plus cam - minus cam < 180 degrees

If this condition is not fulfilled or the minus cam is greater than the plus cam, the

behavior of the plus cam signal is inverted. The behavior of the minus cam

signal remains unchanged.

Mode signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-357

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

4.5 Mode signals

Signal status 0 or

edge transition 1 --->

Linear axis:

– The plus cam signal switches from 1 to 0 when the axis overtravels the plus

cam in the negative direction.

Modulo rotary axis:

– The plus cam signal switches back from 1 to 0 when the axis overtravels the

plus cam in the positive axis direction.

The described behavior of the plus cam applies under the following condition:

Plus cam - minus cam < 180 degrees

If this condition is not fulfilled or the minus cam is greater than the plus cam, the

behavior of the plus cam signal is inverted. The behavior of the minus cam

signal remains unchanged.

V3000 0000.0

Interface signal

AUTOMATIC mode

Signal(s) to NCK (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

AUTOMATIC mode is selected by the PLC program.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

AUTOMATIC mode is not selected by the PLC program.

Signal irrelevant for ...

...

if ”Mode group changeover disable” signal

Related to .... IS ”Active mode AUTOMATIC”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3000 0000.1

Interface signal

MDA mode

Signal(s) to NCK (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

MDA mode is selected by the PLC program.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

MDA mode is not selected by the PLC program.

Signal irrelevant for ...

...

if ”Mode group changeover disable” signal

Related to .... IS ”Active mode MDA”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3000 0000.2

Interface signal

JOG mode

Signal(s) to NCK (PLC ---> NCK)

Interface Signals 06/2007

Mode signals

4-358

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

JOG mode is selected by the PLC program.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

JOG mode is not selected by the PLC program.

Signal irrelevant for ...

...

if ”Mode group changeover disable” signal

Related to .... IS ”Active mode JOG”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

Mode signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-359

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3000 0000.4

Interface signal

Mode group changeover disable

Signal(s) to NCK (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The currently active mode (JOG, MDA or AUTOMATIC) cannot be changed.

Signal state 0 The mode can be changed.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3000 0000.7

Interface signal

Reset

Signal(s) to NCK (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The channel must change to the ”RESET” status. The current program is then in

program status ”aborted”. All moving axes and spindles are decelerated to zero

speed according to their acceleration ramp without contour violation. The initial

settings are set (e.g. for G functions). The alarms are cleared if they are not

POWER ON alarms.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Channel status and program run are not affected by this signal.

Related to .... IS ”Channel reset”

IS ”All channels in reset state”

Special cases, errors,

... ...

An alarm which cancels IS ”802 ready” ensures that the channel is no longer in

the Reset state. In order to switch to another operating mode, a ”reset” must

then be initiated.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3000 0001.2

Interface signal

Machine function REF

Signal(s) to NCK (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Machine function REF is activated in JOG mode.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Machine function REF is not activated.

Signal irrelevant for ...

...

if JOG mode is not active.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Mode signals

4-360

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3000 0000.0 to .6

Interface signal

Machine function INC1, INC10, INC100, INC1000, INC10000, INCvar, continuous

Signal(s) to modes (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 ---

> 1

This input range is only used if the ”INC inputs in mode group range active”

interface signal (V2600 0001.0) is set. The signals then apply to all axes and

geometry axes.

IS ”INC...” defines how many increments the axis traverses when the traversing

key is pressed or the handwheel turned one detent position. JOG mode must be

active. With ”INCvar” the value in the general SD 41010: JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE

applies.

In ”continuous mode” the associated axis can be traversed with the plus or minus

traversing key according to how the traverse key is pressed.

As soon as the selected machine function becomes active, this is signaled to the

PLC interface (IS ”Active machine function INC1; ...”). If several machine function

signals (INC1, INC... or ”Continuous jogging”) are selected at the interface

simultaneously, no machine function is activated by the control.

Note:

The input IS ”INC...” or ”continuous” for changing an active machine function

must be active for at least one PLC cycle. A static application is not required.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 ---

> 0

The machine function in question is not selected. No change to the active

machine function is required.

If an axis is currently traversing an increment, this movement is also aborted if

this machine function is deselected or changed over.

Related to .... IS ”INC inputs in mode group range active” (V2600 0001.0)

IS ”Machine function INC1, ..., continuous”

for geometry axis 1 (V3200 1001.0 to .6)

for geometry axis 2 (V3200 1005.0 to .6)

for geometry axis 3 (V3200 1009.0 to .6)

IS ”Machine function INC1, ..., continuous” in axis range (V380x 0005.0 to .6)

IS ”Active machine function INC1, ..., continuous”

for geometry axis1 (V3300 1001.0 to .6)

for geometry axis 2 (V3300 1005.0 to .6)

for geometry axis 3 (V3300 1005.0 to .6)

IS ”Active machine function INC1, ..., continuous” in axis range (V390x 0005.0 to

.6)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

V3100 0000.0

Interface signal

Active mode AUTOMATIC

Signal(s) from NCK (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

AUTOMATIC mode is active.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

AUTOMATIC mode is not active.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

Mode signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-361

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3100 0000.1

Interface signal

Active mode MDA

Signal(s) from NCK (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

MDA mode is active.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

MDA mode is not active.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3100 0000.2

Interface signal

Active mode JOG

Signal(s) from NCK (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

JOG mode is active.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

JOG mode is not active.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3100 0000.3

Interface signal

802 READY

Signal(s) from NCK (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

This signal is set after POWER ON when all voltages are present. The mode

group is now ready and part programs can be processed and axes traversed in

the channel.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The mode group/channel is not ready. Possible causes of this are:

- A serious axis or spindle alarm is active

- Hardware fault

- Mode group incorrectly configured (machine data)

If the mode group ready signal changes to the ”0” state

- the axis and spindle drives are decelerated with max. braking current to zero

speed,

- the signals from the PLC to the NCK are switched to the inactive state (initial

setting).

Special cases, errors,

... ...

An alarm which cancels IS ”802 READY” ensures that the channel is no longer

in the Reset state. In order to switch to another operating mode, a ”reset” must

then be initiated. (V3000 0000.7)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Mode signals

4-362

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3100 0001.2

Interface signal

Active machine function REF

Signal(s) from NCK (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Machine function REF is active in JOG.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Machine function REF is not active.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

Channel-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-363

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

4.6 Channel-specific signals

4.6.1 Signals to channel

V3200 0000.4

Interface signal

Activate single block

Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

In the AUTOMATIC mode the program is processed in the single-block mode; in

MDA only 1 block can be entered in any case.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

No effect

Application

example(s)

A new program can first be tested in single block mode in order to monitor the

individual program steps more exactly.

Special cases, errors,

... ...

•Intermediate blocks can be inserted if tool radius compensation (G41,G42) is

selected.

•In a series of G33 blocks single block is effective only if ”dry run feedrate” is

selected.

•Pure calculation blocks are not processed in the single step in ”Single block

coarse” but only in ”Single block fine”. The preselection is made via softkey

”Program control”.

Related to .... IS"Single–block selected”

IS ”Program status stopped”

References Subsection NO TAG

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3200 000.5

Interface signal

Activate M1

Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

M1 programmed in the part program leads to a programmed stop when

processed in AUTOMATIC or MDA mode.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

M1 programmed in the part program does not lead to a programmed stop.

Related to .... IS ”M01 selected” (V1700 0000.5)

IS ”M0/M1 active” (V3300 0000.5)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Channel-specific signals

4-364

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3200 0000.6

Interface signal

Activate dry run feedrate

Signal(s) to channel (PLC → NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Instead of the programmed feedrate (for G1, G2, G3, CIP, CT), the dry run

feedrate defined in SD 42100: DRY_RUN_FEED is used if the dry run feedrate is

larger than the programmed feedrate.

This interface signal is evaluated on an NC start when the channel is in the

”Reset” state.

When selected on the PLC, the ”Activate dry run feedrate” interface signal is

required to be set by the PLC user program.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The programmed feedrate is used for traversing.

Active after Reset.

Application

example(s)

Testing a workpiece program with an increased feedrate.

Related to .... IS ”Dry run feedrate selected” (V1700 0000.6)

SD 42100: DRY_RUN_FEED (Dry run feedrate)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1

V3200 0001.0

Interface signal

Activate referencing

Signal(s) to channel (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Channel-specific referencing is started with the "Activate referencing" interface

signal. The control acknowledges a successful start with the îReferencing

activeî interface signal. Each machine axis assigned to the channel can be

referenced with channel-specific referencing (this is achieved internally on the

control by simulating the plus/minus travel keys). The axis-specific MD 34110:

REFP_CYCLE_NR (axis sequence for channel-specific referencing) can be

used to define the sequence in which the machine data are referenced.

If all axes entered in MD: REFP_CYCLE_NR have reached their reference

point, the "all axes referenced" interface signal (V3300 0004.2) is enabled.

Application

example(s)

If the machine axes are to be referenced in a particular sequence, the following

options are available:

•up

•the PLC must check the sequence when starting or define it itself.

•specific referencing function is used.

Related to .... ”Referencing active” interface signal (V3300 0001.0)

”All axes referenced” interface signal (V3300 0004.2)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: R1

Channel-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-365

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3200 0001.7

Interface signal

Activate program test

Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Axis disable is set internally for all axes (not spindle). Therefore the machine

axes do not move when a part program block or a part program is being

processed. The axis movements are simulated on the operator interface with

changing axis position values. The axis position values for the display are

generated from the calculated setpoints.

The part program is processed in the normal way.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Part program processing is not affected by the function program test

Related to .... IS ”Program test selected”

IS ”Program test active”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3200 0002.0

Interface signal

Skip block

Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Blocks marked in the part program with an oblique (/) are skipped. If there is a

series of skip blocks, this signal is only active if it is pending before decoding of

the first block of the series, ideally before NC start.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The marked part program blocks are not skipped.

Related to .... IS ”Skip block selected”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Channel-specific signals

4-366

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3200 0003.0

Interface signal

Stroke disable

Signal(s) to the channel (PLC->NCK)

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid from SW release:

Signal status 1 or

edge transition 0 --->

This signal is used to enable the punching strokes via the PLC. 1-signal: The

stroke is disabled; no punching stroke must be initiated by the NC.

Signal status 0 or

edge transition 1 --->

0-signal: Stroke enable is provided; if no enable signal is set, no punching stroke

can be executed by the NC.

V3200 0003.1

Interface signal

Stroke initiated manually

Signal(s) to the channel (PLC->NCK)

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid from SW release:

Signal status 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

This signal can be used to initiate a single stroke in the manual mode.

1-signal: A manual stroke is executed.

Signal status 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

0-signal: No effect

V3200 0003.2

Interface signal

Stroke suppressed

Signal(s) to the channel (PLC->NCK)

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid from SW release:

Signal status 1 or edge

transition 0 ---> 1

The signal merely prevents the stroke. The machine will nevertheless traverse.

If the automatic path distribution is active, it also remains active. Merely the

”Initiate stroke” signal is suppressed. The machine will traverse in the ”stop

and go” mode. The step length is defined by the path segmentation. 1-signal:

The stroke suppression is active.

Signal status 0 or signal

transition 1 ---> 0

0-signal: The stroke suppression is not active.

V3200 0003.3

Interface signal

Stroke does not run

Signal(s) to the channel (PLC->NCK)

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid from SW release: 3

Signal status 1 or edge

transition 0 ---> 1

The NC reacts to this signal with immediate motion stop. If a motion or another

action is interrupted due to this signal, an alarm is issued.

Physically, the signal for the CNC is identically to the ”Stroke active” signal, i.e.

the system is switched such that the two signals are connected to the same NC

input via an AND operation. 1-signal: Stroke does not run (corresponds to the

”Stroke enable” signal)

Signal status 0 or

signal transition 1 ---> 0

0-signal: Stroke running (corresponds to the ”Stroke enable” signal)

Channel-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-367

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3200 0003.4

Interface signal

Delayed stroke

Signal(s) to the channel (PLC->NCK)

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid from SW release:

Signal status 1 or edge

transition 0 ---> 1

This signal can be used to activate a ”Delayed stroke”. In respect of its function,

this signal corresponds to a programming of PDELAYON. Any further PLC

signals not complying with the standard are not evaluated by the NCK. Except

for the manual stroke initiation, the evaluation of the signals is limited to PON

active. 1-signal: Delayed stroke is active

Signal status 0 or edge

transition 1 ---> 0

0-signal: Delayed stroke is not active

V3200 0003.5

Interface signal

Manual stroke initiation

Signal(s) to the channel (PLC->NCK)

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid from SW release:

6.4

Signal status 1 or

edge transition 0 --->

–> PLC IS ”Manual stroke initiation acknowledgment” (DB21, ... DBX38.1).

1-signal: Manual stroke initiation is active

Signal status 0 or

edge transition 1 --->

0-signal: Manual stroke initiation is not active

Interface Signals 06/2007

Channel-specific signals

4-368

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

VB3200 0004

Interface signal

Feedrate override

Signal(s) to channel (PLC → NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1 Gray coding for Feedrate override

Switch

position

Code Feedrate override

00001

00011

00010

00110

00111

00101

00100

01100

01101

01111

01110

01010

01011

01001

01000

11000

11001

11011

11010

11110

11111

11101

11100

10100

10101

10111

10110

10010

10011

10001

10000

0.0

0.01

0.02

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.10

0.20

0.30

0.40

0.50

0.60

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00

1.05

1.10

1.15

1.20

Related to .... IS ”Feedrate override active” (V3200 0006.7)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1

Channel-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-369

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

VB3200 0005

Interface signal

Rapid traverse override

Signal(s) to channel (PLC → NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Special cases, errors, ...

...

The feed disable is inactive when G33 is active.

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1 Gray coding forRapid traverse override

Switch

position

Code Rapid traverse override

factor

00001

00011

00010

00110

00111

00101

00100

01100

01101

01111

01110

01010

01011

01001

01000

11000

11001

11011

11010

11110

11111

11101

11100

10100

10101

10111

10110

10010

10011

10001

10000

0.0

0.01

0.02

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.10

0.20

0.30

0.40

0.50

0.60

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00

Related to .... IS ”Rapid traverse override active” (V3200 0006.6)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Channel-specific signals

4-370

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3200 0006.0

Interface signal

Feed disable

Signal(s) to channel (PLC → NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The signal is active on a channel in all operating modes.

•The signal disables all axes interpolating relative to each other as long as G33

(thread) is not active.

All axes are brought to a standstill with adherence to the path contour. When

the feed disable is canceled (0 signal), the interrupted part program is

continued.

•The position control is retained, i.e. the following error is eliminated.

•If a travel request is issued for an axis with an active ”Feed disable”, The

pending travel request is executed immediately when the ”Feed disable” is

canceled.

If the axis is interpolating in relation to others, this also applies to these axes.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

•The feedrate is enabled for all axes on the channel.

•If a travel request (”Travel command”) exists for an axis or group of axes when

the ”Feed disable” is canceled, this is executed immediately.

Special cases, errors,

... ...

The feed disable is inactive when G33 is active.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1

Channel-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-371

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3200 0006.1

Interface signal

Read–in disable

Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Data transfer of the next block into the interpolator is disabled. This signal is only

active in modes AUTOMATIC and MDA.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Data transfer of the next block into the interpolator is enabled. This signal is only

active in modes AUTOMATIC and MDA.

Application

example(s)

Related to .... IS ”Program status running”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

,QDFDVHZKHUHDQDX[LOLDU\IXQFWLRQKDVWRKDYHEHHQH[HFXWHGEHIRUHWKHQH[WEORFNFDQEHSURFHVVHG

HJIRUDWRROFKDQJHDXWRPDWLFEORFNFKDQJHPXVWEHLQKLELWHGZLWKUHDG෥LQGLVDEOH

17 1*

;0

17 1

























5HDGLQJLQWREXIIHU

'DWDWUDQVIHU

5HDGLQGLVDEOHVLJQDO

&RQWHQWVRIWKHLQWHUSRODWRU

2XWSXWRIWKHDX[LOLDU\IXQFWLRQ







'DWDWUDQVIHULQWRWKHLQWHUSRODWRU

5HPRYHUHDGLQGLVDEOH

4XHU\SRLQWRIWKHUHDGLQHQDEOH

5HDGLQGLVDEOHIRUWRROFKDQJH







V3200 0006.4

Interface signal

Program level abort

Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

On each signal transition 0 -> 1 the current program level being processed

(subroutine level) is immediately aborted. Processing of the part program

continues one level higher after the exit point.

Signal state 0 or signal

transition 1 ---> 0

No effect

Special cases, errors,

... ...

The main program level cannot be aborted with this IS, only with IS ”Reset”.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Channel-specific signals

4-372

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3200 0006.6

Interface signal

Rapid traverse override active

Signal(s) to channel (PLC → NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The rapid traverse override between 0 and a maximum of 100% entered in the

PLC interface is channelspecific.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The rapid traverse override entered in the PLC interface is ignored.

If the rapid traverse override is not active, an override factor of 100% is used

internally on the NC.

Note:

The 1st switch position of the gray-coded interface for the value represents an

exception. In this case, this override factor is also used with ”Rapid traverse

override inactive” and 0% is issued as the override value for axes.

Special cases, errors,

... ...

The rapid traverse override is inactive if G33 is active.

Related to .... IS ”Rapid traverse override” (V3200 0005)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1

V3200 0006.7

Interface signal

Feedrate override active

Signal(s) to channel (PLC → NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The feedrate override between 0 and a maximum of 120% entered in the PLC

interface is active for the path feedrate and therefore automatically for the

related axes.

In JOG mode, the feedrate override acts directly on the axes.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The feedrate override entered in the PLC interface is ignored.

If the feedrate override is not active, an override factor of 100% is used internally

on the NC.

Note:

The 1st switch position of the gray-coded interface for the value represents an

exception. In this case, this override factor is also used with ”Feedrate override

inactive” and 0% is issued as the override value for axes (acts the same as

”Feed disable”).

Special cases, errors,

... ...

The feedrate override is inactive if G33 is active.

Related to .... IS ”Feedrate override” (V3200 0004)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1

Channel-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-373

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3200 0007.0

Interface signal

NC start disable

Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

IS ”NC Start” is ineffective

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

IS ”NC Start” is effective.

Application

example(s)

This signal is used to suppress renewed program processing because, for

example, there is no lubricant.

Related to .... IS ”NC Start”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3200 0007.1

Interface signal

NC Start

Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW status

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

AUTOMATIC mode: The selected NC program is started or resumed.

If data are transferred from the PLC to the NC in the ”Program interrupted” state,

the data are calculated immediately on NC Start.

MDA mode: The entered part program blocks are released for execution or

continued.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

No effect

Related to .... IS ”NC Start disable”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3200 0007.2

Interface signal

NC Stop at block limit

Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The current NC program is stopped after the current part program block has

been processed. Otherwise as for IS ”NC Stop”.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

No effect

Related to .... IS ”NC Stop”

IS ”NC Stop axes plus spindles”

IS ”Program status stopped”

IS ”Channel status interrupted”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Channel-specific signals

4-374

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3200 0007.3

Interface signal

NC stop

Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The current NC program is stopped immediately, the current block is not

completed. Only the axes without contour violation are stopped.

Distances to go are traversed only after a renewed start.

The program status changes to ”stopped”, the channel status changes to

”interrupted”.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

No effect

Application

example(s)

Special cases, errors,

... ...

The signal NC stop must be active for at least one PLC cycle.

Related to .... IS ”NC Stop at block limit”

IS ”NC Stop axes plus spindles”

IS ”Program status stopped”

IS ”Channel status interrupted”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

2Q1&VWDUWWKHSURJUDPLVFRQWLQXHGDWWKHSRLQWRILQWHUUXSWLRQ

,6ರ1&6WRSರ

,6ರ1&6WDUWರ

3URJUDPUXQQLQJ

$[LVUXQQLQJ

%ORFNSURFHVVHG

Channel-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-375

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3200 0007.4

Interface signal

NC Stop axes plus spindles

Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

––go are not completed until a start signal is given. The axes and the spindle are

stopped. They are brought to a controlled standstill, however.

The program status changes to stopped, the channel status changes to

interrupted.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

No effect

Signal irrelevant for ...

...

Channel status Reset

Program status aborted

Special cases, errors,

... ...

Related to .... IS ”NC Stop at block limit”

IS ”NC Stop”

IS ”Program status stopped”

IS ”Channel status interrupted”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

$OOD[HVDQGVSLQGOHVWKDWZHUHQRWFDXVHGWRPRYHE\DSURJUDPRUSURJUDPEORFNHJD[HVDUHPRYHGE\

SUHVVLQJWKHWUDYHONH\VRQWKHPDFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHODUHQRWGHFHOHUDWHGWR]HURVSHHGZLWKರ1&VWRS

D[HVSOXVVSLQGOHVರ

7KHSURJUDPLVFRQWLQXHGDWWKHLQWHUUXSWHGSODFHZLWK1&6WDUW

7KHVLJQDOರ1&VWRSD[HVSOXVVSLQGOHVರPXVWEHSHQGLQJIRUDWOHDVWRQH3/&F\FOH

6LJQDO1&6WRSD[HV

6LJQDO1&6WDUW

3URJUDPUXQQLQJ

$[LVUXQQLQJ

6SLQGOHUXQQLQJ

%ORFNSURFHVVHG

V3200 0013.5

Interface signal

Deactivate workpiece counter

Signal(s) to channel (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The workpiece count monitoring is turned off with activated tool monitoring.

Interface Signals 06/2007

Channel-specific signals

4-376

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

No effect

Related to ....

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: W1

V3200 1000.0 to .1

V3200 1004.0 to .1

V3200 1008.0 to .1

Interface signal

Activate handwheel (1 to 3) for geometry axis 1

for geometry axis 2

for geometry axis 3

Signal(s) to channel (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

These machine data determine whether this geometry axis is assigned to

handwheel 1, 2, 3 or no handwheel.

Only one handwheel can be assigned to an axis at any one time.

If several ”Activate handwheel” interface signals are set, priority

”Handwheel 1” before ”Handwheel 2” before ”Handwheel 3” applies.

Note:Three geometry axes can be traversed simultaneously with handwheels 1

to 3!

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Neither handwheel 1, 2 nor 3 is assigned to this geometry axis.

Application

example(s)

The PLC user program can use this interface signal to disable the influence of

turning the handwheel on the geometry axis.

Related to .... IS ”Handwheel active” 1 to 3 for geometry axis 1: V3300 1000.0 to .2

for geometry axis 2: V3300 1004.0 to .2

for geometry axis 3: V3300 1008.0 to .2

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

V3200 1000.3

V3200 1004.3

V3200 1008.3

Interface signal

Feed stopGeo-axes (axes in the WCS)

Signal(s) to channel (PLC → NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The signal is only active in JOG mode (axes traversed in the WCS).

•The signal triggers a feed stop for the axis. Traversing axes are brought to a

standstill under controlled braking (ramp stop). No alarm is output.

•The position control is retained, i.e. the following error is eliminated.

•If a travel request is issued for an axis with an active ”Feed stop”, the request

is retained. This pending travel request is executed immediately after the

”Feed stop” is canceled.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

•The feedrate is enabled for the axis.

•If a travel request (”Travel command”) is active when the ”Feed stop” is

canceled, this is executed immediately.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1

Channel-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-377

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3200 1000.4

V3200 1004.4

V3200 1008.4

Interface signal

Traverse key disable for geometry axis 1

for geometry axis 2

for geometry axis 3

Signal(s) to channel (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The traverse keys plus and minus have no effect on the geometry axes in

question. It is thus not possible to traverse the geometry axis in JOG with the

traverse keys on the machine control panel.

If the traverse key disable is activated during a traverse movement, the geometry

axis is stopped.

Signal state 0 Traverse keys plus and minus are enabled.

Application

example(s)

It is thus possible, depending on the operating mode, to disable manual traverse

of the geometry axis in JOG mode with the traverse keys from the PLC user

program.

Related to .... IS ”Traverse key plus” and ” ... minus” for geometry axis 1 (V3200 1000.7 and

.6)

for geometry axis 2 (V3200 1004.7 and .6)

for geometry axis 3 (V3200 1008.7 and .6)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

V3200 1000.5

V3200 1004.5

V3200 1008.5

Interface signal

Rapid traverse override for geometry axis 1

for geometry axis 2

for geometry axis 3

Signal(s) to channel (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

If the PLC interface signal ”Rapid traverse override” is set together with

”Traverse key plus” and ”Traverse key minus”, the geometry axis in question

traverses at rapid traverse set for JOG on the assigned machine axis (e.g.: X ->

X1).

The rapid traverse velocity is defined in MD 32010: JOG_VELO_RAPID.

Rapid traverse override is active in the following JOG modes:

•Continuous traversing

•Incremental traversing

If rapid traverse override is active, the velocity can be modified with the rapid

traverse override switch.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The geometry axis traverses at the defined JOG velocity (SD: JOG_SET_VELO

or MD: JOG_VELO).

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1, V1

V3200 1000.7 and .6

V3200 1004.7 and .6

V3200 1008.7 and .6

Interface signal

Traverse keys plus and minus for geometry axis 1

for geometry axis 2

for geometry axis 3

Signal(s) to channel (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Interface Signals 06/2007

Channel-specific signals

4-378

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The selected axis can be traversed in both directions in JOG mode with the

traverse keys plus and minus.

Incremental traversing

With signal 1 the axis starts to traverse at the set increment. If the signal

changes to the 0 state before the increment is traversed, the traversing

movement is interrupted. When the signal state changes to 1 again the

movement is continued.

The axis can be stopped and started several times as described above until

the increment has been completely traversed.

Continuous traversal

If no INC measure is selected, and ”continuous” is, the axis travels for as

long as the traverse key is pressed.

If both traverse signals (plus and minus) are set at the same time, no movement

occurs, or any current movement is aborted!

The effect of the traverse keys can be disabled for every axis individually with the

PLC interface signal ”Traverse key disable”.

Notice!

In contrast to machine axes, for geometry axes, only one geometry axis can

be traversed at any one time using the traversing keys. Alarm 20062 is

triggered if an attempt is made to traverse more than one axis with the

traverse keys.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

No traverse

Signal irrelevant for

... ...

Operating modes AUTOMATIC and MDA

Special cases, errors,

... ...

The geometry axis cannot be traversed in JOG mode:

•If it is already being traversed via the axis-specific PLC interface (as a machine

axis).

•If another geometry axis is already being traversed with the traverse keys.

Alarm 20062 ”Axis already active” is output.

Related to .... IS ”Traverse key plus” and ”Traverse key minus” for the machine axes (V380x

0004.7 and .6)

IS ”Traverse key disable” for geometry axis 1 (V3200 1000.4)

for geometry axis 2 (V3200 1004.4)

for geometry axis 3 (V3200 1008.4)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

V3200 1001.0 to .6

V3200 1005.0 to .6

V3200 1009.0 to .6

Interface signal

for geometry axis 1

for geometry axis 2

for geometry axis 3

Signal(s) to channel (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Channel-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-379

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

4.6.2 Signals from the channel

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

This input range is only used if IS ”INC inputs in mode group range active”

(V2600 0001.0) is not set.

The interface signals INC... define how many increments the geometry axis

traverses when the traverse key is pressed or the handwheel is turned one

detent position. JOG mode must be active.

With ”INCvar” the value in the general SD 41010: JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE

applies.

In mode ”continuous” the associated geometry axis can be traversed with the

plus or minus traversing key according to how the traverse key is pressed.

As soon as the selected machine function becomes active, this is signaled to the

PLC interface (interface signal ”Active machine function INC1;...”).

If several machine function signals (INC1, INC... or ”Continuous jogging”) are

selected at the interface simultaneously, no machine function is activated by the

control.

Note:

The input IS ”INC...” or ”continuous” for changing an active machine function

must be active for at least one PLC cycle. A static application is not required.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The machine function in question is not selected. No change to the active

machine function is requested.

If an axis is currently traversing an increment, this movement is also aborted if

this machine function is deselected or changed over.

Related to .... IS ”Active machine function INC1, ...” for geometry axis 1 (V3300 1001.0 ... .6)

for geometry axis 2 (V3300 1005.0 ... .6)

for geometry axis 3 (V3300 1005.0 ... .6)

IS ”INC inputs in the mode group area active” (V2600 0001.0)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

V3300 0000.3

Interface signal

Action block active

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Block search: Output with accumulated auxiliary function outputs in progress

(see Subsection NO TAG)

Application

example(s)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3300 0000.4

Interface signal

Approach block active

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Block search with calculation/on contour: Start block in progress (see

Subsection NO TAG)

Interface Signals 06/2007

Channel-specific signals

4-380

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Application

example(s)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3300 0000.5

Interface signal

M0/M1 active

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The part program block has been processed, the auxiliary functions have been

output and

- M0 is stored in the working memory

- M1 is stored in the working memory and IS ”Activate M01” is active

The program status changes to stopped.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

- With IS ”NC Start”

- On program abort as a result of Reset

Related to .... IS ”Activate M01”

IS ”M01 selected”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3300 0000.6

Interface signal

Last action block active

Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Block search: Last block of the output with collected auxiliary function outputs in

progress (see Subsection NO TAG)

Application

example(s)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3300 0001.0

Interface signal

Referencing active

Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Channel-specific referencing is operational.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

•Channel-specific referencing has been completed

•Axis-specific referencing running

•No referencing active

Signal irrelevant for

... ...

Spindles

Related to .... ”Activate referencing” interface signal (V3200 0001.0)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: R1

V3300 0001.2

Interface signal

Revolutional feedrate active

Signal(s) from channel (NCK → PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Channel-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-381

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

When programming G95 (revolutional feedrate) in the AUTOMATIC mode.

Application

example(s)

Related to ....

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1

V3300 0001.4

Interface signal

Block search active

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The Block search function is active. It was selected and started on the operator

interface.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The block search function is not active.

Application

example(s)

The block search function makes it possible to jump to a certain block within a

part program and to start processing the part program at this block.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3300 0001.5

Interface signal

M2/M30 active

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

NC block with M2 is completely processed. If traversing motions are also

programmed in this block, the signal is not output until the target position is

reached.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

- No program end or abort

- Status after power-up of control system

- Start of an NC program

Application

example(s)

The PLC can detect the end of program processing with this signal and react

appropriately.

'DWDWUDQVIHUWR

ZRUNLQJPHPRU\

%ORFNSURFHVVHG

1&EORFNZLWK0

0FKDQJHVLJQDO

3/&F\FOHWLPH

,6ರ00DFWLYHರ

0

Interface Signals 06/2007

Channel-specific signals

4-382

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Special cases, errors,

... ...

- The functions M2 and M30 have equal priority. Only M2 should be used.

- IS "M2/M30 active" is applied statically at the end of a program.

- Not suitable for automatic follow-on functions such as workpiece counting, bar

feed, etc. M2 must be programmed in a separate block and the word M2 or the

decoded M signal used for these functions.

- No auxiliary functions leading to read-in stop may be written in the last block of

a program.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3300 0001.6

Interface signal

Transformation active

Signal(s) from NCK channel (NCK->PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 2.0

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The NC command TRANSMIT or TRACYL is programmed in the part program.

The corresponding block has been processed by the NC and a transformation is

now active.

Signal state 0

Edge change 1--->0

No transformation is active.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: M1

V3300 0001.7

Interface signal

Program test active

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Program control ”Program test” is active. Axis disable is set internally for all axes

(not spindles). Therefore the machine axes do not move when a part program

block or a part program is being processed. The axis movements are simulated

on the operator interface with changing axis position values. The axis position

values for the display are generated from the calculated setpoints.

The part program is processed in the normal way.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Program control Program test is not active.

Related to .... IS ”Activate program test”

IS ”Program test selected”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3300 0003.0

Interface signal

Program status running

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The part program has been started with IS ”NC start” and is running.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

- Program stopped by M00/M01 or NC Stop or mode change.

- The block is executed in single-block mode.

- End of program reached (M2)

- Program abort by Reset

- Current block cannot be processed

Channel-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-383

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Special cases, errors,

... ...

The IS "Program status running" does not change to 0 if workpiece machining is

stopped by the following events:

- Output of feed disable or spindle disable

- IS "Read-in disable"

- Feed override to 0%

- Response of the spindle and axis monitoring

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3300 0003.2

Interface signal

Program status stopped

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The NC part program has been stopped by ”NC stop”, ”NC stop axes plus

spindles”, ”NC stop at block limit”, programmed M0 or M1 or single block mode.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Program status ”stopped” is not active.

Related to .... IS ”NC Stop”

IS ”NC Stop axes plus spindles”

IS ”NC Stop at block limit”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3300 0003.3

Interface signal

Program status interrupted

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

When changing from AUTOMATIC or MDA mode (when program has stopped)

after JOG the program status switches to ”interrupted”. The program can be

continued at the point of interruption in AUTOMATIC or MDA mode when ”NC

start” is operated.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Program status interrupted is not active.

Special cases, errors,

... ...

IS ”Program status interrupted” signifies that the part program can be continued

after an NC start.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3300 0003.4

Interface signal

Program status aborted

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The program has been selected but not started or the current program was

aborted with Reset.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Program status interrupted is not active.

Related to .... IS ”Reset”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Channel-specific signals

4-384

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3300 0003.5

Interface signal

Channel status active

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

In this channel

•a part program or block is currently being processed in AUTOMATIC or MDA

mode or

•at least one axis is

being traversed in JOG mode.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

”Channel status interrupted” or ”Channel status Reset” is active.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3300 0003.6

Interface signal

Channel status interrupted

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The NC part program in AUTOMATIC or MDA mode can be stopped by ”NC

stop”, ”NC stop axes plus spindles”, ”NC stop at block limit”, programmed M0 or

M1 or single block mode.

With NC start the part program or the interrupted traversing movement can be

continued.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

”Channel status active” or ”Channel status Reset” is active.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3300 0003.7

Interface signal

Channel status rese

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The signal changes to 1 as soon as the channel goes into Reset status, i.e. no

processing taking place.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The signal changes to 0 if processing is taking place in the channel, e.g.

execution of a part program or block search

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

V3300 0004.2

Interface signal

All axes referenced

Signal(s) from channel (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

All axes referenced.

(Note for axes requiring referencing:

MD 34110: REFP_CYCLE_NR, MD 20700: REFP_NC_START_LOCK )

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

One or more axes on the channel have not been referenced.

Channel-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-385

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Special cases, errors,

... ...

The spindles of the channel have no effect on this interface signal.

Related to .... ”Referenced/synchronizing 1” interface signal (V390x 0000.4)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: R1

V3300 0004.3

Data block

All axes stationary

Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

All axes assigned to the channel are stationary with interpolator end. No other

traversing movements are active.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: B1

V3300 0006.0

Interface signal

Stroke initiation active

Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid from SW release:

Signal status 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

This signal indicates an active stroke initiation.

1-signal: The stroke initiation is active.

Signal status 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

0-signal: The stroke initiation is not active.

V3300 0006.1

Interface signal

Acknowledgment of manual stroke initiation

Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid from SW release:

Signal status 1 or

signal transition 0 ---> 1

This signal indicates whether a manual stroke was initiated.

1-signal: A manual stroke was initiated.

Signal status 0 or

signal transition 1 ---> 0

0-signal: No manual stroke was initiated.

V3300 0008

V3300 0009

Interface signal

Machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) preactivated

Signal(s) from the channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal status 1 or edge

transition --> 0 --->1

The machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) is preactivated in the current

block. (The preactivation was performed in the part program.) Thus, the

protection zone can be activated or deactivated in the PLC user program

using the interface signal DB21, ... DBX8.0 - DBX9.1 (”Activate machine-

related protection zone 1 (...10)”).

Signal status 0 or edge

transition --> 1 ---> 0

The machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) is deactivated in the current

block. (The deactivation was performed in the part program.) Thus, the

protection zone can be deactivated or set inactive in the PLC user program

using the interface signal DB21, ... DBX8.0 - DBX9.1 (”Activate machine-

related protection zone 1 (...10)”).

Interface Signals 06/2007

Channel-specific signals

4-386

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Related to .... DB21, ... DBX8.0 - DBX9.1 (”Activate machine-related protection zone 1

(...10)”).

V3300 0010

V3300 0011

Interface signal

Channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) preactivated

Signal(s) from the channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal status 1 or

edge transition --> 0 --

-> 1

The channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) is preactivated in the current

block. (The preactivation was performed in the part program.) Thus, the

protection zone can be activated or deactivated in the PLC user program using

the interface signal DB21, ... DBX10.0 - DBX11.1 (”Activate channel-specific

protection zone 1 (...10)”).

Signal status 0 or

edge transition --> 1 --

-> 0

The channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) is deactivated in the current block.

(The deactivation was performed in the part program.) Thus, the protection zone

can be deactivated or set inactive in the PLC user program using the interface

signal DB21, ... DBX10.0 - DBX11.1 (”Activate channel-specific protection zone

1 (...10)”).

Related to ...

with ....

DB21, ... DBX10.0 - DBX11.1 (”Activate channel-specific protection zone 1

(...10)”).

V3300 0012

V3300 0013

Interface signal

Machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) violated

Signal(s) from the channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal status 1 or

edge transition --> 0 --

-> 1

The activated, machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) is violated in the current

block or in the current JOG motion. The preactivated, machine-related protection

zone 1 (...10) would be violated in the current block if it would be set active by

the PLC.

Signal status 0 or

edge transition --> 1 --

-> 0

The activated, machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) is not violated in the

current block. The preactivated, machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) would

not be violated in the current block if it would be set active by the PLC.

Application

example(s)

This interface signal (IS) can be used to check before swinging parts into the

work space whether the tool or the workpiece is in the machine-related

protection zone of the part to be swung in.

V3300 0014

V3300 0015

Interface signal

Channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) violated

Signal(s) from the channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically

Signal status 1 or

edge transition --> 0 --

-> 1

The activated, channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) is violated in the current

block. The preactivated, channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) would be

violated in the current block if it would be set active by the PLC.

Signal status 0 or

edge transition --> 1 --

-> 0

The activated, channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) is not violated in the

current block. The preactivated, channel-specific protection zone 1 (...10) would

not be violated in the current block if it would be set active by the PLC.

Application

example(s)

This interface signal (IS) can be used to check before swinging parts into the

work space whether the tool or the workpiece is in the channel-specific

protection zone of the part to be swung in.

Channel-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-387

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V3300 1000.0 to .1

V3300 1004.0 to .1

V3300 1008.0 to .1

Interface signal

Handwheel active (1 to 2) for geometry axis 1

for geometry axis 2

for geometry axis 3

Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

These PLC interface signals report whether this geometry axis is assigned to

handwheel 1, 2 or 3 or to no handwheel.

Only one handwheel can be assigned to an axis at any one time.

If several ”Activate handwheel” interface signals are set, priority

”Handwheel 1” before ”Handwheel 2” before ”Handwheel 3” applies.

If the assignment is active, the geometry axis can be traversed with the

handwheel in JOG mode.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Neither handwheel 1, 2 nor 3 is assigned to this geometry axis.

Related to .... IS ”Activate handwheel” (V3200 1000.0 to .2, V3200 1004.0 to .2, V3200 1008.0

to .2)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

V3300 1000.7 and .6

V3300 1004.7 and .6

V3300 1008.7 and .6

Interface signal

Travel command plus and minus for geometry axis for geometry axis 1

for geometry axis 2

for geometry axis 3

Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

A traverse movement of the axis is to be executed in one or the other direction.

Depending on the mode selected, the command is triggered in different ways:

•JOG mode: with the plus or minus traverse key

•REF submode: with the traverse key that takes the axis to the reference point

•AUTO/MDA mode: the program block containing a coordinate value for the

axis in question is executed.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

A travel command in the relevant axis direction has not been given or a traverse

movement has been completed.

JOG mode:

•Cancelation of traverse key

•While ending traversing with the handwheel.

REF submode:

•When the reference point is reached

AUTO/MDA mode:

•The program block has been executed (and the next block does not contain

any coordinate values for the axis in question)

•Abort with ”RESET”, etc.

•IS ”Axis disable” is active

Application

example(s)

To release clamping of axes with clamping

Note:

If the clamping is not released until the travel command is given, these axes

cannot be operated under continuous path control!

Interface Signals 06/2007

Channel-specific signals

4-388

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Related to .... IS ”Traverse key plus” and ” ... minus” for geometry axis 1 (V3200 1000.7 and

.6)

for geometry axis 2 (V3200 1004.7 and .6)

for geometry axis 3 (V3200 1008.7 and .6)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

V3300 1001.0, ..., .6

V3300 1005.0, ..., .6

V3300 1009.0, ..., .6

Interface signal

Active machine function INC1, ..., continuous

for geometry axis 1

for geometry axis 2

for geometry axis 3

Signal(s) from channel (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The PLC interface receives a signal stating which JOG mode machine function is

active for the geometry axes.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The machine function in question is not active.

Related to .... IS ”Machine function INC1, ..., continuous”

for geometry axis 1 (V3200 1001.0 ... .6)

for geometry axis 2 (V3200 1005.0 ... .6)

for geometry axis 3 (V3200 1009.0 ... .6)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

V3300 4001.1

Interface signal

Workpiece setpoint reached

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The required number of workpieces is reached.

According to setting in MD 27880: PART_COUNTER:

Bit 1 = 0: when $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS equal to $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS

Bit 1 = 1: when $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS equal to $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The required number of workpieces is not reached.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: K1

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-389

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

4.7 Axis-/spindle-specific signals

PLC interface signals for axis monitoring functions

4.7.1 Transferred axis-specific M and S functions

6LJQDOVWRD[LV9[

[ ෥!D[LV

[ ෥!D[LV

$[LV

$[LV

$[LV

6LJQDOVIURPD[LV9[

[ ෥!D[LV

[ ෥!D[LV

$[LV

PRQLWRULQJ

IXQFWLRQV

*HEHUJUHQ]IUHTXHQ]

¾EHUVFKULWWHQ

9[

&ODPSLQJLQSURJUHVV9[

+DUGZDUHOLPLWVZLWFKSOXV9[

+DUGZDUHOLPLWVZLWFKPLQXV9[

QGVRIWZDUHOLPLWVZLWFKSOXV9[

QGVRIWZDUHOLPLWVZLWFKPLQXV9[



VD370x 0000

Interface signal

M function for spindle

Signals from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC), axis-specific

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Generally the M functions are output in V2500... channel-specific. In the

V25001... range these only remain valid for one PLC cycle; in V25003... until a

new function is output.

In this IS ”M function for spindle” selected spindle M functions are available to

the PLC as a current integer value.

•M3 > value: 3

•M4 > value: 4

•M5 > value: 5

Related to .... specific

IS auxiliary function transfer from NC channel (V2500...)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

VD370x 0004

Interface signal

S function for spindle

Signals from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC), axis-specific

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Interface Signals 06/2007

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

4-390

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

4.7.2 Signals to axis/spindle

Generally the S function is transferred to the PLC channel-specific in VD2500

4000 as a floating point value.

In this IS îS function for spindleî the floating point value is output to the PLC on

an axis-specific basis:

•S.... as the spindle speed in rpm (programmed value)

•S.... as the constant cutting speed in m/min or ft/min for G96

The following S functions are not output here:

•S.... as the programmed Spindle speed limiting G25

•S.... as the programmed Spindle speed limiting G26

•S.... as the dwell time in spindle revolutions

Related to .... specific

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

VB380x 0000

Interface signal

Feedrate override (axis-specific)

Signal(s) to axis (PLC → NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-391

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

The axis-specific feedrate override is defined via the PLC in gray coding.

Gray coding for axis-specific feedrate override

Switch

position

Code Axial feedrate over ride

factor

00001

00011

00010

00110

00111

00101

00100

01100

01101

01111

01110

01010

01011

01001

01000

11000

11001

11011

11010

11110

11111

11101

11100

10100

10101

10111

10110

10010

10011

10001

10000

0.0

0.01

0.02

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.10

0.20

0.30

0.40

0.50

0.60

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00

1.05

1.10

1.15

1.20

Related to .... IS ”Override active” (V380x 0001.7)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1

V380x 0001.1

Interface signal

Acknowledge fixed stop reached

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 2.0

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Meaning after the fixed stop has been reached

IS ”Fixed stop reached” = 1

→ The axis pushes against the fixed stop with the clamping torque

→ The fixed stop monitoring window is activated

→ A block change is performed.

Interface Signals 06/2007

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

4-392

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Signal state 0

Edge change 1--->0

Meaning after the fixed stop has been reached

IS ”Fixed stop reached” = 1

→ The axis pushes against the fixed stop with the clamping torque

→ The fixed stop monitoring window is activated

→ No block change is performed and channel alarm

"Wait: Auxiliary function acknowledgment missing” is displayed.

Meaning once the fixed stop has been reached:

IS ”Fixed stop reached” = 1

The function is aborted, the alarm ”20094 axis %1 Function aborted” is

displayed.

Meaning when function is deselected ”FXS = 0” via part program:

Torque limiting and monitoring of the fixed stop window are canceled.

IS irrelevant for .... MD 37060: FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK (monitoring of PLC acknowledgments

for travel to fixed stop) = 0 or 1 (for values >1, however)

Related to .... MD 37060: FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK (monitoring of PLC acknowledgments

for travel to fixed stop)

IS ”Fixed stop reached”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: F1

V380x 0001.2

Interface signal

Sensor for fixed stop

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 2.0

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Fixed stop is reached.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Fixed stop is not reached.

Related to .... The signal is effective only if MD 37040: FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR is set to 1.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: F1

V380x 0001.7

Interface signal

Override active

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Feedrate override active (for axes):

•The axis-specific feedrate override between 0 and a maximum of 120%

entered in the PLC interface is used.

Spindle override active (for spindle):

•The spindle override of 50 to a maximum of 120% is used.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The existing axis-specific feedrate override or spindle override is not active.

If the feedrate override is inactive, 100% is used as the internal override factor.

Note:

coded interface for the value represents a special case. In this case, the

override factor of the 1st switch position is also used with ”Override inactive” and

0% is issued as the override value for axes (acts the same as ”Feed disable”);

accordingly 50%, is issued for the spindle.

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-393

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Special cases, errors,

... ...

•The spindle override is always accepted with 100% in the spindle ”Oscillation

mode”.

•The spindle override acts on the programmed values before the limits (e.g.

G26) intervene.

•The feedrate override is inactive if G33 is active.

Related to .... IS ”Feedrate override” and IS ”Spindle override”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1

V380x 0002.0

Interface signal

Cam activation

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC --> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid from SW release:

2.1

Signal status 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

The output of the minus and plus cam signals of an axis to the general PLC

interface is activated.

The activation comes immediately into effect after processing of the IS ”Cam

activation” in the NCK.

Signal status 0 or signal

transition 1 ---> 0

The minus and plus cam signals of an axis are not output to the general PLC

interface.

Related to .... IS "Minus cam signal 1-32” (V2700 0004.0 bis .7)

IS "Plus cam signal 1-32” (V2700 0008.0 to .7)

V380x 0002.2

Interface signal

Spindle reset/Delete distance-to-go

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Edge change 0 ---> 1 Independent of MD 35040: SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET, spindle reset has

the following effects for the

different spindle modes:

Open-loop control mode:

−Spindle stops

−Program continues running

−Spindle continues to run with subsequent M and S programcommands

Oscillation mode:

−Oscillation is aborted

−Axes continue to run

−Program is continued with current gear stage

−With a subsequent M value and a higher S value, IS "Setpoint speed limited"

(V390x 2001.1) is set if necessary.

Positioning mode:

−is stopped

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

No effect

Related to .... MD 35040: SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET (own spindle reset)

IS "Reset" (V300 00000.7)

IS "Delete distance-to-go" (V380x 0002.2) is another name for the same signal;

however, it applies to each

axis.

Interface Signals 06/2007

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

4-394

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

V380x 0002.3

Data block

Clamping in progress

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Clamping in progress

The clamping monitoring function is activated.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

speed monitoring function takes over from the clamping monitoring function.

Related to .... MD 36050: CLAMP_POS_TOL (clamping tolerance)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: A3

V380x 0003.1

Interface signal

Enable travel to fixed stop

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 2.0

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Meaning when ”FXS” function is selected via part program,

(IS ”Activate travel to fixed stop” = 1):

Travel to fixed stop is enabled and the axis traverses from the start position at

the programmed velocity to the programmed target position.

Signal state 0

Edge change 1--->0

Meaning when ”FXS” function is selected via part program,

(IS ”Activate travel to fixed stop” = 1):

→ Travel to fixed stop is disabled.

→ The axis is at the start position with reduced torque.

→ Channel alarm ”Wait: Auxiliary function acknowledgment missing” is

displayed.

Meaning before the fixed stop has been reached

IS ”Fixed stop reached” = 0

→ Travel to fixed stop is aborted

→ Alarm ”20094: axis%1 Function aborted” is displayed

Meaning once fixed stop has been reached

IS ”Fixed stop reached” = 1.

Torque limiting and the monitoring of the fixed stop monitoring window are

canceled.

IS irrelevant for .... MD 37060: FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK (monitoring of PLC acknowledgments

for travel to fixed stop) = 0 or 2

Related to .... MD 37060: FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK (monitoring of PLC acknowledgments

for travel to fixed stop)

IS ”Activate travel to fixed stop”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: F1

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-395

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V380x 0003.6

Data block

Velocity/spindle speed limitation

Signal(s)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The NCK limits the velocity/spindle speed to the limit value set in

MD 35160: SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

No limiting active.

Related to .... MD 35100: SPIND_VELO_LIMIT (max. spindle speed)

SD 43220: SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 (prog. spindle speed limiting G26)

SD 43230: SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (prog. spindle speed limiting G96)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: A3

V380x 0004.0 to .2

Interface signal

Activate handwheel (1 to 3)

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

This PLC interface signal defines whether this machine axis is assigned to

handwheel 1, 2, 3 or no handwheel.

Only one handwheel can be assigned to an axis at any one time.

If several ”Activate handwheel” interface signals are set, priority

”Handwheel 1” before ”Handwheel 2” before ”Handwheel 3” applies.

If the assignment is active, the machine axis can be traversed with the

handwheel in JOG mode.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Neither handwheel 1, 2 nor 3 is assigned to this geometry axis.

Application

example(s)

The PLC user program can use this interface signal to disable the influence of

turning the handwheel on the axis.

Related to .... IS ”Handwheel active” 1 to 3 (V390x 0004.0 to .2)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

4-396

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V380x 0004.3

Interface signal

Feed stop/Spindle stop (axis-specific)

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The signal is active in all modes.

Feed stop:

•The signal triggers a feed stop for the axis. Traversing axes are brought to a

standstill under controlled braking (ramp stop). No alarm is output.

•The signal triggers a feed stop for all path axes interpolating relative to each

other when the ”Feed stop” is activated for any one of these axes. In this case,

all the axes are brought to a stop with adherence to the path contour. When

the feed stop signal is canceled, execution of the interrupted part program is

resumed.

•The position control is retained, i.e. the following error is eliminated.

•If a travel request is issued for an axis with an active ”Feed stop”, the request

is retained. This pending travel request is executed immediately when ”Feed

stop” is canceled. If the axis is interpolating in relation to others, this also

applies to these axes.

Spindle stop:

•The spindle is brought to a standstill along the acceleration characteristic.

•In positioning mode, activation of the ”Spindle stop” signal interrupts the

positioning process. The above response applies with respect to individual

axes.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Feed stop:

•The feedrate is enabled for the axis.

•If a travel request (”Travel command”) is active when the ”Feed stop” is

canceled, this is executed immediately.

Spindle stop:

•The speed is enabled for the spindle.

•The spindle is accelerated to the previous speed setpoint with the acceleration

characteristic or, in positioning mode, positioning is resumed.

Application

example(s)

Feed stop:

•The traversing motion in the machine axes is not started when ”Feed stop” is

active, if, for example, certain operating states that do not permit axis motion

(e.g. door not closed) prevail.

Spindle stop:

•Change a tool

Special cases, errors,

... ...

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-397

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V380x 0004.4

Interface signal

Traverse key disable

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The traverse keys plus and minus have no effect on the machine axes in

question. It is thus not possible to traverse the machine axis in JOG with the

traverse keys on the machine control panel.

If the traverse key disable is activated during a traverse movement, the machine

axis is stopped.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Traverse keys plus and minus are enabled.

Application

example(s)

It is thus possible, depending on the operating mode, to disable manual traverse

of the machine axis in JOG mode with the traverse keys from the PLC user

program.

Related to .... IS ”Traverse key plus” and ”Traverse key minus” (V380x 0004.7 and .6)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

V380x 0004.5

Interface signal

Rapid traverse override

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

If interface signal "Rapid traverse override" is set together with "Traverse key

plus"and "Traverse key minus", the machine axis in question traverses at rapid

traverse.

The rapid traverse velocity is defined in MD 32010: JOG_VELO_RAPID.

Rapid traverse override is active in the following JOG modes:

•Continuous jogging

•Incremental jogging

If rapid traverse override is active, the velocity can be modified with the axis-

specific feedrate override switch.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The machine axis traverses at the defined JOG velocity

(SD 41110: JOG_SET_VELO or SD 41130, or MD 32020: JOG_VELO).

Signal irrelevant for ...

...

•Operating modes AUTOMATIC and MDA

•Reference point approach (JOG mode)

Related to .... IS ”Traverse key plus” and ”Traverse key minus” (V380x 0004.7 and .6)

specific ”Feedrate override” (VB380x 0000)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

4-398

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V380x 0004.7 and .6

Interface signal

Plus and minus traverse keys

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The selected axis can be traversed in both directions in JOG mode with the

traverse keys plus and minus.

Incremental traversing

With signal 1 the axis starts to traverse at the set increment. If the signal

changes to the 0 state before the increment is traversed, the traversing

movement is interrupted. When signal state 1 occurs again, the traverse

motion is restarted. The traversing motion of the axis can be stopped and

restarted multiple times as described above until the increment has been

fully traversed.

Continuous traversing

If no INC measure is selected but ”continuous” is, the axis travels for as long

as the traverse key is actuated.

If both traverse signals (plus and minus) are set at the same time there is no

movement or a current movement is aborted.

The effect of the traverse keys can be disabled for every axis individually with the

PLC interface signal ”Traverse key disable”.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

No traverse

Signal irrelevant for

... ...

Operating modes AUTOMATIC and MDA

Application

example(s)

specific PLC interface (as a geometry axis). Alarm 20062 is signaled.

Special cases, ...... Indexing axes

Related to .... IS ”Traverse key plus” and ” ... minus”

for geometry axis 1 (V3200 1000.7 and .6)

for geometry axis 2 (V3200 1004.7 and .6)

for geometry axis 3 (V3200 1008.7 and .6)

IS ”Traverse key disable” (V380x 0004.4 )

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-399

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V380x 0005.0 to .6

Interface signal

Machine functions INC1, INC10, INC100, INC1000, INC10000, INCvar,

continuous

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

This input range is only used if IS ”INC inputs in mode group range active”

(V2600 0001.0) is not set.

The interface signals ”INC...” define how many increments the machine axis

traverses when the traverse key is pressed or the handwheel is turned one

detent position. JOG must be active.

With ”INCvar” the value in the general SD 41010: JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE

applies.

In ”continuous” mode the associated axis can be traversed with the plus or minus

traversing key according to how the traverse key is pressed.

As soon as the selected machine function becomes active, this is signaled to the

PLC interface (IS ”Active machine function INC1...”).

If several machine function signals (INC1, INC... or ”Continuous jogging”) are

selected at the interface simultaneously, no machine function is activated by the

control.

Note:

The input IS ”INC...” or ”continuous” for changing an active machine function

must be active for at least one PLC cycle. A static application is not required.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The machine function in question is not selected. No change to the active

machine function is requested.

If an axis is currently traversing an increment, this movement is also aborted if

this machine function is deselected or changed over.

Related to .... IS ”Active machine function INC1, ...” (V390x 0005.0 ... .6)

IS ”INC inputs in the mode group area active” (V2600 0001.0)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

V380x 1000.1 and .0

Data block

Hardware limit switches plus and minus

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC ---> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

A switch can be mounted at each end of the travel range of a machine axis which

will cause a signal ”Hardware limit switch plus or minus” to be signaled to the NC

via the PLC if it is approached.

If the signal is recognized as set, alarm 021614 ”Hardware limit switch + or -” is

output and the axis is decelerated immediately. The braking mode is defined in

MD 36600: BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE (deceleration behavior on hardware limit

switch).

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Normal condition, hardware limit switch not triggered.

Related to .... MD 36600: BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE (deceleration behavior on hardware limit

switch)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: A3

V380x1000.3 or .2

Data block

2nd software limit switch plus or minus

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC ---> NCK)

Interface Signals 06/2007

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

4-400

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

2nd software limit switch for the plus or minus direction is active.

1st software limit switch for the plus or minus direction is not active.

The 2nd software limit switches (plus and minus) can be activated in addition to

the 1st software limit switches (plus and minus) via this interface signal.

The position is defined by MD 36130: POS_LIMIT_PLUS2,

MD 36120: POS_LIMIT_MINUS2 (2nd software limit switch plus, 2nd software

limit switch minus).

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

1st software limit switch for the plus or minus direction is active.

2nd software limit switch for the plus or minus direction is not active.

Related to .... MD 36110: POS_LIMIT_PLUS, MD 36130: POS_LIMIT_PLUS2,

MD 36100: POS_LIMIT_MINUS, MD 36120: POS_LIMIT_MINUS2, (software

limit switch plus, software limit switch minus)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: A3

V380x1000.7

Interface signal

Reference point approach delay

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The machine axis is positioned at the reference cam.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The machine axis is positioned in front of the reference cam. A reference cam of

appropriate length (to the end of the traversing range) has been used to prevent

the machine axis from being positioned behind the referencing cam.

Related to ....

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: R1

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-401

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V380x 2000.0 to .2

Interface signal

Actual gear stage A to C

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 (level-

operated)

When the new gear is engaged, the IS ”Actual gear stage A to C” and ”Gear

changed” are enabled by the PLC user. This informs the NCK that the correct

gear stage has been successfully engaged. The gear change is complete

(spindle oscillation mode is deselected), the spindle accelerates in the new gear

stage to the last programmed spindle speed and the next block in the part

program can be executed.

The actual gear stage is specified in coded format (ABC values).

A parameter set is used for each of the 5 gear stages and is assigned as follows:

Parameter VDI Data in data set contents

set no. code

CBA

0 - Data for axis mode Servo gain factor

Monitoring functions

1 000 Data for 1st gear stage M40 speed

001 Min/max speed

Acceleration

2 010 Data for 2nd gear stage etc.

3 011 Data for 3rd gear stage

4 100 Data for 4th gear stage

5 101 Data for 5th gear stage

110

111

Special cases, errors,

... ...

If the PLC user reports back to the NCK with a different actual gear stage than

issued by the NCK as the set gear stage, the gear change is still treated as

having been successfully completed and the actual gear stage A to C is

activated.

Related to .... IS ”Set gear stage A” to ”...C” (V390x 2000.0 to .2)

IS ”Change gear” (V390x 2000.3)

IS ”Gear changed” (V380x 2000.3)

IS ”Oscillation speed” (V380x 2002.5)

Parameter sets (MD) for gear stages.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

V380x 2000.3

Interface signal

Gear changed

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

When the new gear is engaged, the IS ”Actual gear stage A to C” and ”Gear

changed” are enabled by the PLC user. This informs the NCK that the correct

gear stage has been successfully engaged. The gear stage change is complete

(spindle oscillation mode is deselected), the spindle accelerates in the new gear

stage to the last programmed spindle speed and the next block in the part

program can be executed. The IS ”Change gear” is reset by the NCK, which

causes the PLC user to reset the IS ”Gear changed”.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

No effect

Signal irrelevant for

... ...

All spindle modes except oscillation mode

Interface Signals 06/2007

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

4-402

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Special cases, errors,

... ...

If the PLC user reports back to the NCK with a different actual gear stage than

issued by the NCK as the set gear stage, the gear change is still treated as

having been successfully completed and the actual gear stage A to C is

activated.

Related to .... IS ”Actual gear stage A” to C” (V380x 2000.0 to .2)

IS ”Set gear stage A” to ”...C” (V390x 2000.0 to .2)

IS ”Change gear” (V390x 2000.3)

IS ”Oscillation speed” (V380x 2002.5)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

V380x 2001.0

Interface signal

Feedrate override for spindle valid (instead of spindle override)

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The ”Feedrate override” value (VB380x 0000) is used for the spindle instead of

the ”Spindle override” value.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The ”Spindle override” value is used.

Related to .... IS Spindle override” (VB380x 2003)

IS Feedrate override” (V380x 0000)

IS Override active” (V380x 0001.7)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1

V380x 2001.4

Interface signal

Resynchronize spindle during positioning 1

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 The spindle must be resynchronized during positioning.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

No effect

Signal irrelevant for

... ...

All spindle modes except for positioning mode

Application

example(s)

The spindle has an indirect measuring system and slipping may occur between

the motor and the clamp. If the signal=1 when the positioning process is started,

the old reference is deleted and the zero mark searched for again before the end

position is approached.

Related to .... ”Referenced/synchronizing 1” interface signal (V390x 0000.4)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-403

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V380x 2001.6

Interface signal

Invert M3/M4

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The direction of rotation of the spindle motor changes with the following

functions:

•M3

•M4

•M5

•SPOS from movement; not active for SPOS from standstill.

Application

example(s)

The machine has a selector switch for a vertical and horizontal spindle. The

mechanical design incorporates one gear wheel more on the horizontal spindle

than on the vertical spindle. The direction of rotation must therefore be changed

on the vertical spindle if the spindle is always to rotate clockwise with M3.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

V380x 2002.4

Interface signal

Oscillation via PLC

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

If the IS ”Oscillation via PLC” is enabled, the IS ”Oscillation speed” effects output

of a speed only in conjunction with the IS ”Direction of rotation setpoint counter-

clockwise and clockwise”. The oscillation, i.e. the continuous change of the

direction of rotation, is performed by the PLC user with the IS ”Direction of

rotation setpoint counter-clockwise and clockwise” (oscillation via PLC).

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

If the IS ”Oscillation via PLC” is not enabled, the IS ”Oscillation speed” triggers

automatic oscillation on the NCK. The two times for the directions of rotation are

entered in MD 35440: SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW (oscillation time for M3

direction) SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW (oscillation time for M3 direction) and MD

35450: SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW (oscillation time for M4 direction).

Application

example(s)

If the new gear stage cannot be engaged in spite of several attempts by the

NCK, the system can be switched to oscillation via PLC. Both of the times can

then be altered by the PLC user. This assures a reliable change of the gear

stage, even with unfavorable gear wheel positions.

Related to .... MD 35440: SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW (oscillation time for direction M3)

MD 35450: SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW (oscillation time for M4 direction)

IS ”Oscillation speed” (V380x 2002.5)

IS ”Set direction of rotation counterclockwise” (V380x 2002.7)

IS ”Set direction of rotation clockwise” (V380x 2002.6)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

4-404

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V380x 2002.5

Interface signal

Oscillation speed

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

If the gear stage must be changed (IS ”Change gear” (V390x 2000.3) is

enabled), the spindle changes to oscillation mode.

The spindle decelerates to a standstill with different acceleration levels,

according to the point when the IS ”Oscillation speed” (V380x 2002.5) was

enabled:

1. The IS ”Oscillation speed” is enabled before the IS ”Change gear” is

enabled by the NCK. The spindle is brought to a standstill with the acceleration

during oscillation (MD: SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL). Once the spindle is

stationary, oscillation is immediately initiated.

2. The IS ”Oscillation speed” is enabled after the IS ”Change gear” is enabled

by the NCK and when the spindle is stationary. The position controller is

disabled. The spindle decelerates with the deceleration rate in speed

controlled mode. After the IS ”Oscillation speed”is set, the spindle starts to

oscillate with the oscillation acceleration (MD:SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL).

If the IS ”Oscillation via PLC” (V380x 2002.4) is not enabled, the IS ”Oscillation

speed” triggers automatic oscillation on the NCK. The two times for the directions

of rotation are entered in MD:

in SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW (oscillation time for M3 direction) and

SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW (oscillation time for M4 direction).

If the IS ”Oscillation via PLC” is enabled, the IS ”Oscillation speed” effects output

of a speed only in conjunction with the IS ”Direction of rotation setpoint counter-

clockwise and clockwise”. The oscillation, i.e. the continuous change of the

direction of rotation, is performed by the PLC user with the IS ”Direction of

rotation setpoint counter-clockwise and clockwise” (oscillation via PLC).

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The spindle does not oscillate.

Signal irrelevant for

... ...

All spindle modes except oscillation mode

Application

example(s)

The oscillation speed is used to facilitate the engagement of a new gear stage.

Related to .... IS ”Oscillation via the PLC” (V380x 2002.4)

IS ”Set direction of rotation counterclockwise” (V380x 2002.7)

IS ”Set direction of rotation clockwise” (V380x 2002.6)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-405

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V380x 2002.7 / .6

Interface signal

Setpoint direction of rotation, counter-clockwise/setpoint direction of rotation,

clockwise

Signal(s) to axis/spindle (PLC -> NCK)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

When the IS ”Oscillation via PLC” is enabled, the two IS ”Direction of rotation

setpoint counterclockwise” and ”Direction of rotation setpoint clockwise” can be

used to set the direction of rotation for the oscillation speed. The times for the

oscillation movement of the spindle motor are defined by enabling the IS

”Direction of rotation setpoint counterclockwise and clockwise” for a

corresponding length of time.

Signal irrelevant for ...

...

All spindle modes except oscillation mode

Application

example(s)

See IS ”Oscillation via PLC”

Special cases, errors,

... ...

•If both of the IS are enabled simultaneously, no oscillation speed is output.

•If no IS are set, then an oscillation speed is not output.

Related to .... IS ”Oscillation via the PLC” (V380x 2002.4)

IS ”Oscillation speed” (V380x 2002.5)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

4-406

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

VB380x 2003

Interface signal

Spindle override

Signal(s) to spindle (PLC → NCK)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or signal

transition 0 ---> 1

The spindle override is defined via the PLC in gray coding.

The override value determines the percentage of the programmed speed

setpoint that is issued to the spindle.

Gray coding for spindle override

Schalter-

einstellung

Code Spindelkorrekturfaktor

00001

00011

00010

00110

00111

00101

00100

01100

01101

01111

01110

01010

01011

01001

01000

11000

11001

11011

11010

11110

11111

11101

11100

10100

10101

10111

10110

10010

10011

10001

10000

0.5

0.55

0.60

0.65

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00

1.05

1.10

1.15

1.20

Related to .... IS ”Override active” (V380x 0001.7)

IS ”Feedrate override for spindle valid” (V380x 2001.0)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: V1

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-407

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

4.7.3 Signals from axis/spindle

V390x 0000.0

Interface signal

Spindle/no axis

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The machine axis is operated as a spindle in the following spindle modes:

•Control mode

•Oscillation mode

•Positioning mode

•Thread drilling (tapping) without compensating chuck (rigid tapping)

The IS to axis (V380x 1000 to V380x 1003) and from axis (V390x 1000 to V390x

1003) are invalid.

The IS to spindle (V380x 2000 to V380x 2003) and from spindle (V380x 2000 to

V380x 2003) are valid.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The machine axis is operated as an axis

The IS to axis (V380x 1000 to V380x 1003) and from axis (V390x 1000 to V390x

1003) are valid.

The IS to spindle (V380x 2000 to V380x 2003) and from spindle (V380x 2000 to

V380x 2003) are invalid.

Application examples If a spindle is sometimes also used as a rotary axis on a machine tool (turning

machine with spindle/C axis or milling machine with spindle/rotary axis for rigid

tapping), the ”Spindle/no axis” signal can be used to determine whether the

machine axis is in axis mode or spindle mode.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

V390x 0000.2

Data block

Encoder limit frequency exceeded 1

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The axis velocity defined in MD 36300: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT (encoder limit

frequency) has been exceeded.

The reference point for the position measuring system concerned has been lost

(IS: Referenced/synchronized is in signal state 0). Proper position closed loop

control is no longer possible.

The spindles continue to run with speed control.

The axes are brought to a standstill with rapid stop (with open position control

loop) along a speed setpoint ramp.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The axis velocity defined in MD 36300: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT is no longer

exceeded.

For the edge change 1 -->, the encoder frequency must have dropped below the

setting in MD 36302: ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW (% value of MD 36300:

ENC_FREQ_LIMIT).

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: A3

Interface Signals 06/2007

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

4-408

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V390x 0000.4

Interface signal

Referenced/synchronizing 1

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

Axes:

When, during a reference point approach, the machine axis has reached the

reference point (incremental measurement systems) or target point (linear

measuring system with distance-coded reference marks), the machine axis is

deemed to have been referenced and the ”referenced/synchronizing 1”

interface

signal (depending on which position measurement system is active during

referencing) is enabled.

Spindles:

A spindle is synchronized (zero mark crossed or BERO responded) after

Power On after one spindle revolution at the latest.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The machine axis/spindle with position measurement system 1 is not

referenced/synchronizing.

Related to .... ”Position measuring system 1” interface signal (V380x 0000.5)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: R1, S1

V390x 0000.6

Data block

Position reached with exact stop coarse

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The axis is in the appropriate exact stop and no interpolator is active for the axis

and

•The control system is in the Reset mode (Reset key or end of program).

•The axis was last programmed as a positioning spindle.

•The path movement was stopped with NC Stop.

•The spindle is in position-controlled mode and is stationary.

•The axis is switched from speed-controlled to position-controlled mode with IS

”Position measuring system”.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The axis is not in the appropriate exact stop or the interpolator is active for the

axis or

•The path movement was stopped with NC Stop.

•The spindle is in the speed-controlled mode.

•”Parking mode” is active for the axis.

•The axis is switched from the position-controlled to the speed-controlled mode

with using the IS ”Position measuring system”.

Signal irrelevant for ...

...

Related to .... MD 36000: STOP_LIMIT_COARSE (exact stop coarse)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: B1

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-409

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V390x 0000.7

Data block

Position reached with exact stop fine

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

See IS ”Position reached with exact stop coarse”

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

See IS ”Position reached with exact stop coarse”

Signal irrelevant for ...

...

Related to .... MD 36010: STOP_LIMIT_FINE (exact stop fine)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: B1

V390x 0002.3

Interface signal

Measurement active

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK → PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The ”Measuring” function is active.

This displays the current measurement status of the axis (measuring block with

this axis is running).

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The ”Measuring” function is not active.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: M5

V390x 0002.4

Interface signal

Activate travel to fixed end stop

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK ! PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 2.0

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The ”Travel to fixed stop function” is active.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The ”Travel to fixed stop function” is not active.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: F1

V390x 0002.5

Interface signal

Fixed stop reached

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK ! PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 2.0

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The fixed stop was reached after selection of the ”FXS” function.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The fixed stop has still not been reached after selection of the ”FXS” function.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: F1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

4-410

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V390x 0004.0 to .2

Interface signal

Handwheel active (1 to 3)

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

These PLC interface signals provide feedback whether the machine axis is

assigned to handwheel 1, 2, 3 or no handwheel.

Only one handwheel can be assigned to an axis at any one time.

If several ”Activate handwheel” interface signals are set, priority

”Handwheel 1” before ”Handwheel 2” before ”Handwheel 3” applies.

If the assignment is active, the machine axis can be traversed with the

handwheel in JOG mode.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

Neither handwheel 1, 2 nor 3 is assigned to this geometry axis.

Related to .... IS ”Activate handwheel” (V380x 0004.0 to .2)

IS ”Handwheel selected” from HMI (V1900 0003, ff)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

V390x 0004.7 and .6

Interface signal

Plus and minus traverse keys

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

A traverse movement of the axis is to be executed in one or the other direction.

Depending on the mode selected, the command is triggered in different ways:

•JOG mode: with the plus or minus traverse key

•REF submode: with the traverse key that takes the axis to the reference point

•AUT/MDA mode: the program block containing a coordinate value for the axis

in question is executed.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

A travel command in the relevant axis direction has not been given or a traverse

movement has been completed.

JOG mode:

•Cancelation of traverse key.

•While ending traversing with the handwheel.

•REF submode: When the reference point is reached

AUT/MDA mode:

•The program block has been executed (and the next block does not contain

any coordinate values for the axis in question)

•Abort with ”RESET”, etc.

•IS ”Axis disable” is active

Application

example(s)

To release clamping of axes with clamping (e.g. on a rotary table).

Note:

If the clamping is not released until the travel command is given, these axes

cannot be operated under continuous path control!

Related to .... IS ”Traverse key plus” and ”Traverse key minus” (V380x 0004.7 and .6)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-411

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V390x 0005.0, ..., .6

Interface signal

Active machine function INC1, ..., continuous

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW: 1.1

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The PLC interface receives a signal stating which JOG mode machine function is

active for the machine axes.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The machine function in question is not active.

Related to .... IS ”Machine function INC1,...,continuous” (V380x 0005.0, ..., .6)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: H1

V390x 2000.0 to .2

Interface signal

Set gear stage A to C

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

A gear stage can be defined as follows:

•Permanent definition in the part program (M41 to M45)

•Automatic definition by the programmed spindle speed (M40)

M41 to M45:

•The gear stage can be permanently defined in the part program with M41 to

M45. If the M41 to M45 commands select a gear stage which is not the same

as the current (actual) gear stage, the IS ”Change gear” and the IS ”Set gear

stage A to C” are enabled.

M40:

•M40 in the part program causes the gear stage to be selected automatically by

the control. The control checks which gear stage is possible for the

programmed spindle speed (S function). If a gear stage is identified that is not

equal to the current (actual) gear stage, the ”Change gear” and ”Set gear stage

A” to ”...C” interface signals are set.

The set gear stage is output in coded format:

1st gear stage 0 0 0 (C B A)

1st gear stage 0 0 1

2nd gear stage 0 1 0

3rd gear stage 0 1 1

4th gear stage 1 0 0

5th gear stage 1 0 1

Invalid value 1 1 0

Invalid value 1 1 1

Signal irrelevant for ...

...

Other spindle modes except oscillation mode

Related to .... IS ”Change gear” (V390x 2000.3)

IS ”Actual gear stage A” to ”...C” (V380x 2000.0 to .2)

IS ”Gear changed” (V380x 2000.3)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

4-412

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V390x 2000.3

Interface signal

Change gear stage

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

A gear stage can be defined as follows:

•Permanent definition in the part program (M41 to M45)

•Automatic definition by the programmed spindle speed (M40)

M41 to M45:

•The gear stage can be permanently defined in the part program with M41 to

M45. If the M41 to M45 commands select a gear stage which is not the same

as the current (actual) gear stage, the IS ”Change gear” and the IS ”Set gear

stage A to C” are enabled.

M40:

•M40 in the part program causes the gear stage to be selected automatically by

the control. The control checks which gear stage is possible for the

programmed spindle speed (S function). If a gear stage is identified that is not

equal to the current (actual) gear stage, the ”Change gear” and ”Set gear stage

A” to ”...C” interface signals are set.

•While the signal = 1, the text ”Wait for gear stage change” is displayed

in the channel operating message”.

Special cases, errors,

... ...

The IS ”Change gear” is only enabled when a new gear stage is selected that is

not equal to the current actual gear stage.

Related to .... IS ”Set gear stage A” to C”(V390x 2000.0 to .2)

IS ”Actual gear stage A” to ”...C” (V380x 2000.0 to .2)

IS ”Gear changed” (V380x 2000.3)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

V390x 2001.0

Interface signal

Speed limit exceeded

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

If the actual speed exceeds the maximum spindle speed MD 35100:

SPIND_VELO_ LIMIT by more than the spindle speed tolerance MD 35150:

SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL the IS ”Speed limit exceeded” is enabled and alarm

22050 ”Maximum speed reached” is output. All axes and spindles of the channel

are brought to a standstill.

Related to .... MD 35150: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL (spindle speed tolerance)

MD 35100: SPIND_VELO_LIMIT (maximum spindle speed)

Alarm 22050 ”Maximum speed reached”

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-413

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V390x 2001.1

Interface signal

Setpoint speed limited (programmed speed too high)

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

If a spindle speed (rev/min) or a constant cutting speed (m/min or ft/min) is

programmed, the value is exceeded one of the following limits:

•Max. speed of specified gear stage

•Maximum spindle speed

•Speed limited by the PLC interface signal

•Progr. Spindle speed limiting G26

•Progr. Spindle speed limiting for G96

The spindle speed is limited to the maximum limit.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

If a spindle speed (1/min) or a constant cutting speed (m/min) or ft/min) is

programmed, none of the limit values have been exceeded.

Application

example(s)

The IS ”Setpoint speed limited” can be used to detect that the programmed

speed cannot be achieved. The PLC user can recognize this condition as not

permissible and block path feed, or he can block the path feed or the entire

channel. IS ”Spindle in set range” is processed.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

V390x 2001.2

Interface signal

Setpoint speed increased (programmed speed too low)

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

If a spindle speed (rev/min) or a constant cutting speed (m/min or ft/min) is

programmed, the value is below one of the following limits:

•Minimum speed of the specified gear stage

•Min. spindle speed

•Speed limited by the PLC

•Progr. Spindle speed limiting G25

•Progr. spindle speed limit for G96

The spindle speed is limited to the minimum limit.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

If a spindle speed (1/min) or a constant cutting speed (m/min or ft/min) is

programmed, the value has not fallen below any of the limits.

Application

example(s)

The IS ”Setpoint speed increased” can be used to detect that the programmed

speed cannot be achieved. The PLC user can recognize this condition as not

permissible and block path feed, or he can block the path feed or the entire

channel. IS ”Spindle in set range” is processed.

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

4-414

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V390x 2001.5

Interface signal

Spindle in setpoint range

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The IS ”Spindle in setpoint range” reports whether the programmed, and possibly

limited spindle speed has been reached.

In the spindle ”control mode”, the speed setpoint (programmed speed + spindle

override including limits) is compared with the actual speed. If the actual speed

deviates from the set speed by less than the spindle speed tolerance in MD

35150: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL, the IS ”Spindle in setpoint range” is enabled.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The IS ”Spindle in setpoint range” reports whether the spindle is still in the

acceleration or braking phase.

In the spindle control mode, the speed setpoint (programmed speed * spindle

override) is compared with the actual value. If the actual speed deviates from the

set speed by more than the spindle speed tolerance in

SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL, the IS ”Spindle in setpoint range” is reset.

Signal irrelevant for ...

...

all spindle modes except for speed mode (control mode).

Application

example(s)

The path feed must generally be disabled when the spindle is in the acceleration

phase (programmed speed setpoint not yet reached).

This can be performed as follows:

•The IS ”Spindle in setpoint range” is evaluated and the IS ”Feed disable”

(V3200 0006.0) is enabled.

•MD 35500: SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START (feed enable with spindle in

setpoint range) is enabled and the NCK then internally evaluates whether the

spindle is in the setpoint range. The path feed is only enabled if the spindle is

within the setpoint range. The positioning axes are never stopped by this

function.

Related to .... MD 35500: SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL (spindle speed tolerance)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

V390x 2001.7

Interface signal

Actual direction of rotation clockwise

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

When the spindle is rotating, ”Actual direction of rotation clockwise” = 1 signals

that the direction of rotation is CLOCKWISE. The actual direction of rotation is

derived from the spindle position measurement encoder.

Signal state 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

When the spindle is rotating, ”Actual direction of rotation clockwise” = 0 signals

that the direction of rotation is COUNTERCLOCKWISE.

Signal irrelevant for ...

...

•Spindle stationary, IS ”Axis/spindle stationary” = 1 (at standstill it is not

possible to evaluate a direction of rotation)

•Spindles without a position measuring encoder

Related to .... IS ”Spindle stationary” (V390x 0001.4)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-415

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V390x 2002.0

Interface signal

Constant cutting rate active

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

For programming G96 S... the constant cutting rate function is carried out. The S

word is now the cutting value.

Related to ....

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

V390x 2002.3

Interface signal

Rigid tapping active (no compensation)

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The spindle is running in the rigid tapping function [no compensating chuck]

(thread interpolation G331/G332).

The spindle speed is also programmed with S.... in rev/min for rigid tapping,

however the direction of rotation is stored in the sign for the pitch.

There is no specific interface signals such as:

IS ”Spindle reset”

IS ”Synchronize spindle”

IS ”Invert M3/M4”

IS ”Spindle in setpoint range”

IS ”Programmable speed too high”

Application

example(s)

Certain functions should not be used during rigid tapping (no compensating

chuck), such as:

•Reset IS ”Controller enable” (V380x 0002.1)

•IS ”Set feed stop” (V380x 0004.3)

•Reset

•When activating the EMERGENCY STOP during rigid tapping, it should be

remembered that the tool and workpiece are locked together.

Related to ....

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

V390x 2002.5

Interface signal

Active spindle positioning mode

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

When programming SPOS=..... the spindle is in positioning mode.

Related to .... IS ”Active spindle mode control mode” (V390x 2002.7)

IS ”Active spindle mode oscillation mode” (V390x 2002.6)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

4-416

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V390x 2002.6

Interface signal

Active spindle mode oscillation mode

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The spindle is in oscillation mode if a new gear stage was defined using the

automatic gear stage selection (M40) or M41 to M45 (IS ”Change gear” is

enabled). The IS ”Change gear” is only enabled when a new gear stage is

selected that is not equal to the current actual gear stage.

Related to .... IS ”Active spindle mode control mode” (V390x 2002.7)

IS ”Active spindle mode positioning mode” (V390x 2002.5)

IS ”Change gear” (V390x 2000.3)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

V390x 2002.7

Interface signal

Active spindle control mode

Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK -> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The spindle is in control mode with the following functions:

Spindle direction of rotation input M3/M4 or spindle stop M5

Related to .... IS ”Active spindle mode oscillation mode” (V390x 2002.6)

IS ”Active spindle mode positioning mode” (V390x 2002.5)

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: S1

V390x5004.2

Interface signal

Reciprocation reversal active

Signal(s) from axis/spindle

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated:

cyclically

Signal(s) valid from SW release: 7.2

Signal status 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The braking phase after reciprocation reversal from external (DB31, ...DBX28.0)

is active.

Signal status 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

No braking after reciprocation reversal from external is active.

V390x5004.3

Interface signal

Reciprocation cannot be started.

Signal(s) from axis/spindle

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated:

cyclically

Signal(s) valid from SW release: 2.1

Signal status 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The reciprocating axis cannot be started; faulty programming. This state can

also occur if the traversing motion has already been performed.

Signal status 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The reciprocating motion can be started.

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-417

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V390x5004.4

Interface signal

Error during the reciprocating motion

Signal(s)

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid from SW release:

2.1

Signal status 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The reciprocating motion was canceled.

Signal status 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The reciprocating motion is performed without errors.

V390x5004.5

Interface signal

Sparking-out active

Signal(s) from axis/spindle

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid from SW release:

2.1

Signal status 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The axis performs sparking-out strokes.

Signal status 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The axis is currently not performing any sparking-out strokes.

Related to .... DBX100.7

V390x5004.6

Interface signal

Reciprocating motion active

Signal(s) from axis/spindle

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid from SW release:

2.1

Signal status 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The axis performs a reciprocating motion between 2 reversal points.

Signal status 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The axis is currently not reciprocating.

Signal not relevant

with ......

DBX100.7 = 0

Related to .... DBX100.7

Interface Signals 06/2007

Axis-/spindle-specific signals

4-418

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

V390x5004.7

Interface signal

Reciprocation active

Signal(s) from axis/spindle

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated:

cyclically

Signal(s) valid from SW release: 2.1

Signal status 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The axis is currently traversed as a reciprocating axis.

Signal status 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The axis is a positioning axis.

Related to .... DBX100.5, DBX100.6

V390x5008.0 to .5

Interface signal

Active infeed axes

Signal(s) from axis/spindle

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid from SW release:

2.1

Signal status 1 or

signal transition 0 --->

The axis that issues the signal is currently the reciprocating axis and reports its

active infeed axes (104.0 axis 1 is infeed axis, 104.1 axis 2 is infeed axis, etc.)

in this field.

Signal status 0 or

signal transition 1 --->

The appropriate axis is not an infeed axis.

Related to .... DBX100.7

Tool management functions from NC channel

06/2007 Interface Signals

4-419

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

4.8 Tool management functions from NC channel

V5300 0000.0

Interface signal

Tool prewarning limit reached

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: Job controlled

by NCK

Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1/ value The prewarning limit for a tool to be monitored was reached.

The T number is provided in VD5300 1000.

Signal state 0 No prewarning limit reached

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: W1

V5300 0000.1

Interface signal

Tool limit value reached

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: Job controlled

by NCK

Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1/ value The limit for a tool to be monitored was reached.

The T number is provided in VD5300 1004.

Signal state 0 Limit value reached

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: W1

VD5300 1000

Interface signal

T number for tool prewarning limit

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: Job controlled

by NCK

Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1/ value The T number for which the tool prewarning limit is set is provided.

Signal state 0 No tool number reported

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: W1

VD5300 1004

Interface signal

T number for tool limit value

Signal(s) from channel (NCK ---> PLC)

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: Job controlled

by NCK

Signal(s) valid from SW:

Signal state 1/ value The T number for which the tool limit value is set is provided.

Signal state 0 No tool number reported

Note for the reader: 802D sl Description of Functions: W1

Interface Signals 06/2007

Tool management functions from NC channel

4-420

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

5-421

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

PLC User Interface 5

5.1 Adressranges

Structure of V-range addresses:

Operand identifiers Description Area

V Data V0.0 to V79999999.7 (see below)

T Timers T0 to T39

C Counters C0 to C31

I Figure: digital inputs I0.0 to I17.7

Q Figure: digital outputs Q0.0 to Q11.7

M Flag M0.0 to M383.7

SM Special flag SM0.0 to SM 0.6 (see below)

O ACCU (logic) AC0, AC1 (UDword)

O ACCU (arithmetic) AC2, AC3 (Dword)

Type identifier

(DB no.)

Range No.

(channel and axis No.)

Subarea Offset addressing

(10-79)

(00-99)

(0-9)

000

(000-999)

symbolic (8-digit)

PLC User Interface 06/2007

Adressranges

5-422

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Special flag - SM bit definition (read-only):

Variable access rights:

[r] labels the range “read only” allowed

[r/w] labels the range “read/ write” allowed

additionally data format specification:

1: BIT

8: BYTE

16: INT/WORD

32: DINT/DWORD/REAL

Without data format specification: all named data formats are readable and wri-

table.

SM bits Description

SM0.0 Flag with defined ONE signal

SM0.1 Initial setting: first PLC cycle ’1’, following cycles ’0’

SM0.2 Buffered data lost - only valid in first PLC cycle (’0’ data ok, ’1’ data lost)

SM0.3 Power On: first PLC cycle ’1’, following cycles ’0’

SM 0.4 60 s cycle (alternating ’0’ for 30 s, then ’1’ for 30 s)

SM 0.5 1 s cycle (alternating ’0’ for 0.5 s, then ’1’ for 0.5 s

SM 0.6 PLC cycle (alternating one cycle ’0’, then one cycle ’1’)

Note

All empty fields in the user interface are "Reserved for Siemens" and must not

be written in or evaluated!

Fields marked with "0" always receive the value "logical 0".

References to the description of the interface signals refer to the corresponding

chapters of the description of functions and are specified by [F "Chapter num-

ber"].

User data

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-423

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.2 User data

5.2.1 User data 1

5.2.2 User data 2

5.2.3 Signals from MCP (connected to the MCPA module)

1000

Data Block

Data 1 [r/w]

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

User data

1000 0000

up to

User data

1000 0011

1100

Data Block

Data 2 [r/w]

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

User data

1100 0000

up to

User data

1100 0007

1000

Data block

Data 1 [r/w]

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1000 1000 Key 8

JOG

Key 7

Var. INC

Key 6

User key 6

Key 5

User key 5

Key 4

User key 4

Key 3

User key 3

Key 2

User key 2

Key 1

User key 1

1000 1001 Key 16

4th axis

Key 15

Spindle

CCW

Key14

Spindle

STOP

Key 13

Spindle

Key 12

mode

Key 11

Single

block

Key 10

mode

Key 9

LOG REF

1000 1002 Key 24

4th axis

Key 23

1st axis

Key 22

2nd axis

Key 21

3rd axis

Key 20

Rapid

traverse

override

Key 19

3rd axis

Key 18

2nd axis

Key 18

1st axis

1000 1003 Key 27

START

Key 26

STOP

Key 25

RESET

1000 1004 Feedrate override switch

EDCBA

1000 1005 Spindle override switch

EDCBA

PLC User Interface 06/2007

User data

5-424

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.2.4 Signals to MCP (connected to the MCPA module)

5.2.5 Reading/writing NC data: Job [F20.6]

5.2.6 Read/write NC data: Result [F20.6]

1000

Data block

Data 1 [r/w]

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1100 1000 LED 6 LED 5 LED 4 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1

1200

Data Block

NC data l/s [r/w]

PLC interface -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1200 0000 Write

variable

Start

1200 0001 Number of variables

1200 ...

1207

Data Block

NC data l/s [r/w]

PLC interface -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

120x1000 Variable index

120x1001 Area number

120x1002 Line index for the NCK variable x (WORD)

120x1004 Column index for the NCK variable x (WORD)

120x1006

120x1008 Writing: Data to NCK variable x (data type of the variables: 1...4 bytes)

1200

Data Block

NC data l/s [r/w]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1200 2000 Error in job Request

completed

1200 2001

1200 2002

Retentive data area

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-425

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Access result:

0 No error

3 Illegal access to object

5 Invalid address

10 Object does not exist

5.3 Retentive data area

1200 ... 1207

Data Block

NC data l/s [r/w]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

120x3000 Invalid

variable

120x3001 Access result

120x3002

120x3004 Reading: Data from NCK variable x (data type of the variables: 1...4 bytes)

1400

Data Block

Retentive data [r/w]

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

User data

1400 0000

up to

User data

1400 0127

PLC User Interface 06/2007

User alarm

5-426

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.4 User alarm

Note:

Information on PLC alarms, including configuring user alarms, can be found in:

References:

Operating Instructions”, Chapter “PLC alarms”

5.4.1 User alarm: Activation

5.4.2 Variable for alarm

1600

Data Block

Activating alarm [r/w]

PLC interface -----> HMI

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Activation of alarm no.

1600 0000 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 700002 700001 700000

Activation of alarm no.

1600 0001 700015 700014 700013 700012 700011 700010 700009 700008

Activation of alarm no.

1600 0002 700023 700022 700021 700020 700019 700018 700017 700016

Activation of alarm no.

1600 0003 700031 700030 700029 700028 700027 700026 700025 700024

Activation of alarm no.

1600 0004 700039 700038 700037 700036 700035 700034 700033 700032

Activation of alarm no.

1600 0005 700047 700046 700045 700044 700043 700042 700041 700040

Activation of alarm no.

1600 0006 700055 700054 700053 700052 700051 700050 700049 700048

Activation of alarm no.

1600 0007 700063 700062 700061 700060 700059 700058 700057 700056

1600

Data Block

Variable for alarm [r32/w32]

PLC interface -----> HMI

Start byte

1600 1000 Variable for alarm 700000 (4 bytes)

1600 1004 Variable for alarm 700001 (4 bytes)

1600 1008 Variable for alarm 700002 (4 bytes)

... ...

1600 1244 Variable for alarm 700061 (4 bytes)

1600 1248 Variable for alarm 700062 (4 bytes)

1600 1252 Variable for alarm 700063 (4 bytes)

Signals from/to HMI

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-427

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.4.3 Active alarm reaction

5.5 Signals from/to HMI

5.5.1 Program control signals from HMI (retentive area)

5.5.2 Program selection from PLC (retentive area)

1600

Data Block

Active alarm reaction [r]

PLC interface -----> HMI

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1600 2000 PLC STOP EMERGE

NCY

STOP

Feed

disable on

all axes

READ-in

disable

start

disable

1600 2001

1600 2002

1600 2003

1700

Data Block

HMI signals [r]

HMI interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1700 0000 Test run

feedrate

selected

[F-K1]

M01

selected

[F-K1]

1700 0001 Program

test

selected

[F-K1]

Feedrate

override

for rapid

traverse

selected

[[F-K1] [F-

V1]

1700 0002 Skip block

7 selected

Skip

block 6

selected

Skip block

5 selected

Skip block

4 selected

Skip block

3 selected

Skip block

2 selected

Skip block

1 selected

Skip block

0 selected

[F-K1]

1700 0003 Measuring

in JOG

active

[F-M5]

Skip block

9 selected

Skip block

8 selected

1700

Data Block

HMI signals [r/w]

PLC interface -----> HMI

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1700 1000 Program selection from PLC: Program number [F-A2]

1700 1001 Command job from PLC: Command [F-A2]

1700 1002

1700 1003

PLC User Interface 06/2007

Signals from/to HMI

5-428

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.5.3 Checkback signal Program selection from HMI (retentive area)

5.5.4 Signals from HMI

5.5.5 Signals from PLC

1700

Data Block

HMI signals [r]

HMI interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1700 2000 Error

Program

selection

[F-A2]

Program

selected

[F-A2]

1700 2001 Error

Command

execution

[F-A2]

Execute

command

[F-A2]

1700 2002

1700 2003

1800

Data Block

HMI signals [r]

HMI interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1800 0000 Start

measuring

in JOG

[F-M5]

Mode

group

changeove

r disable

[F-M5]

JOG mode

[[F-M5]

MDA

mode

[F-M5]

AUTO

mode

[F-M5]

1800 0001 Machine

function

REF

[F-M5]

1800

Data Block

Signals from PLC [r]

PLC interface

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1800 1000 MCPA exists up with

saved

data

[F-A2]

up with

default

values

[F-A2]

1800 1001

1800 1002

1800 1003

Signals from/to HMI

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-429

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.5.6 Signals from operator panel (retentive area)

5.5.7 General selection/status signals from HMI (retentive area)

1900

Data Block

HMI signals [r/w]

HMI interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1900 0000 Simulation

active

[F-K1]

1900 0001

1900 0002

1900 0003

1900

Data Block

HMI signals [r]

HMI interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1900 1000

1900 1001

1900 1002

Axis number for handwheel 1

1900 1003 Machine

axis

[F-H1]

Axis number for handwheel 2

1900 1004 Machine

axis

[F-H1]

[F-H1]]

[F-H1]

1900 1005

1900 1006

1900 1007

PLC User Interface 06/2007

Signals from/to HMI

5-430

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.5.8 General selection/status signals to HMI (retentive area)

1900

Data Block

Signals to operator panel [r/w]

PLC interface -----> HMI

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1900 5000 OP key

disable

[F-A2]

1900 5001 Update

tool list

[F-W1]

1900 5002 Enable

tool

measuring

in JOG

[F-M5]

1900 5003

1900 5004

...

1900 5007

T number for tool measuring in JOG (DINT)

[F-M5]

Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-431

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.6 Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel

2500

Data Block

Auxiliary functions from NCK channel[r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

2500 0000

up to

2500 0003

2500 0004 M fcts. 5

Change

[F-H2]

M fcts. 4

Change

[F-H2]

M fcts. 3

Change

[F-H2]

M fcts. 2

Change

[F-H2]

M fcts. 1

Change

[F-H2]

2500 0005

2500 0006 S fcts. 1

change

[F-H2]

2500 0007

2500 0008 T function

1 change

[F-H2]

2500 0009

2500 0010 D function

1 change

[F-H2]

2500 0011

2500 0012 H fcts. 3

change

[F-H2]

H fcts. 2

change

[F-H2]

H fcts. 1

change

[F-H2]

2500 0013

up to

2500 0019

PLC User Interface 06/2007

Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel

5-432

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.6.1 Decoded M signals: (M0-M99)

Remarks:

The signals are output for the duration of a PLC cycle.

5.6.2 Transferred T functions

2500

Data Block

M functions from NCK channel[r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Dynamic M functions [F-H2]

2500 1000 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

Dynamic M functions [F-H2]

2500 1001 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8

Dynamic M functions [F-H2]

2500 1002 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

...

Dynamic M functions [F-H2]

2500 1012 M99 M98 M97 M96

2500 1013

up to

2500 1015

2500

Data Block

T functions from NCK channel[r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Start byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

2500 2000 T function 1 (DINT) [F-H2]

2500 2004

2500 2007

Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-433

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.6.3 Transferred M functions

5.6.4 Transferred S functions

5.6.5 Transferred D functions

2500

Data Block

M functions from NCK channel[r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Start byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

2500 3000 M function 1 (DINT) [F-H2]

2500 3004 Extended address of M function 1 (byte)

2500 3008 M function 2 (DINT) [F-H2]

2500 3012 Extended address of M function 2 (byte)

2500 3016 M function 3 (DINT) [F-H2]

2500 3020 Extended address of M function 3 (byte)

2500 3024 M function 4 (DINT) [F-H2]

2500 3028 Extended address of M function 4 (byte)

2500 3032 M function 5 (DINT) [F-H2]

2500 3036 Extended address of M function 5 (byte)

2500

Data Block

S functions from NCK channel[r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Start byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

2500 4000 S function 1 (REAL) [F-H2]

2500 4004 Extended address of S function 1 (byte)

2500 4008 S function 2 (REAL) [F-H2]

2500 4012 Extended address of S function 2 (byte)

2500

Data Block

D functions from NCK channel[r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Start byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

2500 5000 D function 1 (DINT) [F-H2]

2500 5004

PLC User Interface 06/2007

NCK signals

5-434

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.6.6 Transferred H functions

5.7 NCK signals

5.7.1 General signals to NCK

Remarks:

1) see operating mode signals

2500

Data Block

H functions from NCK channel[r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Start byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

2500 6000 H function 1 (REAL) [F-H2]

2500 6004 Extended address for H function 1 (INT) [F-H2]

2500 6008 H function 2 (REAL)

2500 6012 Extended address for H function 2 (INT) [F-H2]

2500 6016 H function 3 (REAL) [F-H2]

2500 6020 Extended address for H function 3 (INT) [F-H2]

2600

Data Block

General signals to NCK [r/w]

PLC interface -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

2600 0000 Protection level [F-A2] Acknowled

EMERGE

NCY

STOP

[F-N2]

EMERGE

NCY

STOP

[F-N2]

Braking at

contour in

case of

EMERGE

NCY

STOP

4567

2600 0001 Request

axis

distances-

to-go

actual

values

INC inputs

in mode

group

range

active 1)

[F-H1]

2600 0002

2600 0003

NCK signals

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-435

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.7.2 General signals from NCK

2700

Data Block

General signals from NCK [r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

2700 0000 EMERGE

NCY

STOP

active

[F-N2]

2700 0001 INCH

dimensio

n system

[F-G2]

Probe 2

actuated

[F-M5]

Probe 1

actuated

[F-M5]

2700 0002 Drive

ready

[F-A2]

Drives in

cyclical

operation

[F-A2]

2700 0003 Air

temperat

ure alarm

[F-A2]

NCK alarm

is active

[F-A2]

2700 0004 Software

cam

MINUS 7

Software

cam

MINUS 6

Software

cam

MINUS 5

Software

cam

MINUS 4

Software

cam

MINUS 3

Software

cam

MINUS 2

Software

cam

MINUS 1

Software

cam MINUS

2700 0005

2700 0006

2700 0007

2700 0008 Software

cam

PLUS 7

Software

cam

PLUS 6

Software

cam PLUS

Software

cam

PLUS 4

Software

cam PLUS

Software

cam PLUS

Software

cam PLUS

Software

cam PLUS

2700 0009

2700 0010

2700 0011

2700 0012 Modification counter for motions of handwheel 1

2700 0013 Modification counter for motions of handwheel 2

2700 0014

2700 0015 Modification counter, inch/metricunit system

PLC User Interface 06/2007

NCK signals

5-436

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.7.3 Signals to fast inputs and outputs

2800

Data block

Signals to fast inputs and outputs [r/w]

Interface PLC -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

2800 0000 Disable digital NCK inputs

Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

2800 0001 Values from the PLC for the NCK inputs

Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

2800 0004 Disable digital NCK outputs

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

2800 0005 Overwrite screenform for digital NCK outputs

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

2800 0006 Value from the PLC for the digital NCK outputs

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

2800 0007 Setpoint screenform for the NCK outputs

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

2800

Data block

Signals to fast inputs and outputs [r/w]

Interface PLC -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

2800 1000 Disable external digital NCK inputs

Input 16 Input 15 Input 14 Input 13 Input 12 Input 11 Input 10 Input 9

2800 1001 Values from the PLC for the external NCK inputs

Input 16 Input 15 Input 14 Input 13 Input 12 Input 11 Input 10 Input 9

2800 1008 Disable external digital NCK outputs

Output

Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9

2800 1009 Overwrite screenform for the external digital NCK outputs

Output

Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9

2800 1010 Value from the PLC for the external digital NCK outputs

Output

Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9

2800 1011 Setpoint screenform for the external digital NCK outputs

Output

Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9

NCK signals

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-437

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.7.4 Signal from fast inputs and outputs

2900

Data block

Signals from fast inputs and outputs [r/w]

Interface PLC -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

2800 0000 Actual values of the digital NCK inputss

Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

2900 0001 Setpoints of the digital NCK outputs

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

2900

Data block

Signals from fast inputs and outputs [r/w]

Interface PLC -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

2900 0000 Actual values of the digital NCK inputs

Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

2900 0004 Setpoints of the digital NCK outputs

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

2900

Data block

Signals to fast inputs and outputs [r/w]

Interface PLC -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

2900 1000 Actual values of the external digital NCK inputs

Input 16 Input 15 Input 14 Input 13 Input 12 Input 11 Input 10 Input 9

2900 1004 NCK setpoint for the external digital NCK outputs

Output

Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9

PLC User Interface 06/2007

NCK signals

5-438

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.7.5 Operating mode signals

Remarks:

Machine functionin order to use machine function signals in VB3000 0002, signal

“INC inputs in mode group range active” (V2600 0001.0) must be set to “1”

Machine function INC10 000 is not supported by all machine control panels.

3000

Data Block

Operating mode signals to NCK [r/w]

PLC interface -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

3000 0000 Reset

[F-K1]

Mode

group

changeov

er disable

[F-K1]

Operating mode

JOG

[F-K1]

MDI

[F-K1]

AUTOM.

[F-K1]

3000 0001 Machine function

REF

[F-K1]

Teach In

Machine function 1) [F-H1]

3000 0002 Continuou

s traversal

INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1

3000 0003

3100

Data Block

Operating mode signals to NCK [r]

PLC interface -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

3100 0000 Active mode

802-

READY

[F-K1]

JOG

[F-K1]

MDI

[F-K1]

AUTOM.

[F-K1]

3000 0001 Active machine function

REF

[F-K1]

Teach In

3000 0002 Continuou

traversing

active

var. INC

active

10 000

INC active

1000

INC active

100

INC active

3000 0003

Channel Signals

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-439

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.8 Channel Signals

5.8.1 Signals to NC channel

Control signals to NC channel

3200

Data Block

Signals to NCK channel [r/w]

PLC interface -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

3200 0000 Activate

dry run

feed

[F-V1]

M01

Activate

[F-K1]

Single

block 4)

Activate

[F-K1]

DRF

Activate

Forward

travel

Activate

Reverse

travel

Activate

3200 0001 Activate

program

test

[F-K1]

Enable

protection

zones

Activate

referencin

[F-R1]

3200 0002 Activate

”Skip block

7”

Activate

”Skip

block 6”

Activate

”Skip block

5”

Activate

”Skip block

4”

Activate

”Skip block

3”

Activate

”Skip block

2”

Activate

”Skip block

1”

Activate

”Skip block

0”

[F-K1]

3200 0003

Nibbling and punching

Stroke

initiated

manually 2

Delayed

stroke

Stroke

does not

run

Stroke

suppresse

Stroke

initiated

manually

Stroke

disable

3200 0004 Feedrate override2) [F-V1]

HG F E D C B O

3200 0005 Rapid traverse override3) [F-V1]

HG F E D C B O

3200 0006 Feedrate

override1)

active

[F-V1]

Rapid

traverse

override

active

[F-V1]

Limited

path

velocity

Program

level abort

[F-K1]

Delete

number of

subroutine

cycles

Delete

distance

to-go

[F-A2]

Read-in

disable

[F-K1]

Feedrate

disable

[F-V1]

3200 0007 Suppress

Start Lock

NC stop

axes plus

spindle

[F-K1]

NC stop

[F-K1]

NC Stop at

block limit

[F-K1]

NC Start

[F-K1]

NC Start

disable

[F-K1]

3200 0008 Activate machine-related protection zone

Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1

3200 0009 Activate machine-related protection zone

Area 10 Area 9

3200 0010 Activate channel-specific protection zone

Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1

3200 0011 Activate channel-specific protection zone

Area 10 Area 9

3200 0012

PLC User Interface 06/2007

Channel Signals

5-440

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Remarks:

1)+ Feedrate override activeEven if the feedrate override is not active, (=100%)

the 0% position still functions.

2)+ Feedrate override31 positions (Gray code)

3)+ Rapid override31 positions (Gray code)

4)’s Guide”)

3200 0013 Do not

disable

tool

[F-W1]

Deactivate

workpiece

counter

[F-W1]

3200 0014 Activate contour handwheel

(bit-/binary-coded)

Activate

associated

M01

Neg.

direction

for sim.

contour

handwheel

Sim.

contour

handwheel

Handwhee

l 2

Handwhee

l 1

3200 0015 Activate

”Skip block

9”

Activate

”Skip

block 8”

Channel Signals

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-441

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Control signals to geometry axes (axes in WCS)

Remarks:1)

Machine function specification of machine function in VB3200 1001, VB3200

1005, VB3200 1009, only if signal “INC inputs in mode group range active”

(V2600 0001.0) is not set. Machine function INC10 000 is not supported by all

machine control panels.

3200

Data Block

Signals to NCK channel [r/w]

PLC interface -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Geometry axis 1 (axis 1 in WCS)

3200 1000 Traversing keys Rapid

traverse

override

[F-H1]

Traversing

key lock

[F-H1]

Feedrate

stop

[F-H1]

Activate handwheel

[F-H1]

Geometry axis 1 (axis 1 in WCS)

3200 1001 Machine function 1) [F-H1]

Continuo

traversal

INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1

[

3200 1002

3200 1003

Geometry axis 2 (axis 2 in WCS)

3200 1004 Traversing keys Rapid

traverse

override

[F-H1]

Traversing

key lock

[F-H1]

Feedrate

stop

[F-H1]

Activate handwheel

[F-H1]

Geometry axis 2 (axis 2 in WCS)

Machine function 1) [F-H1]3200 1005

Continuo

traversal

INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1

3200 1006

3200 1007

Geometry axis 3 (axis 3 in WCS)

3200 1008 Traversing keys Rapid

traverse

override

[F-H1]

Traversing

key lock

[F-H1]

Feedrate

stop

[F-H1]

Activate handwheel

[F-H1]

Geometry axis 3 (axis 3 in WCS)

Machine function 1) [F-H1]3200 1009

Continuo

traversal

INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1

3200 1010

3200 1011

PLC User Interface 06/2007

Channel Signals

5-442

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.8.2 Signals from NC channel

Status signals from NC channel

3300

Data Block

Signals from NCK channel [r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

3300 0000 Last

action

block

active

[F-K1]

M0/M1

active

[F-K1]

Approach

block

active

[F-K1]

Action

block

active

[F-K1]

Forward

travel

active

Reverse

travel

active

Program

execution

from ext.

active

3300 0001 Program

test active

[F-K1]

Transfor

m. active

[F-M1]

M2 / M30

active

[F-K1]

Block

active

[F-K1]

Handwhe

el override

active

Rev.

feedrate

active

[F-V1]

Referencin

g active

[F-R1]

3300 0002

Channel status Program status

3300 0003 Reset

[F-K1]

–

upted

[F-K1]

active

[F-K1]

Aborted

[F-K1]

–

upted

[F-K1]

Stopped

[F-K1]

Running

[F-K1]

3300 0004 NCK alarm

with

processing

stop

present

[F-A2]

specific

NCK

alarm is

active

[F-A2]

all axes

stationary

[F-B1]

all axes

reference

[F-R1]

Stop

request

Start

request

3300 0005 Contour handwheel active

(bit-/binary-coded)

Handwhee

l 2

Handwheel

3300 0006 Nibbling and punching

Acknowl.

of manual

stroke

initiation

Stroke

initiation

3300 0007 Protection

zones no

longer

guaranteed

3300 0008 Machine-related protection zones preactivated

Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1

3300 0009 Machine-related protection zones preactivated

Area 10 Area 9

3300 0010 Channel-specific protection zones preactivated

Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1

3300 0011 Channel-specific protection zones preactivated

Area 10 Area 9

3300 0012 Machine-related protection zones violated

Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1

3300 0013 Machine-related protection zones violated

Area 10 Area 9

3300 0014 Channel-specific protection zones violated

Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1

3300 0015 Channel-specific protection zones violated

Channel Signals

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-443

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Status signals to geometry axes (axes in WCS)

Further status signals from the NC channel

Area 10 Area 9

3300

Data Block

Signals from NCK channel [r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Geometry axis 1 (axis 1 in WCS)

3300 1000 Motion command Travel request Handwheel active

plus

[F-H1]

minus

[F-H1]

plus minus 2

[F-H1]

3300 1001 Active machine function [F-H1]

Continuou

s traversal

INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1

3300 1002

3300 1003

Geometry axis 2 (axis 2 in WCS)

3300 1004 Motion command Travel request Handwheel active

plus

[F-H1]

minus

[F-H1]

plus minus 2

[F-H1]

3300 1005 Active machine function [F-H1]

Continuou

s traversal

INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1

3300 1006

3300 1007

Geometry axis 3 (axis 3 in WCS)

3300 1008 Motion command Travel request Handwheel active

plus

[F-H1]

minus

[F-H1]

plus minus 2

[F-H1]

3300 1009 Active machine function [F-H1]

Continuou

s traversal

INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1

3300 1010

3300 1011

3300

Data Block

Signals from NCK channel [r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

3300 4000 G00 active

3300 4001 Travel

request for

drive test

present

Workpiece

setpoint

reached

[F-K1]

External

language

mode

active

[F-A2]

3300 4002

3300 4003 DELAY

FST

SUPPRE

DELAY

FST

PLC User Interface 06/2007

Channel Signals

5-444

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

G functions from NC channel

Note:

With SINUMERIK 802D, G group 2 is transferred in VB3500 0001 with values

0: - no group 2 G command is active,

1: G4, 2: G63, 3: G74, 4: G75, 11: G147, 12: G247,

13: G347, 14: G148, 15: G248, 16: G348 (other values: not available

in SINUMERIK 802D)

Other settings are possible with MD 22510: see Section 21.3

When the NC program terminates or is aborted, the last status of the groups is retained.

The meaning of the G commands is explained in

References:

“Operation and Programming”, Section “Overview of instructions”

Note:

synchronous connection between the active NC block and the applied G codes at

any given time. The connection does not exist, for instance, if temporally short

blocks are used with continuous path mode (G64).

3500

Data Block

Signals from NCK channel [r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

3500 0000 Active G function of group 1

3500 0001 Active G function of group 2

3500 00.. Active G function of group ...

3500 0063 Active G function of group 64

Axis/spindle signals

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-445

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.9 Axis/spindle signals

5.9.1 Transferred M/S functions, axis-specific

5.9.2 Signals to axis/spindle

Common signals to axis/spindle

3700 ... 3704

Data block

M/S functions [r]

PLC interface -----> NCK

Start byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit0

370x 0000 M function for spindle (DINT) [F-S1]

370x 0004 S function for spindle (REAL) [F-S1]

3800 ... 3804

Data block

Signals to axis/spindle [r/w]

PLC interface -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Feedrate override [F-V1]

380x 0000 H G F E D C B A

380x 0001 Override

active

[F-V1]

Position

measuring

system 1

[F-A2]

Follow-up

mode

[F-A2]

Axis/spindl

e disable

[F-A2]

Sensor for

fixed stop

[F-F1]

Acknowled

ge fixed

stop

reached

[F-F1]

380x 0002 Clamping

progress

[F-A3]

Distance-

to-

go/spindle

reset

[F-S1]

Controller

enable

[F-A2]

Cam

activation

380x 0003 Axis/spindl

e enable

program

test

Velocity/

spindle

speed

limiting

[F-A3]

Enable

approach

to fixed

stop

[F-F1]

Traversing keys Rapid

traverse

override

Traversing

key lock

Feedrate

stop

Spindle

stop

Activate handwheel

380x 0004 plus

[F-H1]

minus

[F-H1]

[F-H1] [F-H1] [F-V1] 2

[F-H1]

380x 0005 Machine function1) [F-H1]

Continuo

traversal

INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1

380x 0006

up to

380x 0011

PLC User Interface 06/2007

Axis/spindle signals

5-446

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Remarks:

1) Machine functionSpecification of machine function in VB380x 0005, only if sig-

nal “INC inputs in modegroup range active” (V2600 0001.0) is not set. Machine

function INC10 000 is not supported by all machine control panels.

Signals to axis

Signals to spindle

3800 ... 3804

Data block

Signals to axis [r/w]

PLC interface -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Delay.

Ref. pt.

approach

[F-R1]

Modulo

Limit

Enabled

2nd software limit

switch

Hardware limit switch

380x 1000

(axis)

plus

[F-A3]

minus

[F-A3]

plus

[F-A3]

minus

[F-A3]

380x 1001

up to

380x 1003

3800 ... 3804

Data block

Signals to spindle [r/w]

PLC interface -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Clear S

value

Spindle:

No speed

monitoring

when

switching

the gear

stage;

resynchro

nize 2

Spindle:

Resynchro

nize 2

Spindle:

Resynchro

nize 1

Gear

changed

[F-S1]

Actual gear stage

380x 2000

(Spindle)

[F-S1]

380x 2001

(spindle)

Invert

M3/M4

[F-S1]

Resynchro

nize

spindle

during

positioning

[F-S1]

Feedrate

override

valid for

spindle

[F-V1]

Setpoint direction of

rotation

Oscillation

speed

[F-S1]

Oscillation

via PLC

[F-S1]

380x 2002

(Spindle)

Left

[F-S1]

Right

[F-S1]

380x 2003 Spindle override [F-V1]

(Spindle) H G F E D C B A

Axis/spindle signals

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-447

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Signals to PLC axis

Signals to drive

3800 ... 3805

Data block

Signals to PLC axis [r/w]

Interface PLC -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

380x 3000 Start

positioning

axis

380x 3001

380x 3002 Traversing

dimension:

Inch (not

metric)

G function:

Shortest

path (DC)

G function:

increment

al (IC)

380x 3003 Indexing

position

G function:

Abs. pos.

direction

(ACP)

G function:

Abs. neg.

direction

(ACN)

380x 3004 Position (REAL, with indexing axis: DWORD)

380x 3005

380x 3006

380x 3007

380x 3008 Feedrate (REAL),

if = 0, value is taken from machine data POS_AX_VELO

380x 3009

380x 3010

380x 3011

3800 ... 3805

Data block

Signals to axis/spindle [r/w]

PLC interface -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

380x 4000 Speed

setpoint

smoothing

380x 4001 Pulse

enable

[F-A2]

Speed

controller

integrato

r disable

[F-A2]

Parameter set selection [F-A2]

CBA

380x 4002

380x 4003

PLC User Interface 06/2007

Axis/spindle signals

5-448

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Signals to technology functions

5.9.3 Signals from axis/spindle

General signals from axis/spindle

3800 ... 3805

Data block

Signals to axis/spindle [r/w]

Interface PLC -----> NCK

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

380x 5000

380x 5001

380x 5002

380x 5003 Stop

HIAxMove

Stop

Corr

Stop

DEPBCS

Stop

DEPMCS

Resume

HIAxMove

Resume

Corr

Resume

DEPBCS

Resume

DEPMCS

380x 5004

(grinding)

(reciprocat

ing)

PLC

controls

axis

AxStop,

stop

Stop at

reversal

point

Change

reversal

point

Set

reversal

point

AxResum

AxReset OscillAxEx

t Reversal

380x 5005

(grinding)

380x 5006

(spindle)

Positionin

g the

spindle

Automatic

gear stage

change

Specified

direction of

rotation

CCW

Specified

direction of

rotation

Spindle

STOP

3900 ... 3905

Data block

Signals from axis/spindle [r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Position reached Reference

d/synchro

nized 1

[F-R1]

Encoder

limit

frequency

exceeded

[F-A3]

Spindle/

no axis

[F-S1]

390x 0000 with exact

stop, fine

[F-B1]

with

exact

stop,

coarse

[F-B1]

390x 0001 Current

controller

active

[F-A2]

Speed

control

loop

active

[F-A2]

Position

controller

active

[F-A2]

Axis/spindl

stationary

(n < nmin)

[F-A2]

Follow up

mode

active

[F-A2]

390x 0002 Power

Fixed

stop

limited

Fixed

stop

reached

[F-F1]

Activate

travel to

fixed stop

[F-F1]

Measurem

ent active

[F-M5]

Cam

active

390x 0003

Motion command Travel request

Handwheel active

Axis/spindle signals

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-449

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Signals from axis

Signals from spindle

390x 0004 plus

[F-H1]

minus

[F-H1]

plus minus 2 1

[F-H1] [F-H1]

Active machine function [F-F1]

390x 0005 Continuo

INCvar INC10 000 INC1000 INC100 INC10 INC1

390x 0006

up to

390x 0011

PLC axis

assigned

firmly

3900 ... 3905

Data block

Signals from axis [r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

390x 1000 Modulo

Limit

Enabled

active

390x 1001

390x 1002 Rotary

axis in

position

Indexing

axis in

position

Positionin

g axis

Path axis Lubricatio

n pulse

[F-A2]

390x 1003

3900 ... 3905

Data block

Signals from spindle [r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Gearbox

changeov

[F-S1]

Set gear stage

390x 2000

(Spindle)

[F-S1]

390x 2001

(Spindle)

Actual

direction of

rotation

clockwise

[F-S1]

Speed

monitorin

Spindle In

the

setpoint

range

[F-S1]

Supporting

range limit

violated

Geometry

monitoring

Setpoint

speed

increased

[F-S1]

Setpoint

speed

limited

[F-S1]

Speed

limit

exceeded

[F-S1]

Active spindle mode Rigid

tapping

[F-S1]

SUG

active

Const.

cutting

velocity

active

[F-S1]

390x 2002

(Spindle)

Control

mode

[F-S1]

Oscillatio

n mode

[F-S1]

Positionin

g mode

[F-S1]

390x 2003 Spindle in

position

PLC User Interface 06/2007

Axis/spindle signals

5-450

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Signals from PLC axis

Signals from drive

3900 ... 3905

Data block

Signals from spindle [r]

Interface NCK -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

390x 3000 Positionin

g axis

active

Position

reached

Error

during

traversing

Axis

cannot be

started

390x 3001

390x 3002

390x 3003 Error number

3900 ... 3905

Data block

Signals from axis/spindle [r]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

390x 4000

390x 4001 Pulses

enabled

[F-A2]

Speed

controller

integrato

disabled

[F-A2]

Drive

ready

[F-A2]

Active parameter set [F-A2]

CBA

390x 4002 nact =

nset

[F-A2]

nact<nx

[F-A2]

nact<nmin

[F-A2]

Md<Mdx

[F-A2]

Ramp-up

completed

[F-A2]

Temperature

prewarning

Heat sink

[F-A2]

Motor

[F-A2]

390x 4003

Uzk<Uzkx

Axis/spindle signals

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-451

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Signals from technology functions

3900 ... 3905

Data block

Signals from axis/spindle [r]

Interface NCK -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

390x 5000

390x 5001

390x 5002 ESR

reaction

initiated

Accelerat

ion

warning

threshold

reached

Velocity

warning

threshold

reached

Overlaid

movement

390x 5003 Max.

accelerat

ion

reached

Max.

velocity

reached

Synchroni

zation

running

Axis

accelerate

390x 5004

(grinding)

(reciprocat

ing)

Reciprocat

ion active

Reciproc

ating

motion

active

Sparking-

out active

Error

during the

reciprocati

ng motion

Reciprocat

ion cannot

be started.

OscillAxEx

t Reversal

active

390x 5005

390x 5006

390x 5007

390x 5008 Active additional axis

Axis 6 Axis 5 Axis 4 Axis 3 Axis 2 Axis 1

PLC User Interface 06/2007

PLC machine data

5-452

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.10 PLC machine data

5.10.1 INT values (MD 14510 USER_DATA_INT)

5.10.2 HEX values (MD 14512 USER_DATA_HEX)

5.10.3 FLOAT values (MD 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT)

User alarm:

4500

Data block

Signals from NCK [r16]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Start

byte

4500

0000

Int values (WORD/ 2 Byte)

4500

0002

Int values (WORD/ 2 Byte)

4500

0004

Int values (WORD/ 2 Byte)

up to

4500

0062

Int values (WORD/ 2 Byte)

4500

Data block

Signals from NCK [r8]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte

4500

1000

Hex value (BYTE)

4500 1001 Hex value (BYTE)

up to

4500 1031 Hex value (BYTE)

4500

Data block

Signals from NCK [r32]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Start byte

4500

2000

Float value (REAL/ 4 Byte)

4500

2004

Float value (REAL/ 4 Byte)

up to

4500

2028

Float value (REAL/ 4 Byte)

Reading and writing PLC variables

06/2007 PLC User Interface

5-453

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

Configuration (MD 14516 USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM)

Note:

Information on PLC alarms, including configuring user alarms, can be found in:

References:

Up Guide”, Section “PLC alarms”

5.11 Reading and writing PLC variables

Note:

The application programmers of NCK and PLC themselves are responsible for

the organization of this data area. Data type, position offset and meaning of the

variables must be agreed. The memory range limits per data type must be obser-

ved (1, 2 or 4 byte types). Further information can be found in:

References:

"Operation and Programming”, Section “Reading and writing PLC variables”

4500

Data block

Signals from NCK [r8]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte

4500 3000 Alarm reaction/ deletion criterion Alarm 700000

4500 3001 Alarm reaction/ deletion criterion Alarm 700001

up to

4500

3031

Alarm reaction/ deletion criterion Alarm 700031

4900

Data block

PLC variables [r/w]

PLC interface

Byte

4900

0000

Offset[0]

4900 0001 Offset[1]

up to

4900 1021 ...

4900 1022 Offset[1022]

4900 1023 Offset[1023]

PLC User Interface 06/2007

Tool management functions from NC channel

5-454

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

5.12 Tool management functions from NC channel

Change signals for tool management functions

Transferred tool management functions

Axis actual values and distances-to-go

Note:

Axis actual values and distances-to-go can each be requested separately:

−V2600 0001.1 Request for axis actual values

−V2600 0001.2 Request for axis distances-to-go

Once the respective request has been set, these values are provided by NCK for

all axes.

5300

Data block

Tool management functions [r]

NCK interface NCK PLC -----> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5300 0000

Tool limit

value

reached

[F-W1]

Tool

warning

limit

reached

[F-W1]

5300

Data block

Tool management functions [r32]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte

5300 1000 T number for tool warning limit (DINT) [F-W1]

5300 1004 T number for tool limit value (DINT) [F-W1]

5700 ... 5704

Data block

Signals from axis/spindle [r32]

NCK interface -----> PLC

Byte

570x 0000 Axis actual value (REAL)

570x 0004 Axis distance-to-go (REAL)

6-455

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007Edition

SINAMICS Parameter 6

For the SINAMICS parameters, please refer to the documentation SINAMICS S,

Lists Manualî.

LH1, SINAMICS_S, Parameter Manual

SINAMICS Parameter 06/2007

6-456

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

06/2007 Index
I-457
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
Index I
Number
1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-423
1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-423
1200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-424
1200 ... 1207  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-424
1400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-425
1600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-426
1700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-427
1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-428
1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-429
2500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-431
2600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-434
2700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-435
2800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-436
2900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-437
3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-438
3100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-438
3200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-439
3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-442
3500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-444
3700 ... 3704  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-445
3800 ... 3804  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-445
3800 ... 3805  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-447
3900 ... 3905  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-448
4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-452
4900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-453
5300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-454
5700 ... 5704  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-454
A
ABSBLOCK_FUNCTION_MASK
MD 27100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-199
ACCEL_ORI
MD 21170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-129
ACCESS_EXEC_CMA
MD 11161 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-61
ACCESS_EXEC_CST
MD 11160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-60
ACCESS_EXEC_CUS
MD 11162 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-61
ACCESS_WRITE_CMA
MD 11166 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-62
ACCESS_WRITE_CST
MD 11165 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-62
ACCESS_WRITE_CUS
MD 11167 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-63
ACCESS_WRITE_MACCESS
MD 11171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-64
ACCESS_WRITE_SACCESS
MD 11170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-63
ACCESS_WRITE_UACCESS
MD 11172 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-64
ADD_MOVE_ACCEL_RESERVE
MD 20610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-120
APPROACH_FEED
MD 42120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-316
AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION
MD 22020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-132
AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP
MD 22000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-131
AUXFU_ASSIGN_SPEC
MD 22035 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-133
AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE
MD 22010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-131
AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE
MD 22030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-132
AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE
MD 22254 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-135
AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE
MD 22256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-135
AUXFU_MAXNUM_GROUP_ASSIGN
MD 11100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-60
AUXFU_PREDEF_EXTENSION
MD 22060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-134
AUXFU_PREDEF_GROUP
MD 22040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-133
AUXFU_PREDEF_TYPE
MD 22050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-134
AUXFU_PREDEF_VALUE
MD 22070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-134
AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME
MD 36610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-281
AX_MOTION_DIR
MD 32100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-231
AX_VELO_LIMIT
MD 36200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-277
AXCONF_ASSIGN_MASTER_NCU
MD 30554 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-223
AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB
MD 20080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-102
AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB
MD 20050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-101
AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB
MD 10000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-22
AXCONF_MACHAX_USED

06/2007
Index
I-458  © Siemens AG 2007  All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
MD 20070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-101
AXCT_SWWIDTH
MD 41700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-313
AXES_SCALE_ENABLE
MD 22914 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-138
AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK
MD 30465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-220
Active alarm reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-427
Adressranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-421
Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel  
4-351
Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel 
5-431
Axis/spindle signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-445
Axis-/spindle-specific signals . . . . . . .  4-389
B
BACKLASH
MD 32450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-237
BERO_DELAY_TIME_MINUS
MD 31123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-230
BERO_DELAY_TIME_PLUS
MD 31122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-229
BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE
MD 36600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-281
C
CC_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_MASK
MD 10420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-30
CC_VDI_IN_DATA
MD 10400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-29
CC_VDI_OUT_DATA
MD 10410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-29
CEC_TABLE_ENABLE
MD 41300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-301
CEC_TABLE_WEIGHT
MD 41310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-302
CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST
MD 21000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-126
CIRCLE_ERROR_FACTOR
MD 21010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-127
CLAMP_POS_TOL
MD 36050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-274
COMPAR_THRESHOLD_1
MD 41600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-311
COMPAR_THRESHOLD_2
MD 41601 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-312
COMPRESS_CONTUR_TOL
MD 42475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-322
COMPRESS_VELO_TOL
MD 20172 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-109
CONE_ANGLE
MD 42995 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-331
CONST_VELO_MIN_TIME
MD 20500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-118
CONTOUR_TOL
MD 36400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-280
CONTROL_UNIT_LOGIC_ADDRESS
MD 13120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-71
CORNER_SLOWDOWN_CRIT
MD 42526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-328
CORNER_SLOWDOWN_END
MD 42522 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-327
CORNER_SLOWDOWN_OVR
MD 42524 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-328
CORNER_SLOWDOWN_START
MD 42520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-327
CRIT_SPLINE_ANGLE
MD 42470 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-321
CTM_CROSS_AX_DIAMETER_ON
MD 291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-21
CTM_G91_DIAMETER_ON
MD 292 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-21
CTM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM
MD 290 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-20
CTM_SIMULATION_TIME_NEW_POS
MD 289 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-20
CTRLOUT_LIMIT
MD 36210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-278
CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR
MD 30110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-213
CTRLOUT_NR
MD 30120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-213
CTRLOUT_SEGMENT_NR
MD 30100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-212
CTRLOUT_TYPE
MD 30130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-213
CUTCOM_ACT_DEACT_CTRL
MD 42494 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-323
CUTCOM_CLSD_CONT
MD 42496 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-325
CUTCOM_DECEL_LIMIT
MD 42528 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-329
CUTCOM_G40_STOPRE
MD 42490 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-323
Channel Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-439
Channel-specific signals  . . . . . . . . . .  4-363
Checkback signal Program selection from HMI 
(retentive area)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-428
Cyclic signal exchange  . . . . . . . . . . .  4-343
D
D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
MD 11717 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-69
DEFAULT_FEED
MD 42110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-316
DEFAULT_ROT_FACTOR_R
MD 42150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-317
DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_AXIS

06/2007 Index
I-459
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
MD 43120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-331
DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_P
MD 42140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-317
DEFAULT_VALUES_MEM_MASK
MD 11270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-67
DISPLAY_IS_MODULO
MD 30320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-219
DISPLAY_RESOLUTION
MD 203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-19
DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_INCH
MD 204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-20
DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_SPINDLE
MD 205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-20
DPIO_LOGIC_ADDRESS_IN
MD 10500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-35
DPIO_LOGIC_ADDRESS_OUT
MD 10510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-37
DPIO_RANGE_ATTRIBUTE_IN
MD 10502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-36
DPIO_RANGE_ATTRIBUTE_OUT
MD 10512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-37
DPIO_RANGE_LENGTH_IN
MD 10501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-36
DPIO_RANGE_LENGTH_OUT
MD 10511 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-37
DRIFT_LIMIT
MD 36710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-282
DRIFT_VALUE
MD 36720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-283
DRILL_VELO_LIMIT
MD 35550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-271
DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM
MD 31050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-227
DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA
MD 31060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-227
DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_DENOM
MD 31064 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-228
DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_NUMERA
MD 31066 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-228
DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM
MD 31070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-229
DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA
MD 31080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-229
DRIVE_FUNCTION_MASK
MD 13070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-70
DRIVE_TELEGRAM_TYPE
MD 13060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-69
DRIVE_TYPE_DP
MD 13080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-71
DRY_RUN_FEED
MD 42100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-315
DRY_RUN_FEED_MODE
MD 42101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-315
DYN_LIMIT_RESET_MASK
MD 32320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-234
Decoded M signals
(M0-M99)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-432
E
ENC_ABS_BUFFERING
MD 30270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-217
ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO
MD 34220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-254
ENC_ACTVAL_SMOOTH_TIME
MD 34990 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-255
ENC_CHANGE_TOL
MD 36500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-280
ENC_COMP_ENABLE
MD 32700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-244
ENC_FEEDBACK_POL
MD 32110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-232
ENC_FREQ_LIMIT
MD 36300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-278
ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW
MD 36302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-278
ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST
MD 31010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-225
ENC_INPUT_NR
MD 30230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-216
ENC_IS_DIRECT
MD 31040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-226
ENC_IS_DIRECT2
MD 31044 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-226
ENC_IS_LINEAR
MD 31000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-225
ENC_MODULE_NR
MD 30220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-215
ENC_REFP_MODE
MD 34200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-253
ENC_REFP_STATE
MD 34210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-253
ENC_RESOL
MD 31020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-225
ENC_SEGMENT_NR
MD 30210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-215
ENC_TYPE
MD 30240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-216
ENC_ZERO_MONITORING
MD 36310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-279
EPS_TLIFT_TANG_STEP
MD 37400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-294
EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME
MD 32810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-244
EXACT_POS_MODE
MD 20550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-119
EXACT_POS_MODE_G0_TO_G1
MD 20552 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-119

06/2007
Index
I-460  © Siemens AG 2007  All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
EXTERN_DIGITS_TOOL_NO
MD 10888 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-54
EXTERN_DOUBLE_TURRET_DIST
MD 42162 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-318
EXTERN_DOUBLE_TURRET_ON
MD 10812 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-48
EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_F9
MD 42160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-317
EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_ON
MD 22920 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-139
EXTERN_FLOATINGPOINT_PROG
MD 10884 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-53
EXTERN_FUNCTION_MASK
MD 20734 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-124
EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE
MD 10816 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-50
EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME
MD 10817 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-51
EXTERN_G0_LINEAR_MODE
MD 20732 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-124
EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_MODE
MD 20156 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-108
EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES
MD 20154 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-107
EXTERN_INCREMENT_SYSTEM
MD 10886 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-54
EXTERN_INTERRUPT_BITS_M96
MD 10808 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-47
EXTERN_INTERRUPT_NUM_ASUP
MD 10818 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-51
EXTERN_INTERRUPT_NUM_RETRAC
MD 10820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-52
EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT
MD 10806 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-47
EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE
MD 10814 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-49
EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME
MD 10815 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-50
EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT
MD 10804 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-46
EXTERN_MEAS_G31_P_SIGNAL
MD 10810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-48
EXTERN_PARALLEL_GEOAX
MD 22930 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-139
EXTERN_REF_POSITION_G30_1
MD 43340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-335
EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR
MD 20095 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-104
EXTERN_TOOLPROG_MODE
MD 10890 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-55
F
F_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET
MD 22410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-137
Read/write NC data
Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-424
Reading/writing NC data
Job  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-424
FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS
MD 10350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-26
FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS
MD 10360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-26
FFW_ACTIVATION_MODE
MD 32630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-242
FIRST_LANGUAGE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-19
FIX_POINT_POS
MD 30600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-224
FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK
MD 37060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-287
FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK
MD 37050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-287
FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR
MD 37040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-286
FIXED_STOP_CONTROL
MD 37002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-284
FIXED_STOP_MODE
MD 37000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-283
FIXED_STOP_SWITCH
MD 43500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-336
FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD
MD 37030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-286
FIXED_STOP_TORQUE
MD 43510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-337
FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_DEF
MD 37010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-284
FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_FACTOR
MD 37014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-285
FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_RAMP_TIME
MD 37012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-285
FIXED_STOP_WINDOW_DEF
MD 37020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-285
FLOAT values (MD 14514 
USER_DATA_FLOAT)  . . . . . . . . . . .  5-452
FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG
MD 42440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-320
FRAME_SUPPRESS_MODE
MD 24020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-140
FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE
MD 32510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-238
FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX
MD 32520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-239
FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN
MD 32530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-240
FRICT_COMP_ENABLE
MD 32500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-238
FRICT_COMP_MODE
MD 32490 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-237

06/2007 Index
I-461
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
FRICT_COMP_TIME
MD 32540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-241
G
G0_LINEAR_MODE
MD 20730 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-123
G53_TOOLCORR
MD 10760 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-45
GANTRY_ACT_POS_TOL_ERROR
MD 37135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-292
GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE
MD 37100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-288
GANTRY_BREAK_UP
MD 37140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-292
GANTRY_FUNCTION_MASK
MD 37150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-293
GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR
MD 37120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-290
GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF
MD 37130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-291
GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING
MD 37110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-289
GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE
MD 35010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-256
GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_POSITION
MD 35012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-256
GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO
MD 35110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-260
GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT
MD 35130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-262
GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2
MD 35112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-260
GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO
MD 35120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-261
GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT
MD 35140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-263
GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2
MD 35122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-261
GEAR_STEP_PC_MAX_VELO_LIMIT
MD 35135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-263
GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL
MD 35210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-266
GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL2
MD 35212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-266
GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL
MD 35200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-265
GEAR_STEP_USED_IN_AXISMODE
MD 35014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-257
General selection/status signals from HMI  . 
4-348
General selection/status signals from HMI (re-
tentive area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-429
General selection/status signals to HMI (reten-
tive area)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-430
General signals from NCK . . . . . . . . .  5-435
General signals to NC  . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-354
General signals to NCK . . . . . . . . . . .  5-434
H
HANDWH_CHAN_STOP_COND
MD 20624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-121
HANDWH_IMP_PER_LATCH
MD 11320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-68
HANDWH_REVERSE
MD 11310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-67
HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE
MD 11346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-68
HEX values (MD 14512 USER_DATA_HEX) 
5-452
HIRTH_IS_ACTIVE
MD 30505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-223
HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN
MD 10366 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-27
HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTOUT
MD 10368 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-28
HW_SERIAL_NUMBER
MD 18030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-76
I
INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB
MD 30500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-221
INDEX_AX_DENOMINATOR
MD 30502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-222
INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_1
MD 10900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-56
INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2
MD 10920 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-58
INDEX_AX_NUMERATOR
MD 30501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-222
INDEX_AX_OFFSET
MD 30503 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-223
INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1
MD 10910 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-57
INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_2
MD 10930 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-59
INFO_FREE_MEM_DPR
MD 18070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-77
INT values (MD 14510 USER_DATA_INT) . 
5-452
INT_INCR_PER_DEG
MD 10210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-24
INT_INCR_PER_MM
MD 10200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-24
IS_LOCAL_LINK_AXIS
MD 30560 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-224
IS_ROT_AX
MD 30300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-218
IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL
MD 42502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-326

06/2007
Index
I-462  © Siemens AG 2007  All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK
MD 42512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-327
IS_UNIPOLAR_OUTPUT
MD 30134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-214
Interface signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-343
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-343
J
JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE
MD 32420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-235
JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK
MD 32430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-235
JOG_MODE_MASK
MD 10735 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-45
JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO
MD 41130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-300
JOG_SET_VELO
MD 41110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-300
JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO
MD 41200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-300
JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE
MD 41010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-299
JOG_VELO
MD 32020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-231
JOG_VELO_ORI
MD 21155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-129
JOG_VELO_RAPID
MD 32010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-230
JOG_VELO_RAPID_ORI
MD 21150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-129
L
LANG_SUB_NAME
MD 15700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-75
LANG_SUB_PATH
MD 15702 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-75
LEADSCREW_PITCH
MD 31030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-226
LOOKAH_FREQUENCY
MD 32440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-236
LOOKAH_RELIEVE_BLOCK_CYCLE
MD 20450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-117
LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR
MD 20460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-118
LUBRICATION_DIST
MD 33050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-245
M
M_NO_FCT_CYCLE
MD 10715 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-41
M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
MD 10716 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-42
M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR
MD 10718 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-44
M_NO_FCT_EOP
MD 10714 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-40
M_NO_FCT_STOPRE
MD 10713 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-40
M19_SPOS
MD 43240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-334
M19_SPOSMODE
MD 43250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-334
MAX_AX_ACCEL
MD 32300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-234
MAX_AX_JERK
MD 32431 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-235
MAX_AX_VELO
MD 32000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-230
MAX_BLOCKS_IN_IPOBUFFER
MD 42990 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-331
MEAS_PROBE_DELAY_TIME
MD 13220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-73
MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE
MD 13200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-72
MEAS_SAVE_POS_LENGTH2
MD 373 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-21
MEAS_TOOL_CHANGE
MD 361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-21
MIN_CURV_RADIUS
MD 42471 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-322
MINTIME_BETWEEN_STROKES
MD 42404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-319
MM_ABSBLOCK
MD 28400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-211
MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF
MD 28402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-211
MM_CC_MD_MEM_SIZE
MD 18238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-97
MM_CYC_DATA_MEM_SIZE
MD 18237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-97
MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_POINTS
MD 38000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-296
MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM
MD 10880 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-52
MM_EXTERN_GCODE_SYSTEM
MD 10881 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-52
MM_EXTERN_LANGUAGE
MD 18800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-97
MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM
MD 18150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-92
MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT
MD 28085 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-206
MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES
MD 18079 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-81
MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES
MD 18078 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-81
MM_MAXNUM_3D_COLLISION
MD 18896 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-99

06/2007 Index
I-463
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
MM_MAXNUM_3D_INTRERFACE_IN
MD 18897 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-99
MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREA_ELEM
MD 18892 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-98
MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREAS
MD 18890 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-98
MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_GROUPS
MD 18894 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-98
MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_ELEMENTS
MD 28090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-207
MM_NUM_CC_BLOCK_USER_MEM
MD 28100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-207
MM_NUM_CC_HEAP_MEM
MD 28105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-207
MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
MD 18090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-85
MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
MD 18092 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-87
MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM
MD 18200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-94
MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM
MD 18202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-95
MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC
MD 18077 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-80
MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN
MD 18130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-92
MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK
MD 18120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-91
MM_NUM_LINKVAR_ELEMENTS
MD 28160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-208
MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE
MD 18076 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-79
MM_NUM_MAGAZINE
MD 18084 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-84
MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION
MD 18086 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-84
MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIVE
MD 28210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-209
MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN
MD 28200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-208
MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CONTOUR
MD 28212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-209
MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK
MD 18190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-93
MM_NUM_SAFE_SYNC_ELEMENTS
MD 28251 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-210
MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS
MD 28250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-210
MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS
MD 18075 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-78
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD 18080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-82
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TRACE_SZ
MD 18074 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-77
MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
MD 18091 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-86
MM_TYPE_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
MD 18093 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-87
MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM
MD 18099 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-89
MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM
MD 18095 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-88
MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM
MD 18097 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-89
MM_TYPE_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM
MD 18201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-94
MM_TYPE_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM
MD 18203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-95
MM_TYPE_CCS_MON_PARAM
MD 18209 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-96
MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE
MD 18102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-90
MMC_INFO_CUT_SPEED
MD 27206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-202
MMC_INFO_CUT_SPEED_STATUS
MD 27207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-202
MMC_INFO_NO_UNIT
MD 27200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-200
MMC_INFO_NO_UNIT_STATUS
MD 27201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-200
MMC_INFO_POSN_LIN
MD 27202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-200
MMC_INFO_POSN_LIN_STATUS
MD 27203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-201
MMC_INFO_REV_FEED
MD 27208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-202
MMC_INFO_REV_FEED_STATUS
MD 27209 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-203
MMC_INFO_VELO_LIN
MD 27204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-201
MMC_INFO_VELO_LIN_STATUS
MD 27205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-201
N
NC signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-354
NC_USER_EXTERN_GCODES_TAB
MD 10882 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-53
NCK signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-434
NIBBLE_PRE_START_TIME
MD 26018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-198
NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE
MD 26008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-195
NIBBLE_PUNCH_INMASK
MD 26006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-194
NIBBLE_PUNCH_OUTMASK
MD 26004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-194
NIBBLE_SIGNAL_CHECK

06/2007
Index
I-464  © Siemens AG 2007  All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
MD 26020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-199
NIBPUNCH_PRE_START_TIME
MD 42402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-319
NUM_ENCS
MD 30200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-214
O
OEM_AXIS_INFO
MD 37800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-296
OEM_CHAN_INFO
MD 27400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-203
OEM_GLOBAL_INFO
MD 17400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-75
ORIAX_TURN_TAB_1
MD 21120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-127
ORIAX_TURN_TAB_2
MD 21130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-128
OSCILL_CTRL_MASK
MD 43770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-340
OSCILL_DWELL_TIME1
MD 43720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-338
OSCILL_DWELL_TIME2
MD 43730 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-339
OSCILL_END_POS
MD 43760 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-340
OSCILL_IS_ACTIVE
MD 43780 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-341
OSCILL_NUM_SPARK_CYCLES
MD 43750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-339
OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1
MD 43700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-337
OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2
MD 43710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-338
OSCILL_START_POS
MD 43790 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-342
OSCILL_VELO
MD 43740 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-339
OVR_RAPID_FACTOR
MD 42122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-317
Operating mode signals . . . . . . . . . . .  5-438
P
PART_COUNTER
MD 27880 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-204
PART_COUNTER_MCODE
MD 27882 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-206
PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM
MD 32432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-236
PLC User Interface  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-421
PLC machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-452
PLC_IPO_TIME_RATIO
MD 10074 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-23
POS_LIMIT_MINUS
MD 36100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-275
POS_LIMIT_MINUS2
MD 36120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-276
POS_LIMIT_PLUS
MD 36110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-276
POS_LIMIT_PLUS2
MD 36130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-277
POSCTRL_CONFIG
MD 32230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-234
POSCTRL_CYCLE_DIAGNOSIS
MD 10063 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-23
POSCTRL_GAIN
MD 32200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-232
POSCTRL_INTEGR_ENABLE
MD 32220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-233
POSCTRL_INTEGR_TIME
MD 32210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-233
POSITIONING_TIME
MD 36020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-273
PROCESSTIMER_MODE
MD 27860 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-204
PROFIBUS_CTRL_CONFIG
MD 37610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-295
PROFIBUS_SDB_NUMBER
MD 11240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-65
PROFIBUS_SDB_SELECT
MD 11241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-66
PROFIBUS_SHUTDOWN_TYPE
MD 11250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-66
PROFIBUS_TORQUE_RED_RESOL
MD 37620 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-295
PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT
MD 20107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-105
PROG_EVENT_IGN_SINGLEBLOCK
MD 20106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-105
PROG_EVENT_MASK
MD 20108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-106
PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB
MD 10710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-39
PROT_AREA_3D_TYPE_NAME_TAB
MD 18898 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-100
PROTAREA_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE
MD 10618 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-38
PUNCH_DWELLTIME
MD 42400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-318
PUNCH_PARTITION_TYPE
MD 26016 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-197
PUNCH_PATH_SPLITTING
MD 26014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-197
PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION
MD 26012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-196
PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTIN
MD 26000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-192
PUNCHNIB_ASSIGN_FASTOUT
MD 26002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-193

06/2007 Index
I-465
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
PUNCHNIB_AXIS_MASK
MD 26010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-196
Program control signals from HMI (retentive 
area)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-427
Program selection from PLC (retentive area) 
5-427
Program-control signals from HMI . . .  4-344
R
REBOOT_DELAY_TIME
MD 10088 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-23
REFP_BERO_LOW_ACTIVE
MD 34120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-252
REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS
MD 34010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-246
REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE
MD 34000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-245
REFP_CAM_MARKER_DIST
MD 34093 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-250
REFP_CAM_SHIFT
MD 34092 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-250
REFP_CYCLE_NR
MD 34110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-251
REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST
MD 34030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-247
REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST
MD 34060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-248
REFP_MOVE_DIST
MD 34080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-249
REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR
MD 34090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-249
REFP_NC_START_LOCK
MD 20700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-123
REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERSE
MD 34050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-248
REFP_SET_POS
MD 34100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-251
REFP_VELO_POS
MD 34070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-249
REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM
MD 34020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-246
REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER
MD 34040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-247
ROT_IS_MODULO
MD 30310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-218
Reading and writing PLC variables  . .  5-453
Retentive data area . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-425
S
S_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET
MD 22400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-136
SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC
MD 10240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-25
SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL
MD 42500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-325
SD_MAX_PATH_JERK
MD 42510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-326
SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME
MD 36620 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-282
SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT
MD 30350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-220
SINAMICS_ALARM_MASK
MD 13150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-72
SINGLEBLOCK2_STOPRE
MD 42200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-318
SMOOTH_CONTUR_TOL
MD 42465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-321
SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET
MD 35040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-258
SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX
MD 35000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-255
SPIND_CONSTCUT_S
MD 43202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-332
SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND
MD 20090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-103
SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK
MD 35030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-258
SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE
MD 35020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-257
SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL
MD 35150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-264
SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT
MD 35160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-265
SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26
MD 43220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-333
SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS
MD 43230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-334
SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25
MD 43210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-333
SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START
MD 35500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-270
SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL
MD 35410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-268
SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO
MD 35400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-268
SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR
MD 35430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-269
SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW
MD 35450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-270
SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW
MD 35440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-269
SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO
MD 35300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-266
SPIND_POSIT_DELAY_TIME
MD 35310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-267
SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR
MD 35350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-267
SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR

06/2007
Index
I-466  © Siemens AG 2007  All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
MD 20094 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-103
SPIND_S
MD 43200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-331
SPIND_SPEED_TYPE
MD 43206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-332
SPIND_STOPPED_AT_IPO_START
MD 35510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-271
SPIND_VELO_LIMIT
MD 35100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-259
STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME
MD 36040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-274
STANDSTILL_POS_TOL
MD 36030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-273
STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL
MD 36060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-275
STIFFNESS_CONTROL_CONFIG
MD 32642 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-243
STIFFNESS_CONTROL_ENABLE
MD 32640 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-243
STIFFNESS_DELAY_TIME
MD 32644 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-244
STOP_CUTCOM_STOPRE
MD 42480 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-322
STOP_LIMIT_COARSE
MD 36000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-272
STOP_LIMIT_FINE
MD 36010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-272
SW_CAM_ASSIGN_FASTOUT_1
MD 10470 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-32
SW_CAM_ASSIGN_TAB
MD 10450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-30
SW_CAM_MINUS_LEAD_TIME
MD 10460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-31
SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_1
MD 41500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-302
SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_2
MD 41502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-303
SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_3
MD 41504 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-304
SW_CAM_MINUS_POS_TAB_4
MD 41506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-305
SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_1
MD 41520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-306
SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_2
MD 41522 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-307
SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_3
MD 41524 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-309
SW_CAM_MINUS_TIME_TAB_4
MD 41526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-310
SW_CAM_MODE
MD 10485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-34
SW_CAM_PLUS_LEAD_TIME
MD 10461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-31
SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_1
MD 41501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-303
SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_2
MD 41503 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-304
SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_3
MD 41505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-305
SW_CAM_PLUS_POS_TAB_4
MD 41507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-306
SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_1
MD 41521 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-307
SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_2
MD 41523 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-308
SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_3
MD 41525 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-309
SW_CAM_PLUS_TIME_TAB_4
MD 41527 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-311
SW_CAM_TIMER_FASTOUT_MASK
MD 10480 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-33
Signal from fast inputs and outputs . .  5-437
Signals from HMI . . . . . . . . . . . 4-346, 5-428
Signals from MCP (connected to the MCPA 
module)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-423
Signals from NC channel . . . . . . . . . .  5-442
Signals from PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-428
Signals from axis/spindle . . . . . 4-407, 5-448
Signals from operator panel (retentive area) 
5-429
Signals from the channel . . . . . . . . . .  4-379
Signals from/to HMI . . . . . . . . . 4-344, 5-427
Signals to MCP  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-424
Signals to NC channel . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-439
Signals to axis/spindle . . . . . . . 4-390, 5-445
Signals to channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-363
Signals to fast inputs and outputs  . . .  5-436
T
T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE
MD 10719 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-44
T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
MD 10717 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-43
TANG_OFFSET
MD 37402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-294
TARGET_BLOCK_INCR_PROG
MD 42444 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-320
TECHNOLOGY_MODE
MD 27800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-203
THREAD_RAMP_DISP
MD 42010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-314
THREAD_START_ANGLE
MD 42000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-314
TOFF_ACCEL
MD 21196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-131
TOFF_MODE
MD 21190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-130

06/2007 Index
I-467
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
TOFF_VELO
MD 21194 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-130
TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
MD 22550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-137
TOOL_CORR_MODE_G43G44
MD 20380 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-116
TOOL_CORR_MULTIPLE_AXES
MD 20384 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-116
TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER
MD 17530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-76
TOOL_LENGTH_CONST
MD 42940 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-329
TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE
MD 42950 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-330
TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD 20310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-110
TOOL_OFFSET_DRF_ON
MD 20396 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-117
TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG
MD 42442 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-320
TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK
MD 20360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-115
TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK
MD 20320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-114
TRAANG_ANGLE_1
MD 24700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-177
TRAANG_ANGLE_2
MD 24750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-179
TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_1
MD 24710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-178
TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_2
MD 24760 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-180
TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_1
MD 24721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-179
TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_2
MD 24771 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-181
TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1
MD 24720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-178
TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_2
MD 24770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-180
TRACON_CHAIN_1
MD 24995 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-190
TRACON_CHAIN_2
MD 24996 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-191
TRACON_CHAIN_3
MD 24997 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-192
TRACON_CHAIN_4
MD 24998 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-192
TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1
MD 24820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-183
TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_2
MD 24870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-185
TRACYL_DEFAULT_MODE_1
MD 24808 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-182
TRACYL_DEFAULT_MODE_2
MD 24858 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-184
TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_1
MD 24805 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-182
TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_2
MD 24855 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-184
TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1
MD 24800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-181
TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2
MD 24850 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-184
TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1
MD 24810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-183
TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2
MD 24860 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-185
TRAFO_AXES_IN_1
MD 24110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-141
TRAFO_AXES_IN_10
MD 24482 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-156
TRAFO_AXES_IN_2
MD 24210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-143
TRAFO_AXES_IN_3
MD 24310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-144
TRAFO_AXES_IN_4
MD 24410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-146
TRAFO_AXES_IN_5
MD 24432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-148
TRAFO_AXES_IN_6
MD 24442 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-149
TRAFO_AXES_IN_7
MD 24452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-151
TRAFO_AXES_IN_8
MD 24462 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-153
TRAFO_AXES_IN_9
MD 24472 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-154
TRAFO_CHANGE_M_CODE
MD 22534 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-137
TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1
MD 24120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-141
TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_10
MD 24484 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-156
TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2
MD 24220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-143
TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_3
MD 24320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-145
TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_4
MD 24420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-146
TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_5
MD 24434 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-148
TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_6
MD 24444 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-150
TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_7
MD 24454 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-151

06/2007
Index
I-468  © Siemens AG 2007  All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_8
MD 24464 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-153
TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_9
MD 24474 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-155
TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_1
MD 24130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-142
TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_10
MD 24486 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-156
TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_2
MD 24230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-143
TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_3
MD 24330 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-145
TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_4
MD 24426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-147
TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_5
MD 24436 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-148
TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_6
MD 24446 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-150
TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_7
MD 24456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-152
TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_8
MD 24466 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-153
TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_9
MD 24476 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-155
TRAFO_MODE_MASK
MD 20144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-107
TRAFO_RESET_VALUE
MD 20140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-106
TRAFO_TYPE_1
MD 24100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-140
TRAFO_TYPE_10
MD 24480 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-155
TRAFO_TYPE_2
MD 24200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-142
TRAFO_TYPE_3
MD 24300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-144
TRAFO_TYPE_4
MD 24400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-146
TRAFO_TYPE_5
MD 24430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-147
TRAFO_TYPE_6
MD 24440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-149
TRAFO_TYPE_7
MD 24450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-151
TRAFO_TYPE_8
MD 24460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-152
TRAFO_TYPE_9
MD 24470 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-154
TRAFO5_AXIS1_1
MD 24570 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-164
TRAFO5_AXIS1_2
MD 24670 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-174
TRAFO5_AXIS2_1
MD 24572 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-164
TRAFO5_AXIS2_2
MD 24672 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-175
TRAFO5_AXIS3_1
MD 24573 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-165
TRAFO5_AXIS3_2
MD 24673 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-175
TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENT_1
MD 24574 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-165
TRAFO5_BASE_ORIENT_2
MD 24674 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-175
TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_1
MD 24550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-160
TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_2
MD 24650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-171
TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1
MD 24560 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-161
TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_2
MD 24660 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-172
TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_PART_1
MD 24558 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-161
TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_PART_2
MD 24658 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-172
TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_1
MD 24530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-158
TRAFO5_NON_POLE_LIMIT_2
MD 24630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-169
TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_1
MD 24564 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-163
TRAFO5_NUTATOR_AX_ANGLE_2
MD 24664 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-173
TRAFO5_NUTATOR_VIRT_ORIAX_1
MD 24566 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-163
TRAFO5_NUTATOR_VIRT_ORIAX_2
MD 24666 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-174
TRAFO5_ORIAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1
MD 24585 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-167
TRAFO5_ORIAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2
MD 24685 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-177
TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1
MD 24500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-157
TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_2
MD 24600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-167
TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_1
MD 24540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-159
TRAFO5_POLE_LIMIT_2
MD 24640 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-170
TRAFO5_POLE_TOL_1
MD 24542 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-160
TRAFO5_POLE_TOL_2
MD 24642 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-171
TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1
MD 24510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-157

06/2007 Index
I-469
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
TRAFO5_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2
MD 24610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-168
TRAFO5_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FR_1
MD 24590 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-167
TRAFO5_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FR_2
MD 24690 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-177
TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1
MD 24520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-158
TRAFO5_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2
MD 24620 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-168
TRAFO5_TCARR_NO_1
MD 24582 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-166
TRAFO5_TCARR_NO_2
MD 24682 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-176
TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1
MD 24562 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-162
TRAFO5_TOOL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2
MD 24662 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-173
TRAFO5_TOOL_VECTOR_1
MD 24580 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-166
TRAFO5_TOOL_VECTOR_2
MD 24680 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-176
TRAFO6_BASE_ORIENT_NORMAL_1
MD 24576 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-165
TRAFO6_BASE_ORIENT_NORMAL_2
MD 24676 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-176
TRAFO6_JOINT_OFFSET_2_3_1
MD 24561 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-162
TRAFO6_JOINT_OFFSET_2_3_2
MD 24661 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-173
TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1
MD 24920 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-187
TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_2
MD 24970 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-189
TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_1
MD 24911 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-187
TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_2
MD 24961 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-189
TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_1
MD 24905 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-186
TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_2
MD 24955 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-188
TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1
MD 24900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-186
TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2
MD 24950 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-188
TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1
MD 24910 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-186
TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2
MD 24960 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-188
Tool management functions from NC channel 
4-419, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-454
Transferred D functions . . . . . . . . . . .  5-433
Transferred H functions . . . . . . . . . . .  5-434
Transferred M functions . . . . . . . . . . .  5-433
Transferred M/S functions, axis-specific  .  5-
445
Transferred S functions . . . . . . . . . . .  5-433
Transferred T functions  . . . . . . . . . . .  5-432
Transferred axis-specific M and S functions  
4-389
U
UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY
MD 11210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-65
USER_DATA_FLOAT
MD 14514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-74
USER_DATA_HEX
MD 14512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-74
USER_DATA_INT
MD 14510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-73
USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM
MD 14516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-74
User alarm
Activation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-426
Configuration (MD 14516 
USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM) . . . . .  5-452
User data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-423
User data 1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-423
User data2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-423
V
V1700 0000.5  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-344
V1700 0000.6  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-344
V1700 0001.3  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-344
V1700 0001.7  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-345
V1700 0002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-345
V1700 0003.0 to .1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-345
V1700 0003.7 *** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-345
V1800 0000.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-346
V1800 0000.1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-346
V1800 0000.2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-346
V1800 0000.4  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-346
V1800 0000.6 *** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-347
V1800 0001.2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-347
V1900 0000.6  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-347
V1900 0003.7  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-348
V1900 0004.7  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-348
V1900 1003.0 to .2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-348
V1900 1004.0 to .2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-348
V1900 5001.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-350
V1900 5002.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-350
V2500 0004. 0 to .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-351
V2500 0006.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-351
V2500 0008.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-351
V2500 0010.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-351
V2500 0012.0 to .2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-351
V2600 0000.1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-354

06/2007
Index
I-470  © Siemens AG 2007  All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
V2600 0000.2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-354
V2600 0001.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-354
V2700 0000.1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-355
V2700 0001.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-355
V2700 0001.7  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-355
V2700 0004.0 to .7  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-356
V2700 0008.0 to .7  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-356
V3000 0000.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-357
V3000 0000.0 to .6  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-360
V3000 0000.1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-357
V3000 0000.2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-357
V3000 0000.4  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-359
V3000 0000.7  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-359
V3000 0001.2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-359
V3100 0000.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-360
V3100 0000.1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-361
V3100 0000.2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-361
V3100 0000.3  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-361
V3100 0001.2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-362
V3200 000.5  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-363
V3200 0000.4  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-363
V3200 0000.6  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-364
V3200 0001.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-364
V3200 0001.7  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-365
V3200 0002.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-365
V3200 0003.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-366
V3200 0003.1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-366
V3200 0003.2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-366
V3200 0003.3  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-366
V3200 0003.4  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-367
V3200 0003.5  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-367
V3200 0006.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-370
V3200 0006.1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-371
V3200 0006.4  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-371
V3200 0006.6  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-372
V3200 0006.7  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-372
V3200 0007.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-373
V3200 0007.1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-373
V3200 0007.2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-373
V3200 0007.3  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-374
V3200 0007.4  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-375
V3200 0013.5  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-375
V3200 1000.0 to .1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-376
V3200 1000.3  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-376
V3200 1000.4  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-377
V3200 1000.5  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-377
V3200 1000.7 and .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-377
V3200 1001.0 to .6  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-378
V3200 1004.0 to .1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-376
V3200 1004.3  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-376
V3200 1004.4  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-377
V3200 1004.5  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-377
V3200 1004.7 and .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-377
V3200 1005.0 to .6  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-378
V3200 1008.0 to .1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-376
V3200 1008.3  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-376
V3200 1008.4  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-377
V3200 1008.5  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-377
V3200 1008.7 and .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-377
V3200 1009.0 to .6  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-378
V3300 0000.3  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-379
V3300 0000.4  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-379
V3300 0000.5  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-380
V3300 0000.6  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-380
V3300 0001.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-380
V3300 0001.2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-380
V3300 0001.4  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-381
V3300 0001.5  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-381
V3300 0001.6  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-382
V3300 0001.7  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-382
V3300 0003.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-382
V3300 0003.2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-383
V3300 0003.3  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-383
V3300 0003.4  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-383
V3300 0003.5  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-384
V3300 0003.6  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-384
V3300 0003.7  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-384
V3300 0004.2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-384
V3300 0004.3  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-385
V3300 0006.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-385
V3300 0006.1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-385
V3300 0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-385
V3300 0009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-385
V3300 0010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-386
V3300 0011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-386
V3300 0012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-386
V3300 0013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-386
V3300 0014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-386
V3300 0015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-386
V3300 1000.0 to .1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-387
V3300 1000.7 and .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-387
V3300 1001.0, ..., .6  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-388
V3300 1004.0 to .1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-387
V3300 1004.7 and .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-387
V3300 1005.0, ..., .6  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-388
V3300 1008.0 to .1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-387
V3300 1008.7 and .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-387
V3300 1009.0, ..., .6  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-388
V3300 4001.1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-388
V380x 0001.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-391
V380x 0001.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-392
V380x 0001.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-392
V380x 0002.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-393
V380x 0002.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-393
V380x 0002.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-394
V380x 0003.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-394

06/2007 Index
I-471
© Siemens AG 2007 All Rights Reserved
SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition
V380x 0003.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-395
V380x 0004.0 to .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-395
V380x 0004.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-396
V380x 0004.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-397
V380x 0004.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-397
V380x 0004.7 and .6  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-398
V380x 0005.0 to .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-399
V380x 1000.1 and .0  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-399
V380x 2000.0 to .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-401
V380x 2000.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-401
V380x 2001.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-402
V380x 2001.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-402
V380x 2001.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-403
V380x 2002.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-403
V380x 2002.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-404
V380x 2002.7 / .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-405
V380x1000.3 or .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-399
V380x1000.7  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-400
V390x 0000.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-407
V390x 0000.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-407
V390x 0000.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-408
V390x 0000.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-408
V390x 0000.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-409
V390x 0002.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-409
V390x 0002.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-409
V390x 0002.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-409
V390x 0004.0 to .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-410
V390x 0004.7 and .6  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-410
V390x 0005.0, ..., .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-411
V390x 2000.0 to .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-411
V390x 2000.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-412
V390x 2001.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-412
V390x 2001.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-413
V390x 2001.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-413
V390x 2001.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-414
V390x 2001.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-414
V390x 2002.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-415
V390x 2002.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-415
V390x 2002.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-415
V390x 2002.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-416
V390x 2002.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-416
V390x5004.2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-416
V390x5004.3  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-416
V390x5004.4  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-417
V390x5004.5  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-417
V5300 0000.0  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-419
V5300 0000.1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-419
VB2500 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-351
VB2500 1012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-351
VB2500 3004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-352
VB2500 3012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-352
VB2500 3020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-352
VB2500 3028 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-352
VB2500 3036 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-352
VB2500 4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-352
VB2500 4012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-352
VB3200 0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-368
VB3200 0005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-369
VB380x 0000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-390
VB380x 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-406
VD1900 5004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-350
VD2500 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-351
VD2500 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-352
VD2500 3008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-352
VD2500 3016 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-352
VD2500 3024 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-352
VD2500 3032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-352
VD2500 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-352
VD2500 4008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-352
VD2500 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-352
VD2500 6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-353
VD2500 6008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-353
VD2500 6016 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-353
VD370x 0000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-389
VD370x 0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-389
VD5300 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-419
VD5300 1004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-419
VELO_FFW_WEIGHT
MD 32610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-242
VERSION_INFO
MD 18040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-77
VW2500 6004  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-353
VW2500 6012  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-353
VW2500 6020  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-353
Variable for alarm  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-426
W
WAB_CLEARANCE_TOLERANCE
MD 20204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-109
WEIGHTING_FACTOR_FOR_SCALE
MD 22910 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-138
WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS
MD 43430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-336
WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS
MD 43420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-336
WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE
MD 43410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-335
WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE
MD 43400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-335
WORKAREA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS
MD 21020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-127

06/2007

Index

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, 06/2007 Edition

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007

Suggestions and/or corrections

Siemens AG

A&D MC MS1

Postfach 3180

D-91050 Erlangen

(Tel. +49 (0) 180 5050 - 222 [hotline]

Fax +49 (0) 9131 98 - 63315 [documentation]

E-mail: motioncontrol.docu@siemens.com)

Suggestions

Corrections

For publication/manual:

SINUMERIK 802D sl

Parameter Manuals

Manufacturer Documentation

From:

Name:

Company/Dept.

Address

Zip code: City :

Telephon : /

Telefax : /

Telefax :

Order No.: 6FC5397-5CP10-1BA0

Ausgabe 06/2007

Should you come across any print-

ingerrors when reading this publica-

tion, please notify us on this sheet.

Suggestions for improvement are

also welcome.

SINUMERIK 802D sl, Parameter Manual, Ausgabe 06/2007